Contents
Introduction Part A Part B Part C Part D Part E Part F Part G Part H General provisions Traffic separation schemes Deep-water routes Areas to be avoided Other routeing measures Associated rules and recommendations on navigation Mandatory Ship Reporting Systems and Mandatory Routeing Systems Adopted Archipelagic Sea Lanes How to Search Ships’ Routeing About the International Maritime Organization IMO Membership List of IMO Address of the IMO Publications Section Colophon and Copyright Notice Charts:

Part A - General provisions on ships' routeing
International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1974, as amended - Regulation V/8 - Ships' Routeing 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Objectives Definitions Procedures and Responsibilities Methods Planning Design Criteria Temporary Adjustments and Suspensions Use of Routeing Systems Representation on Charts

Figures: Traffic separation by separation zone and line 1 Separation of traffic by natural obstructions 2 Inshore traffic zones 3 Sectorial division of adjacent traffic separation schemes at approaches to focal points 4 Separation of traffic at a roundabout 5 Separation of traffic at a crossing 6 Separation of traffic at a junction 7 A junction, showing a separation line substituted for a zone, where there will be crossing traffic 8 Precautionary area at a focal point 9 Precautionary area with recommended direction of traffic flow around an area to be avoided 10 Precautionary area at a junction with recommended directions of traffic flow 11 Deep-water route (two-way) 12 One-way deep-water route (within a traffic lane) 13 Recommended directions of traffic flow between two traffic separation schemes 14 Two-way route (with one-way sections) 15 Recommended routes 16 Recommended tracks (in black) 17 Area to be avoided 18

Part B - Traffic separation schemes
TEXT CHART Section I - Baltic Sea Section II - Western European Waters Section III - Mediterranean Sea and Black Sea Section IV - Indian Ocean and adjacent waters Section V - South-east Asia Section VI - Australasia Section VII - North America, Pacific Coast Section VIII - South America, Pacific Coast Section IX - Western North Atlantic Ocean, Gulf of Mexico and Caribbean Sea Section X - Asia, Pacific Coast

Part B - Traffic separation schemes
TEXT CHART Section I - Baltic Sea 1 Off Sommers Island 2 Off Hogland (Gogland) Island 3 Off Rodsher Island 4 Off Kalbådagrund Lighthouse 5 Off Porkkala Lighthouse 6 Off Hankoniemi Peninsula 7 Off Köpu Peninsula (Hiiumaa Island) 8 Off Gotland Island 9 Off Öland Island 10 South of Gedser 11 Off Falsterborev 12 In The Sound 13 Off Kiel Lighthouse 14 Between Korsoer and Sprogoe 15 At Hatter Barn

Part B - Traffic separation schemes
TEXT CHART Section II - Western European Waters 1A Summary chartlet A - English Channel and Dover Strait 1B Summary chartlet B - Dover Strait and North Sea 1 West of the Scilly Isles 2 South of the Scilly Isles 3 Off Land's End, between Seven Stones and Longships 4 Off Ushant 5 Off Casquets 6 In the Strait of Dover and adjacent waters 7 At West Hinder 8 Off Friesland 9 In the approaches to Hook of Holland and at North Hinder 10 Off Texel 11 Off Vlieland, Vlieland North and Vlieland Junction 12 Terschelling-German Bight 13 German Bight western approach 14 Jade approach 15 Elbe approach 16 Off Feistein 17 Off Fastnet Rock 18 Off Smalls 19 Off Tuskar Rock 20 Off Skerries 21 In the North Channel 22 Off Finisterre 23 Off Berlenga 24 Off Cape Roca 25 Off Cape S. Vicente 26 At Banco del Hoyo

Part B - Traffic separation schemes
TEXT CHART Section III - Mediterranean Sea and Black Sea 1 In the Strait of Gibraltar 2 Off Cabo de Gata 3 Off Cani Island 4 Off Cape Bon 5 Saronicos Gulf 6 Strait of Istanbul – North Approach 7 Strait of Istanbul 8 Strait of Istanbul – South Approach and Sea of Marmara 9 Strait of Çanakkale 10 Strait of Çanakkale – South-west Approach 11 Between the Ports of Odessa and Ilichevsk 12 In the approaches to the Ports of Odessa and Ilichevsk 13 In the southern approaches to the Kerch Strait

Traffic separation schemes TEXT CHART Section IV .Part B .Indian Ocean and adjacent waters 1 In the Gulf of Suez 2 In the entrance to the Gulf of Aqaba 3 In the Strait of Bab E1 Mandeb 4 Off Ras al Hadd 5 In the Strait of Hormuz 6 Tunb-Farur 7 Between Zaqqum and Umm Shaif 8 In the approaches to Ras Tanura and Ju'aymah 9 Marjan/Zuluf 10 Off Dondra Head 11 Off Alphard Banks 12 Off the FA Platform TEXT CHART Section V . John’s Island) 8 Singapore Strait (Off Changi/Pulau Batam) 9 At Horsburgh Lighthouse area 10 In the East Lamma and Tathong Channels TEXT CHART Section VI .Australasia 1 South of Wilson Promontory in the Bass Strait 2 In the Bass Strait .South-east Asia 1 Summary chartlets for the Straits of Malacca and Singapore 2 At One Fathom Bank 3 Port Klang to Port Dickson 4 Port Dickson to Tanjung Keling 5 Malacca to Iyu Kecil 6 In the Singapore Strait (Main Strait) 7 Singapore Strait (Off St.

Part B . Alaska 2 In the Strait of Juan de Fuca and its approaches 3 In Puget Sound and its approaches: Rosario Strait North Rosario Strait South Approaches to Puget Sound Puget Sound . Pacific Coast 1 In Prince William Sound.South America.South 4 Off San Francisco 5 In the Santa Barbara Channel 6 In the approaches to Los Angeles . Pacific Coast 1 In the approaches to Arica 2 In the approaches to Iquique 3 In the approaches to Antofagasta 4 In the approaches to Quintero Bay 5 In the approaches to Valparaiso 6 In the approaches to Concepcion Bay 7 In the approaches to San Vicente Bay 8 In the approaches to Punta Arenas .Long Beach (A continuation of the Santa Barbara Channel scheme) 7 In the approaches to Salina Cruz TEXT CHART Section VIII .North Puget Sound .North America.Traffic separation schemes TEXT CHART Section VII .

Part B . Rhode Island. and Buzzards Bay.Western North Atlantic Ocean. Massachusetts 6 Off New York 7 Off Delaware Bay 8 In the approaches to Chesapeake Bay 9 In the approaches to Galveston Bay 10 Off Cabo San Antonio 11 Off La Tabla 12 Off Costa de Matanzas 13 In the Old Bahama Channel 14 Off Punta Maternillos 15 Off Punta Lucrecia 16 Off Cabo Maysi 17 In the approaches to the port of Veracruz . Maine 4 In the approach to Boston. Massachusetts 5 In the approaches to Narragansett Bay. Gulf of Mexico and Caribbean Sea 1 In the approaches to Chedabucto Bay 2 In the Bay of Fundy and approaches 3 In the approaches to Portland.Traffic separation schemes TEXT CHART Section IX .

Pacific Coast 1 In the Fourth Kuril Strait 2 In the Proliv Bussol 3 Off the Aniwa Cape 4 In the approaches to the Gulf of Nakhodka 5 Off the Ostrovnoi Point .Part B .Traffic separation schemes TEXT CHART Section X .Asia.

Western North Atlantic Ocean.Western European waters 1 Deep-water route leading to the Port of Antifer 2 Deep-water route forming part of the north-eastbound traffic lane of the Strait of Dover and adjacent waters traffic separation scheme 3 Deep-water routes forming parts of routeing system "Off Friesland" 4 Deep-water route leading to Europoort 5 Deep-water route leading to IJmuiden 6 Deep-water route west of the Hebrides TEXT CHART Section III .Deep-water routes TEXT CHART Section I . Gulf of Mexico and Caribbean Sea 1 Deep-water route in the southern approach to Chesapeake Bay .PART C .Baltic Sea 1 Navigation through the entrances to the Baltic Sea 2 Between Hatter Rev and Hatter Barn 3 Off the east coast of Langeland 4 North-east of Gedser TEXT CHART Section II .South-east Asia 1 Deep-water routes within the traffic separation schemes in the Strait of Malacca 2 Deep-water routes forming part of the eastbound lane of the traffic separation scheme "In the Singapore Strait" TEXT CHART Section IV .

Areas to be avoided TEXT CHART Section I .PART D .Other areas to be avoided 1 In the region of the Vorioi Sporadhes Islands 2 North of the Straits of Tiran 3 North of Sharm el Sheikh harbour 4 At the southern extremity of the Sinai Peninsula 5 In the region of Fasht Buldani 6 In the region of Mahé Island in the Seychelles 7 In the region of the Aldabra Islands in the Seychelles 8 At Alphard Banks [abolished] 9 In the region of Cape Terpeniya (Sakhalin) 10 In the region of the Great Barrier Reef 11 In the region of Three Kings Islands 12 In the Bass Strait .North and Central American waters 1 In the region of Nantucket Shoals 2 In the region of the Bermuda Islands 3 Off the Florida Coast 4 At Louisiana Offshore Oil Port (LOOP) in the Gulf of Mexico 5 In the approaches to the port of Veracruz 6 At the maritime oil terminal off Cayo Arcas 7 In the Gulf of Campeche 8 In the region of the North-west Hawaiian Islands 9 Off the Washington coast 10 Off the California Coast 11 In the approaches to Salina Cruz TEXT CHART Section III .North-western European waters 1 In the region of the Rochebonne Shelf 2 In the English Channel and its approaches 3 In the Dover Strait 4 Around the F3 station within the separation scheme “In the Strait of Dover and adjacent waters” 5 At North Hinder Junction Point 6 At Maas Centre 7 In the region of the Orkney Islands 8 In the region of the Fair Isle 9 In the region of the Shetland Islands 10 Between the Smalls Lighthouse and Grassholme Island TEXT CHART Section II .

Associated rules and recommendations on navigation 1 2 3 4 5 6 Recommendations on navigation through the English Channel and the Dover Strait Rules and recommendations on navigation through the Strait of Istanbul.Ship reporting systems TEXT CHART Section I .Regulation V/8-1 . the Strait of Canakkale and the Marmara Sea Rules for ships navigating in the Gulf of Suez Rules for navigation of laden tankers off the South African Coast Rules for vessels navigating through the Straits of Malacca and Singapore Navigation in the vicinity of the Grand Banks of Newfoundland PART G . as amended . 1974.Other routeing measures TEXT CHART 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Recommended directions of traffic flow in the German Bight Recommended directions of traffic flow in the English Channel Recommended routes in the Fair Isle Channel Recommendations on navigation around the United Kingdom coast Routeing measures in the Strait of Bonifacio Recommended directions of traffic flow off Ras Shukheir Recommended tracks in the Gulf of Campeche PART F .Mandatory Routeing Systems Mandatory route for tankers from North Hinder to the German 1 Bight and vice versa .PART E .Mandatory Ship Reporting Systems and Mandatory Routeing Systems International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea.Mandatory Ship Reporting Systems In the Great Belt Traffic area 1 In the Dover Strait/Pas de Calais 2 Off Ushant 3 Off Finisterre 4 In the Strait of Gibraltar traffic separation scheme area 5 In the Strait of Bonifacio 6 In the Straits of Malacca and Singapore 7 In the Torres Strait and the Inner Route of the Great Barrier Reef 8 Systems for protecting North Atlantic right whales in sea areas off the 9 north-eastern and south-eastern coasts of the United States Section II .

Adopted Archipelagic Sea Lanes TEXT CHART 1 Partial system of archipelagic sea lanes in Indonesian archipelagic waters Sea Lane I: South China Sea .Seram Sea . designation and substitution of archipelagic sea lanes Introduction Objectives Definitions and Clarifications Procedures and Responsibilities Criteria for Consideration and Adoption of Proposals Substitution of Archipelagic Sea Lanes and Traffic Separation Schemes Use of Archipelagic Sea Lanes and Normal Passage Routes Representation on Charts Section I .Natuna Sea .Sawu Sea .Lombok Strait . Sawu Sea .Maluku Sea .Makasar Strait .Indian (Hindia) Ocean .Western Java Sea .Karimata Strait .Leti Strait .Ombai Strait .Sunda . Banda Sea .Strait .Arafuru Sea Sea Lane IIID: Spur from Point (IIIA-11) to (IIID-1).PART H .Sea between Sawu and Roti Islands .Banda Sea .Indian (Hindia) Ocean Sea Lane IIIA: Pacific Ocean .Timor Sea Sea Lane IIIC: Spur from Point (IIIA-8) to (IIIC-2).Indian (Hindia) Ocean Sea Lane IA: Spur from North of Pulau Merapas to point (I-3) Sea Lane II: Celebes (Sulawesi) Sea . Banda Sea .Indian (Hindia) Ocean Sea Lane IIIB: Spur from Point (IIIA-8) to (IIIB-2).Adopted Archipelagic Sea Lanes General provisions for the adoption.

Submissions should include. the reference chart or charts listed in the description of the routeing measure with the proposed routeing system delineated thereon. Today. 1 . for reasons of safety. whilst. chapter V of the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea. IMO is recognized as the only international body for establishing and adopting measures on an international level concerning routeing and areas to be avoided by ships or certain classes of ships. the hazards to navigation in certain areas and the associated dangers to the marine environment and ecology have resulted in the establishment and adoption of ``areas to be avoided'' by certain ships.464(XII).678(16). by shipping companies operating passenger ships across the North Atlantic.572(14). 1974 (1974 SOLAS Convention). in accordance with regulation 8-1(b). A. including adoption of ship reporting systems. Rule 10 of the International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea.669(16) and A. Parts B to F include descriptions of routeing systems and associated rules and recommendations on navigation which have been adopted by the Organization. A. The increase in recent years in the size and draught of ships has produced problems in certain shallowwater areas and led to the establishment of deep-water routes. Related provisions were subsequently incorporated into the International Conventions for the Safety of Life at Sea. in addition to the description of the routeing measure and associated chartlet. The Maritime Safety Committee will adopt all routeing measures in accordance with Assembly resolutions A. Proposed routeing measures should be submitted to the Sub-Committee on Safety of Navigation at least three months before a scheduled meeting. Through its appropriate bodies. This initial step was further developed by IMO and the basic concept of separating opposing traffic was applied to many areas throughout the world.Introduction The practice of following predetermined routes originated in about 1898 and was adopted. The text of rule 10 is reproduced in part B. 1972 (COLREG 1972). in accordance with regulation 8(b). as amended by Assembly resolutions A. chapter V of the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea. France and the United Kingdom undertook a study of measures for separating traffic in the Strait of Dover and. The SubCommittee will evaluate a proposal for technical compliance with the General Provisions and make a recommendation regarding its adoption. Similarly. Their studies resulted in proposals for the separation of traffic in those areas as well as for certain basic principles of ships' routeing. A Government intending to establish a new or amended routeing system should be guided by this publication and follow all recommended consultative procedures to ensure that a proposed system will comply with the General Provisions in part A. IMO is recognized as the only international body for developing guidelines. prescribes the conduct of vessels within or near traffic separation schemes adopted by IMO. criteria and regulations on an international level. so far as circumstances permit. Ships' Routeing is intended primarily for Administrations responsible for planning and supporting routeing systems for use by international shipping. in certain other areas where statistics indicated an increased risk of collision. A new Part G includes descriptions of ship reporting systems and mandatory routeing measures which have been adopted by the Organization. and were generally adopted. when necessary. subsequently. withdrawing existing systems. These proposals were submitted to the International Maritime Organization (IMO). The Contracting Governments undertook the responsibility of using their influence to induce the owners of all passenger ships crossing the Atlantic to follow the recognized routes and to do everything in their power to ensure adherence to such routes in converging areas by all ships.626(15) and A. Part A consists of General Provisions on Ships' Routeing which have been developed to ensure that all adopted routeing systems conform to the same general criteria and principles. the specialized agency of the United Nations responsible for maritime safety and efficiency of navigation.826(19). The 1960 Safety Convention referred to the same practice in converging areas on both sides of the North Atlantic. 1974. IMO keeps the subject of ships' routeing under continuous review by adopting new routeing systems and amending or. In 1961 the institutes of navigation of the Federal Republic of Germany.

when adopted and implemented in accordance with the guidelines and criteria developed by the Organization. In developing such systems for adoption by the Organization. Ships' routeing systems are recommended for use by. Any such reason shall be recorded in the ship's log. however. including countries in the vicinity of the proposed ships' routeing system.* The Organization is recognized as the only international body for developing guidelines. such ships are encouraged to participate in ships' routeing systems adopted in accordance with this regulation. 2 (Adopted 1995) . However. This regulation. and may be made mandatory for. a Government or Governments implementing ships' routeing systems not intended to be submitted to the Organization for adoption or which have not been adopted by the Organization are encouraged to follow. naval auxiliary or other vessels owned or operated by a Contracting Government and used. (b) (c) (h) (d) (i) (j) (e) (k) __ * Refer to the General provisions on ships' routeing adopted by the Organization by resolution A. including the relevant provisions of the 1982 United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea. A Government or Governments concerned may monitor traffic in those systems. all ships. Contracting Governments shall refer proposals for the adoption of ships' routeing systems to the Organization. Nothing in this regulation nor its associated guidelines and criteria* shall prejudice the rights and duties of Governments under international law or the legal regime of international straits. and/or protection of the marine environment.* (g) (f) Where two or more Governments have a common interest in a particular area. the guidelines and criteria developed by the Organization* shall be taken into account. certain categories of ships or ships carrying certain cargoes. they should formulate joint proposals for the delineation and use of a routeing system therein on the basis of an agreement between them. 1974. Contracting Governments shall adhere to the measures adopted by the Organization concerning ships' routeing. AS AMENDED Regulation V/8 . the guidelines and criteria developed by the Organization. the Organization shall ensure details of the proposal are disseminated to the Governments which have a common interest in the area. Upon receipt of such proposal and before proceeding with the consideration of it for adoption.572(14). safety and efficiency of navigation.INTERNATIONAL CONVENTION FOR THE SAFETY OF LIFE AT SEA.* All adopted ships' routeing systems and actions taken to enforce compliance with those systems shall be consistent with international law. as amended. for the time being.Ships' routeing (a) Ships' routeing systems contribute to safety of life at sea. and its associated guidelines and criteria. They shall promulgate all information necessary for the safe and effective use of adopted ships' routeing systems. The Organization will collate and disseminate to Contracting Governments all relevant information with regard to any adopted ships' routeing systems. does not apply to warships. criteria and regulations on an international level for ships' routeing systems. The initiation of action for establishing a ships' routeing system is the responsibility of the Government or Governments concerned. Contracting Governments will do everything in their power to secure the appropriate use of ships' routeing systems adopted by the Organization. A ship shall use a mandatory ships' routeing system adopted by the Organization as required for its category or cargo carried and in accordance with the relevant provisions in force unless there are compelling reasons not to use a particular ships' routeing system. only on government non-commercial service. Mandatory ships' routeing systems shall be reviewed by the Contracting Government or Governments concerned in accordance with the guidelines and criteria developed by the Organization. Ships' routeing systems should be submitted to the Organization for adoption. wherever possible.

Mandatory routeing system A routeing system adopted by the Organization. for mandatory use by all ships.3 . the reduction of dangers of collision between crossing traffic and shipping in established traffic lanes. limited depths or unfavourable meteorological conditions. Ships' routeing may also be used for the purpose of preventing or reducing the risk of pollution or other damage to the marine environment caused by ships colliding or grounding in or near environmentally sensitive areas.1 The purpose of ships' routeing is to improve the safety of navigation in converging areas and in areas where the density of traffic is great or where freedom of movement of shipping is inhibited by restricted searoom. precautionary areas and deep-water routes.8 * These terms are used in the 1972 Collision Regulations.7 . 1 OBJECTIVES 1.1 .6 . of the International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea. Traffic within the roundabout is separated by moving in a counterclockwise direction around the separation point or zone. as amended. two-way routes. aimed at providing safe passage of ships through waters where navigation is difficult or dangerous. Two-way route A route within defined limits inside which two-way traffic is established. the organization of traffic flow in or around areas where navigation by all ships or by certain classes of ship is dangerous or undesirable. recommended tracks. the reduction of risk of grounding by providing special guidance to vessels in areas where water depths are uncertain or critical. 1. Traffic separation scheme* A routeing measure aimed at the separation of opposing streams of traffic by appropriate means and by the establishment of traffic lanes.General provisions on ships' routeing INTRODUCTION The General Provisions on Ships' Routeing are established pursuant to regulation V/8 of the SOLAS Convention. the simplification of the patterns of traffic flow in converging areas. Separation zone or line* A zone or line separating the traffic lanes in which ships are proceeding in opposite or nearly opposite directions. inshore traffic zones. the organization of safe traffic flow in or around or at a safe distance from environmentally sensitive areas.4 . to be used in accordance with the provisions of rule 10(d).1 Routeing system Any system of one or more routes or routeing measures aimed at reducing the .2 The precise objectives of any routeing system will depend upon the particular hazardous circumstances which it is intended to alleviate. roundabouts. in accordance with the requirements of regulation V/8 of the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea 1974. or separating a traffic lane from the adjacent sea area. may constitute a boundary.1 The following terms are used in connection with matters related to ships' routeing: . it includes traffic separation schemes. 1 . certain categories of ships or ships carrying certain cargoes. 1972 (Collision Regulations). but may include some or all of the following: .3 .2 .2 risk of casualties.4 . Roundabout A routeing measure comprising a separation point or circular separation zone and a circular traffic lane within defined limits.8 2 DEFINITIONS 2.7 . Inshore traffic zone* A routeing measure comprising a designated area between the landward boundary of a traffic separation scheme and the adjacent coast. the organization of safe traffic flow in areas of concentrated offshore exploration or exploitation. . or separating traffic lanes designated for particular classes of ship proceeding in the same direction. areas to be avoided. the existence of obstructions to navigation.5 the separation of opposing streams of traffic so as to reduce the incidence of head-on encounters. including those forming separation zones.6 . Traffic lane* An area within defined limits in which oneway traffic is established.5 . . Natural obstacles. and the guidance of traffic clear of fishing grounds or the organization of traffic through fishing grounds.

where that system may affect: .11 3. Area to be avoided A routeing measure comprising an area within defined limits in which either navigation is particularly hazardous or it is exceptionally important to avoid casualties and which should be avoided by all ships. which is often marked by centreline buoys. .14 3.9 Recommended route A route of undefined width. 44 of the International Hydrographic Organization.2.1 the proposed routeing system can reasonably be expected to significantly prevent or reduce the risk of pollution or other damage to the marine environment of the area concerned.13 . or certain classes of ship.4 IMO shall not adopt or amend any routeing system without the agreement of the interested coastal States. the use of routeing systems ± particularly areas to be avoided ± could have the effect of unreasonably limiting the sea area available for navigation. and 3.1 the aids to navigation proposed will enable mariners to determine their position with sufficient accuracy to navigate in the scheme in accordance with rule 10 of the 1972 Collision Regulations. IMO will consider whether: . as appropriate.7 IMO will not adopt a proposed routeing system until is is satisfied that the proposed system will not impose unnecessary constraints on shipping and is completely in accordance with the requirements of * The minimum standards to which hydrographic surveys are to be conducted.* 3.3 In deciding whether or not to adopt or amend a routeing system other than a traffic separation scheme.4. IMO will consider whether the aids to navigation and the state of hydrographic surveys are adequate for the purpose of the system. as amended.2 In deciding whether or not to adopt or amend a traffic separation scheme. 2 . Recommended direction of traffic flow A traffic flow pattern indicating a recommended directional movement of traffic where it is impractical or unnecessary to adopt an established direction of traffic flow.5 In deciding whether or not to adopt or amend a mandatory routeing system.3 . in addition to the provisions of paragraphs 3. for the convenience of ships in transit.12 . . to verify the accuracy of charted depths in the traffic lanes of a proposed or amended traffic separation scheme or in a deep-water route or other routeing measure.3 the proposed routeing system meets the requirements of these General Provisions.2 3 PROCEDURES AND RESPONSIBILITIES Procedures and functions of IMO 3. 3. IHO Standards for Hydrographic Surveys ± Classification criteria for deep sea soundings ± Procedures for elimination of doubtful data.1 their rights and practices in respect of the exploitation of living and mineral resources. traffic pattern or established routeing systems in the waters concerned. and ports or harbours of littoral States would be adversely affected.15 .3.* 3. . . Established direction of traffic flow A traffic flow pattern indicating the directional movement of traffic as established within a traffic separation scheme. Precautionary area A routeing measure comprising an area within defined limits where ships must navigate with particular caution and within which the direction of traffic flow may be recommended. certain categories of ships or ships carrying certain cargoes. IMO will. .10 the scheme takes account of the accepted planning considerations and complies with the design criteria for traffic separation schemes and with established methods of routeing.2 given the overall size of the area to be protected.1 IMO is recognized as the only international body responsible for establishing and adopting measures on an international level concerning ships' routeing systems for use by all ships. consider whether: . or the aggregate number of environmentally sensitive areas established or identified in the geographical region concerned. and demands for improvements or adjustments in the navigational aids or hydrographic surveys in the waters concerned. Recommended track A route which has been specially examined to ensure so far as possible that it is free of dangers and along which ships are advised to navigate. are those defined in Special Publication No.6 In deciding whether or not to adopt or amend a routeing system which is intended to protect the marine environment.2 3.1 proper and sufficient justification for the establishment of a mandatory routeing system has been provided by the sponsoring Government or Governments. .. Deep-water route A route within defined limits which has been accurately surveyed for clearance of sea bottom and submerged obstacles as indicated on the chart. 3. and . IMO will consider whether: . .3 the environment. the state of hydrographic surveys in the area is adequate.2 .

exploration platforms and other structures obstructing navigation and not being an aid to navigation will not be established within the traffic lanes of a traffic separation scheme being part of a mandatory routeing system. If the Government that proposed the system is unable at the time of adoption by IMO to declare a definite date of implementation. and the number. exploration platforms and other similar structures are not established within the traffic lanes of routeing systems adopted by IMO or near their terminations. for all ships. 3 . shall be made available in ample time before the system comes into force.14 Governments establishing routeing systems. hazards to navigation. the geodetic datum of the reference chart used for the delineation of the routeing system. ensure that there are clear indications on charts and in nautical publications as to what rules apply to the system. should be submitted to IMO for adoption. That date shall not be earlier than six months after the date of adoption of a routeing system by IMO but.3 . are requested to design them in accordance with IMO guidelines and criteria for such schemes and submit them to IMO for adoption. this information should be communicated to IMO as soon as possible thereafter and the implementation date then declared should not be earlier than four months after the date on which the declaration is made. they should formulate joint proposals for adoption by IMO in accordance with SOLAS chapter V. anchorage areas or pilot boarding areas which are closely associated with the system and important to its effective utilization by the mariner are provided to the appropriate hydrographic authority at least six months prior to the date of implementation. the Government concerned should periodically inform IMO of the situation and forecast when implementation is likely to be possible. IMO shall set a later date as required by the circumstances of the case. any alternative routeing measure.15 Where. any part of which lies beyond its or their territorial sea. where possible. the effect of subsequent exploitation on the safety of marine traffic should be considered carefully. permanent amendments to the scheme.4 Responsibilities of Governments and recommended and compulsory practices 3. Governments should ensure that drilling rigs (MODUs). In particular. 3. Such Government or Governments should furnish all relevant information.14 and 3. Either Notices to Mariners to amend charts. 3. a Government decides not to submit a routeing system to IMO.12 Governments are recommended to ensure. no part of which lies beyond their territorial seas or in straits used for international navigation. if necessary. which shall be communicated to IMO by the responsible Government. certain categories of ships or ships carrying certain cargoes of a routeing system or any part thereof.5 .16 Governments establishing routeing systems. as far as practicable. 3.13 If the above exploration activities lead to the finding of important exploitation prospects. together with copies of the reference charts listed in the description of the routeing system showing the new system or the amendments to existing systems. that drilling rigs (MODUs). or revised charts to depict the system. certain categories of ships or ships carrying certain cargoes which may be excluded from using a routeing system or any part thereof. aids to navigation and the state of hydrographic surveys. marine environmental considerations. 3.1 the objectives of the proposed routeing system and a demonstrated need for its establishment. be amended temporarily in accordance with the guidelines given in section 7. 3. in the case of a traffic separation scheme the exact time of implementation should also be stated. proposing a new routeing system or an amendment to an adopted system.6 3. paragraph (j) of the SOLAS Convention.2 the traffic pattern. including the consideration of alternative routeing measures and the reasons why the proposed routeing system is preferred. in promulgating the system to mariners. should consult IMO so that such system may be adopted or amended by IMO for international use. or Governments jointly.11 A Government. when new chart editions necessitate a substantially longer period between adoption and implementation. .9 The responsible Government implementing a new or amended routeing system should ensure that full and final details of planned changes to aids to navigation.regulation V/8.15 above. are recommended to follow the same procedure as that set out in paragraphs 3. in particular with regard to: . If there is a protracted delay in making such a declaration. for whatever reason. it should. . the application to all ships. other than traffic separation schemes. When the temporary positioning of a drilling rig or a similar structure in a traffic lane of an adopted traffic separation scheme cannot be avoided. if deemed necessary. . In the case of mandatory routeing systems.10 When establishing or amending a routeing system in a particular area where two or more Governments have a common interest. no parts of which lie beyond their territorial seas.8 A new or amended routeing system adopted by IMO shall not come into force as an IMO adopted system before an effective date promulgated by the Government that proposed the system. if necessary. If the establishment of permanent installations within a traffic separation scheme is unavoidable. 3. regulation 8(f). the system should. edition and. 3. an area to be avoided will not be adopted if it would impede the passage of ships through an international strait.

In such cases. The outside limits (6) of such traffic separation schemes are the outer boundaries of the traffic lanes. as far as possible. procedures. or lines where zones are not possible 6 3 1 1 4 5 6 97054 Figure 1 ± Traffic separation by separation zone and line In this method. The Government or authority responsible for safety of navigation in a traffic separation scheme should ensure that: . 4. Elements under review might include variations to traffic patterns.20 By rules 10(k) and 10(l) respectively of the 1972 Collision Regulations. hydrographical changes. shall not be temporarily amended or suspended except in urgent cases as described in paragraph 3. when adopted by IMO. servicing or picking up of a submarine cable in a traffic separation scheme is exempted from complying with rule 10 to the extent necessary to carry out the operation. promulgated in advance by Notice to Mariners.1 The separation of opposing streams of traffic by separation zones. taking into account pertinent comments. 4 METHODS In meeting the objectives set out in section 1.17 A routeing system. and such operations are. when adopted by IMO. with the objective of directing traffic flow clear of the new hazard. a vessel restricted in its ability to manoeuvre when engaged in an operation for either the maintenance of safety of navigation or the laying. IMO shall take account of the objectives. A length of separation line may also be substituted for a zone in positions where this may encourage and facilitate correct procedures by crossing traffic. the use of zones is to be preferred.19 In an emergency such as might result from the unexpected blocking or obstruction of a traffic lane or any other part of a routeing system by a wreck or other hazard. shoals or rocks restricting free movement and providing a natural division for opposing traffic streams.3 4 97055 . the following are among the methods which may be used: 4.19. require that earlier action be taken. every possible measure shall be taken by the Government or Governments concerned to immediately inform shipping of the hazard and of the temporary changes which have been made. In considering the proposal. avoided in conditions of restricted visibility. as described in paragraph 3.1 the intention of undertaking such an operation is first notified to each Government or appropriate authority concerned. responsibilities. 3. The arrows (1) indicate the established direction of traffic flow.3. but in narrow passages and restricted waters it may be necessary to use a separation line rather than a zone so as to allow more navigable space in the traffic lanes. offshore exploration and exploitation. . shall not be amended or suspended before consultation with and agreement by IMO unless local conditions or the urgency of the case. The responsible and sponsoring Government or Governments should inform IMO as soon as possible of any such changes and their justification. effectiveness of aids to navigation and other developments. and subsequently by radionavigation warnings broadcast before and at regular intervals during the operations. as necessary. 3. methods and criteria for routeing systems as set out in these General Provisions. A mandatory routeing system. information about such ships working in a traffic separation scheme is.19. immediate temporary changes in the use of the affected traffic separation scheme or other routeing system may be made by the responsible and sponsoring Government or Governments.2 . as far as practicable.2 The separation of opposing streams of traffic by natural obstructions and geographically defined objects 6 1 1 6 Figure 2 ± Separation of traffic by natural obstructions This method is used where there is a defined area with obstructions such as islands.18 Mandatory routeing systems should be reviewed. reports and observations on the routeing system. streams of traffic proceeding in opposite or nearly opposite directions are separated by separation zones (4) or lines (3). by the Government or Governments concerned. 3.

route junctions and intersections should be selected Figure 7 ± Separation of traffic at a junction 97215 5 . ships may navigate in any direction. with the purpose of keeping local traffic clear of the traffic separation scheme which should be used by through traffic. Where such areas lie between the traffic separation scheme and the coast they may be designated as inshore traffic zones (see also figures 4 and 10). a roundabout may be used to guide traffic counterclockwise round a circular separation zone (4) or specified point.3 The separation of through and local traffic by providing inshore traffic zones 3 4 1 3 from the most appropriate of the following methods: .4. sea pilot stations. canals.4 The sectorial division of adjacent traffic separation schemes at approaches to focal points 4 e 6 3 e traffic zone 3 Ins ho re ffic tra n zo 97059 Inshor 5 5 5 97057 Figure 6 ± Separation of traffic at a crossing Figure 4 ± Sectorial division of adjacent traffic separation schemes at approaches to focal points This method is used where ships converge at a focal point or a small area from various directions. as illustrated in figure 5. Port approaches. positions where landfall buoys or lightvessels are located. 4. Traffic in inshore traffic zones is separated from traffic in the adjacent traffic lane by separation zones (4) or by separation lines (3) (see also figures 4 and 10). entrances to channels. estuaries.5 The routeing of traffic at focal points and route junctions where traffic separation schemes meet The routeing measure to be utilized at focal points. etc.1 Roundabouts If the need can be demonstrated. . may be considered as such focal points..2 6 97058 Figure 5 ± Separation of traffic at a roundabout Junctions 4. 5 Inshore traffic zone e tr affi c zo ne 5 5 5 3 6 Ins hor 5 6 1 97056 5 4 Figure 3 ± Inshore traffic zones Beyond the outside limits of traffic separation schemes.

The traffic lanes are terminated short of the point where traffic is expected to cross and replaced by a precautionary area within which the recommended directions of traffic flow (2) are indicated. The directions of traffic flow are established in the lanes of the adjoining schemes. as shown in figure 8. Figure 9 ± Precautionary area at a focal point Inshore traffic zone 3 ! 4 9 2 4 ! 9 DW 6 97218 97220 Figure 10 ± Precautionary area with recommended direction of traffic flow around an area to be avoided Figure 12 ± Deep-water route (two-way) 6 . Figures 9 and 10 illustrate the use of such an area at focal points. .2 Deep-water routes (figures 12 and 13). to terminate them clear of their potential joining points and in such a case a precautionary area (9) can be instituted so as to emphasize the need for care in navigation. when routes converge. Areas to be avoided (figures 10 and 18). Precautionary area 55 97217 4. as shown in figure 10.4 1 6 1 2 1 ! 3 4 4 97216 9 2 4 6 97219 1 6 Figure 8 ± A junction. Figure 11 gives an example of how a precautionary area (9) can be used at a junction with crossing traffic.3 Precautionary areas Figure 11 ± Precautionary area at a junction with recommended directions of traffic flow It may be best. Precautionary areas may also be used at the termination of any single route. where there will be crossing traffic These methods are used where two routes join or cross. a direction of traffic flow may be recommended (2) around the focal point. as shown in figures 6 and 7. the separation zone may be interrupted. showing a separation line substituted for a zone. or replaced by a separation line.6 Other routeing methods Other routeing methods which may be used are as shown in the figures below: . in order to emphasize the correct method of crossing by traffic changing from one scheme to the other.1 .

8 8 97224 DW 6 Figure 16 ± Recommended routes Figure 13 ± One-way deep-water route (within a traffic lane) V V V 7 V V V V 97225 V 1 2 4 5 Figure 17 ± Recommended tracks (in black) 2 1 Area to be avoided 97222 5 Figure 14 ± Recommended directions of traffic flow between two traffic separation schemes 97226 Figure 18 ± Area to be avoided 2 5 PLANNING 5.3 Recommended directions of traffic flow (figure 14). 5.. 97223 Figure 15 ± Two-way route (with one-way sections) V V V 97221 7 V V V V V V V 7 . establishing. and taking account of anticipated or existing navigational hazards.1 The routeing system selected for a particular area should aim at providing safe passage for ships through the area without unduly restricting legitimate rights and practices. reviewing or adjusting a routeing system.2 When planning.1 their rights and practices in respect of the exploitation of living and mineral resources. the following factors shall be among those taken into account by a Government: . two-way routes (figure 15) and recommended routes and tracks through areas where navigation is difficult or dangerous (figures 16 and 17).

. .5 . as amended.6 . 5. and resolution A. including coastal traffic.4 Course alterations along a route should be as few as possible and should be avoided in the approaches to convergence areas and route junctions or where crossing traffic may be expected to be heavy. 5. the necessity for creating such areas should be well demonstrated and the reasons stated. the existing traffic pattern in the area concerned.2 .2 Routes should follow as closely as possible the existing patterns of traffic flow in the areas as determined by traffic surveys. hydrographic surveys and nautical charts of the area. these areas should be established only in places where inadequate survey or insufficient provision of aids to navigation may lead to danger of stranding. and should be as widely separated from each other as possible. or where there might be hazard to a vital aid to navigation. whether or not under the proposing Government's jurisdiction.5 and 6.43(64).3 The configuration and length of routeing systems which are established to provide for an unobstructed passage through offshore exploration and exploitation areas may differ from the dimensions of normally established systems if the purpose of safeguarding a clear passage warrants such a special feature. . crossing traffic. tidal streams and currents and the possibility of ice concentrations. Refer to resolution MSC. including prevailing weather conditions. 6. naval exercise areas and anchorage areas. an associated monitoring service.8 Traffic separation schemes shall be designed so as to enable ships using them to fully comply at all times with the International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea.3 previously established routeing systems in adjacent waters.2. existing activities and foreseeable developments of offshore exploration or exploitation of the sea-bed and subsoil.1 The following standards should.6 Governments considering establishing a new routeing system or amending an existing one should consult at an early stage with: . may be expected.4 authorities responsible for aids to navigation and for hydrographic surveys and nautical publications. a reporting service or VTS should be established in accordance with the guidelines adopted by IMO for such services. 6 DESIGN CRITERIA 6. 6. 5.5 When establishing areas to be avoided by all ships or by certain classes of ship. as appropriate. so far as the circumstances allow. are likely. foreseeable changes in the traffic pattern resulting from port or offshore terminal developments. Guidelines and criteria for ship reporting systems. General 6.4 . and thus of the routeing system itself. and of such shipborne navigational aids as are required or recommended to be fitted by international conventions or by IMO resolutions and recommendations. the classes of ship which should avoid the areas should be considered in each particular case.4 Routeing systems should not be established in areas where the instability of the sea-bed is such that frequent changes in the alignment and positions of the main channels. ferry traffic. 6.3 . Route junctions should not be located where concentrated crossing traffic.1 mariners using the area.6 Routes should be designed to allow optimum use of aids to navigation in the area. 5. 8 . offshore exploration or exploitation and environmental protection. 3. * Traffic separation schemes 6. the adequacy of existing aids to navigation.9 The extent of a traffic separation scheme should be limited to what is essential in the interests of safe navigation.2.2 .* as appropriate. 6.. because of the particular circumstances in the area or parts of the area concerned. and the existence of environmental conservation areas and foreseeable developments in the establishment of such areas. In general. environmental factors. or where there is the possibility that unacceptable damage to the environment could result from a casualty.4.3 A Government or Governments planning. not following established routes. 1972.9 5. or where local knowledge is considered essential for safe passage. the presence of fishing grounds. 6. These areas shall not be regarded as prohibited areas unless specifically so stated.7 The state of hydrographic surveys within the limits of a routeing system and in the approaches thereto should be such that full information on existing depths of water and hazards to surface navigation is available to nautical charting authorities.5 The number of convergence areas and route junctions should be kept to a minimum.g. e. implementing and maintaining mandatory routeing systems should consider whether. 6.7 .11. and organizations concerned with fishing. Guidelines for vessel traffic services. be applied in the design of ships' routeing measures.857(20). Adjacent traffic separation schemes should be placed such that nearly opposing streams of traffic in the adjacent schemes are separated as widely as possible.8 This consultation process is implied in paragraphs 3. port authorities. as amended. 5.

serious consideration should be given to providing adequate marking by buoys.15 Where space allows the use of traffic separation zones. 6. the need to give ships which may be required to give way under the 1972 Collision Regulations as much room to manoeuvre as possible. If recommended directions of traffic flow are adopted. the width of the zone should. the need to enable a stand-on vessel to maintain a steady course. The width of lanes should take account of the traffic density. as required by the 1972 Collision Regulations. 6. the existence of that system may be taken into account when designing the scheme.1 .4 Deep-water routes 6. for as long as possible before the route junction.18 It shall be possible for ships to fix their positions in relation to a mandatory routeing system by one or more of the means mentioned in paragraph 6.12 over the whole area of that lane and an electronic position-fixing system covers that area. D/F bearings. 6. it must be a cardinal principle that any ambiguity or possible source of confusion in the application of the 1972 Collision Regulations must be avoided.12. 6.16 If there is doubt as to the ability of ships to fix their positions positively and without ambiguity in relation to separation lines or zones. listed in paragraph 6. consideration should be given to marking critical turning points. 6. Such shore-based systems should be approved by IMO before they are recognized as a position-fixing system for supporting the safety of navigation in or near traffic separation schemes. accepting the appropriate performance standards for shipborne equipment as set out in IMO resolutions and recommendations. Where necessary or desirable.1. Mandatory routeing systems 6.2 .3 . both by day and by night: .12 of this section. as modified by the Protocol of 1978 relating thereto.4 radar bearings and ranges of readily identifiable objects. Converging and junction areas 6.12. taking into account the maximum depth of water attainable along the length of the route. in appropriate circumstances. and also of all other applicable provisions of ships' routeing.21 In designing deep-water routes. 6.6. separation zones should be used in preference to separation lines to separate opposing streams of traffic and to segregate inshore traffic zones from adjacent traffic lanes.1 visual bearing of readily identifiable objects. as specified in the International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships. be not less than three times the transverse component of the standard error (measured across the separation zone) of the most appropriate of the position-fixing methods .11 Where there is sufficient space.14 The minimum widths of traffic lanes and of traffic separation zones should be related to the accuracy of the available position-fixing methods.13 When it is considered essential to provide within a traffic separation scheme an additional lane for ships carrying hazardous liquid substances in bulk. .20 At route junctions the following particular considerations apply: .10 Traffic lanes should be designed to make optimum use of available depths of water and the safe navigable areas. 1973. the general usage of the area and the sea-room available. additional separation should be provided to ensure that there will be adequate early indication that traffic proceeding in the opposite direction will pass on the correct side.19 Whichever of the several available routeing methods is chosen for use at a route junction or in a converging area.17 The extent of a mandatory routeing system should be limited to what is essential in the interest of safety of navigation and the protection of the marine environment.1 It should be possible for ships to fix their position anywhere within the limits of and in the immediate approaches to a traffic separation scheme by one or more of the following means. in circumstances where it is not possible for ships to fix their position as set out in paragraph 6.2 the need to encourage the crossing of traffic lanes as nearly as possible at right angles.12. This principle should be particularly borne in mind when establishing or recommending the direction of traffic flow in such areas. Any wrecks or sea-bed obstructions which lie within the limits of a deep-water route and which have less depth of water over them than the minimum depth of water for the route as indicated on the charts.3 . 9 . Separation zones or lines may also be used to separate a traffic lane from adjacent sea areas other than inshore traffic zones.2 The position fixing of ships may be supplemented or substituted by shore-based radar and radio direction-finder systems to assist ships which have difficulty to accurately establish their position with the means prescribed under 6. should be marked. and the need to encourage traffic not following an established route to avoid crossing at or near route junctions.12 Position fixing 6. and where practicable. taking into account traffic density and the available means of fixing ships' positions. these should take full account of the existing pattern of traffic flow in the area concerned.12. and other radionavigation equipment suitable for use throughout the intended voyage. 6. 6. if possible. 6.

2 if a small temporary adjustment of the traffic lane is not possible the whole or part of the scheme could be temporarily shifted away from the drilling area so that traffic connected with the drilling operations will stay clear of the lane. 7.3 Adapted situation temporary local interruption of the scheme or part of the scheme in the area of location of the drilling rig.1 When the temporary positioning of an exploration rig is unavoidable.7 TEMPORARY ADJUSTMENTS AND SUSPENSIONS Example Traffic separation schemes 7. Such an interruption could be made a precautionary area.1 when the drilling location is situated near the boundary of a traffic lane or separation zone.2 The said adjustments should be made in accordance with the following: . Example 97228 Adapted situation . 97231 Original situation 10 . the design criteria and the provisions for planning should be taken into account before permitting the positioning of the rig or subsequently adjusting a traffic separation scheme. a relatively slight adjustment of the scheme could have such effect that the drilling rig and its associated safety zone are sufficiently clear of the traffic lane. Example 97229 Original situation 97227 97230 Original situation .

4 A ship navigating in or near a traffic separation scheme adopted by IMO shall in particular comply with rule 10 of the 1972 Collision Regulations to minimize the development of risk of collision with another ship. 8. Ships should therefore navigate with great caution in such areas and be aware that the mere fact that a ship is proceeding along a through-going route gives that ship no special privilege or right of way. as ships may need to cross routes or change to another route.5 In the event of a temporary adjustment to a traffic separation scheme remaining in force for more than one year. 7.4 Details of these temporary adjustments should be forwarded to IMO and to appropriate hydrographic offices at least four months before the rig is positioned within an adopted traffic separation scheme so as to allow ample time to inform shipping. because of their draught in relation to the available depth of water in the area concerned. 11 . initiate timely procedures for IMO to adopt such amendments. 97232 Adapted situation .8 In two-way routes. routeing systems are recommended for use by all ships and may be made mandatory for all ships. 8. or entering or leaving adjacent ports. exploration sites should be reviewed and such conditions specified as the responsible Government may deem necessary to ensure safety of navigation in the area. as far as practicable. if appropriate. if risk of collision with another ship is deemed to exist. and the effects of meteorological and tidal conditions on water depths. and particularly the rules of part B.3 In each case. meaning You appear not to be complying with the traffic separation scheme. sections II and III. by passing ships not making use of the associated traffic separation schemes or deep-water routes. the possibility of changes in the sea-bed since the time of the last survey. 8.7 Precautionary areas should be avoided. if practicable. avoid using deep-water routes.4 temporary suspension of the whole scheme.10 The signal YG. a mandatory routeing system may be entirely or partly suspended by the Contracting Government or Governments which have implemented such systems.8 Temporary precautionary area USE OF ROUTEING SYSTEMS 8.2 Routeing systems are intended for use by day and by night in all weathers. a decision to use a routeing system must take into account the charted depth. this should be made known to the relevant hydrographic authorities in order to allow appropriate action to be taken in notifying mariners. 8.9 Arrows printed on charts in connection with routeing systems merely indicate the general direction of established or recommended traffic flow. 8. Mandatory routeing systems 7. ships should as far as practicable keep to the starboard side. Through traffic to which the above consideration does not apply should.6 A deep-water route is primarily intended for use by ships which. is provided in the International Code of Signals for appropriate use. 8. If necessary for the safety of navigation in the area concerned.6 Mandatory routeing systems should not be temporarily adjusted.3 Bearing in mind the need for adequate underkeel clearance. require the use of such a route. The responsible Government or Governments should inform IMO of such a suspension and promulgate details of the suspension by all appropriate means. certain categories of ships or ships carrying certain cargoes. 7. ships need not set their courses strictly along the arrows. the responsible Government should consider whether permanent amendments to the scheme may ultimately become necessary and.5 At junction points where traffic from various directions meets. 7. 8. 8. a true separation of traffic is not really possible. The other rules of the 1972 Collision Regulations apply in all respects. When the duration of such temporary adjustments is expected to be six months or more.1 Unless stated otherwise. in ice-free waters or under light ice conditions where no extraordinary manoeuvres or ice-breaker assistance are required. 8. including two-way deepwater routes.

Shown on charts and referred to in notes. Not usually shown on charts but referred to in notes.2 Use of legends on charts and in notes Legend Traffic separation scheme Inshore traffic zone Precautionary area Deep-water route Area to be avoided Two-way route Recommended route Recommended track Mandatory routeing system Use of legend Not usually shown on charts.9 REPRESENTATION ON CHARTS 9. 9. twoway routes. may be any shape (4).2. (2) 1 Established direction of traffic flow Outlined arrow Traffic separation schemes and deep-water routes (when part of a traffic lane) Precautionary areas.3. symbols are printed on charts in colour.1 The legends.4 and 9. (5) and paragraph 9. 9. 9. Shown on charts and referred to in notes.3 Symbols for basic elements of routeing measures Unless otherwise specified. 3 mm wide (3). May be shown on charts in lieu of the symbol and referred to in notes. symbols and notes appearing in paragraphs 9. usually magenta. Not usually shown on charts but referred to in notes. Referred to in notes.4 4 Separation zones Tint. DW is shown on charts to indicate the deep water. DW or deep-water route is referred to in notes. (4) and paragraph 9. recommended routes and deep-water routes Traffic separation schemes and between traffic separation schemes and inshore traffic zones Traffic separation schemes and between traffic separation schemes and inshore traffic zones 2 Recommended direction of traffic flow Dashed outlined arrow (1) 3 Separation lines Tint.5 are recommended by the International Hydrographic Organization as guidance for the representation of details of routeing systems and associated measures on nautical charts. They are included to illustrate the information likely to be found on charts and as an aid to those designing proposed routeing systems for adoption by IMO.4 12 . Not usually shown on charts but referred to in notes. 9. Not usually shown on charts but referred to in notes. Routeing term Symbol Description Applications Notes and paragraph references (1).

arrows should be oriented to the approximate average directions of the side boundaries. Tint light enough not to obscure detail beneath it. two-way routes and deep-water routes Generally reserved for use by charting authorities Recommended routes (7) 7 Recommended tracks: one-way two-way Recommended routes Dashed lines with arrowheads (colour black) Dashed line and dashed outlined arrows Precautionary symbol V V 8 V 9 Precautionary areas Precautionary areas (8) ! NOTES (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) Arrows dispersed over width of route.4 5 Limits of restricted areas (charting term) T-shaped dashes Areas to be avoided and ends of inshore traffic zones 6 General maritime limits (charting term) Dashed line Traffic separation schemes.Routeing term Symbol Description Applications Notes and paragraph references (6) and paragraph 9. Symbol intended for tracks to be followed closely through inadequately surveyed areas. Where the traffic lane is converging. Separation line 3 mm wide where chart scale permits. If traffic lanes are separated by natural obstacles. For examples of routeing measures using these basic symbols see figures 1 to 18 in section 4. Stems of dashes point towards the area in question. precautionary areas. Arrow omitted at intersections (other than roundabouts) to avoid implying priority of one lane. may be replaced by the symbol for general maritime limits at the boundaries of the lanes. Arrows may be curved. Legend Precautionary area may also be used within the precautionary area instead of the symbol. 13 .

with the stems of the T's pointing towards the ITZ.4 Boundary symbols in detail Example: Boundary symbol 8 means that the boundary. No boundary (zone) 1 2 Traffic separation scheme (ends) Open sea Traffic separation scheme (sides) Open sea Traffic separation scheme Inshore traffic zone Traffic separation scheme next to traffic separation scheme Inshore traffic zone (ends) Open sea Precautionary area Open sea Precautionary area Traffic separation scheme Precautionary area Inshore traffic zone Deep-water route (sides) Open sea Deep-water route (ends) Open sea Deep-water route (ends) Traffic separation scheme Deep-water route next to deep-water route Deep-water route (ends) Precautionary areas Deep-water route Separation zone/line or or 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 or No boundary (zone) No boundary (Separation zone/line acts as boundary) 15 16 Two-way route All other areas Area to be avoided All other areas 14 . between a precautionary area and an inshore traffic zone is to be shown by T-shaped dashes. indicated by the line.9.

5. nature of cargoes.g. 22 m) may be given after the abbreviation DW.5. 9.9.2 Deep-water routes Where maintenance of a minimum depth can be guaranteed. the least depth (e. 15 .1 Traffic separation schemes and other routeing measures The existence of special provisions applying to particular measures should be mentioned on the charts affected.) should preferably be given on charts and should always be given in Sailing Directions. if necessary referring mariners to the full text in Sailing Directions.3 Areas to be avoided Notes on conditions governing avoidance of areas (classes and sizes of ships.5. 9. preferably in conjunction with a note giving the date of the latest survey. etc.5 Cautionary and explanatory notes on charts 9. In other cases charted soundings will indicate the least depth.

Notwithstanding subparagraph (d)(i). servicing or picking up of a submarine cable. vessels of less than 20 metres in length. A vessel restricted in her ability to manoeuvre when engaged in an operation for the maintenance of safety of navigation in a traffic separation scheme is exempted from complying with this rule to the extent necessary to carry out the operation. (g) (iii) normally join or leave a traffic lane at the termination of the lane. A vessel shall so far as practicable avoid anchoring in a traffic separation scheme or in areas near its terminations. (h) (i) (j) (d) (k) (ii) (l) 1 . sailing vessels and vessels engaged in fishing may use the inshore traffic zone. However. (i) A vessel shall not use an inshore traffic zone when she can safely use the appropriate traffic lane within the adjacent traffic separation scheme. so far as practicable. (c) A vessel shall. (e) A vessel other than a crossing vessel or a vessel joining or leaving a lane shall not normally enter a separation zone or cross a separation line except: (i) (ii) in cases of emergency to avoid immediate danger. but when joining or leaving from either side shall do so at as small an angle to the general direction of traffic flow as practicable. 1972. offshore installation or structure. A vessel of less than 20 metres in length or a sailing vessel shall not impede the safe passage of a power-driven vessel following a traffic lane. a vessel may use an inshore traffic zone when en route to or from a port. (b) (f) (ii) A vessel navigating in areas near the terminations of traffic separation schemes shall do so with particular caution. A vessel engaged in fishing shall not impede the passage of any vessel following a traffic lane.626(15) and on 19 October 1989 by Assembly resolution A. pilot station or any other place situated within the inshore traffic zone. A vessel not using a traffic separation scheme shall avoid it by as wide a margin as is practicable. to engage in fishing within a separation zone.678(16). avoid crossing traffic lanes but if obliged to do so shall cross on a heading as nearly as practicable at right angles to the general direction of traffic flow. A vessel restricted in her ability to manoeuvre when engaged in an operation for the laying. or to avoid immediate danger. is exempted from complying with this rule to the extent necessary to carry out the operation. is applicable to all traffic separation schemes contained in this part. Rule 10 Traffic separation schemes (a) This rule applies to traffic separation schemes adopted by the Organization and does not relieve any vessel of her obligation under any other rule. within a traffic separation scheme. as amended on 19 November 1981 by Assembly resolution A.Rule 10 of COLREG 1972 Rule 10 of the International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea. The text is given below. A vessel using a traffic separation scheme shall: (i) proceed in the appropriate traffic lane in the general direction of traffic flow for that lane. so far as practicable keep clear of a traffic separation line or separation zone. on 19 November 1987 by Assembly resolution A.464(XII).

80˚ INDEX THE SECTIONS OF PART B Arctic Circle I II X VII III Tropic of Cancer 60˚ X 40˚ IX V 20˚ V Equator 0˚ VIII Tropic of Capricorn IV 20˚ 40˚ VI VI 60˚ Antarctic Circle 180˚ 160˚ 140˚ 120˚ 100˚ 80˚ 60˚W 40˚ 20˚ 0˚ 20˚ 40˚ 60˚E 80˚ 100˚ 120˚ 140˚ 160˚ 180˚ .

Mariners should consult the appropriate nautical publications and charts for up-to-date details on aids to navigation and other relevant information. I . WARNING: The geographical positions given in the descriptions of the routeing systems are only correct for charts using the same geodetic datum as the reference charts indicated under each scheme.Section I BALTIC SEA CAUTION: The chartlets are for illustrative purposes only and must not be used for navigation. Charts published by other hydrographic offices may use a different geodetic datum. as may new editions of the reference charts published after the adoption of the routeing system.

64˚ 62˚ Helsinki Oslo 6 4 5 3 2 1 60˚ Stockholm 7 Tallinn 58˚ Göteborg 8 12 15 14 Kobenhavn 11 13 10 9 Kiel 10˚ 15˚ 20˚ 25˚ I/ii Th d 24 h F b 2000 S W i Shi ' R 97068 INDEX: BALTIC SEA 1: Off Sommers Island 2: Off Hogland (Gogland) Island 3: Off Rodsher Island 4: Off Kalbådagrund Lighthouse 5: Off Porkkala Lighthouse 6: Off Hankoniemi Peninsula 7: Off Köpu Peninsula (Hiiumaa Island) 8: Off Gotland Island 9: Off Öland Island 10: South of Gedser 11: Off Falsterborev 12: In The Sound 13: Off Kiel Lighthouse 14: Between Korsoer and Sprogoe 15: At Hatter Barn 56˚ f 54˚ i (f h) 1 .

is established around the circular separation zone.40 N. 027846'. 027842'.10 N. 027843'. is established on each side of the separation line and the outside limits of the traffic lanes are extended to intersect with the outside limit of the roundabout.00 E (8) 60801'. Vyborg and the western Baltic meets.40 N. 028805'. (chartlet overleaf) I/1-1 . Part IV: (a) (b) A separation line connects the following geographical positions: (9) 60812'.60 N. Part III: (a) A separation line connects the following geographical positions: (6) 60811'. half a mile wide.50 E A traffic lane.60 E (3) 60810'. (b) Part II: (a) (b) (c) (d) A separation zone. 027847'.20 E (5) 60810'. is established on each side of the traffic separation zone. 027832'.70 N. is centred upon the following geographical positions: (2) 60807'. is established on each side of the separation line and the outside limits of the traffic lanes are extended to intersect with the outside limit of the roundabout.90 N. A separation line connects the following geographical positions: (4) 60810'. 1989 edition. (7) 60807'.50 N.20 E A traffic lane. 027849'. half a mile wide.80 N.00 E (b) A traffic lane. 028816'.OFF SOMMERS ISLAND (Reference chart: USSR 403.00 E A traffic lane. one and a quarter miles wide. one and a quarter miles wide.80 E (10) 60824'. is established on each side of the separation line and the outside limits of the traffic lanes are extended to intersect with the outside limit of the roundabout.50 N. Note: The roundabout serves the purpose of facilitating manoeuvring in the area where traffic to and from Leningrad.70 N. Note: This chart is based on the single geodetic datum for Soviet nautical charts. one mile wide. 027842'.) Description of the traffic separation scheme The traffic separation scheme ``Off Sommers Island'' consists of four parts: Part I: (a) A roundabout with a circular traffic separation zone half a mile in diameter is centred at the following geographical position: (1) 60811'.20 E A circular traffic lane. one mile wide.10 E 028829'.

Malyy 5 O. Nerva Sommers I. (10) 5Khalli 25' O. . Moshchnyy 5O. Seskar (8) . (3) . (6) 10' (2) . 60˚ 20' 25' 30' 35' 40' 45' 50' 55' 28˚ 5' 10' 15' 20' 25' 30' 35' 40' 55' 97069 OFF SOMMERS ISLAND I/1-2 . (5) (4) 15' . 5' 5 O. Rondo Bol’shoy 5 Fiskar . 5 (9) (1) . .5 O. Bol’shoy Berezovyy 20' 5 O. Zapadnyy Berezovyy Sitirok O. [5] See separation scheme “Off Hogland (Gogland) Island” (7) .

(5) Bnk.40 E (3) 59859'.30 E A traffic lane. 027804'.Vikalla 55' 5 35' 40' 45' 50' 55' O.70 N.) Description of the traffic separation scheme The traffic separation scheme ``Off Hogland Island'' consists of two parts: Part I: (a) A separation zone.60 E A traffic lane. Bol’shoy Tyuters 15' 20' 25' 30' 35' 50' 97082 27˚ 5' 10' OFF HOGLAND (GOGLAND) ISLAND + OFF RODSHER ISLAND I/2/3 . 026836'. (2) (3) . Ljuderona [2] . 027832'.50 E (3) 60800'. (4) 60˚ 5 Rodsher O. 1989 edition. 1988 edition. 027804'.90 N. half a mile wide.00 N. (2) .80 E (5) 60807'. (O.30 E (2) 60800'. 1988 edition.70 N. 026857'.70 N. 026840'.OFF HOGLAND (GOGLAND) ISLAND (Reference charts: USSR 403. is centred upon the following geographical positions: (1) 59859'. (b) Bnk. (3) (1) . is established on each side of the separation line. OFF RODSHER ISLAND (Reference charts: USSR 403. 404. one and a quarter miles wide. Note: These charts are based on the single geodetic datum for Soviet nautical charts.70 N.10 N.40 E A traffic lane. Meririutta 5 Hogland I. 026844'. 404. one mile wide.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) A separation zone.80 E (2) 59858'. 027801'. (b) Part II: (a) (b) A separation line connects the following geographical positions: (4) 59859'.40 N. 1989 edition. is established on each side of the separation zone. . half a mile wide. is established on each side of the separation zone. Gogland) 5' (1) . 5 . one mile wide. Note: These charts are based on the single geodetic datum for Soviet nautical charts. is centred upon the following geographical positions: (1) 59859'. Virginy Bnk.

025830'. (2) 50' 45' Pärispea 5 Mohni 40' 5 Juminda nina Loksa 35' 25' 30' 35' 40' 45' 50' 55' 26˚ Ê OFF KALBADAGRUND LIGHTHOUSE I/4 97070 .50 E (2) 59853'.90 N. is centred upon the following geographical positions: (1) 59852'. one and a half miles wide. (3) .60 E A traffic lane.00 N. 025846'. (1) .20 N. 025838'. 60˚ º Kalbadagrund 5 55' .Ê OFF KALBADAGRUND LIGHTHOUSE (Reference chart: USSR 404.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) (b) A separation zone. 1988 edition.70 E (3) 59853'. is established on each side of the separation zone. one mile wide. Note: This chart is based on the single geodetic datum for Soviet nautical charts.

) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) A separation zone.90 N. is established on the southern side of the separation zone.10 N. is established on the northern side of the separation zone. 024813'. one and a half miles wide.OFF PORKKALA LIGHTHOUSE (Reference chart: USSR 404.90 N. for westbound traffic. (2) 45' Tallinnamadal 40' Uusmadal Naissaar 5 NAISSAAR 5' 10' 15' 20' 5 59˚ 35' 97071 24˚ 25' 30' 35' 40' 45' OFF PORKKALA LIGHTHOUSE I/5 . is centred upon the following geographical positions: (1) 59844'. A traffic lane. 024829'.40 E A traffic lane.10 E (2) 59844'. (1) . for eastbound traffic. 1988 edition. two miles wide. Note: This chart is based on the single geodetic datum for Soviet nautical charts.70 E (3) 59845'. one mile wide. 024821'. (3) . (b) (c) Rönnskär 5 Mäkiluoto 5 55' 5 Porkkala Savin 50' .

90 N. Apollomadalik 10' 5 VORMSI Ristna 40' 50' 59˚ HIIUMAA 5 10' 20' 30' 40' 50' 22˚ 23˚ 10' 20' 30' 40' 50' OFF HANKONIEMI PENINSULA I/6 97268 . Glotovimadalik Tahkuna 5 . 60˚ Padvamaa Hanko 50' 5 Jussarö 5 Russarö Bengtskär5 40' 5 Längden . (2) 30' . 022833'. four miles wide.20 N. Note: This chart is based on the single geodetic datum for Soviet nautical charts. is established on each side of the separation zone. 1988 edition. two miles wide.OFF HANKONIEMI PENINSULA (Reference chart: USSR 444.30 N. (3) .90 E (2) 59831'. 022853'.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) (b) A separation zone.60 E A traffic lane. (1) 20' see separation scheme ‘‘Off Köpu Peninsula’’ 5 Osmussaar . 022842'.30 E (3) 59833'. is centred upon the following geographical positions: (1) 59828'.

021852'. (3) .È OFF KOPU PENINSULA (HIIUMAA ISLAND) (Reference chart: USSR 444. (1) 5 VORMSI 59˚ Ristna 5 5 Köpu HIIUMAA 50' 40' MUHU Kiipsaarenukk 5 SAAREMAA Vilsandi 5 30' 20' 21˚ 10' 20' 30' 40' 50' 22˚ 10' 20' 30' 40' 50' 23˚ 10' 97072 È OFF KOPU PENINSULA (HIIUMAA ISLAND) I/7 . Note: This chart is based on the single geodetic datum for Soviet nautical charts.00 E (2) 59807'.60 N.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) (b) A separation zone.60 E A traffic lane. 1988 edition.80 E (3) 59811'. (2) 5 Glotovimadalik 10' Tahkuna 5 . 021842'. four miles wide. 021835'. is established on each side of the separation zone 20' . is centred upon the following geographical positions: (1) 59802'. two miles wide.90 N.70 N.

is centred upon the following geographical positions: (1) 56846'. 016846'. is established on each side of the separation zone. 016835'.70 N.50 N. Inshore traffic zone The area between the landward boundary of the traffic separation scheme and Gotland Island and between lines drawn in a direction of 3248 from positions (1) and (2) is designated as an inshore traffic zone.90 E È (2) Olands Sodra Grund Lighthouse È A traffic lane. GOTLAND 57˚ Hoburg 5 Ins tra re ho one z . is centred upon the following geographical positions: (1) 56802'. (2) ' 50 Kalmar ÖLAND ' 40 ' 30 5 Segerstad 20' re Ölands 5 ho Södra Udde Ins affic tr ne zo . (3) 5 Ölands Södra Grund (1) 56˚ 50' 97073 16˚ 10' 20' 30' 40' 50' 17˚ 10' 20' 30' 40' 50' 18˚ 10' 20' 30' 40' È OFF GOTLAND ISLAND + OFF OLAND ISLAND I/8/9 . (2) 10' . three miles wide.00 E (3) 56806'. two miles wide. (b) Inshore traffic zone È The area between the landward boundary of the traffic separation scheme and Oland Island and between a line È lands Sodra Udde lighthouse and a line drawn in a drawn in an approximate direction of 3288 from position (1) to O È direction of 3238 from position (3) to the shoreline is designated as an inshore traffic zone. 018819'.50 E A traffic lane.00 N. three miles wide. 018827'.00 E (2) 56849'.00 N.OFF GOTLAND ISLAND (Reference chart: British Admiralty 2288) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) (b) A separation zone. is established on each side of the separation zone. (1) ffic . one mile wide. È OFF OLAND ISLAND (Reference chart: British Admiralty 2251) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) A separation zone.

00 E (12) 54823'.10 N. 012810'.20 E (14) 54823'.50 E (9) 54827'.SOUTH OF GEDSER (Reference chart: Danish 186. 012809'. 012800'. 012805'. 012812'.10 E (11) 54827'. (14) . 54˚ 30' . Note: This chart is based on European Datum. half a mile wide.00 E (5) 54825'.00 E A traffic lane for eastbound traffic is established between the separation line.80 N. (10) . 012814'. DW . (9) . (3) 25' . (7) .10 E (3) 54825'. (11) (5) . the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (10) 54830'.30 N. (8) .20 N.30 N.20 N. (6) (1) . section I). the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (6) 54831'. 012800'.40 N. .60 E (13) 54823'. 012800'.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) (b) (c) A separation line connects the following geographical positions: (1) 54831'.80 E (d) Note: The northern termination of the traffic separation scheme is connected to the deep-water route ``North-east of Gedser'' (see part C. (2) 54827'.30 N.30 N. 012817'. 012809'.30 E (4) 54825'.70 E (8) 54827'.40 N. 012807'.10 N. (13) . (2) .60 N.10 N.40 E 012807'.00 E A separation zone. 1984 edition.00 E A traffic lane for westbound traffic is established between the separation line. (12) 97074 12˚ 5' 10' 15' SOUTH OF GEDSER I/10 . 012805'.20 E (7) 54828'. 012815'.40 N. 012809'. is centred upon the following geographical positions: (4) 54825'.60 N. (4) .

012857'. 012852'.50 E A traffic lane.OFF FALSTERBOREV (Reference charts: Swedish Administration of Shipping and Navigation 921. (b) Part II: (a) (b) A separation line connects the following geographical positions: (2) 55815'.50 E A circular traffic lane. 012842'.50 N.50 N. 012839'.00 N.70 E A traffic lane. the Kiel Canal and The Sound meets. 2 Lighthouse (approximate position 55823'. is established on each side of the separation line and the outside limits of the traffic lanes are extended to intersect with the outside limit of the roundabout. is established on each side of the separation line and the outside limits of the traffic lanes are extended to intersect with the outside limit of the roundabout.10 E (5) 55816'.70 E). is established on each side of the separation line and the outside limits of the traffic lanes are extended to intersect with the outside limit of the roundabout. one and three quarter miles wide. 1980 edition. Note: The roundabout serves the purpose of facilitating manoeuvring in the area where traffic to and from the Baltic Sea.10 N.60 N. one mile wide. 1. 012838'.50 N.90 E A traffic lane. Note: These charts are based on Swedish National Geodetic Datum. 012839'. 1980 edition. is established around the circular separation zone.00 E) and a line drawn from position (7) to Skanor Lighthouse È (approximate position 55825'. I/11-1 . Inshore traffic zone The area between the eastern landward boundaries of the roundabout and the traffic separation scheme and the Swedish coast. 012839'.1 miles wide. and lying between a line drawn from position (2) to Falsterbokanalen No.20 E (3) 55817'.) Description of the traffic separation scheme The traffic separation scheme ``Off Falsterborev'' consists of four parts: Part I: (a) A roundabout with a circular traffic separation zone half a mile in diameter is centred upon the following geographical position: (1) 55818'.00 N. one and a half miles wide.40 E (7) 55825'. is designated as an inshore traffic zone. Part III: (a) (b) A separation line connects the following geographical positions: (4) 55813'. 012840'.60 N. 929.60 N. 012849'. Part IV: (a) (b) A separation line connects the following geographical positions: (6) 55820'.

(7) . (1) (3) 5 Stevns . 15' . (6) Inshore traffic zone 20' . (2) . 30' 35' 97076 (4) 12˚ 40' 45' 50' 55' OFF FALSTERBOREV I/11-2 . (5) . 5 Skanör Falsterbo 55˚ 25' 5 .

012838'. should be taken in the area between Helsingborg and Helsingùr.50 E (3) 55858'. (2) 56803'.90 N. Note: The Danish chart is based on European Datum.10 N.30 N. 012832'.90 E (7) 55859'.00 N.40 N.20 N. Danish 131. Note: Cross-channel traffic All precautions. 012833'. 012838'. 012842'.IN THE SOUND (Reference charts: British Admiralty 2115.30 E (10) 56803'. 1986 edition. 012839'. 012838'.10 N.10 E (c) (d) Inshore traffic zones Western inshore traffic zone The area between the western landward boundary of the traffic separation scheme and the Danish coast and between a line drawn in the direction of 2238 from position (8) and a line drawn in the direction of 2578 from position (11) is designated as an inshore traffic zone.90 E (15) 55858'. 012840'.00 E (13) 56801'. 012840'. including if necessary a reduction of speed.50 N.30 E (11) 56801'.70 E In the southern part of this traffic lane the southbound traffic is divided into two lanes by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (12) 56801'. 012840'.00 N.30 E (9) 56805'.20 N.10 E (5) 56806'. 012834'.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) A separation line connects the following geographical positions: (1) 56807'.80 E (6) 56803'.20 E 012841'.30 N. 012831'. 012830'. 012837'. which is widely used by local cross-channel ferry traffic.50 E A traffic lane for southbound traffic is established between the separation line and a separation line connecting the following geographical positions: (8) 56806'.70 N.80 N.60 E (14) 56800'. Eastern inshore traffic zone The area between the eastern landward boundary of the traffic separation scheme and the Swedish coast and between a line drawn in a direction of 0468 from position (4) and a line drawn in a direction of 0628 from position (6) is designated as an inshore traffic zone. I/12-1 .40 N.60 N.40 E (b) A traffic lane for northbound traffic is established between the separation line and a separation line connecting the following geographical positions: (4) 56808'. 2594.

. ne zo 5' In sh or e tra ffi c zo n e (10) . (3) The Sound 30' (15) 97075 12˚ 35' 40' 45' IN THE SOUND I/12-2 . . (2) . (6) Helsingborg Helsingør (13) . 56˚ . DENMARK . (11) . (8) (5) . (7) . SWEDEN e or sh In (9) c ffi tra . . (12) (14) . . (4) (1) .

57 E (2) 54829'.02 N.OFF KIEL LIGHTHOUSE (Reference chart: German Hydrographic Office 32.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) A separation zone is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (1) 54829'. 28' Bülk 5 27' 54˚ 97077 11' 12' 13' 14' 15' 16' 17' 18' 19' 10˚ 20' OFF KIEL LIGHTHOUSE I/13 . (6) 29' (5) .20 N. 010816'. Note: This chart is based on European Datum. 010818'.90 E (b) (c) 31' . .78 E (8) 54830'.18 N. (8) Kiel 5 . 010817'.97 N.78 N. 010815'. 010818'.65 N. .15 N.48 N. 010817'. 010819'.52 E (3) 54829'. 010816'.57 E (6) 54829'. (3) . (1) . (2) 30' (7) (4) .72 E (4) 54829'.40 E A traffic lane for south-westbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (7) 54829'. 1986 edition.53 E A traffic lane for north-eastbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (5) 54828'.

011802'.95 N.and west-bound ferry traffic.42 E (7) 55820'. (2) (4) Korsør . 011802'.31 N. 1972 must be applied.53 N.58 E (6) 55821'.20 E (2) 55819'. the following shall apply for ships with a deadweight tonnage of more than 40. 011801'.74 N. 1991 edition.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) (b) A separation line connects the following geographical positions: (1) 55821'. If. section I. the Steering and Sailing Rules (part B) of the International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea. . Cross-channel traffic Immediately south of the traffic separation scheme there is heavy east.24 E A traffic lane for northbound traffic is established between the separation line and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (3) 55821'. 21' SPROGØ Halsskov (7) . (3) .000 tons: upon receipt of notification of passage through the area. risk of collision does arise. / (6) . (Reference chart: Danish 143. (8) 19' 97078 11˚ ' 1 2' 3' 4' 5' 6' 7' 8' BETWEEN KORSOER AND SPROGOE I/14 . 20' . Note: This chart is based on European Datum.79 N.06 N. (1) .66 E (8) 55818'.BETWEEN KORSOER AND SPROGOE Note: See mandatory ship reporting system ``In the Great Belt Traffic area'' in part G. 011801'. 011801'. 55˚ (5) 22' .47 N.84 E (4) 55819'. 011802'. When participating in the ship reporting system (SHIPPOS). however.87 E A traffic lane for southbound traffic is established between the separation line and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (5) 55821'. 011801'. the ferries will endeavour to navigate in such a way that risk of collision does not arise.49 E (c) Notes: 1 2 3 The minimum free water depth in the northbound traffic lane is 17 m and in the southbound traffic lane 19 m.85 N. 011802'.

56 E (4) 55849'. for south-westbound traffic is established between the separation line and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (5) 55854'. 800 metres wide.39 E (6) 55850'. Note: This chart is based on European Datum.07 N.65 N.90 E A traffic lane. is designated as an inshore traffic zone.58 N. 010849'. Notes: 1 2 The minimum depth of water below mean sea level in the traffic separation scheme is 15 m.66 E A traffic lane. 010857'.77 N. I/15-1 . 1985 edition.AT HATTER BARN (Reference chart: Danish 128.48 E (2) 55850'. for north-eastbound traffic is established between the separation line and a separation line connecting the following geographical positions: (3) 55854'.56 N.71 N. 800 metres wide. 010856'. 010855'. 010849'.42 E (c) Inshore traffic zone The area east of the traffic separation scheme. 010849'. Ships with a draught of more than 13 m should use the deep-water route which lies west of the traffic separation scheme.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) (b) A separation line connects the following geographical positions: (1) 55854'. which lies between a line drawn from position (3) above in a direction of 0858 to Sejrù Light and a line drawn from position (4) above in a direction of 1658 to Rùsnñs Light.

Røsnæs 5 Puller 45' 5 RØSNÆS 50 ' 11˚ 99041 AT HATTER BARN I/15-2 . 55˚ 50' (4) . (5) .Bosserne See description of Deep-water route between Hatter Rev and Hatter Barn (part C. (6) (2) . section I) Sejro 5 Hatter Rev DW [vii] . Hatter Barn DW Inshore traffic zone [v] . (1) (3) 55' .

Mariners should consult the appropriate nautical publications and charts for up-to-date details on aids to navigation and other relevant information. Charts published by other hydrographic offices may use a different geodetic datum. WARNING: The geographical positions given in the descriptions of the routeing systems are only correct for charts using the same geodetic datum as the reference charts indicated under each scheme.Section II WESTERN EUROPEAN WATERS CAUTION: The chartlets are for illustrative purposes only and must not be used for navigation. as may new editions of the reference charts published after the adoption of the routeing system. II .

Vlieland North and Vlieland Junction Terschelling – German Bight German Bight western approach Jade approach Elbe approach Off Feistein Off Fastnet Rock Off Smalls Off Tuskar Rock Off Skerries In the North Channel Off Finisterre Off Berlenga Off Cape Roca Off Cape S. Vicente At Banco del Hoyo 45˚ 23 40˚ 24 25 26 27 35˚ 97080 15˚ 10˚ 5˚ 0˚ 5˚ 10˚ II/ii .60˚ 17 22 55˚ 1B 21 13 9 12 11 10 8 7 6 3 5 50˚ 14 16 15 20 19 1A 18 2 4 INDEX: WESTERN EUROPEAN WATERS 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 16: 17: 18: 19: 20: 21: 22: 23: 24: 25: 26: 27: Summary chartlets West of the Scilly Isles South of the Scilly Isles Off Land's End. between Seven Stones and Longships Off Ushant Off Casquets In the Strait of Dover and adjacent waters At West Hinder Off Friesland In the approaches to Hook of Holland and at North Hinder Off Texel Off Vlieland.

Recommendations on navigation around the United Kingdom coast are in part E.At North Hinder Deep-water route forming part of the north-eastbound traffic lane of the Strait of Dover and adjacent waters traffic separation scheme At West Hinder 51˚ (see Note) West of the Scilly Isles Off Land’s End. 49˚ 48˚ 7˚ 6˚ 5˚ 4˚ 3˚ 2˚ 1˚ 0˚ 1˚ 2˚ SUMMARY CHARTLET A . between Seven Stones and Longships (see part D) Off Casquets (see part E) In the Strait of Dover and adjacent waters Deep-water route leading to the port of Antifer 50˚ South of the Scilly Isles Off Ushant (see Note) Note: Recommendations on navigation through the English Channel and Dover Strait are given in part F.

and vice versa Off Vlieland. Vlieland North and Vlieland Junction DW 30' DW Off Texel 53˚ Den Helder Mandatory route for tankers from North Hinder to the German Bight and vice versa DW Great Yarmouth DW 30' Deep-water route leading to Europoort DW Deep-water route leading to IJmuiden Area to be avoided around the F3 station (see part D. section I ) Area to be avoided in the Dover Strait (see part D. Recommended alternative route for tankers from North Hinder to the German Bight. section I ) DW DW 52˚ Europoort In the approaches to Hook of Holland and at North Hinder At West Hinder 30' Ramsgate Dover DW Deep-water route forming part of the north-eastbound traffic lane of the Strait of Dover and adjacent waters traffic separation scheme Antwerp 51˚ Calais In the Strait of Dover and adjacent waters 30' 1˚ 2˚ 3˚ 4˚ 5˚ 6˚ 7˚ 8˚ 0˚ SUMMARY CHARTLET B .Deep-water route forming Friesland Junction precautionary part of routeing system area “Off Friesland” DW German Bight western approach Elbe approach Jade approach Terschelling – German Bight 54˚ Off Friesland Deep-water routes forming parts of routeing system “Off Friesland”.

(Reference chart: British Admiralty 2565. 006816'. Note: This chart is based on Ordnance Survey of Great Britain (1936) Datum. 006853'. 006816'.50 W (7) 49844'.00. is bounded by lines connecting the following geographical positions: (5) 49852'.73 W (7) 50801'.00 N. Mary's Island is designated as an inshore traffic zone.38 W (2) 49841'.50 N.50 W (4) 49839'. 006834'.50 W (3) 49839'. is established between the separation zones described in paragraphs (a) and (c) above.67 W (12) 49835'. 006836'.50 W A separation zone. 006830'.78 W A traffic lane for north-eastbound ships.50 W A traffic lane for eastbound ships. 006816'. 006832'. is established between the separation zones described in paragraphs (a) and (b) above. 1982 edition. Note: This chart is based on Ordnance Survey of Great Britain (1936) Datum.50 W (4) 49852'. one and a half miles wide. three miles wide. 006816'.13 W (11) 50804'.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) A separation zone. 006816'. 006835'. 006832'.25 W A separation zone.50 W (8) 49844'. A traffic lane for south-westbound ships.50 N. 1982 edition.15 W (10) 49836'. one and a half miles wide.50 W (2) 50802'. two miles wide.00 N.33 N. is bounded by lines connecting the following geographical positions: (9) 49852'.17 W A separation zone.50 N. 006829'.00 W (3) 50802'.03 W (6) 50801'. 006833'. SOUTH OF THE SCILLY ISLES Note: See ``Recommendations on navigation through the English Channel and the Dover Strait'' in part F. A traffic lane for westbound ships.78 W (8) 49852'. three miles wide.33 N. (b) (c) (d) (e) Inshore traffic zone The area between the eastern boundary of the traffic separation scheme and the Scilly Isles and lying between a line drawn in a direction of 2708 from Bishop Rock Lighthouse and a line drawn in a direction of 2868 from Round Island Lighthouse is designated as an inshore traffic zone.50 N. three miles wide. is bounded by lines connecting the following geographical positions: (1) 49841'.50 N.50 N.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) A separation zone.WEST OF THE SCILLY ISLES Note: See ``Recommendations on navigation through the English Channel and the Dover Strait'' in part F.07 N.50 N.98 N. 006844'.33 N.50 W (11) 49835'. is bounded by lines connecting the following geographical positions: (9) 49836'.33 N. one mile wide. three miles wide. is established between the separation zones described in paragraphs (a) and (b) above. is established between the separation zones described in paragraphs (a) and (c) above. is bounded by lines connecting the following geographical positions: (5) 49846'. is bounded by lines connecting the following geographical positions: (1) 49852'.50 N.15 W (6) 49846'. 006839'. (b) (c) (d) (e) Inshore traffic zone The area between the northern boundary of the traffic separation scheme and the Scilly Isles and lying between a line drawn in a direction of 1968 from the Bishop Rock Lighthouse and a line drawn in a direction of 1808 from the eastern extremity of St. 006848'. 006816'. 006831'. one mile wide. 006839'. (Reference chart: British Admiralty 2565.50 W A separation zone.80 N. two miles wide.50 N.57 N. (chartlet is on page 2-2/3-2/4-2) II/2-1/3-1 .33 N.33 N.50 N. 006847'. 006847'.18 N.43 N.53 W (10) 50803'. 006852'. 006842'.W (12) 49852'.

OFF LAND'S END. 005855'.52 W (8) 50800'.50 W (11) 50808'.70 W (3) 50808'. is designated as an inshore traffic zone. is bounded by lines connecting the following geographical positions: (1) 49857'. (b) (c) (d) (e) Inshore traffic zones The area between the eastern boundary of the traffic separation scheme and Land's End. is bounded by lines connecting the following geographical positions: (9) 49854'.52 W (7) 50808'.00 N. 006803'. 006805'.18 N.00 N. 005858'. one mile wide.00 N. 006803'.48 N.00 N. 006805'. Note: This chart is based on Ordnance Survey of Great Britain (1936) Datum. The area between the western boundary of the traffic separation scheme and the Scilly Isles. is bounded by lines connecting the following geographical positions: (5) 50800'.95 N. two miles wide. 005851'. is established between the separation zones described in paragraphs (a) and (c) above. three miles wide.82 W (2) 50808'. and which lies between a line drawn from position (5) above in a direction of 0788 to the coast and a line drawn from position (6) above in a direction of 0908 to the coast. (Reference chart: British Admiralty 2565. 005849'.05 W A separation zone.00 N. is established between the separation zones described in paragraphs (a) and (b) above.25 N. 005855'. one mile wide.00 W (10) 50808'. II/4-1 .00 W A traffic lane for northbound traffic.82 W A separation zone.00 N.50 W (12) 49853'. 005851'. 005858'. BETWEEN SEVEN STONES AND LONGSHIPS Note: See ``Recommendations on navigation through the English Channel and the Dover Strait'' in part F. A traffic lane for southbound traffic.05 W (6) 50808'. and which lies between a line drawn from position (12) above in a direction of 2708 to the islands and a line drawn from position (11) above in a direction of 2258 to Round Island Lighthouse.50 N. 1982 edition. is designated as an inshore traffic zone.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) A separation zone.98 N. three miles wide. 005849'.70 W (4) 49856'.

. Round I. . (4) . (1) . (12) (9) . (10) (3) . St Mary’s . (7) . (1) (8) 50˚ 5 Wolf Rock (see Recommendations on navigation around the United Kingdom coast in part E) Lizard Point . (1) . (9) . (11) . . (8) . . Bishop Rock 5 Inshore traffic zone (8) (5) 50' (6) . . (2) . BETWEEN SEVEN STONES AND LONGSHIPS .20' (11) (10) (3) . (5) . 5 Inshore traffic zone Inshore traffic zone . . (5) . Seven Stones 5 (7) (6) . (2) . Land’s End . (2) . . (4) . . Penzance Inshore traffic zone 5 (11) . (10) . (12) 40' II/2-2/3-2/4-2 97109 50' 40' 30' 20' 10' 6˚ 50' 40' 30' 20' 10' WEST AND SOUTH OF THE SCILLY ISLES + OFF LAND'S END. (3) . . (7) (6) 10' . (9) ISLES OF SCILLY (12) (4) .

005807'. This lane may also be used by other ships but only if they are fitted with an electronic position-fixing appliance. is established to the landward side of the separation zone described in paragraph (a) above. is established between the separation zones described in paragraphs (a) and (b) above. three miles wide. 005826'. A traffic lane for north-eastbound ships.00 W A separation zone. 005814'.10 W. Annex I. the tankers in ballast and ships referred to in subparagraphs 1 (a) and (b) above shall.70 N. so far as practicable.40 N.20 N. Annex II.65 N. with the exception of gasolines. six miles wide. is centred upon the following geographical positions: (4) 48835'. f F id 25 h F b 2000 S W i Shi ' R i (f h) 1 2 3 Inshore traffic zone The area between the following limits is designated (1) North-eastern limit: A line joining the eastern corner of the scheme and the Men Korn buoy (2) South-western limit: A line joining the southern corner of the scheme and La Jument lighthouse as an inshore traffic zone: (48834'. or (b) ships carrying in bulk liquid substances classed in categories A and B mentioned in appendices I and II. 005836'. Such ships not so fitted shall avoid the traffic separation scheme by as wide a margin as possible in accordance with rule 10(h) of the International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea. 005831'. 1973. to the International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships.40 W) (48826'.30 N. 005842'. 003848'. The traffic lane for south-westbound ships described in paragraph (d) above may be used by all ships. A traffic lane for south-westbound ships. II/5-1 . 005825'.00 N. Note: This chart is based on European Datum. a recommended direction of traffic flow (0518 true) extends from position 48853'. 005808'. section I. 005817'.70 N. Note: Special provisions 1 The traffic lane for north-eastbound ships described in paragraph (c) above shall not be used by: (a) tankers carrying oils mentioned in appendix I. 005801'. as modified by the Protocol of 1978 relating thereto (MARPOL 73/78).50 W (3) 48839'. (b) (c) (d) (e) For ships using the traffic lane described in paragraph (e) above and proceeding either to the eastbound lane of the traffic separation scheme ``Off Casquets'' or to Lyme Bay.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) A separation zone. five miles wide.00 W (2) 48835'.40 W) (48828'.00 N. However.30 W) (48825'. jet fuels and naphtha. 1973. keep within the outer half of the lane. is centred upon the following geographical positions: (1) 48829'. Such ships may use the traffic lane described in paragraph (e) above but only if fitted with an electronic position-fixing appliance appropriate to the area. is established to the seaward side of the separation zone described in paragraph (b) above.50 W (6) 48849'. eight miles wide. 1986 edition.20 N. six miles wide. as modified by the Protocol of 1978 relating thereto (MARPOL 73/78).40 N.10 W to position 49847'. (Reference chart: French 6680 (INT 1708).10 W) Note: Navigation within the inshore zone is regulated by national rules.75 N. 005822'.10 W A traffic lane for north-eastbound ships.OFF USHANT Note: See mandatory ship reporting system ``Off Ushant'' in part G. to the International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships.40 W (5) 48843'. mentioned in this Convention.40 N. 1972.

Brest 50´ 40´ 30´ 20´ 10´ 25´ 20´ La Jument 6˚ 50´ 40´ 30´ 20´ 10´ OFF USHANT II/5-2 97233 5˚ 4˚ 50´ .Longships Seven Stones Wolf Rock Lizard Pt. 5´ 50˚ 55´ 50´ 45´ 40´ 35´ 30´ Re c om m en d ed e dir cti on of tra ffic f low 25´ 20´ 15´ 10´ 5´ 49˚ 55´ 50´ (6) (5) (3) (4) (2) Île de Batz 45´ 40´ 35´ Le Four (1) Inshore traffic zone 30´ Ushant I.

24 W A traffic lane for westbound ships. 002821'.70 N. is centred upon the following geographical positions: (5) 49846'. 002824'. is centred upon the following geographical positions: (3) 50802'. 002827'.81 W A separation zone.01 W (4) 50807'. Martin's Point light to the southern extremity of Sark.55 N. The Race of Alderney is not recommended for use by ships other than those proceeding to or from ports in the Channel Islands. five miles wide. from St. from the eastern extremity of Sark to Quenard Point and from Quenard Point to the south-east corner of the scheme. navigation and visibility conditions in this area. is designated as an inshore traffic zone. (Reference charts: British Admiralty 2669.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) A separation zone.65 N.80 N. 1989 edition. French 6966.OFF CASQUETS Note: See ``Recommendations on navigation through the English Channel and the Dover Strait'' in part F. ports located on the French coast between Cherbourg and Ushant or inshore routes at Ushant. 002853'.41 W (6) 49851'. 002850'. Notes: 1 It is important that ships passing in this area listen to the appropriate VHF broadcasts by the Channel Navigation Information Service which provide information concerning traffic. five miles wide. five miles wide.80 N. A traffic lane for eastbound ships. Inshore traffic zone The area between the southern boundary of the traffic separation scheme and the Channel Islands. two miles wide.55 N. one mile wide.66 W (2) 49859'. Note: These charts are based on European Datum. bounded by lines drawn from the south-west corner of the scheme to Les Hanois Lighthouse. is established between the separation zones described in paragraphs (a) and (c) above.41 W A separation zone. is established between the separation zones described in paragraphs (a) and (b) above. 002857'. 2 II/6-1 . 1984 edition. is centred upon the following geographical positions: (1) 49854'.

(4) (3) . (6) .Poole Bournemouth s Needleel Chann ote 1) (see N Bill of Portland Lyme Bay St Alban’s Head Isle of Wight 30' Start Pt (see Note 2 ) . (2) (1) . (5) Recommended direction of traffic flow from separation scheme “Off Ushant” Quenard de Al Point of ce 5 Casquets 5 Ra Alderney Inshore traffic zone Guernsey St. . . Martin’s Point Les Hanois5 4˚ 30' rn ey Notes 1: Recommendations on navigation around the United Kingdom coast are in part E 2: Details of the areas to be avoided “In the English Channel and its Approaches” and “Recommended directions of traffic flow in the English Channel” are given in section I of part D and in part E respectively 50˚ Cherbourg 30' 5 5 Sark 97115 ^ 3˚ 30' 2˚ 30' 1˚ 30' II/6-2 OFF CASQUETS .

a separation zone bounded by the following geographical positions: (43) 51804'.30 E (38) 50826'. 000832'.00 E (26) 50852'.33 N.30 E (54) 51812'.50 N.73 E 50814'.60 N.00 001817'.87 N.00 N.65 N.20 N.30 N.40 E (11) 51806'.33 N.20 E (d) (e) (f) A separation line connects the following geographical positions: (10) 51816'. 51814'.IN THE STRAIT OF DOVER AND ADJACENT WATERS Note: See ``Recommendations on navigation through the English Channel and the Dover Strait'' in part F and mandatory ship reporting system ``The Dover Strait/Pas de Calais'' in part G. 50851'.60 E 001858'. 001802'.00 N. 1982 edition. 001822'.00 N. is centred upon the following geographical positions: (12) 51806'. 000801'.80 E (8) 51816'.40 N. (d). Note: These charts are based on Ordnance Survey of Great Britain (1936) Datum.60 E (20) 50842'.25 N. 001822'.00 E 001802'.08 N. (i) A separation (49) (50) (51) (52) zone is bounded 51818'. 001824'.30 E (19) 50832'.80 N.72 N. 001851'. (e) and (f) above and the following separation line/zone: a separation (22) (23) (24) a separation (27) (28) (29) line connecting the following geographical positions: 51830'. 001800'.83 N. (e) and (f) above and the following separation zones/lines: a separation (33) (34) (35) zone bounded by lines connecting the following geographical positions: 50816'. 002800'. 000832'. one mile wide. 002807'.60 E A separation (14) (15) (16) (17) zone is bounded 50857'.00 W (21) 50856'.10 N.20 N. by the lines connecting the following geographical positions: 002804'.50 N.20 N. 002803'. 001827'. an uncharted line representing the junction of the scheme with the adjacent scheme ``At West Hinder'' and joining the following geographical positions: (47) 51811'.00 E (46) 51809'. 001845'. 001838'.20 N.10 E (18) 50822'.00 E (42) 51804'.45 N. 001850'.20 E (48) 51822'.14 E 002801'. 001846'. (c).20 E (13) 50857'.10 E 001831'.40 N.51 E 001847'. 50826'. is centred upon the following geographical positions: (1) 51828'.20 E (37) 50839'.00 N. 1610.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) (b) (c) A separation zone.10 N.00 E 001830'.40 N.40 N. 001800'. 001822'. 001852'. (b). 2451.40 E 001859'. 000857'. 51809'.83 N.30 N.72 E 002804'.83 000836'.60 N. 001823'.75 E zone bounded by lines connecting the following geographical positions: 50852'.50 E 001838'.50 E (41) 50853'.33 N. 51816'.21 E II/7-1 . A separation (5) (6) (7) zone is bounded 51823'.20 E by lines connecting the following geographical positions: 001858'. 1982 edition.90 N. 51822'. 001818'.70 E (9) 51822'. A separation zone.45 N.55 E (30) 50832'.13 E E E E (g) A traffic lane for south-westbound traffic is established between the separation zones/lines described in paragraphs (a). 002804'.60 N. (40) 50844'. 001852'.30 N.05 N.67 N. 51823'.30 E 50826'.10 N. (44) 51806'.73 N.32 N.67 N. 51822'. 001844'.55 N. 001854'.43 N.50 N. one mile wide.00 E (25) 51806'.10 E (55) 51815'. 000804'. 1982 edition.10 N.02 N.00 E (45) 51811'. 50833'. 51813'. 1989 edition.90 N.50 E (4) 51823'.23 E a separation line connecting the following geographical positions: (39) 50839'.40 W 50839'.10 E (2) 51825'.00 N. 002803'. section I. 001849'.95 E (h) A traffic lane for north-eastbound traffic is established between the separation zones/lines described in paragraphs (a). by lines connecting the following geographical positions: 001823'.68 N. 000804'.25 N.80 E 001846'.60 E (31) 50838'.60 N. 001857'.40 E A separation zone is established within this lane as described in (i) below. (c).50 E A separation line connects the following geographical positions: (3) 51825'. (d). 001859'.87 N. 001802'. 002812'.20 W (32) 50852'.80 E (53) 51809'.32 N. (Reference charts: British Admiralty 2450. (b).40 000801'.81 N.80 E 50834'. 000803'.40 E (36) 50839'. 000803'.00 E 002804'.20 E 002803'. 2675.

(j) A deep-water route forming part of the north-eastbound traffic lane between the separation zone described in paragraph (i) above and the separation zone/line described in paragraphs (c) and (d) above has been established between the latitude of 51809'.. . 001830'. (44) (46) . (26) (32) . (19) (38) (36) Inshore traffic zone (17) . 002800'.30 N.(ii) . . (13) (21) Dunkerque Calais . (40) .. . . .80 E Note: An area to be avoided around the F3 station [position (i) of this deep-water route] is described in part D.40 N.62 E (iii) 51818'. (48) 20' . 5 Cap Gris Nez . (18) (33) . . 002805'. (31) (16) . .80 E (position (41) above) and parallel of latitude 50830' N is designated as an inshore traffic zone. (54) (51) . (i) South Foreland Dover Folkestone (25) (7) (49) .60 N. (39) r affi e tr c zo ne Boulogne 40' (28) . 000804'.60 N. (41) 51˚ Fairlight Beachy Head ho Ins (29) (30) (15) . . (42) See description of the (43) traffic separation scheme “At West Hinder” (14) (27) . See description of the traffic separation scheme “At North Hinder” . (45) (47) (53) . section I. (35) 20' .. .80 E (ii) 51822'.82 N. . . (34) 97107 0˚ 20' 40' 1˚ 20' 40' 2˚ 20' IN THE STRAIT OF DOVER AND ADJACENT WATERS II/7-2 . (1) . . (20) (37) .. .20 W (position (29) above) to the coast is designated as an inshore traffic zone..(6) (2) (3) (5)(4) . ...70 N and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (i) 51823'. . . (9) Ramsgate . (8) (10) (50) (iii) (24) . (11) (12) (52) . The area between the outer boundary of the traffic separation scheme and the French coast which lies between a line connecting Cap Gris Nez Lighthouse to position 50853'. 002804'. Inshore traffic zones The area between the outer boundary of the traffic separation scheme and the English coast which lies between a line drawn in a direction of 1808 from South Foreland Lighthouse and a line drawn in a direction of 3328 from position 50834'. . (22) (23) . (55) .

(1) . . 2 3 Note: It is important that ships passing through the Dover Strait listen to the appropriate VHF broadcasts by the Channel Navigation Information Service which provide information concerning traffic. . (5) . (20) (37) . (11)(12) (44) . .. (15) 51˚ Calais re ho . I (32) . (13) . (6) (7) (2)(3) . Area to be avoided ‘‘Around the F3 station’’ (see part D. (42)(43) Dunkerque ffic tra n zo e (14) .WARNINGS: 1 A deep-water route forming part of the north-eastbound traffic lane is established to the north-west of the Sandettie Bank. ships are recommended to avoid overtaking. section I ) . (i) (9) . (see part D. The main traffic lane for north-eastbound traffic lies to the south-east of the Sandettie Bank and shall be followed by all such ships as can safely navigate therein having regard to their draught. (22) See description of the traffic separation scheme “At North Hinder” . . (52) (46) [19] . (53) (50) .(39) . (36) (40) Boulogne 40' Mont St. section I) 20' DW (iii) . navigation and visibility conditions in the Strait. Frieux . (51) (45)(47) See description of traffic separation scheme “At West Hinder” . (55) . (54) . (49) . . (4) . (23) . (26) ns (27) . . 5 Cap Gris Nez . . . . In the area of the deep-water route east of the separation line. (19) Inshore traffic zone 97108 1˚ 20' 40' 2˚ IN THE STRAIT OF DOVER AND ADJACENT WATERS II/7-3 . (ii) (48) [12] Ramsgate (10) . (8) Area to be avoided “In the Dover Strait” (24) . . . (21) (41) . and masters considering the use of this route should take into account the proximity of traffic using the south-westbound lane. South Foreland Dover Folkestone (25) .

50 N.20 N.00 E 002840'.50 N.09 E (5) 51820'. 002816'. N.60 E (ii) a separation zone bounded by lines connecting the following geographical positions: (17) 51820'.00 N.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) (b) A separation line connects the following geographical positions: (1) 51822'.00 E (14) 51821'.70 E A separation zone is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (4) 51819'. 002803'. 002835'.80 N. 002830'. 002840'.00 N.40 E (21) 51813'. 002837'.40 N.60 E (20) 51811'.00 N. The small differences in values of these common points are due to the difference of the geodetic datum of the reference charts on which these two schemes are based.00 N.00 E (11) 51821'.00 E (3) 51819'.00 E (iv) 51824'. Note: This chart is based on European datum.20 N.70 E (6) 51819'.00 E (12) 51822'.90 N.50 E (8) 51823'. (2) 51822'.50 N. 002830'.50 N. 002817'. 002843'.00 N.50 N.00 E (10) 51822'. 002840'.00 E 002843'.00 E 002846'.10 N. N. 002810'.55 N.00 N. 002840'.70 E (9) 51823'. 002840'. 1991 edition.00 E (ii) 51826'.20 E recommended direction of traffic flow is established connecting the following N.29 N. 002811'.20 N.40 E (iii) 51826'.88 N. (19) and (20) form part of both the scheme ``At West Hinder'' and the scheme ``In the Strait of Dover and adjacent waters''.50 N.AT WEST HINDER (Reference chart: British Admiralty 1872.30 N. 002846'. 002810'.00 E (15) 51821'.20 N. 002840'.17 E (18) 51812'. 002812'.50 (23) 51823'.88 N.00 E 2 (chartlet overleaf) II/8-1 .00 E Notes: 1 Positions (12).10 N. 002833'.40 E 002840'.25 N. (26) 51821'. 002804'.50 (24) 51822'.37 E A traffic lane for eastbound traffic is established between the separation line/zone described in paragraphs (a) and (b) and above and: (i) a line connecting the following geographical positions: (13) 51821'.00 E 002816'.90 N.99 E A traffic lane for westbound traffic is established between the separation line/zone described in paragraphs (a) and (b) above and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (7) 51823'. An anchorage is established north of the scheme and is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (i) 51824'.30 E (19) 51809'. 002824'. 002826'.30 The pilot station Wandelaar is positioned in the following geographical position: (28) 51822'. 002830'.00 E (c) (d) A precautionary area with geographical positions: (22) 51823'.68 N. (27) 51823'. 002824'. 002810'. 002840'.40 E (25) 51820'. 002837'.00 E (16) 51820'.

. 10' . (23) (24) (15) (4) . ! (28) . (3) 15' (21) . . (iii) (7)(22)(27) (iv). See description of the traffic separation scheme “In the Strait of Dover and adjacent waters” (5) (11) . .[48] (10) . [47] (20) (18) . . . (2) . . (16) (17) (14) (13) (26) . (8) . . (25) 20' . . . (6) . (1) . . (19) [46] 5' Dunkerque 51˚ Calais 97106 50' 55' 2˚ 5' 10' 15' 20' 25' 30' 35' 40' 45' AT WEST HINDER II/8-2 .30' (ii) (i) . 25' (9) (12) . .

22 N. 1990 edition.67 N. 53820'. 003838'. 004846'.37 E (25) 54800'.00 E (36) 54805'.74 E (24) 53845'. 003847'.OFF FRIESLAND (Reference charts: British Admiralty 1405. 1037 (INT 1045). 004836'. 004823'. 005800'.25 E Geographical positions (11) to (14) form the deep-water route ``From traffic separation scheme `Off Brown Ridge' to traffic separation scheme `West Friesland''' (see ``Deep-water routes forming parts of routeing system `Off Friesland''' in part C. 004820'. 1978 edition. 004836'.14 N. 1988 edition. by a line connecting the following geographical positions: 003842'. INT 1420. 003818'. 003839'. 1014 (INT 1043). by a line connecting the following geographical positions: 005800'. 004815'.32 E (25) 54800'.00 N. 1989 edition.85 E (9) 52854'. 1505 and 2182A. 53831'.57 N. 004810'.87 E (8) 52855'.34 E (31) 54801'.34 E A traffic lane for northbound traffic is established between the separation zone in paragraph (b) above and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (6) 52854'.96 E (h) Friesland Junction precautionary area (i) East Friesland scheme (j) A separation (32) (33) (34) zone is bounded 54802'.33 E 005820'.12 E (19) 53846'. Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) Geographical positions (1) to (6) form the deep-water route ``From North Hinder to traffic separation scheme `Off Brown Ridge''' (see ``Deep-water routes forming parts of routeing system `Off Friesland''' in part C. 003826'.00 E 003831'. 1408.60 N.00 E (35) 54808'.21 N. 004859'. German Hydrographic Office 50 (INT 1045).02 E (29) 54805'.39 N.00 E (11) 53802'. 1035 (INT 1046). 004810'. 003814'.97 N.12 N.20 N.81 N.00 E (30) 54802'.00 N. 003822'. 004859'. 006803'.47 E (20) 53856'. The area is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (26) 53857'. 003828'.00 E 003836'.11 N.00 E 003844'. 54804'.02 E (13) 53822'.99 N.72 E (22) 53857'.34 E (38) 54806'. Netherlands Hydrographic Office INT 1419. section II).11 N.10 N.17 E (g) A traffic lane for north-eastbound traffic is established between the separation zone in paragraph (f) above and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (14) 53819'.91 N.75 N.00 E II/9-1 .40 E (27) 53843'. 1986 edition.32 E (23) 53830'.38 E (10) 53802'.14 N.84 N. 003821'. 1988 edition.73 N. (c) (d) (e) West Friesland scheme (f) A separation (15) (16) (17) (18) zone is bounded 53842'.14 N. 003818'.20 N. 1406.48 E A traffic lane for southbound traffic is established between the separation zone in paragraph (b) above and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (12) 53803'.90 N.71 E (1) 52855'.12 N. 003823'. 54808'.69 N.59 N. 1988 edition. section II). 004820'.89 N. Off Brown Ridge scheme (b) A separation zone is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (7) 53803'.00 E A traffic lane for south-westbound traffic is established between the separation zone in paragraph (f) above and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (26) 53857'.69 N. 003817'.78 N. 004808'. 1984 edition. 1990 edition. 005819'.92 E (28) 54801'.85 E (21) 53859'. Note: These charts are based on European Datum.66 E (k) A traffic lane for eastbound traffic is established between the separation zone in paragraph (j) above and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (28) 54801'. 53822'.90 E (37) 54804'.) The following traffic separation schemes form part of the routeing system ``Off Friesland''.00 N.66 E 006801'.17 N.81 E A precautionary area is established directly to the north of the ``West Friesland'' traffic separation scheme. 006801'.62 N.00 N. 1978 edition. 1988 edition. 53.94 N. 005800'.20 N. 004846'.

003803'.00 E (41) 53855'.32 E (40) 54807'. (4). (p) (q) II/9-2 . 003844'.and east-bound traffic is established between the separation zone in paragraph (n) above and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (54) 53834'.40 E (51) 53858'.32 E Note: The positions (38).50 N. 003843'. 002856'. 53841'. (58).40 N.71 E (o) A traffic lane for west-/south-west.32 E (53) 53836'.81 N.85 E 003827'. (m) Geographical positions (26).91 E (49) 53856'.(l) A traffic lane for westbound traffic is established between the separation zone in paragraph (j) above and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (39) 54810'.12 E (50) 53858'. 002858'. by a line connecting the following geographical positions: 003844'. (60). 003801'. 003818'. section II).59 N. 005819'.88 E Geographical positions (53). (35) and (39) coincide with the positions (15).66 E 003808'.02 E (55) 53840'.18 E (47) 53836'. (8) and (14) of the ``German Bight western approach'' traffic separation scheme.10 N. (61) and (54) form the deep-water route ``From North Hinder to Indefatigable Bank via DR1 lightbuoy'' (see ``Deep-water routes forming parts of routeing system `Off Friesland''' in part C. 53835'.18 E 003803'.49 E (56) 53853'.30 N.47 E (48) 53843'.28 N. (11).01 E (52) 53844'.17 N.50 E A traffic lane for north-/north-east.20 E (29) 54805'.24 N.57 N.and south-bound traffic is established between the separation zone in paragraph (n) above and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (42) 54800'.46 N. (34). (3). Off Botney Ground scheme (n) A separation (43) (44) (45) (46) zone is bounded 53857'. 003843'. (42) and (31) form the deep-water route ``From traffic separation scheme `Off Botney Ground' to precautionary area `Friesland Junction' ''(see ``Deep-water routes forming parts of routeing system `Off Friesland''' in part C.13 N. 003805'.90 N.61 N. 003811'. 003828'. (57).19 N. (59).71 N. 004859'.76 N.66 N. section II). (41).71 N. 53855'. 006800'. 003817'.

(6) Off Brown Ridge Den Helder 3˚ 4˚ 5˚ 6˚ 97105 OFF FRIESLAND . (41) . (8)(9) . . .East Friesland Friesland Junction precautionary area (42) (51) . (16) . . (27) . (17) (14) DW (12) . (19) (24) . (37) . (29) (36) . (38) [15] 54˚ (28) Off Botney Ground (52) . (56) . (15) West Friesland (55) (53) .(18) . (21) (25) . (44) . . (7)(10) . DW (26) (22) . . . . . . . (43) . . . . DW (11) 53˚ (1) . (20) . (32) . (49) (31) (40) [14] (39) (35) . (48) . (34) . . . (47) . (50) . . . (23) (13) . (30) . . (46) (54) . . . (45) . (33) . .

(See also Caution 1 and section I of part D).72 E (4) 52808'. 1988 edition. 1983 edition. 003835'. 003855'.03 E (10) 52801'.95 N.03 N. 1448 (INT 1473).18 E A traffic lane for westbound traffic is established between the separation zone in paragraph (a) above and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (17) 52804'. 1985 edition.13 E A traffic lane for eastbound traffic is established between the separation zone in paragraph (b) above and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (19) 51858'.62 E (position (19) above) to (21) [51858'. 004800'.95 E (b) (c) (d) Inshore traffic zone The area between the landward boundary of the traffic separation scheme and the coast which lies between a line drawn from position 51858'. 003854'.18 N. A circular area to be avoided with a 0.10 E (15) 51858'. 1349 (INT 1416).48 E thence to geographical positions (19).95 N. 003834'.57 N. 003845'. 003835'.33 E] is designated as an inshore traffic zone.60 N. 1540 (INT 1475).32 E A traffic lane for northbound traffic is established between the separation zone in paragraph (a) above and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (5) 52804'.95 E (12) 52802'. 003846'. 004800'.7657 N.23 E (18) 52804'.87 E (6) 52807'.15 E (2) 52805'.40 E (14) 52800'.95 E (position (20) above) to (22) [51843'. 1986 edition. 003851'.25 N.37 N. The focal point of the precautionary area is located at the following geographical position: (25) 52801'.93 N. 003835'. 003834'. 003845'.37 N.38 N.15 E (b) (c) Maas West inner traffic separation scheme (a) A separation zone to the north of the Eurochannel is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (9) 52802'. 1988 edition. 003856'. Maas Centre precautionary area (a) A precautionary area is established off the entrance to the Rotterdam Waterway.92 N.38 N.28 N.IN THE APPROACHES TO HOOK OF HOLLAND AND AT NORTH HINDER (Reference charts: British Admiralty 122. 003845'. 003835'.52 N.48 N.37 N. 1350 (INT 1415). The area is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (23) North Mole Head Light (24) South Mole Head Light thence along the South Mole to the geographical position: (21) 51858'.97 N.) Maas North traffic separation scheme (a) A separation zone is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (1) 52807'.5713 E This position coincides with the crossing point of the Eurochannel axis and the leading lights line 1128. 003858'. 003842'. (5) and (23). 1986 edition. Netherlands 1035 (INT 1046).67 N. 1449 (INT 1472).20 E (16) 51859'.88 E (3) 52805'. 004800'. Note: These charts are based on European Datum.63 E A separation zone to the south of the Eurochannel is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (13) 52800'. (7).6 mile radius is established around position (25). 003835'.03 E A traffic lane for southbound traffic is established between the separation zone in paragraph (a) above and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (7) 52805'. 003846'. (b) II/10-1 .00 E (8) 52808'.65 E (11) 52800'.75 N.25 N. 003852'. 003846'.85 N.47 N. 1406 and 3371. 003853'. 003855'. 003846'.80 N.48 E] and a line drawn from position 51856'.77 N.62 E (20) 51856'. (17).

92 E A traffic lane for south-westbound traffic is established between the separation zone in paragraph (a) above and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (51) 52813'. 002828'. 002828'. 003810'.07 E A traffic lane for westbound traffic is established between the separation zone in paragraph (a) above and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (34) 52804'.13 N.40 E (54) 52807'.00 E (43) 51836'.88 N. 003817'.95 E A separation zone is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (38) 51828'. 002835'. 003818'.18 E This position coincides with the new location of the North Hinder Lightvessel. 003816'.35 E (39) 51827'. 003817'.23 E (36) 51851'. 003811'. 003802'. 002856'. 002840'.03 N. 003809'.47 N. 002859'. 003808'.03 N. 003806'.53 N.15 N. 002859'.73 E (49) 52811'.03 E (29) 52801'.93 E (50) 52809'.40 N.52 N.60 E A traffic lane for eastbound traffic is established between the separation zone in paragraph (b) above and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (36) 51851'. 003810'.58 N.41 N.69 E (41) 51848'.77 N.43 E (52) 52811'. (See also Caution 5 and section I of part D.58 E (32) 51858'.58 N.Maas West outer traffic separation scheme (a) A separation zone to the north of the (extended) Eurochannel is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (26) 51858'. 003811'. section II)) (27) 51859'.78 N.62 E (28) 52801'. 003818'.45 N.60 E A precautionary area is established off North Hinder.85 N.07 N.33 N.18 E (33) 51857'.45 E (46) 51851'. 002834'.42 N.42 N.42 E (35) 52804'.82 N.57 N. 002851'. 003808'.67 N.78 E (35) 52804'.23 E A traffic lane for north-eastbound traffic is established between the separation zone in paragraph (a) above and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (53) 52805'.12 E (48) 52809'. 003809'.33 E A traffic lane for south-westbound traffic is established between the separation zone in paragraph (a) above and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (45) 51830'.12 N.57 E (46) 51851'.93 N. 002827'.57 N.52 N.78 E A separation zone is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (47) 52807'.67 N. 002807'.47 N. 002856'.40 N.92 E (position (iv) of the deep-water route leading to Europoort (see part C. The area is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (44) 51845'.45 E (40) 51847'. 003809'. 003817'.27 E A separation zone to the south of the (extended) Eurochannel is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (30) 51855'.25 N. 002806'.85 N.) (b) (c) (d) North Hinder south traffic separation scheme (a) (b) (c) North Hinder north traffic separation scheme (a) (b) (c) North Hinder Junction precautionary area (a) (b) II/10-2 .30 N.49 N.00 E (52) 52811'. 003805'. A circular area to be avoided with a diameter of one mile is established around position (55). 003803'. 002812'.75 E (31) 51856'.37 E (44) 51845'. 001859'.50 N.12 E A traffic lane for north-eastbound traffic is established between the separation zone in paragraph (a) above and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (42) 51822'.60 E The focal point of the precautionary area is located at the following geographical position: (55) 52800'. 002840'.45 E (37) 51853'.

if practicable. are of specific relevance in the crossing situation. sections II and III. near the area to be avoided) Ships should proceed with caution in the area where the traffic lanes merge. if practicable. not enter a circular area of about one mile diameter. however. e. (In the ``North Hinder Junction'' precautionary area. 2 3 4 5 II/10-3 . (Off the end of the westgoing traffic lane of the ``Maas West inner'' traffic separation scheme) Mariners are warned that in this area traffic streams. from the routes Texel to River Scheldt and Maas West to River Scheldt.Note: 1 CAUTIONS: (In the ``Maas Centre'' precautionary area. Any ship which is not compelled to adhere to the deep-water route should. (Near the deep-water route in the ``North Hinder Junction'' precautionary area and near the ``Deepwater route leading to Europoort'' between the ``Maas West outer'' and ``Maas West inner'' schemes (see section I of part D)) For ships which have to cross the deep-water route. Mariners are. the density of traffic. the pilotage or the weather conditions warrant otherwise. are merging or crossing. All ships should keep the circular area on their port side unless the available water depth. not enter a circular area of one mile diameter around the North Hinder Lightvessel.g. centred around a position half a mile north of the Maas centre buoy. reminded that when risk of collision is deemed to exist the 1972 Collision Regulations fully apply and in particular the rules of part B. the pilotage (helicopter operations) or the weather conditions warrant otherwise. (Off the seaward entrances to the ``Maas West inner'' and ``Maas North'' traffic separation schemes) The precautionary area in the approaches to Hook of Holland should be avoided by passing traffic which is not entering or leaving the adjacent ports. attention is drawn to rule 18(d)(i) of the 1972 Collision Regulations. All ships should keep the circular area on their port side unless the density of traffic. Ships should. near the area to be avoided) Ships should proceed with caution in the area where the traffic lanes merge.

. . (37) . (vii) . . (xi) (xii) (xiii) . See description of traffic separation scheme “At West Hinder” (19) 20' 30' 40' 50' 45' 50' 55' 4˚ 5' 50' 4˚ II/10-4 IN THE APPROACHES TO HOOK OF HOLLAND AND AT NORTH HINDER . Maas West See Caution 3 Maas West outer inner . (34) (18) See Caution 2 . (3) (1) . . (i) See Caution 1 . . (24) . . (13) (14) (10) . north (49) . . (27) See Cautio n North Hinder Junction precautionary area (46) . (39) See description of traffic separation scheme “In the Strait of Dover and adjacent waters” . (41) . (43) . (7) 45' North Hinder south . . (53) . . (33) . (viii) . 52˚ (31) See Caution 4 . (22) ! . (9) . . (vi) . . (55) . . . 4 (11) . . . . (ii) . (21) Europoort 97103 (45) . (35) (29) . .See description of deep-water routes forming parts of routeing system “Off Friesland” DW DW (51) North Hinder . . . . . . (48) . (6) . (25) . .. (44) (17) Inshore traffic zone . (32) . . (x) (30) (12) . . DW . (v) DW (iv)(26) . ^ . (ix) . . (52) . (28) . . . . . . . (38) . (16) . (5) (4) (2) Maas Centre precautionary area (iii) . . 5' . (40) . (54) (50) (47) See Caution 5 5 15' See Caution 3 See Caution 1 (8) . . . (42) 2˚ 10' (23) 52˚ 30' . Europoort Maas North . (36) Deep-water route leading to Europoort ! . (15) (20) .

.88 E (11) 52848'.22 N.87 N.58 N. 004815'.95 N. carrying noxious liquid substances in bulk as assessed as categories A or B of Annex II to the International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships. 004801'.50 E (7) 52856'.OFF TEXEL Reference charts: British Admiralty 1405. as modified by the Protocol of 1978 relating thereto (MARPOL 73/78). 1973. 1988 edition. 1987 edition. f .000 tons gross tonnage and upwards.000 tons gross tonnage and upwards. 004816'.68 E (5) 52850'.57 E (10) 52858'.000 tons gross tonnage and upwards. (5) . 52850'. carrying noxious liquid substances in bulk as assessed as categories C or D of Annex II to the International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships. 53800'.07 N. 1973. 004802'.87 E (b) A traffic lane for north-eastbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (9) 53803'. (6) . 2322 and 2593.52 E (13) 53808'. (4) 5 R 50' Texel 4˚ 10' 20' 30' 40' OFF TEXEL II/11 F id 25 h F b 2000 S W i . Note: These charts are based on European Datum. (9) [13] TEXEL . 003853'. (1) [11] . as modified by the Protocol of 1978 relating thereto (MARPOL 73/78). 004827'. carrying oils as defined under Annex I to the International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships. 1350 (INT 1415). 1988 edition.00 E 004811'. . and ships of 10. 004820'.00 E 004809'. (12) (7) . (11) Shi ' R 97102 i (f h) 1 .30 N. 1352 (INT 1414). (2) 53˚ (10) 5 .72 N.97 E (6) 52851'.43 E (c) Note: (a) The following classes of ships are obliged to use the ``Mandatory route for tankers from North Hinder to the German Bight and vice versa'' (see part G. ships of 5. 1973. 1408. section II): tankers of 10. 2182A.42 E A traffic lane for south-westbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (12) 52856'.53 N.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) A separation (1) (2) (3) (4) zone is bounded 53805'.47 N. 52848'. Netherlands Hydrographic Office 1035 (INT 1046).65 N. ships of 10. 1986 edition. (13) [29] (b) (c) (d) . (8) [10] See description of separation scheme “Off Vlieland.00 N.80 E 004817'. 004801'. (3) . by a line connecting the following geographical positions: 004823'.75 E (8) 53806'.00 N. 1354.000 tons gross tonnage and upwards. Vlieland North and Vlieland Junction” . carrying liquefied gases in bulk. 004822'.00 N. as modified by the Protocol of 1978 relating thereto (MARPOL 73/78).

00 E (20) 53825'.28 E (21) 53815'.69 E (26) 53822'. Note: These charts are based on European Datum.000 tons gross tonnage and upwards.57 N. zone is bounded 53828'. 004833'. 005811'.00 E (19) 53827'. 004833'.37 N.70 N.00 N.00 N.000 tons gross tonnage and upwards. 53829'. 004849'. 1973. 004823'. 004816'.13 N. 004835'.00 N.35 N. 53809'.97 N. 53817'.00 E (iii) a separation zone bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (26) 53822'.13 N.38 E (15) 53822'.07 E (ii) a line connecting the following geographical positions: (25) 53829'.08 E (b) (c) A traffic lane for northbound and eastbound traffic is established between the separation zones described in paragraphs (a) and (b) above.38 E] to Brandaris Lighthouse (53821'.37 N.93 E (23) 53832'.88 E (14) 53811'.97 E 004826'.97 N.92 N.39 E) is designated as an inshore traffic zone.32 N.16 N.87 E 004838'. the western boundary of the precautionary area Vlieland Junction described below.00 E (24) 53836'. by a line connecting the following geographical positions: 005808'. 005807'. 004820'. 004851'.63 E (29) 53808'.30 E (16) 53828'. 004839'. 004845'. 005804'.27 N. as modified by the Protocol of 1978 relating thereto (MARPOL 73/78). 004844'.21 N. (b) II/12-1 . 53827'.00 N.30 N.70 E 004844'. 1988 edition.93 E) and a line drawn from position (14) [53811'.43 E (d) (e) Inshore traffic zone The area between the landward boundary of the traffic separation scheme and the coast between an uncharted line drawn from position (18) [53829'. and the following line and separation zone: (i) a line connecting the following geographical positions: (13) 53803'. 004827'.00 E (28) 53811'.07 N. 004851'.60 E (4) 53830'. section II): (a) tankers of 10.10 E (11) 53805'.47 N. the southern boundary of the precautionary area Vlieland Junction described below.39 E] to Eierland Lighthouse (53810'.25 E (10) 53806'.02 E (27) 53818'.66 E (5) 53832'.97 N.62 N. 005812'.69 E (30) 53831'. 004835'.99 N.60 E A traffic lane for westbound traffic is established between the separation zone described in paragraph (a) above and a separation zone bounded by lines connecting the following geographical positions: (22) 53837'.49 E A traffic lane for westbound and southbound traffic is established between the separation zone described in paragraph (b) above. 004830'.OFF VLIELAND.07 N.00 N. ships of 5. 1973. 005811'.90 N. 005809'.39 E (18) 53829'. carrying oils as defined under Annex I to the International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships.80 E (17) 53829'. VLIELAND NORTH AND VLIELAND JUNCTION (Reference charts: German Hydrographic Office 84.03 N.07 N.53 N.66 N. carrying noxious liquid substances in bulk as assessed as categories A or B of Annex II to the International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships. 004857'.21 N. 005811'.) A Description of the traffic separation scheme ``Off Vlieland'' (a) A separation (1) (2) (3) A separation (6) (7) (8) (9) zone is bounded 53834'.02 N. 005802'. Netherlands Hydrographic Office 1352 (INT 1414).62 N. 004827'.28 E (12) 53812'. as modified by the Protocol of 1978 relating thereto (MARPOL 73/78). 004830'. and the following lines and separation zone: (i) an uncharted line representing the junction of the scheme with the adjacent scheme ``Vlieland North'' and connecting the following geographical positions: (25) 53829'. 004822'.21 E 004846'.22 N.40 N.39 E (ii) a separation zone bounded by lines connecting the following geographical positions: (14) 53811'. 004835'. 005804'. 53826'.68 E by a line connecting the following geographical positions: 004842'. Note: The following classes of ships are obliged to use the ``Mandatory route for tankers from North Hinder to the German Bight and vice versa'' (see part G.68 E 004832'.87 N. 004830'.

. 004849'.99 N. .07 N. (6) . (3) (15) .53 N.21 N. (28) (9) . (16) . 004849'.02 N. (30) (2) .69 N. 004848'. 004842'. .(c) ships of 10.97 N.49 E B (a) Description of the traffic separation scheme ``Vlieland North'' A separation zone is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (30) 53831'. Vlieland Junction precautionary area (25) . (20) (19) (26) . .000 tons gross tonnage and upwards.92 N. (10) In sh e or tra ne Brandaris 5 zo Lighthouse ic ff Terschelling 20' . 004851'. (12) .000 tons gross tonnage and upwards. 004846'.11 N. 004833'. and ships of 10. 004840'. [26] (18) 30' . carrying noxious liquid substances in bulk as assessed as categories C or D of Annex II to the International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships.07 E (6) 53828'.93 E A traffic lane for southbound traffic is established between the separation zone described in paragraph (a) above and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (25) 53829'.97 N. (5) (17) . (31) (7) . . (27) . (32) . 004836'.16 E (31) 53829'. 1973. as modified by the Protocol of 1978 relating thereto (MARPOL 73/78). . 004845'.92 N.66 E (30) 53831'.25 E (23) 53832'.. (8) . f . [13] (29) . (33) (24) .24 E (b) (c) See description of the traffic separation scheme “Terschelling – German Bight” Vlieland North (34) .96 E (33) 53836'. The area is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (2) 53829'. . . VLIELAND NORTH AND VLIELAND JUNCTION II/12-2 F id 25 h F b 2000 S W i Province of North Holland Shi ' R 97104 See description of the traffic separation scheme “Off Texel” i (f h) 1 . [25] (22) 40' . .12 E A traffic lane for northbound traffic is established between the separation zone described in paragraph (a) above and a line (coinciding with the western boundary of the separation zone described in section A. paragraph (d)) connecting the following geographical positions: (23) 53832'. (11) . (23) (4) . 004837'.07 E (32) 53835'. 004845'.32 N. (1) . carrying liquefied gases in bulk. (13) [9] 53˚ 50' 50' 4˚ 10' 20' 30' 40' 50' 5˚ 10' 20' 30' OFF VLIELAND. (d) Precautionary area ``Vlieland Junction'' A precautionary area is established off Vlieland. (14) (21) Vlieland 5 Eierland Lighthouse Texel 10' .49 E (24) 53836'.69 E (34) 53835'.

57 N. 1353.37 N.77 N. 1988 edition.45 N.33 N.58 N.85 E (2) 54801'.37 E (20) 53832'. (chartlet is on page 13-2/14-3) II/13-1 . 006820'.10 E 007830'.73 N. (b). 006823'.77 E (3) 53858'.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) A separation zone is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (1) 54800'.53 E (6) 53858'. section II): (a) tankers of 10. and (d) ships of 10. 1973.12 N.33 E (8) 53857'.33 E (29) 53855'.61 E (f) (g) Inshore traffic zone The area between the coast and the landward boundary of the traffic separation scheme is designated as an inshore traffic zone.50 N. 007839'.00 N. as modified by the Protocol of 1978 relating thereto (MARPOL 73/78). by a line connecting the following geographical positions: 006823'.55 N. as modified by the Protocol of 1978 relating thereto (MARPOL 73/78). 87 (INT 1413). 007844'.000 tons gross tonnage and upwards.08 E (4) 53857'. (b).89 E (24) 53851'. 007833'.000 tons gross tonnage and upwards. The eastern limit of the inshore traffic zone is bounded by a line connecting geographical positions 53853'. carrying oils as defined under Annex I to the International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships.53 E (7) 53857'. (15) 53847'.48 E (18) 53848'.10 E (e) A separation zone is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (17) 53834'.35 N. 007851'. 005808'. Netherlands Hydrographic Office 1352. 007837'. 005807'. 1973. (c). 007838'.89 N.73 E 006820'. (d) and (e) and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (21) 54802'. Notes: 1 2 f F id 25 h F b 2000 S W i Shi ' R i ( li h) 1 The gaps in the separation zones of this scheme indicate the areas where a concentration of crossing traffic is likely to be met.000 tons gross tonnage and upwards.52 E (13) 53846'. (b) ships of 5. 006821'.78 N. 007833'. 007833'.68 N.26 N. carrying noxious liquid substances in bulk as assessed as categories C or D of Annex II to the International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships.22 N.51 N.70 E A traffic lane for westbound traffic is established between the separation zones/line described in paragraphs (a).30 N.23 E A separation zone is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (5) 53858'.43 E (b) (c) (d) A separation line connects the following geographical positions: (14) 53847'. 007838'.60 E (19) 53846'.87 E (22) 54802'. 005811'.82 N. (d) and (e) and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (28) 53853'. 005809'.78 E (16) 53847'. 53858'. 006820'. carrying noxious liquid substances in bulk as assessed as categories A or B of Annex II to the International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships. The following classes of ships are obliged to use the ``Mandatory route for tankers from North Hinder to the German Bight and vice versa'' (see part G.13 E (25) 53837'. as modified by the Protocol of 1978 relating thereto (MARPOL 73/78).00 E (23) 54801'.51 N.000 tons gross tonnage and upwards.58 N. 007841'. 1991 edition.13 N. 1988 edition. 007846'.29 N.83 E 007835'.27 N. 007839'. 53858'. (c).72 E (12) 53857'. 006822'.90 N. 007840'.51 E (Wangerooge Lighthouse).20 E (26) 53829'.17 N. 006823'.TERSCHELLING±GERMAN BIGHT (Reference charts: German Federal Maritime and Hydrographic Agency 84.28 E (27) 53843'. 007837'.82 E A separation (9) (10) (11) zone is bounded 53848'.42 N.20 E (28) and 53847'.65 N. 007843'.38 N.00 E A traffic lane for eastbound traffic is established between the separation zones/line described in paragraphs (a). 1973. (c) ships of 10. carrying liquefied gases in bulk. 006822'. 007842'. Note: These charts are based on European Datum.75 N. 1987 edition.

carrying noxious liquid substances in bulk as assessed as categories C or D of Annex II to the International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships. 006819'. as modified by the Protocol of 1978 relating thereto (MARPOL 73/78).03 N.00 N. Note: This chart is based on European Datum. 006800'.95 E (d) (e) Notes: 1 This traffic separation scheme forms part of the ``Mandatory route for tankers from North Hinder to the German Bight and vice versa'' (see part G. 006822'.65 E A traffic lane for eastbound traffic is established between the separation zones/line described in paragraphs (a). 007825'.14 E (9) 54810'. (b) ships of 5. 006803'. carrying liquefied gases in bulk. as modified by the Protocol of 1978 relating thereto (MARPOL 73/ 78). should follow the recommended direction of traffic flow in the precautionary area (indicated by dashed open-outlined arrows in the charts) and shall. 006820'. 1991 edition.10 N.28 N.17 E (2) 54811'.11 E (b) (c) A separation zone is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (8) 54808'. United Kingdom or Continental North Sea ports south of 538 N and offshore and shore-based oil loading facilities in the North Sea area. 007824'.53 N. 007826'.53 E A separation line connects the following geographical positions: (5) 54810'. keep to the starboard side of the deep-water routes forming part of the mandatory route.47 E (3) 54810'.27 E (4) 54809'. Application and use of the route 2 The following classes of ships are obliged to use the route: (a) tankers of 10.33 E (10) 54809'. Denmark.53 N.000 tons gross tonnage and upwards. section II).50 N. 006820'. (iii) when sailing between United Kingdom or Continental North Sea ports south of 538 N and Scandinavian or Baltic ports. II/14-1 . The classes of ships referred to above shall use the mandatory route or part of it: (i) when sailing from North Hinder to the Baltic or to North Sea ports of Norway.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) A separation zone is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (1) 54810'. 006822'.31 N. 006801'. 006820'.000 tons gross tonnage and upwards. 1973.000 tons gross tonnage and upwards. Sweden. (b) and (c) and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (15) 54806'.90 N.50 E (7) 54809'. 006822'.46 E (14) 54810'. These ships shall avoid the sea area between the mandatory route and the adjacent Frisian Islands' coast.90 E A traffic lane for westbound traffic is established between the separation zones/line described in paragraphs (a). These ships shall use the appropriate traffic lanes of the traffic separation schemes forming part of the route. 1973.37 N.00 E (17) 54808'. carrying oils as defined under Annex I to the International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships. 007822'. (6) 54810'. Germany or the Netherlands north of latitude 538 N and vice versa. and (iv) when sailing between North Hinder. (ii) when sailing between North Sea ports of the Netherlands and/or Germany. and (d) ships of 10. carrying noxious liquid substances in bulk as assessed as categories A or B of Annex II to the International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships.97 N. 1973. as far as practicable.20 E (13) 54812'.00 N.80 E 006819'. except when joining or leaving the route at the nearest point of the route to the port of departure or destination which permits a safe passage from or to that port.87 N. 006801'.37 N. (c) Ships of 10. 006819'. except in cases of adjacent port areas.29 N. as modified by the Protocol of 1978 relating thereto (MARPOL 73/ 78).08 E (11) 54808'.GERMAN BIGHT WESTERN APPROACH (Reference chart: German Federal Maritime and Hydrographic Agency 87 (INT 1413). (b) and (c) and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (12) 54813'.000 tons gross tonnage and upwards.51 N.98 E (16) 54807'.27 N.

Least water depth 7 The area of this scheme is surveyed to a least water depth of 30 m at LWS once every 5 years. 5 It is recommended that an efficient electronic position-fixing device appropriate for the area should be carried on board. Pilotage 4 Ships required to use the ``mandatory route for tankers from North Hinder to the German Bight and vice versa'' are referred to resolution A. adopted on 19 November 1981. 6 Numerous offshore structures situated within the limits of the separation zones and/or situated in the proximity of the route are equipped with X.and S-band racons. 8 The gap in the separation zone of this scheme indicates the area where a concentration of crossing traffic is likely to be met. (chartlet is on page 13-2/14-3) II/14-2 .Joining or leaving the route 3 The classes of ships referred to above. English Channel and Skagerrak''.486(XII). and (b) should be aware that oil and gas production facilities and mobile offshore drilling units may be encountered in the proximity of the route.27 nautical miles) radius are established around all offshore structures. concerning the ``Recommendation on the use of adequately qualified deep-sea pilots in the North Sea. safety zones of 500 m (0. when joining or leaving the route: (a) shall do so at the nearest point of the route to the port of departure or destination which permits a safe passage from or to that port.

. (10) (4) . (4) (7) . (13) . (8) (11) . (16) (3) . . . . . 5 (1) . See description of (12)(8) (29) separation scheme (28) . “Jade approach” (22) . “Elbe approach” . . . (14) (19) (13) (15) (9) . .. .. Ameland h Ins e or tra ffic n zo e Terschelling 20' Vlieland 10' 5˚ 30' 6˚ TERSCHELLING±GERMAN BIGHT + GERMAN BIGHT WESTERN APPROACH ^ II/13-2/14-3 German Bight western approach [39] (14) 30' 20' Deutsche (12) Bucht See description of separation scheme “Off Friesland” . ffic re tra Insho zone 5 Norderney Wangerooge 50' Spiekeroog 30' 97101 30' 7˚ 30' 8˚ . . (9) (6)(1) . (11) (5). (6) Elbe L. (10) . (20) [5] .(21) (24) Terschelling – German Bight . (3) . Borkum Schiermonnikoog (26) [17] [1] (17) .See description of separation scheme “Off Vlieland” [22] (25) (27) 40' . . (2) . . 5 Helgoland See “Recommended directions of traffic flow in the German Bight” in part E 10' ! (15) [38] See description of separation scheme (23) . (5) . .. . . (7) . (17) . (16) . 54˚ (18) . (2) 5 LV . .

68 N. 007828'. 007833'.89 E A traffic lane for northbound traffic is established between the separation zone described in paragraph (a) and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (5) 54802'. 007826'.31 N. in part E) 05´ 5 Elbe Lightvessel 54˚ TSS ‘‘Elbe approach’’ TSS ‘‘Terschelling – German Bight’’ 55´ 50´ Inshore traffic zone Wangerooge Spiekeroog Langeoog 25´ 30´ 35´ 40´ 45´ 50´ 55´ 05´ 10´ 99038 8˚ JADE APPROACH II/15 .71 E (2) 54802'. 1991 edition.35 N.92 N. 1988 edition. 007834'.38 N.72 E A traffic lane for southbound traffic is established between the separation zone described in paragraph (a) and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (7) 54808'.13 E (6) 54808'. 007838'. 007836'.42 E (4) 54808'. 007832'.34 N.81 E (3) 54801'. 007830'.33 N. Note: These charts are based on European Datum. Netherlands Hydrographic Office 1352 and 1353 (INT 1413).00 E TSS “German Bight western approach” (b) (c) 5 Deutsche Bucht Lightvessel (1) (6) Helgoland Lighthouse 10´ (7) (4) [17] TSS ‘‘Jade approach’’ [22] [23] (2) (5) (8) (3) (see Recommended directions of traffic flow in the German Bight.15 N.JADE APPROACH (Reference charts: German Federal Maritime and Hydrographic Agency 87 (INT 1413).) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) A separation zone is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (1) 54808'.98 E (8) 54801'.

00 N.37 E A traffic lane for eastbound traffic is established between the separation zone/line and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (5) 53858'.47 E (2) 54800'.47 E (8) 54801'.38 N. 87 (INT 1413). 008813'.00 N.15 E A separation line connects the following geographical positions: (3) 54800'. half a mile wide. (6) 54˚ 59' (5) .00 N. 008813'.63 N. Note: These charts are based on European Datum. 2' . 49 (INT 1452).15 E (4) 53859'. (4) . 008805'.57 E 4' (d) 3' (7) .47 E (6) 53859'. 008813'.95 N. 1989 edition. 008807'.00 N. (8) 1 ' 5 (1) .ELBE APPROACH (Reference charts: German Hydrographic Office 44.28 E A traffic lane for westbound traffic is established between the separation zone/line and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (7) 54801'. is centred upon the following geographical positions: (1) 54800'. 008807'. 008805'. 1989 edition. 008805'. . (2) (3) .) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) (b) (c) A separation zone. 58' 57' 97100 8˚ 5' 10' 15' 20' ELBE APPROACH II/16 .85 N.

OFF FEISTEIN
(Reference chart: British Admiralty 2281, 1973 edition. Note: This chart is based on European Datum.)

Description of the traffic separation scheme
(a) (b) A separation zone, two miles wide, is centred upon the following geographical positions: (1) 58843'.00 N, 005811'.00 E (2) 58832'.00 N, 005805'.00 E A traffic lane, three miles wide, is established on each side of the separation zone.
Hvidingsö
59˚

Stavanger

Feistein 5
(1)

50'

.

Obrestad .
(2)

40'

Kvassheim
30'

Egersund

Flekkefjord Hitterö

20'

10'

Lista Katland5 Lindesnes
30' 40' 50'

Mandal
58˚

10'

20'

30'

40'

50'

10'

20'

30'

40'

50'

10'

20'

30'

97120

OFF FEISTEIN

II/17

OFF FASTNET ROCK
(Reference chart: British Admiralty 2424, 1981 edition. Note: This chart is based on Ordnance Survey of Ireland Datum.)

Description of the traffic separation scheme
(a) (b) A separation zone, two miles wide, is centred upon the following geographical positions: (1) 51820'.00 N, 009825'.80 W (2) 51818'.20 N, 009835'.20 W A traffic lane, two miles wide, is established on each side of the separation zone.

Inshore traffic zone
The area between the landward boundary of the traffic separation scheme and lines connecting Fastnet Rock Lighthouse (51823'.30 N, 009836'.20 W) and the following geographical positions is designated an inshore traffic zone: (3) 51822'.90 N, 009827'.30 W (easterly corner of the scheme) (4) 51821'.10 N, 009836'.60 W (westerly corner of the scheme)

30'

Three Castle Head

Calf Is.

5

Baltimore

Toe Head

5
Mizen Head Clear I.

Sherkin I.

25'

Fastnet Rock 5
Insh ore tra one ffic z

. (3)

(4) .

. (1)

20'

(2)

.

51˚
15'

97114

50'

45'

40'

35'

30'

25'

20'

9˚ 15'

OFF FASTNET ROCK

II/18

OFF SMALLS
(Reference chart: British Admiralty 1478, 1988 edition. Note: This chart is based on Ordnance Survey of Great Britain (1936) Datum.)

Description of the traffic separation scheme
(a) A separation zone, two miles wide, is bounded by lines connecting the following geographical positions: (1) 51851'.60 N, 005851'.60 W (3) 51840'.00 N, 005853'.40 W (2) 51851'.00 N, 005848'.30 W (4) 51840'.00 N, 005856'.90 W A traffic lane for north-eastbound traffic, three miles wide, is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (5) 51850'.20 N, 005843'.70 W (6) 51840'.00 N, 005848'.40 W A traffic lane for south-westbound traffic, three miles wide, is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (7) 51852'.40 N, 005856'.20 W (8) 51840'.00 N, 006801'.90 W

(b)

(c)

Note:

Laden tankers should avoid the area between the traffic separation scheme and The Smalls.

.

(7)

The Bishops and Clerks .
(1)

.

(2)

. (5)
50'

51˚
45'

Grassholme

5 The Smalls

(8)

.

.
(4)

.
(3)

.

(6)

(see description of area to be avoided “Between the Smalls Lighthouse and Grassholme Island” in part D, section I)

40'

97110

45'

30'

OFF SMALLS

II/19

OFF TUSKAR ROCK
(Reference chart: British Admiralty 1787, 1984 edition. Note: This chart is based on Ordnance Survey of Ireland Datum.)

Description of the traffic separation scheme
(a) (b) A separation zone, two miles wide, is centred upon the following geographical positions: (1) 52814'.00 N, 006800'.80 W (3) 52804'.70 N, 006811'.50 W (2) 52808'.50 N, 006803'.80 W A traffic lane, three miles wide, is established on each side of the separation zone.

Inshore traffic zone
The area bounded between the landward boundary of the traffic separation scheme and lines connecting Tuskar Rock Lighthouse (52812'.20 N, 006812'.40 W) and the following geographical positions is designated an inshore traffic zone: (4) 52815'.20 N, 006807'.00 W (northerly corner of the scheme) (5) 52807'.80 N, 006815'.60 W (westerly corner of the scheme)

25'

The Raven Pt. Wexford Rosslare Pt.
20'

5
zo n e

(4)

.

Greenore Pt.
tra

(1)

.

15'

Tuskar Rock 5

Ins

Carnsore Pt. Lt. Saltee Gt. Saltee
(5) .

ho

re

ffic

10'

. (2)

(3)

.

5'

52˚

97113

35'

30'

25'

20'

15'

10'

5'

55'

50'

45'

40'

OFF TUSKAR ROCK

II/20

OFF SKERRIES
(Reference chart: British Admiralty 1977, 1986 edition. Note: This chart is based on Ordnance Survey of Great Britain (1936) Datum.)

Description of the traffic separation scheme
(a) A separation zone, two miles wide, is centred upon the following geographical positions: (1) 53822'.80 N, 004852'.00 W (3) 53832'.10 N, 004831'.60 W (2) 53831'.30 N, 004841'.70 W A traffic lane, two miles wide, is established on each side of the separation zone.

(b)

Note:

Laden tankers should avoid the area between the south-eastern boundary of the scheme and the coast.

Isle of Man

10'

Douglas
5'

Calf of Man

5

5 Lang Ness
54˚

Chicken Rock

55'

50'

Irish Sea

45'

40'

35'

(2) .

. (3)
30'

5 Skerries
.
(1)

5 Point Lynas

25'

5 5
Holy I. Anglesey

5 5

20'

97111

20'

10'

50'

40'

30'

20'

10'

50'

OFF SKERRIES

II/21

IN THE NORTH CHANNEL
(Reference chart: British Admiralty 2798, 1988 edition. Note: This chart is based on Ordnance Survey of Ireland Datum and Ordnance Survey of Great Britain (1936) Datum.)

Description of the traffic separation scheme
(a) A separation zone, two miles wide, is centred upon the following geographical positions: (1) 55815'.30 N, 005855'.40 W (3) 55824'.00 N, 006815'.00 W (2) 55822'.80 N, 006804'.60 W A traffic lane, two miles wide, is established on each side of the separation zone.

(b)

Note:

Laden tankers of over 10,000 gross tonnage should avoid the areas between the traffic separation scheme and the Mull of Kintyre and between the traffic separation scheme and Rathlin Island.
Gigha I. Islay
40'

Texa I. Mull of Oa
35'

Peninsula of Kintyre

30'

Davarr I.
(3) . (2)

25'

.

Bull Pt.

Altacarry 5Hd. Rathlin l. .
(1)

Mull of 5 Kintyre

20'

(see

5 Sanda I.
15'

Note

)
Fair Hd. or Benmore Hd.

North Channel
10'

Note: See Recommendations on navigation around the United Kingdom coast, in part E
5'

Antrim

Garron Pt.

55˚
97112

20'

10'

50'

40'

30'

20'

IN THE NORTH CHANNEL

II/22

OFF FINISTERRE
Note: See mandatory ship reporting system ``Off Finisterre'' in part G, section I. Â (Reference chart: Instituto Hidrografico de la Marina, Cadiz, Spain, 41, 1978 edition. Note: This chart is based on European Datum (Potsdam).)

Description of the traffic separation scheme
(a) A separation (1) (2) (3) A separation (7) (8) (9) zone is bounded 42852'.90 N, 43810'.50 N, 43821'.00 N, zone is bounded 42852'.90 N, 43812'.20 N, 43823'.00 N, by a line connecting the following geographical positions: 009844'.00 W (4) 43821'.50 N, 009837'.70 W 009844'.00 W (5) 43811'.00 N, 009845'.20 W 009836'.40 W (6) 42852'.90 N, 009845'.20 W by a line connecting the following geographical positions: 009849'.40 W (10) 43825'.00 N, 009847'.00 W 009849'.40 W (11) 43813'.70 N, 009854'.80 W 009841'.90 W (12) 42852'.90 N, 009854'.80 W

(b)

(c) (d)

A traffic lane for northbound traffic is established between the separation zones described in paragraphs (a) and (b). A traffic lane for southbound traffic is established between the separation zone described in paragraph (b) and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (13) 42852'.90 N, 009859'.00 W (15) 43826'.40 N, 009850'.90 W (14) 43814'.70 N, 009859'.00 W

Inshore traffic zone
The area between the landward boundary of the traffic separation scheme and the Spanish coast and lying between a line drawn from position 43806'.70 N, 009813'.40 W to position (3) [43821'.00 N, 009836'.40 W] (northern limit) and a line drawn from position 42852'.90 N, 009816'.20 W to position (1) [42852'.90 N, 009844'.00 W] (southern limit) is designated as an inshore traffic zone.

(15) (10) (9) (4) (3)
20´ 25´

(14) (11) (8) (5) (2)

15´

Cabo Villano Inshore traffic zone C.Toriñana

10´

43˚

55´

(13)

(12)

(7) (6)

(1)

C. Finisterre
50´

45´

10˚

55´

50´

45´

40´

35´

30´

25´

20´

15´

10´

OFF FINISTERRE

97234

II/23

00 N.00 N.20 W (4) 39820'. 009856'.00 N.00 N. (3) (2) .00 N.00 N. Note: This chart is based on European Datum. 1990 edition. 009852'. 009847'.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) (b) A separation zone is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (1) 39820'.OFF BERLENGA Â (Reference chart: Marinha ± Instituto Hidrografico de Lisboa (Portugal) 22 (INT 1810). .50 W (2) 39830'. 35' (10) . 30' 5 Farilhão Inshore traffic zone 5 Berlenga 25' Cabo Carvoeiro Peniche 20' .60 W A traffic lane for northbound traffic is established between the separation zones described in paragraphs (a) and (b) above.50 W A separation zone is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (5) 39820'.00 N and on the south by the parallel of 39820'. 009856'. (9) . 009843'. 009852'.00 N.60 W (6) 39830'. 009847'. (6) .20 W (3) 39830'.00 N is designated as an inshore traffic zone.40 W (8) 39820'. A traffic lane for southbound traffic is established between the separation zone described in paragraph (b) and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (9) 39820'. 009842'. (8) .00 N. 009843'.00 N.50 W (10) 39830'. (7) . (4) (1) 39˚ 15' 97116 55' 50' 45' 40' 35' 9˚ 30' 25' 20' 15' OFF BERLENGA II/24 .00 N. (5) .50 W (c) (d) Inshore traffic zone The area between the separation zone described in paragraph (a) and the Portuguese coast and bounded on the north by the parallel of 39830'. 009842'. .40 W (7) 39830'.

. 009849'. (8) (5) .65 N.30 N. (13) (12) . (11).00 N.00 N. 009843'.60 W 009842'. 38847'. . (9) . A traffic lane for southbound traffic is established between the separation zone described in paragraph (b) and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (13) 38840'. 55' (15) . 009842'.00 N and on the south by the parallel of 38843'. (7) (6) (1) .30 W 009848'.10 W (10) 38852'.70 W (11) 38846'.40 W (14) 38846'.70 N. 1990 edition.85 N. Note: This chart is based on European Datum. 38852'.70 W (12) 38841'.15 N. 009851'. .50 W (15) 38852'.75 N.30 W 009848'.30 W (5) 38847'. (4) (3) . 009843'.50 W (b) (c) (d) A traffic lane for northbound traffic is established between the separation zones described in paragraphs (a) and (b) above.25 N. 38852'.40 W Inshore traffic zone The area between the separation zone described in paragraph (a) and the Portuguese coast and bounded on the north by the parallel of 38852'.55 N is designated as an inshore traffic zone. .70 N. 009854'. 009856'.10 W by a line connecting the following geographical positions: 009847'. .55 N.30 W (6) 38843'. zone is bounded 38842'.60 W 009842'. 50' (14) .) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) A separation (1) (2) (3) A separation (7) (8) (9) zone is bounded 38843'.OFF CAPE ROCA Â (Reference chart: Marinha ± Instituto Hidrografico de Lisboa (Portugal) 22 (INT 1810). Cabo Raso Lisboa 40' Bugio 35' 55' 50' 9˚ 45' 40' 35' 30' 25' 20' 15' 10' 5' 97117 OFF CAPE ROCA II/25 . 009851'. 38847'.00 N.90 W (4) 38852'. (10) .00 N. (2) Inshore traffic zone Cabo da Roca 45' 38˚ .00 N.30 N. by a line connecting the following geographical positions: 009840'. 009856'.

(10) .20 W 009805'.00 W (8) 36852'. 009807'. (20) . .30 W 009806'. 008858'. 009803'.10 W (13) 36859'.40 N. te .30 N. 009800'.60 W by a line connecting the following geographical positions: 008856'.60 N.. 009816'.10 N. (11) (14) (19) . 36858'.90 N. (16) 50' (18) .40 W (15) 36850'.80 W Inshore traffic zone The area between the separation zone described in paragraph (a) and the Portuguese coast and bounded on the north by the parallel of 37801'.30 W 009810'.60 N.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) A separation (1) (2) (3) (4) A separation (9) (10) (11) (12) zone is bounded 36853'. (6) . 009811'. 009814'.20 W (5) 37801'.30 N. (7) 5 Pta de Sagres 37˚ . 37800'. 009805'.60 W 009809'. (17) 45' 97118 20' 15 ' 10 ' 5' 9˚ 55' 50' 45 ' OFF CAPE S.40 N. (12) . 009813'.20 W 008859'. (2) .10 W (7) 36854'.90 W (18) 36847'. (13) .00 W (20) 36858'.OFF CAPE S. (3) . 008854'.00 W (b) (c) (d) A traffic lane for northbound traffic is established between the separation zones described in paragraphs (a) and (b) above. VICENTE II/26 . zone is bounded 36849'.90 N. ic en (5) (4) . 009806'. VICENTE Â (Reference chart: Marinha ± Instituto Hidrografico de Lisboa (Portugal) 23 (INT 1811)..80 W (16) 36848'.60 N.70 N. 5 . 37801'. 55' .40 W (19) 36853'.30 W (14) 36855'. (8) . 36856'. Note: This chart is based on European Datum.90 N. Inshore traffic zone .30 N. .80 N.10 N. 1987 edition. 10' Lagos 5' C ab o V S. 36851'.70 W (6) 36858'. .20 W is designated as an inshore traffic zone.40 N and on the east by the meridian of 008854'. (15) . 008857'. (9) .20 W 009802'.40 N. by a line connecting the following geographical positions: 008854'.10 N. (1) .40 N.40 N. 36855'.70 N. A traffic lane for southbound traffic is established between the separation zone described in paragraph (b) and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (17) 36845'.

(3) (2) . .90 W (c) Barbate Cabo Trafalgar 5 10 ' Cabo de Plata 5 5' Pta Camarinal Pta Paloma 36˚ (4) . 006811'.1 should be added to the longitudes.59 N.59 N. (1) See separation scheme “In the Strait of Gibraltar” in section III 55' (6) .49 N. (5) Pta Al-Boasa 50' Pta Malabata 5 Cabo Espartel 5 Tangier 40' 45' 97119 15' 10' 5' 6˚ 55' 50' 45' AT BANCO DEL HOYO II/27 .90 W (2) 35855'. 0'. 006811'.49 N. 006805'. . Spanish Hydrographic Office 105.90 W (6) 35852'.79 N.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) (b) A separation zone. two miles wide.AT BANCO DEL HOYO (Reference charts: British Admiralty 142. . For older charts based on Madrid Datum.90 W (4) 35858'.90 W A traffic lane for westbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (3) 35858'. 006805'. 006805'.79 N.29 should be subtracted from the latitudes and 0'. 006811'. is centred upon the following geographical positions: (1) 35855'.90 W A traffic lane for eastbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (5) 35852'. Note: These charts are based on European Datum.

WARNING: The geographical positions given in the descriptions of the routeing systems are only correct for charts using the same geodetic datum as the reference charts indicated under each scheme. Mariners should consult the appropriate nautical publications and charts for up-to-date details on aids to navigation and other relevant information. as may new editions of the reference charts published after the adoption of the routeing system. III . Charts published by other hydrographic offices may use a different geodetic datum.Section III MEDITERRANEAN SEA AND BLACK SEA CAUTION: The chartlets are for illustrative purposes only and must not be used for navigation.

INDEX: MEDITERRANEAN SEA AND BLACK SEA 1: In the Strait of Gibraltar 2: Off Cabo de Gata 3: Off Cani Island 4: Off Cape Bon 5: Saronicos Gulf 6: Strait of Istanbul – North approach 7: Strait of Istanbul 8: Strait of Istanbul – South approach and Sea of Marmara 9: Strait of Çanakkale 10: Strait of Çanakkale – South-west approach 11: Between the ports of Odessa and Ilichevsk 12: In the approaches to the ports of Odessa and Ilichevsk 13: In the southern approaches to the Kerch Strait 50˚ 11 12 45˚ 13 7 8 9 10 6 40˚ 3 4 1 2 5 35˚ 30˚ 5˚ 0˚ 5˚ 10˚ 15˚ 20˚ 25˚ 30˚ 35˚ 40˚ .

corresponding to position (7) on the attached chartlet) and the Moroccan coastline. 005844'. 0'.90 W falling between the southernmost extremity of the eastbound traffic lane (latitude 35852'.49 N. 005825'.40 W A traffic lane for eastbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (7) 35852'.1 should be added to the longitudes.89 N.40 W (b) (c) Inshore traffic zones (a) Northern inshore traffic zone The area between the northern boundary of the scheme and the Spanish coast and lying between the following limits is designated as an inshore traffic zone: (1) Eastern limit: That part of the meridian 005825'. (Reference charts: British Admiralty 142.90 W (2) 35856'. is centred upon the following geographical positions: (1) 35859'. 005844'.49 N.29 N.59 N. f Southern inshore traffic zone (b) (chartlet overleaf) III/1-1 F id 25 h F b 2000 S W i Shi ' R i (f h) 1 .29 N. Note: These charts are based on European Datum.60 W (3) 35856'. 005836'.90 W (9) 35856'. corresponding to point (6) on the attached chartlet) and the Spanish coast. 005836'.90 W between the northern boundary of the westbound traffic lane (latitude 35858'. section I. For older charts based on Madrid Datum. 005825'.60 W (6) 35858'.89 N. 005844'. The area between the southern limit of the scheme and the adjacent Moroccan coastline and lying between the following limits is designated as an inshore traffic zone: (1) Eastern limit: That part of the meridian 005825'.09 N. Spanish Hydrographic Office 105.49 N. (2) Western limit: That part of the meridian 005844'.89 N. corresponding to position (9) on the attached chartlet) and the Moroccan coastline. half a mile wide.40 W A traffic lane for westbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (4) 36801'.IN THE STRAIT OF GIBRALTAR Note: See mandatory ship reporting system `` In the Strait of Gibraltar traffic separation scheme area'' in part G. 005825'. 005836'.49 N.60 W (8) 35853'. corresponding to point (4) on the attached chartlet) and the Spanish coast. 1984 edition. (2) Western limit: That part of the meridian 005844'.60 W between the northern boundary of the westbound traffic lane (latitude 36801'.60 W between the southernmost extremity of the eastbound lane (latitude 35856'.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) A separation zone.29 N.29 N.29 should be subtracted from the latitudes and 0'.90 W (5) 35858'.

(2) (7) . Pta Al-Boasa Pta Cires . (1) . (8) ne ic zo traff Inshore Pta de Alcázar 5 Ceuta Pta Malabata 5 5 Cabo Espartel 55' 5 Tangier Ensenada de Ceuta 50' 45' 50' 45' 40' 35' 25' 20' 15' 97269 5˚ 30' IN THE STRAIT OF GIBRALTAR III/1-2 . (4) 36˚ (6) .10' Gibraltar Bay Algeciras Gibraltar 5 Pta Camarinal 5 Pta del Acebuche 5 Pta Carnero 5' Tarifa Isla de Tarifa 5 ne c zo Inshore traffi . . (5) (3) . (9) Pta Leona Pta Almina 55' . .

69 N. 002806'.83 W (4) 36835'. 002806'. 002803'. (1) (3) 35' . . (12) 40' . Loma Pelada 45' Cabo 5 de Gata Inshore traffic zone 36˚ . 002806'.43 N.51 N. 001858'.88 W An outer traffic lane eastbound between the separation zones described in (a) and (b) above.72 W (3) 36833'.OFF CABO DE GATA* (Reference chart: 46A issued by the Hydrographic Institute of the Spanish Navy. .83 W (11) 36840'. (7) .72 W Cabo de Gata lighthouse (12) 36839'. 002801'. (9) . 002806'.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) Outer separation zone bounded by a line between the following geographical positions: (1) 36834'. 002800'. 002802'.66 N.83 W (b) (c) Associated inshore traffic zone defined by a line through the following geographical positions: Punta Loma Pelada (13) 36839'. .14 W Intermediate (5) (6) (7) separation zone bounded by 36835'.61 N.41 N. (2) 10' 55' OFF CABO DE GATA * Date of implementation: 0000 hours UTC on 1 December 1998. 002802'.44 a line between the following geographical positions: W (8) 36838'.62 N.25 36837'. 001857'. (5) (4) . An inner traffic lane westbound between the separation zone described in (b) and the associated inshore traffic zone described in (c).28 N. (10) . (d) (e) 5 50' Pta.00 N. (6) .28 N. 002802'.83 W (2) 36833'.09 N. 99000 5' 2˚ III/2 .78 N.22 N.83 36836'. (11) (13) . 002806'. (8) .79 W W (10) 36836'.19 W W (9) 36837'.

is centred upon the following geographical positions: (1) 37813'.20 N. Plane I.80 N. 010802'. 40' (1) .00 E (2) 37831'.OFF CANI ISLAND (Reference chart: British Admiralty 2122. two miles wide. 1988 edition. . Note: This chart is based on European Datum. is centred upon the following geographical positions: (1) 37831'. 011811'.80 N.20 N. three miles wide. 010812'. OFF CAPE BON (Reference chart: British Admiralty 2122.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) (b) A separation zone.80 E A traffic lane. (1) . 1988 edition. is established on each side of the separation zone. two miles wide. (2) 30' Cani Island Bizerte Pilau I. Note: This chart is based on European Datum. 20' .50 E A traffic lane. is established on each side of the separation zone.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) (b) A separation zone.30 E (2) 37810'. three miles wide. 011801'. (2) Cape Bon 10' 37˚ 10˚ 10' 20' 30' 40' 50' 11˚ 10' 20' 97121 OFF CANI ISLAND + OFF CAPE BON III/3/4 .

as heavy traffic.00 N. Note: These charts are based on European Datum. Fléves 45' . fishing boats and pleasure craft. (1) 40' 37˚ 35' 97122 23˚ 25' 30' 35' 40' 45' SARONICOS GULF (IN THE APPROACHES TO PIRAEUS HARBOUR) III/5 . 023844'. one and a half miles wide. Notes: 1 2 Ships in the area between the northern boundaries of the scheme and the adjacent coast of the mainland and Salamis Island should proceed with caution. is established on each side of the separation zone. 50' (9) 5 Akra Tourlos Nísos Aíyina N. Piraeus Nísos Salamis 55' Akra Aixonís (2) . is centred upon the following geographical positions: (1) 37840'. from all directions may be encountered.00 E A traffic lane. 023838'.SARONICOS GULF (in the approaches to Piraeus Harbour) (Reference charts: British Admiralty 1657.00 E (2) 37850'.00 N.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) (b) A separation zone. one mile wide. especially of small ships. Large ships bound to Piraeus and Salamis Strait should reduce speed to bare steerage way before entering the appropriate lane of the scheme. Greek Hydrographic Office 413. 1986 edition.

029807'.60 N.10 N.90 E (3) 41813'.36 N.20 E (b) (c) 21´ (1) (2) 20´ (7) 19´ 18´ 17´ 41° (4) 16´ 15´ (8) (5) Rumeli Lt (9) (3) (6) 14´ Ist an b ul Anadolu Lt St ra it of 01´ 02´ 03´ 04´ 05´ 06´ 07´ 08´ 29° 09´ 10´ 11´ 12´ 13´ 14´ 15´ 16´ 17´ 18´ 97235 STRAIT OF ISTANBUL ± NORTH APPROACH III/6 F id 25 h F b 2000 S W i Shi ' R 11´ i (f 12´ h) 1 13´ f .00 E (9) 41813'.50 E (8) 41814'. the Strait of Canakkale and Ë the Marmara Sea'' in part F.40 N.50 E A traffic lane for north-eastbound traffic is established between the separation zone and the line connecting the following geographical positions: (4) 41815'.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) A separation zone is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (1) 41820'. 029808'.70 N. 029810'. 029807'. 029809'.80 N.50 N.STRAIT OF ISTANBUL ± NORTH APPROACH Note: See ``Rules and recommendations on navigation through the Strait of Istanbul.00 E A traffic lane for southbound and south-westbound traffic is established between the separation zone and the line connecting the following geographical positions: (7) 41819'.00 N. 1993 edition Note: This chart is based on European Datum. 029807'. 029812'.90 E (6) 41813'. (Reference chart: Turkish 1811 (INT 3758).55 E (5) 41814'. 029802'.98 E (2) 41820'.80 N. 029816'.

029804'. 029807'.29 41800'.48 41810'.75 E E E E E E E (b) A traffic lane for northbound traffic is established geographical positions: (24) 41800'.00 N. N.17 029802'.53 029803'.60 N.97 N.73 028859'. 2921A.53 E (21) 41801'.10 N. 029806'.67 41812'.65 029803'.00 N.20 41807'.36 N. N.38 N.45 028859'. 029803'.40 41807'. 029803'.50 E (39) 41812'. N.08 E (19) 41804'.85 41809'.00 E A traffic lane for southbound traffic is established geographical positions: (9) 41813'.63 E (40) 41812'.84 E 029805'.55 E (c) between the separation line and the following (46) (47) (48) (49) (50) (51) (52) (53) 41805'.80 028859'.53 E (20) 41803'. 029803'. N.40 029802'.98 E (17) 41806'. 029807'.18 N. N.35 N. 029803'. 029805'. the line joining the Ahirkapi lighthouse and Kadikoy Cape Inci breakwater lighthouse in the south and È the outer boundaries of the lanes whose co-ordinates are given below: (a) A separation (3) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) line connects the following geographical positions: 41813'.00 41812'. (Reference charts: Turkish 2921 (INT 3756).81 E N.00 E (41) 41810'.00 E (22) 41801'. N. N.30 N. 1992 edition and 2921B.55 41807'.40 E 029805'.33 E (29) 41804'.62 E (45) 41806'. N. 029803'.20 E 29806'. 029804'. 029806'. 029802'.13 41802'. 029800'.96 E (28) 41804'. N.92 41804'. N.) Description of the traffic separation scheme The traffic lanes encompass the area defined by the line joining the Anadolu lighthouse and Rumeli lighthouse in the north.52 N. the Strait of Canakkale and Ë the Marmara Sea'' in part F.85 029802'.27 E (44) 41807'. 1992 edition Note: These charts are based on European Datum. N.91 028859'. 029805'.38 N. 029806'.07 028859'.05 N.15 41806'.51 N.30 N.67 029803'. 029803'.80 N.40 41808'.21 N.80 41811'.35 E 029803'.85 E (31) 41806'.07 E (26) 41801'.53 41809'.97 41801'. N. N. N.73 41801'. N.38 N.57 41804'. 029805'.94 029802'.92 N. 029803'. N. 029803'. N. 029800'.13 41804'.STRAIT OF ISTANBUL Note: See ``Rules and recommendations on navigation through the Strait of Istanbul.20 E (27) 41803'.89 E 029803'.20 E 029808'. N.92 E (30) 41806'. 029800'. 029803'. N.10 N.10 41808'.98 41810'.83 E (18) 41804'. 029803'. 029803'. 1993 edition.48 N.50 E between the separation line and the following (32) (33) (34) (35) (36) (37) (38) (6) 41807'.50 N.60 028859'.30 41813'.00 E (23) 41800'.78 E 029807'. 029804'.88 N.03 N.42 E E E E E E E E (chartlet overleaf) III/7-1 . 029805'. N.50 N.50 E (42) 41809'.29 E (43) 41809'.25 N.06 E (25) 41801'.

(39) (38) (40) (10) (37) (11) (41) (36) 10´ (42) (12) (43) (13) (35) (34) (44) (14) (15) (33) (32) (16) (45) (17) (18) (46) (47) (48) (19) (49) (28) (29) (31) (30) 5´ (50) (20) (27) (21) (51) (22) (52) (26) (25) Ahirkapi Lt.Ho.Ho.Ho. (53) (23) (24) 41˚ Kadiköy Lt. (9) (3) (6) Anadolu Lt.Rumeli Lt.Ho. 29˚ 5´ 10´ 97236 STRAIT OF ISTANBUL III/7-2 F id 25 h F b 2000 S W i Shi ' R i (f h) 1 f .

39 E (73) 40847'. (Reference charts: Turkish 2923 (INT 3754). 029800'.07 E (76) 40842'.53 N.39 N.30 N. 295 (INT 3752). 028855'.44 E (57) 40857'. 028858'. (d). 028858'. 028859'.73 E 028859'.57 E A traffic lane for traffic from the south and south-east of the Sea of Marmara and the Gulf of Izmit sailing toward the Strait of Istanbul is established between the traffic separation zone in paragraph (f) and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (80) 40852'.78 N.75 E (55) 40858'.55 E (69) 40851'. (b) and (a) above and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (75) 40825'.06 E (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (chartlet overleaf) III/8-1 .58 N. 028855'.80 N. 029801'.22 E (68) 40853'.06 E (65) 40855'.10 N.23 E (67) 40854'.11 E (56) 40857'. 028852'. 028859'.22 E (74) 40826'. 1988 edition Note: These charts are based on European Datum.63 E A precautionary area is established bounded by a line joining the following geographical positions: (71) 40858'.90 N.40 E (81A) 40856'.42 E (72) 40855'.15 E (67) 40854'. 028858'.78 N. 028858'.20 N.30 N.15 N.92 E A traffic lane for traffic from the Strait of Istanbul headed for the Gulf of Izmit is established between the traffic lane/separation zones in paragraphs (c).90 N.83 N.82 E (81) 40855'.00 N.25 E (77) 40850'.63 E (59) 40854'.00 N. 027838'. 027838'.30 N. 027838'. 027838'. 029800'. (f) and (g) above and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (78) 40852'.31 E (68) 40853'. 028859'. 026845'. 028855'.21 N. 028858'. A separation zone is bounded by a line joining the following geographical positions: (59) 40854'.06 E (81) 40855'. 026845'.15 E (57) 40857'. 028854'.09 E (65) 40855'.10 E (64) 40853'. (e).50 N. (c). the Strait of Canakkale and Ë the Marmara Sea'' in part F. (c).) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) A separation line connects the following geographical positions: (22) 41801'. 028855'.00 E A circular area to be avoided with a 0.40 N.92 E (79) 40851'.09 E (78) 40852'.58 N.70 N. (23) 41800'.42 N. 028854'. 028854'.11 E (78) 40852'.21 N.00 E A traffic lane for traffic bound for the Canakkale Strait is established in the Sea of Marmara between Ë the separation zones/lines in paragraphs (a). 028857'.50 N. 029800'.50 N.20 N.00 N.78 N. 293.00 N.53 N.40 E (63) 40845'. 028858'.25 E A separation zone is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (66) 40851'. 028852'.06 E (71A) 40856'. 028855'.90 N. 028857'.25 E A traffic lane for traffic bound for the Strait of Istanbul is established in the Sea of Marmara between the separation zones/lines in paragraphs (e).73 E (24) 41800'. 028857'.80 E (54) 40859'.09 E (71) 40858'. 029800'. 026845'.70 N. 028852'. 028859'. 028859'. 029800'.09 E (60) 40852'.53 N. 028858'.40 N.40 N. 1991 edition. 028852'.78 N.10 E (61) 40844'. 028857'. 028856'.15 mile radius is established around position (58).80 N.00 N.82 E (62) 40826'.44 E (b) A separation zone is bounded by a line joining the following geographical positions: (55) 40858'.90 N.50 N. 028859'. (b).50 N.09 E (70) 40859'.STRAIT OF ISTANBUL ± SOUTH APPROACH AND SEA OF MARMARA Note: See ``Rules and recommendations on navigation through the Strait of Istanbul.95 N.92 E (56) 40857'.83 N. (d) and (e) above and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (53) 41800'. 028857'.89 N.55 E The focal point of the precautionary area is located at the following geographical position: (58) 40856'. 1990 edition.

CHARTLET A .III/8-2 05´ Mimarsinan Marmara Ereglisi 41˚ 55´ 50´ (73) (63) 45´ (61) (76) SEA Marmara Adasi OF 40´ MARMARA 35´ 30´ (74) (62) (75) Kapidag Yarimadasi 25´ 20´ 15´ 45´ 50´ 55´ 27˚ 05´ 10´ 15´ 20´ 25´ 30´ 35´ 40´ 45´ 50´ 55´ 28˚ 05´ 10´ 15´ 20´ 25´ 30´ 35´ STRAIT OF ISTANBUL ± SOUTH APPROACH AND SEA OF MARMARA.

05´ (22) Mimarsinan ISTANBUL (53) (70) (23) (24) (54) (55) 41˚ Ambarli (71) (71A) (72) (65) (64) (58) (67) (59) (78) (60) (79) (77) (69) (68) (57) (56) (81A) Area to be avoided ! (81) 55´ (80) (66) 50´ 35´ 40´ 45´ 50´ 55´ 29˚ 05´ STRAIT OF ISTANBUL ± SOUTH APPROACH AND SEA OF MARMARA. CHARTLET B 97237 III/8-3 F id 25 h F b 2000 S W i Shi ' R i (f h) 1 f .

026815'.04 026845'.18 026842'.) Description of the traffic separation scheme The Strait of Canakkale traffic lane is the area between the line joining Cape Mehmetcik lighthouse and Cape Ë Kumkale lighthouse in the south-west.62 E zone/line in paragraphs 026828'.67 N. 026825'.65 E (83) 40822'. 026813'. (97) 40807'.25 (93) 40802'. 026841'.60 N.30 N.25 E E E E E E (c) (d) A traffic lane for south-westbound traffic is established between the separation zone/line in paragraphs (b) and (a) above and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (74) 40826'. 026818'.90 026834'.50 N. 1991 edition Note: This chart is based on European Datum.84 N.25 E (113) 40812'. 026814'.45 N. 026822'.95 E (75) 40825'.99 N. 026838'.41 E (120) 40801'.22 E (103) 40818'. (99) 40809'.00 N.90 N.45 E (125) 40801'.42 N.59 N. the Strait of Canakkale and Ë the Marmara Sea'' in part F. 026822'. 026840'.11 N.30 026839'.95 026823'.70 N.28 N.95 E (110) 40814'.50 N. N. 026823'.STRAIT OF CANAKKALE Ë Note: See ``Rules and recommendations on navigation through the Strait of Istanbul. 026822'.00 (90) 40808'.55 E (85) 40818'.15 (92) 40804'. (100) 40811'.65 N.90 N. 026811'.44 E E E E E E (b) A separation zone is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (93) 40802'. (Reference chart: Turkish 212 (INT 3750). 026823'. 026845'. N. the line joining the Gelibolu lighthouse to the Cardak lighthouse in the north-east.90 N.82 E (116) 40808'. 026811'. 026827'.40 N.46 N.31 026823'.91 E (109) 40819'. 026823'.01 E (102) 40816'.19 E (107) 40823'. N. 026827'.80 E (87) 40812'.88 E (118) 40802'.70 E (105) 40823'.90 N. 026811'. 026835'.54 026815'.50 E positions: (88) 40811'.90 N.25 E (82) 40824'.05 N.55 (91) 40808'.10 E (108) 40821'.32 E A traffic lane for north-eastbound traffic is established between the separation (b) and (a) above and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (94) 40800'.20 N.21 E (84) 40820'.40 026823'.00 N. 026823'.59 N. (95) 40801'. 026835'.62 N. (96) 40801'. and the outer boundaries of the Strait of Canakkale traffic lane whose co-ordinates are given below: Ë (a) A separation line connects the following geographical (62) 40826'.20 E (114) 40811'. 026823'.55 E (119) 40802'. 026823'. 026839'.50 N. 026817'.45 E (117) 40805'.02 N.39 N. 026837'. 026811'.31 E III/9-1 .52 N.10 N.83 N.10 N.25 E (115) 40808'.35 026836'.50 N.24 E (111) 40813'.63 (89) 40809'.88 E (86) 40813'.70 E (101) 40813'. 026822'.12 N. 026823'. N. (98) 40808'.73 N. 026841'. 026815'.03 E (112) 40812'.09 026818'.18 E (126) 40801'. 026845'.10 N.50 N.50 E (106) 40824'.48 E (104) 40820'. N.10 N.

(74) (62) (75) 25´ Gelibolu (107) (83) (108) I (106) (82) (105) Cardak AD AS RI M (84) (104) 20´ YA (109) (85) (103) (102) GE LI B OL U (110) (112)(111) (88) (87) (113) (100) (114) (89) (86) (101) 15´ (115) (116) (91) (97) (117) (92) (99) (98) ÇANAKKALE (90) 10´ 05´ (93) (118) (119) (120) (126) (125) (95) (94) M cik met eh (96) 10´ 15´ 20´ 25´ 26˚ 30´ 35´ 40´ 45´ 97239 STRAIT OF CANAKKALE Ë h) 1 III/9-2 F id 25 h F b 2000 S W i Shi ' R i (f f m Ku 40˚ ale k .

) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) A separation zone is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical (120) 40801'.70 N. 026811'. positions: 025857'. 026811'.70 E 39858'. 026811'. 025857'.52 N. (122) 39858'.80 N.99 N.70 E (125) 40801'.STRAIT OF CANAKKALE ± SOUTH-WEST APPROACH Ë Note: See ``Rules and recommendations on navigation through the Strait of Istanbul.60 E GELIBOLU YARIMADASI Mehmetcik (119) (127) (120) (125) (118) (c) Stra it of akka le Çan (94) (121) (124) (122) (128) Ku m ka le 40˚ (123) Karayer Adalari (129) 55´ 26˚ 5´ 10´ STRAIT OF CANAKKALE ± SOUTH-WEST APPROACH Ë III/10 97240 . 025857'.40 E 026811'. (Reference charts: Turkish 2134. 213.70 E A traffic lane connecting the (94) (128) for north-eastbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line following geographical positions: 40800'.20 N. the Strait of Canakkale and Ë the Marmara Sea'' in part F. 026801'. 1992 edition. 025857'. (121) 40800'.70 E (124) 39859'.28 N.70 E 026800'.20 N.41 E (b) A traffic lane for westbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (119) 40802'.00 N. 025859'.29 N.55 N.70 E (129) 39855'.18 E (123) 39857'.00 N. 1993 edition Note: These charts are based on European Datum.03 E (127) 40801'.

90 N.40 E An outside boundary of the inbound traffic lane connects the following geographical positions: (10) 46818'. 030859'.90 N. is centred upon the following geographical positions: (14) 46816'. (2) 46821'. 030850'. 030849'. Note: This chart is based on the system of co-ordinates used in Soviet marine navigational charts. November 1974 edition.60 N.30 N.20 N.70 N.60 E An outside boundary of an inbound traffic lane connects the following geographical positions: (3) 46809'.00 E An outside boundary of an outbound traffic lane connects the following geographical positions: (5) 46806'.50 N. 031801'.10 N. CAUTION: The roundabout may be entered and left by ships going from the arm of Prorva to the Bugsko±Dneprovsko± Limanskiy Channel and back.70 N.50 N. 030851'.20 E (13) 46818'.10 E Part II: (a) A roundabout consists of a circular separation zone of two miles in diameter with its centre at the point: (7) 46815'.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) A separation line connects the following geographical positions: (1) 46827'.50 E (9) 46827'. one quarter of a mile wide.70 N.00 N.) Description of the traffic separation scheme The traffic separation scheme consists of four parts: Part I: (a) (b) (c) A separation zone. 030848'.50 E (19) 46817'.50 N.00 N. is centred upon the following geographical positions: (8) 46818'.40 E An outside boundary of the outbound traffic lane connects the following geographical positions: (18) 46815'.40 E (15) 46818'.60 E (11) 46827'.80 E (b) A traffic lane. 030846'. 030845'. IN THE APPROACHES TO THE PORTS OF ODESSA AND ILICHEVSK (Reference chart: USSR 508.80 E (17) 46818'. 030851'.10 N. 031806'.50 E (3) 46819'. Note: This chart is based on the system of co-ordinates used in Soviet marine navigational charts. half a mile wide.50 E Part IV: (a) (b) (c) Approaches to the Port of Ilichevsk A separation zone. 030852'.10 E and a circular traffic lane.20 N. 030857'. November 1974 edition.50 N. two and a half miles wide.10 E (6) 46812'.00 N. two miles wide. 030851'. is established on each side of the separation line.90 N.10 E (2) 46813'.30 E III/11-1/12-1 . 030856'.80 E An outside boundary of the inbound traffic lane connects the following geographical positions: (16) 46817'. 031804'.90 N. 031808'.10 E (4) 46814'. Part III: (a) (b) (c) Approaches to the Port of Odessa A separation zone.40 E 030844'. 030854'.60 E An outside boundary of the outbound traffic lane connects the following geographical positions: (12) 46827'. 030847'. half a mile wide.80 N. is centred upon the following geographical positions: (1) 46808'.60 N. 030845'. 030851'.BETWEEN THE PORTS OF ODESSA AND ILICHEVSK (Reference chart: USSR 508. 030853'. around the zone indicated.

. (11) . Black Sea . (5) (3) (1) 46˚ 40' 50' 31˚ 10' 97124 BETWEEN THE PORTS OF ODESSA AND ILICHEVSK + IN THE APPROACHES TO THE PORTS OF ODESSA AND ILICHEVSK III/11-2/12-2 . 5 . . (6) 10' .30' Odessa (1) (12) (9) . (4) (2) . . (17) . . . (7) . (18) . (8) (13) . (10) (15) . (2) 20' Ilichevsk (3) . . (19) . . (14) . (16) .

70 N.00 E (b) (c) A traffic lane for northbound traffic is established between the separation zone/line and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (5) 44849'. 45˚ 55' . 036830'.80 E (d) 5 C.70 N.70 N.70 N. 1989 edition.70 E (8) 44849'. 036833'. (8) .30 E A traffic lane for southbound traffic is established between the separation zone/line and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (7) 45806'. (1) .) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) A separation zone is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (1) 44849'. . Takil 5 t 5' (2) . 036831'. 036830'.IN THE SOUTHERN APPROACHES TO THE KERCH STRAIT (Reference chart: USSR 514.20 E (6) 45806'. (6) h St i ra C.30 N.00 E (3) 44849'.30 N. (5) 50' 97123 25' 36˚ 30' 35' 40' IN THE SOUTHERN APPROACHES TO THE KERCH STRAIT III/13 . 036829'. Note: This chart is based on the single geodetic datum for Soviet nautical charts. 036830'.80 N. 036829'.00 E (4) 45806'.80 N.80 N. 036830'.00 E A separation line connects the following geographical positions: (2) 45802'. . (3) . 036826'. Panaghia rc Ke (4) (7) .00 E (2) 45802'.

Section IV INDIAN OCEAN AND ADJACENT WATERS CAUTION: The chartlets are for illustrative purposes only and must not be used for navigation. IV . Mariners should consult the appropriate nautical publications and charts for up-to-date details on aids to navigation and other relevant information. as may new editions of the reference charts published after the adoption of the routeing system. Charts published by other hydrographic offices may use a different geodetic datum. WARNING: The geographical positions given in the descriptions of the routeing systems are only correct for charts using the same geodetic datum as the reference charts indicated under each scheme.

30˚ 20˚ 10˚ A 0˚ 10˚ INDEX: SUMMARY CHARTLETS FOR INDIAN OCEAN AND ADJACENT WATERS A: Summary chartlet A B: Summary chartlet B 20˚ 30˚ B 40˚ 99012 20˚ 30˚ 40˚ 50˚ 60˚ 70˚ 80˚ IV/ii .

30˚ 9 8 6 7 5 25˚ 1 2 4 20˚ 15˚ INDEX: INDIAN OCEAN AND ADJACENT WATERS 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 3 In the Gulf of Suez In the entrance to the Gulf of Aqaba In the Strait of Bab el Mandeb Off Ras Al Hadd In the Strait of Hormuz Tunb–Farur Between Zaqqum and Umm Shaif In the approaches to Ras Tanura and Ju’aymah Marjan/Zuluf Off Dondra Head 35˚ 40˚ 45˚ 50˚ 55˚ 60˚ 65˚ 70˚ 75˚ 80˚ 10˚ 10 5˚ 97125 85˚ SUMMARY CHARTLET A .

5 5 5 32˚ 5 s CAPE TOWN Mossel Bay s Port Elizabeth s 5 5 5 34˚ 5 5Cape Agulhas 11 12 Atlantic Ocean Indian Ocean INDEX: INDIAN OCEAN AND ADJACENT WATERS 11: Off Alphard Banks 12: Off the FA Platform 36˚ 38˚ 99001 16˚ 18˚ 20˚ 22˚ 24˚ 26˚ 28˚ 30˚ SUMMARY CHARTLET B IV/iv .

00 N.25 E A separation line connects the following geographical positions: (11) 29828'.60 E (9) 29828'. (Reference charts: British Admiralty 2373. 032835'.90 E (20) 29809'. 032835'.68 N. 28815'. 033812'.60 N. 032836'. 033844'.00 N. 032841'. 032832'.50 N.80 N.80 E (19) 28836'.70 N. 032833'.00 N. 033822'.90 N.45 N.60 N.55 N.60 N.80 N.40 E (f) A traffic lane for southbound traffic is established between: (i) The separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (22) 29846'.90 N.80 N. 29809'.40 E (40) 29846'.40 E (21) 29824'. 032833'.00 N.65 N. 032836'.30 E IV/1-1 .40 E 032854'. A separation (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) zone is bounded 29825'.20 N. 033819'.60 N. 032833'.90 E (2) 29837'.70 E E E E E E E (g) A traffic lane for northbound traffic is established between the separation zone/line and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (35) 28811'.58 N. 032832'. 1997 edition.10 E (25) 29835'. Note: These charts are based on WGS 84 Datum. 033850'. by a line connecting the following geographical positions: 033821'.58 N. 2090. 032837'.10 N. 033802'. 032838'.95 N. 28845'. 032832'.40 E (37) 29810'.40 E Part B: (h) Southern scheme A separation (41) (42) (43) (44) (45) zone is bounded 28808'.10 E (4) 29846'.35 E 033844'.80 E (23) 29837'.60 N.00 N. 1997 edition.89 N.25 N. 033841'. 032843'.20 E 033818'. 032832'.50 E (6) 29835'.40 E 034805'.60 N.90 E (b) (c) (d) (e) A separation zone is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (7) 29835'. 032832'. 032830'.05 E (12) 29825'.70 E (46) 27844'.60 N. 28810'.35 E (29) 29827'.55 N.30 E (18) 28811'.60 N.25 E A separation line connects the following geographical positions: (5) 29837'. 032846'.60 E (10) 29835'. 032829'. 032848'.10 E (47) 27850'.50 E (8) 29829'.55 N.95 (iii) The separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (26) 29835'. 27843'.70 E 032845'. 032830'.00 N. 032852'.85 E 034806'. 032832'.90 E (38) 29822'.00 (32) 28845'.90 E (33) 28815'.05 N.50 E 033850'.00 E (48) 27853'.20 N.40 E (50) 28808'. 27831'.95 E (27) 29830'. 1997 edition.20 N. 2374. 27830'. 032830'. 032829'. 032832'. 2375. 032831'.53 N.80 E (34) 28809'.25 N.20 N. 033817'.10 (ii) The separation line and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (24) 29837'.56 N.68 N.60 N.50 E 033814'.20 N.15 N.45 E (49) 27854'.60 N.68 N. 033804'.20 N. 27849'.97 N. 1997 edition.IN THE GULF OF SUEZ Note: See ``Rules for ships navigating in the Gulf of Suez'' (part F) and ``Recommended directions of traffic flow off Ras Shukheir'' (part E).) Description of the traffic separation scheme Part A: (a) Northern scheme A separation zone is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (1) 29846'. 032832'. 1997 edition.90 (v) The separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (30) 29827'.50 E (36) 28836'.80 E by a line connecting the following geographical positions: 032837'.80 E (39) 29835'.00 N. 2098. 033838'.80 E (3) 29838'. 033820'.35 (iv) The separation line and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (28) 29830'.60 (31) 29808'. 032833'.

45 N.60 E (58) 27853'.40 E (57) 27851'.65 E (56) 27845'.27 N.35 E (66) 29827'.60 N. 033842'.40 E (52) 27848'. 032829'.40 E (54) 27828'.68 N.(i) A traffic lane for southbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (51) 28807'.20 N. 032827'.80 E (63) 29835'.00 E (71) 28809'. 033845'. 032829'.11 N. 033823'.10 E (68) 29837'.00 E Part D: (n) Precautionary area off Ras Shukheir A precautionary area is established by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (69) 28809'.58 N.90 E (l) (m) A traffic lane for westbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (67) 29837'.70 N. 032832'.95 E (62) 29830'.65 N. 033849'.40 E (53) 27842'.60 E (j) Part C: (k) Junction scheme off Ain Sukhna A separation zone is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (61) 29832'. 033820'.80 N.30 N.95 E (59) 27856'.75 N.15 N. 032828'. July.80 N.90 E A traffic lane for northbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (55) 27833'. 032833'.30 N. 032830'.50 N. 033843'.50 E A traffic lane for south-eastbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (65) 29830'.60 N. 033821'. 033838'. 034803'.35 E (60) 28809'.80 N.35 N. Ramadan and Morgan oilfields. 032827'.20 N.60 E (70) 28806'.40 E (72) 28812'.40 N. 033850'. 033823'.40 E Note: Recommended directions of traffic flow off Ras Shukheir: Recommended directions of traffic flow are established in the approaches to Ras Shukheir Oil Terminal. IV/1-2 . 034808'.35 E (64) 29835'. 033817'.35 N. 033819'.

Suez Bay (23) (24) (67) (68) (64) 35´ (2) (3) (5) (6) (7) (10) (39) See Note 1 (1)(4) (22) (40) 45´ Ain Sukhna Oil Terminal (25) (26) (63) (61) (65) See Note 1 Ain Sukhna Oil Terminal 30´ 29° 30´ (27) (28) (62) (29) (30) (66) (8) (11) (9) (13) (12) (21) EGYPT 25´ 25´ 32° 30´ 35´ See details opposite (38) 15´ (14) (31) (37) (20) SINAI 29° (15) 45´ (32) EGYPT (19) (36) 30´ Note 1. Rules for ships navigating in the Gulf of Suez are given in part F 15´ 30´ 45´ (33) 33° (16) 30´ 97241 15´ IN THE GULF OF SUEZ (NORTH) IV/1-3 .

30´ (16) (33) Morgan oilfield SINAI 15´ (35) (18) (72)Precautionary area (17) See Note 2 (71)(60) (69) (34) (41) (51) (50) Ras Shukheir (70) 28° (59) (49) (48) (58) (47) (57) EGYPT Ashrafi Islands (52) (42) (46) (56) (53) (43) 45´ Notes 1. 2. Rules for ships navigating in the Gulf of Suez are given in part F. (55) (45) (44) (54) 30´ Shaker I. See Note 1 15´ 30´ 45´ 34° 15´ IN THE GULF OF SUEZ (SOUTH) IV/1-4 97242 . Recommended directions of traffic flow off Ras Shukheir are shown in part E. Gubal I.

(N) 27857'.20 Green Green Fl. 034828'. Rad. Light synchronized with green light of Ras Nusrani Gordon Reef (west) 27859'.45 E (4) 28801'. mon. Rad.25 34826'.00 N.00 N.15 E Aids to navigation for entrance to the Gulf of Aqaba Co-ordinates Station Chisholm Point Northbound channel Reef west of Johnson Point Reef northwest of Johnson Point Jackson Reef (east) Lat. 5 m GRP ± Pigmented green 5 m GRP ± Pigmented: upper half green. 10 m GRP ± Pigmented red over white.20 s 5 5 28800'. 034827'.94 34829'. 034826'. 034829'. 034825'.00 28800'. Note: This chart is based on European Datum. Synchronized with W. mon. 034826'. mon Racon (Morse G) + Rad.38 E (3) 27857'.75 E (2) 27857'. (b) (c) Tower ± Daymark White Fl(2+1). mon.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) A separation zone is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (1) 28801'.20 Light characteristics Colour Rhythm Range (N M) (T=0.16 White Green Red Fl.00 N.7 s Occ. Johnson 28800'.00 N.00 Long.74) 9 Racon/ Radio mon.20 s 10 m GRP ± Pigmented Racon (Morse C) white +Rad.69 E A traffic lane for southbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line joining the following geographical positions: (5) 28801'.7 s 15 5 5 10 m GRP ± Pigmented Racon (Morse Y) green +Rad.10 s Occ.10 s Fl(2).IN THE ENTRANCE TO THE GULF OF AQABA (Reference chart: British Admiralty 3595.00 N. Southbound channel Ras Nusrani 27858'. mon.10 s 5 Rad.55 Red Fl.00 N.22 E (8) 28801'. (E) 34830'.58 34828'. lower white 5 m GRP ± Pigmented red. mon. 034827'. 1986 edition. 034828'.89 34826'.02 34829'.00 N.81 E (6) 27857'.88 E A traffic lane for northbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line joining the following geographical positions: (7) 27857'.00 N.99 (chartlet overleaf) IV/2-1 .

(8) . (1) . (3) 34˚ 28' . (7) 29' Chisholm Pt 57' 30' 97132 IN THE ENTRANCE TO THE GULF OF AQABA IV/2-2 . 1' Sinai Peninsula Johnson Pt 28˚ 5 5 59' Tiran Râs Nusrâni 58' . (2) 27' .Strait of Tiran (5) . (4) . (6) 25' 26' .

043813'.78 N. .85 E (4) 12833'.25 N. 55' Ras Dahànnaba Ras Sintian 50' 45' Sc. Note: This chart is based on World Geodetic System 1972 Datum.02 N.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) A separation zone. I (11)5 Ghubbet al Haikah Ras Bab el Mandeb 40' .03 E (11) 12838'. 043821'.86 N.30 E (2) 12836'. .37 E (8) 12835'. Callida Dumeira. one mile wide.54 N. (5) . (12) 35' .22 E (5) 12837'. 043811'.69 N. 043829'.82 N.80 E A traffic lane for southbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (9) 12831'. 043820'.21 E (b) (c) Note: In the passage between Perim Island and the mainland. (1) . .20 E (12) 12834'. 043827'. 043822'. 1984 edition.IN THE STRAIT OF BAB EL MANDEB (Reference chart: British Admiralty 2588.00 E (3) 12832'. 043828'. coastal traffic may be proceeding in both directions.79 E (6) 12855'. 5 Perim Island .37 N. (2) (8) . is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (1) 12855'. 043827'.53 N. 043815'.50 N. 043812'. 043818'.96 E A traffic lane for northbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (10) 12856'. (3) 30' Ras Si Ane Île Grande Île de l’Est 43˚ 5' 10' 15' 20' 25' 30' 35' 40' IN THE STRAIT OF BAB EL MANDEB IV/3 F id 25 h F b 2000 S W i 25' 45' Shi ' R 97126 i (f h) 1 f .04 E (7) 12855'. (4) (9) .50 N. 13˚ (10) (6) . (7) .44 N.

and lying between a line connecting the following geographical positions: (4) 22836'. 059854'. 059858'. position (11) 22825'. 1983 edition. 059850'.00 N.40 N.70 E (3) 22825'. is established between the separation zone and a separation line connecting the following geographical positions: (4) 22836'. 060802'. 059858'. four nautical miles wide.40 N.00 E (8) 22835'. 060802'.40 N. (9) 40' (1) .40 N.20 E (5) 22832'. Ra ’s a (4) .00 E (6) 22825'.20 E to Ras al Junaiz.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) A separation zone.20 E (b) (c) Inshore traffic zone The area between the coast and the landward boundary of the traffic separation scheme. is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (7) 22825'.20 E A traffic lane for northbound traffic. 060808'. (8) Ins d . (2) . 060801'.30 N. 059856'. . 10' 22˚ 30' 40' 50' 60˚ 10' 20' 30' OFF RAS AL HADD IV/4 F id 25 h F b 2000 S W i Shi ' R 97277 i (f 20' h) 1 (11) (6) (3) (7) f ho re tra ffic (5) . GULF OF OMAN 50' . 059854'.50 N.93 E and a line drawn from position (6) 22825'.00 E (2) 22833'. is centred upon the following geographical positions: (1) 22839'. lH ad . three nautical miles wide.00 E to Ras al Hadd. 30' ne zo . 060808'.00 E A traffic lane for southbound traffic. 059847'. . two nautical miles wide.00 N.20 N.00 N.00 E is designated as an inshore traffic zone. 059858'.20 E (9) 22843'.40 N. 5 (10) .OFF RAS AL HADD (Reference chart: British Admiralty 2851.50 N. position (10) 22832'. . Note: This chart is based on World Geodetic System 1972 Datum.00 N.

05 N.55 E 056828'.50 N.50 N.60 N. 056841'.15 E (16) 26836'. 26836'. 056823'. 056828'.65 N. 056832'.00 N.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) A separation (1) (2) (3) (4) zone is bounded 26834'.50 N.65 E (12) and 26819'.90 E (7) 26834'.05 E (6) 26834'. 056837'.50 N.70 E (14) 26838'. 056828'. 056836'. 1994 edition.25 E (11) 26832'.25 E is designated as an inshore traffic zone.92 E 26830'.20 N.25 E (9) 26832'.50 N.05 E (5) 26828'.50 N.60 N.95 E (12) 26827'. 056812'.35 E (11) 26827'.60 E 056834'.20 N. 056823'.70 N.35 E (10) 26832'.50 N.95 E (10) 26832'.45 E (8) 26832'. 056827'.70 N.65 E A traffic lane for westbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (13) 26830'.50 N.35 N. 056822'. by a line connecting the following geographical positions: 056821'. 056831'. 056832'. 26836'. 056828'. 26829'.50 N. (chartlet overleaf) IV/5-1 .60 N. 056835'. 056833'. 056820'.IN THE STRAIT OF HORMUZ (Reference chart: British Admiralty 3172.80 N. 056835'.40 E (b) A traffic lane for eastbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a separation line connecting the following geographical positions: (9) 26830'.35 E (15) 26838'.15 E (c) Inshore traffic zone The area between the Musandam Peninsula coast and landward boundary of the traffic separation scheme bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: 26815'. Note: This chart is based on WGS 84 datum.50 N.55 E 056839'.

(2) . . Jazh Larak 50' ST R T AI OF HO RM UZ (15) (14) . . (7) .Jazh Hormuz Qeshm 27˚ Q e m sh I. (3) . (1) . (10) (11) (13) 30' Little 5 Quoin Inshore traffic zone (4) (5) (12) 20' Musandam Peninsula Ra’s Shaykh Mas‘ud Umm al Fayyärin Bukha Ras Sarkän 10' Ru’us al Jibal 56˚ 10' 20' 30' 40' 50' 26˚ 57˚ 10' 97276 IN THE STRAIT OF HORMUZ IV/5-2 . . . (8) (9) . . . (6) . . . 40' (16) .

00 E (3) 26823'. (2) Jazh-e Farur (7) .50 E (b) Note: Westbound traffic which has passed Quoin Islands should proceed so as to keep Jazt. . . 054830'. 055817'. 055830'. 055817'. (1) . (4) Jazt.00 N. (10) .00 N. (9) .70 N. . 055830'.00 E (8) 26808'. (12) 10' . 055830'.00 E (5) 26816'.) Description of the traffic separation scheme Separation of traffic in this area is achieved by establishing separate traffic lanes. (a) A traffic lane for westbound traffic is established between a line connecting the following geographical positions: (1) 26822'.TUNB±FARUR (Reference chart: British Admiralty 2837. Sirri Jazt. 054830'.70 N.50 E and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (10) 26810'. 40' 30' (3) (6) .60 N. 054830'.00 N.00 E (2) 26818'. . Note: This chart is based on revised Nahrwan Datum.60 N.00 E (12) 26808'. . (11) 26˚ Jazt.00 E (11) 26805'. 1989 edition. Tunb (8) 20' (5) . Tunb on the port side in order to get into the appropriate traffic lane in the Strait of Hormuz traffic separation scheme. Bu Musa 50' 40' 97127 10' 20' 30' 40' 50' 55˚ 10' 20' 30' 40' 50' TUNB±FARUR IV/6 .00 E (6) 26821'.00 E A traffic lane for eastbound traffic is established between a line connecting the following geographical positions: (7) 26813'.00 E (9) 26811'. Eastbound traffic should proceed so as to keep Jazh-e Farur and Jazt. 50' Qeshm I.80 N.00 N. 055830'.00 N. 055808'.80 N. 054830'. Tunb and Jazh-e Farur on the port side.00 N. 055807'.70 E and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (4) 26820'.

89 N. (5) . . 053824'. 1987 edition.25 nautical miles wide. is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (1) 25807'.90 E (4) 24856'.28 N. Qarnayn (9) .10 N. (4) .41 E A traffic lane for westbound traffic.70 E A traffic lane for eastbound traffic.46 E (b) (c) Umm Shaif Oilfield 10' Jazt. 053825'.30 N. (2) .97 N. 052858'.30 E (11) 25800'.(7) (1) Zaqqum . 053800'.44 N. (10) 55' 5 Zaqqum Oilfield Jazt. 053819'. (3) . (6) R .36 E (5) 25802'. (11) 25˚ Jazt.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) A separation zone. 053820'.78 E (3) 24856'.25 nautical miles wide.40 N. 1.BETWEEN ZAQQUM AND UMM SHAIF (Reference chart: British Admiralty 3733.00 N.90 N. . . 053819'.45 E (6) 25806'. is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (7) 25807'. Das .10 E (2) 25802'. 053801'.01 E (9) 24857'.40 E (8) 25803'. 1. (12) (8) 5' .77 N.15 E (12) 25805'. 052859'. 053818'. 053824'. Note: This chart is based on revised Nahrwan Datum.75 nautical miles wide.90 N. is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (10) 24855'.95 N. Zarakkuh 97130 50' 55' 53˚ 5' 10' 15' 20' 25' 30' BETWEEN ZAQQUM AND UMM SHAIF IV/7 . 0. 053826'.

050814'. (32) 26841'.60 E (b) (c) A separation line connects the following geographical positions: (7) 26857'.28 N. for traffic departing from Ju'aymah is centred upon the following geographical positions: (45) 27801'. 050811'.85 N.40 N.20 N. two miles wide. 050812'.03 N.20 E (47) 27811'.00 E (6) 27806'.47 N.38 E 050810'.50 E 050814'.87 N. 050809'.47 E (22) 26840'.12 N.90 N.20 E (8) 26856'. 26858'. 27806'.20 N.42 N.40 E (39) 26855'. 26856'.13 050812'. 050811'. 050823'. 050811'.43 N.75 N. N. 050812'.83 E A traffic lane for traffic departing from Ras Tanura is established between and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (30) 26840'.87 E (24) 27806'.87 050842'.83 N.48 E (29) 26840'.00 E (46) 27811'.73 E (26) 26849'. 050811'. Note: These charts are based on Nahrwan Datum.50 N.35 N.13 050823'. 050812'. 050812'. 050810'.30 N. 050811'. United States Naval Oceanographic Office 62415. 050812'.85 E (13) 26855'.50 N. 050810'.47 N.43 E (19) 26843'.30 E (5) 27805'.53 N.00 N. 050842'. 050812'.30 E (38) 26850'.15 N.03 N. 050812'.) Description of the traffic separation scheme Part I: (a) Ras Tanura approach A separation (1) (2) (3) zone is bounded 27806'. 050811'.87 N.55 N. 050809'.60 N.27 N.32 N. by a line connecting the following geographical positions: 050812'.60 050813'. 050811'.27 N. 1986 edition.30 E Part III: (h) Ju'aymah departure A traffic lane.00 N. N.95 E the separation zones/lines 050810'. 050812'.57 N.03 050813'.10 E E E E E E (f) Part II: (g) Ju'aymah approach A traffic lane.13 N.27 E (37) 26849'. (34) 26843'.27 N.12 N.88 050812'. 050823'.10 N.10 E E E E (d) line connects the following geographical positions: 26849'.50 N.00 N.43 E (14) 26855'.00 E (28) 26842'. 050809'.87 E N.80 E (44) 26859'.60 E 050823'.87 (e) A traffic lane for traffic bound for Ras Tanura is established between the separation zones/lines and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (23) 27807'.00 E (4) 26857'.30 E (12) 26851'. 26849'.70 E (25) 26856'.00 E (27) 26848'. 050811'. 050842'.30 N. 050811'.25 E (20) 26841'. (36) 26847'. 050814'.93 26845'.00 26848'.28 E 050811'. (31) 26841'. 050836'.70 E (42) 27805'.08 E 050812'.00 N. N.23 050812'.02 26844'.95 N. two miles wide. by a line connecting the following geographical positions: 050842'.15 E (21) 26841'. 050811'.38 N.70 050811'.IN THE APPROACHES TO RAS TANURA AND JU'AYMAH (Reference charts: British Admiralty 3788.93 N.37 E (40) 26855'. for traffic bound for Ju'aymah is centred upon the following geographical positions: (43) 26857'.12 E (41) 27804'. A separation (9) (10) (11) A separation (15) (16) (17) (18) zone is bounded 26856'. 050810'.53 N.75 E (chartlet overleaf) IV/8-1 . (35) 26844'. (33) 26842'.

. . . (11) (37) (38) 45' (17) .. . . . (15) . (39) (26) . (9) (8) . (40) (13) . 50' . . (5) . (36) . (38) 27˚ (44) . . (12) .. (23) . (31) (29) . (14) (10) . 5' . .. (1) . . . . . . (7) (43) . (2) . (47) (24) . (45) . . (41) (12) . (46) 10' . 40' (29) (22) Ras Tanura 10' Ras Tanura 97128 50˚ 15' 20' 25' 10' IN THE APPROACHES TO RAS TANURA AND JU'AYMAH IV/8-2 . .. . . (35) . .. (4) (25) . . (15) . . (30) (22) 40' (20) (21) . (18) . .. (11) (37) (27) . (6) . (32) (19) .. (34) . 45' See details opposite . 50' (26) . . (3) . . (16) 55' . (30) . (42) . (33) (28) .

33 N. 049829'.04 E (3) 28818'. 049820'.16 N.13 E (11) 28830'.41 N.58 E (5) 28830'.45 E (18) 28832'.76 N.04 N.60 E (8) 28817'.19 E (10) 28825'.15 E A traffic lane for southbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (7) 28814'. 049819'.87 N. 049831'.11 N. 049818'.05 N.63 N. 049831'. (chartlet overleaf) IV/9-1 .28 N.70 E A traffic lane for northbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (13) 28815'.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) A separation zone of 0.98 N.MARJAN/ZULUF* (formerly ``Between the Zuluf and Marjan Oilfields'') (Reference chart: British Admiralty 3774.61 E (9) 28819'. Note: This chart is based on WGS 84 Datum.47 E (15) 28817'.60 E (4) 28824'. 049819'. 049827'. 049830'. 049828'.000 metres) wide is centred upon the following geographical positions: (1) 28814'.03 N.09 E (12) 28832'.00 N.97 E (17) 28829'.55 N.94 N. 1991 edition. 049818'.06 E (14) 28816'.59 E (b) (c) _____ * Date of implementation: 0000 hours on 1 July 1999. 049830'. 049828'.00 N. 049818'. 049817'. 049820'. 049817'.01 E (16) 28823'.80 E (2) 28816'.36 N.54 nautical miles (1. 049826'.69 N.24 E (6) 28832'.

(16) 20' Marjan Oilfield (9) . . (3) . (15) (8) . . (5) . . . (13) 49˚ 20' 25' 30' 97131 MARJAN/ZULUF IV/9-2 . (18) (11) . . . . (1) . (17) 30' Zuluf Oilfield 25' (10) . (2) . (14) 28˚ 15' (7) . (4) .(6) (12) .

three miles wide. Note: This chart is based on Ceylon (1933) Datum.54 E A traffic lane for westbound ships. 5 Dondra Head 55' Inshore traffic zone (1) . 1981 edition.OFF DONDRA HEAD (Reference chart: British Admiralty 3265. (2) 50' (3) .) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) (b) (c) (d) A separation zone.70 N.54 E A separation zone.20 N.70 N. 080832'. (4) 45' 5˚ 80˚ 35' 40' 97129 OFF DONDRA HEAD IV/10 . two miles wide. .38 E (2) 05851'. three miles wide.20 N. 080838'. is established to the seaward side of the separation zone described in paragraph (b) above. 080838'. 080832'. is centred upon the following geographical positions: (3) 05845'. . A traffic lane for eastbound ships. three miles wide. is established between the separation zones described in paragraphs (a) and (b) above.38 E (4) 05845'. is centred upon the following geographical positions: (1) 05851'. Inshore traffic zone The area between the coast and the landward boundary of the traffic separation scheme is designated as an inshore traffic zone.

(6) (5) .00 E (b) (c) 5 Cape Infanta 30' 40' Struis Point 5 Cape Agulhas . 021805'. 020845'.00 E A traffic lane for eastbound traffic is established between the traffic separation zone and the line connecting the following geographical positions: (7) 35812'. 021805'.00 E (3) 35808'.11 S.00 E (4) 35809'. 2084) Note: The SAN charts are based on Cape Datum (Clarke 1880 Mod).00 E (2) 34856'. 021805'.48 S. 10' . IV/11 .54 S. (2) 35˚ SUMM ER ZO NE L ZONE R SE WINTE ASONA . 50' . 020845'.00 E A traffic lane for westbound traffic is established between the separation zone and the line connecting the following geographical positions: (5) 34855'. 020845'. 020845'. (3) (4) . British Admiralty 2083.76 S.45 S.55 S.00 E (6) 34853'. (1) .79 S. 121.10 S. Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) A separation zone is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (1) 34858'. (8) 50' 20˚ 10' 20' 30' 40' 21˚ 99002 OFF ALPHARD BANKS _____ * Date of implementation: 0000 hours UTC on 1 December 1998. (7) . 021805'.00 E (8) 35811'. (Reference charts: South African Navy SAN 57.OFF ALPHARD BANKS 34 MILES SOUTH OF CAPE INFANTA* Note: See ``Rules for navigation of laden tankers off the South African coast'' in part F.

75 S.00 E (5) 35804'. 122.00 E (c) Mossel Bay s 5 Cape St.00 E 022820'. British Admiralty 2083.37 S. IV/12 .86 E 022820'. Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) A separation (1) (2) (3) zone is bounded 34850'.00 E (4) 35803'. 022811'. .81 S. 022810'. (Reference charts: South African Navy SAN 57.18 E A traffic lane for westbound traffic is established between the traffic separation zone and the line connecting the following geographical positions: (9) 34847'.OFF THE FA PLATFORM 47 MILES SOUTH OF MOSSEL BAY* Note: See ``Rules for navigation of laden tankers off the South African coast'' in part F. (4) .00 E (b) A traffic lane for eastbound traffic is established between the separation zone and the line connecting the following geographical positions: (6) 35807'.35 S. . (9) (1) SUMM WINTE ER ZO NE ZONE (10) (2) 50 ' .00 E (8) 35804'. 35801'. 022820'.39 S.06 S. 022800'.(7) 10 ' .00 E (10) 34844'. 022820'.11 S. 2084) Note: The SAN charts are based on Cape Datum (Clarke 1880 Mod). (3) (8) 20 ' 30 ' 99004 OFF THE FA PLATFORM _____ * Date of implementation: 0000 hours UTC on 1 December 1998. Blaize 10 ' 34˚ 20 ' 5 Ystervark Point 30 ' 40 ' .16 S. 022800'. by a line connecting the following geographical positions: 022800'. 34847'. . . 022800'. 22˚ .00 E (7) 35806'.07 S.77 S. R SEA SONAL 35˚ (5) (6) 50 ' .

Mariners should consult the appropriate nautical publications and charts for up-to-date details on aids to navigation and other relevant information. as may new editions of the reference charts published after the adoption of the routeing system. Charts published by other hydrographic offices may use a different geodetic datum. V . WARNING: The geographical positions given in the descriptions of the routeing systems are only correct for charts using the same geodetic datum as the reference charts indicated under each scheme.Section V SOUTH-EAST ASIA CAUTION: The chartlets are for illustrative purposes only and must not be used for navigation.

CHINA Tathong Channel 22˚ East Lamma Channel 112˚ 113˚ 114˚ 115˚ 116˚ 97135 SUMMARY CHARTLET A V/ii . John's Island) Singapore Strait (Off Changi/Pulau Batam) 10 At Horsburgh Lighthouse area In the East Lamma and Tathong Channels (see detail below) 25˚ Tropic of Cancer 20˚ 15˚ 10˚ 1 2 3 5˚ 45 6 8 9 7 0˚ 5˚ 100˚ 110˚ 120˚ 130˚ 97133 23˚ HONG KONG.INDEX: SOUTH-EAST ASIA 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: Summary chartlets for the Straits of Malacca and Singapore At One Fathom Bank Port Klang to Port Dickson Port Dickson to Tanjung Keling Malacca to Iyu Kecil In the Singapore Strait (Main Strait) Singapore Strait (Off St.

section I 3˚ Port Klang At One Fathom Bank ! Bukit Jugra Off Port Klang Port Klang to Port Dickson ! Port Dickson Cape Rachado g jun l Ke 30' ing Off Port Dickson Port Dickson to Tanjung Keling DW n Ta ! Malacca Pu.Pulau Angsa see “Rules for vessels navigating through the Straits of Malacca and Singapore” in part F and mandatory ship reporting system “In the Straits of Malacca and Singapore” in part G. Undan DW 2˚ Off Malacca/ Dumai Ma Bukit Segenting lac ca Str ait (see summary chartlet 2) Dumai iai Ta n jun Malacca to Iyu Kecil gP 30' ! Iyu Kecil 5 ! 1˚ 30' 99016 30' 101˚ 30' 102˚ 30' 103˚ 30' 104˚ 30' 105˚ STRAITS OF MALACCA AND SINGAPORE: SUMMARY CHARTLET 1 .

p illi Ph In the Singapore Strait (Main Strait) Selat Riau V/1-2 40' 30' Singapore Ea st Jo ho rS 5 5 Pu. John’s Island/Pulau Sambu Se la tD ur ia n Pu. 5Changi tra it 5Tanjung Stapa 5 Horsburgh At Horsburgh Lighthouse area 20' ! Off Tanjung Stapa/Pulau Bintan Singapore Strait (Off Changi/Pulau Batam) 5 ! 5 ! Off Sultan Shoal Lighthouse a 5R ffle s ! (C) (B) Pu. Jangkat A: Off Pulau Sebarok/Pulau Belakang Padang B: Singapore Strait (Off St. Belakang Padang 20' 30' 40' 50' 104˚ 10' 20' 30' 40' 99017 STRAITS OF MALACCA AND SINGAPORE: SUMMARY CHARTLET 2 . Batam 1˚ 5 Pu. Iyu Kecil Tanjung Piai Sultan Shoal 5 Pu. Sebarok St. Bintan Pu. John’s Island) C: Off St. John’s I. Sambu (A) 5 Karang Galang 10' DW Ch a e nn l Pu.

20 N. [24] ! .40 N. 02853'. .80 E (11) 02846'. Note: This chart is based on revised Kertau Datum.70 N. (11) (14) Bukit Jugra 5 50' 5 .AT ONE FATHOM BANK* Note: See ``Rules for vessels navigating through the Straits of Malacca and Singapore'' in part F and mandatory ship reporting system ``In the Straits of Malacca and Singapore'' in part G. Klang 3˚ (12) .70 N.00 E 100855'.50 E (16) 02839'. 101800'.70 N. 101808'. 101810'.50 E 100859'.30 N. (2) 5 One Fathom Bank .80 E (6) 02849'. 100848'. 100855'. (15) (4) (5) . (10) 55 .30 N.10 E (13) 02841'.40 E (15) 02844'.40 E 101810'.30 N. (7) .50 E (7) 02853'. (1) (8) . 5 .40 N. by a line connecting the following geographical positions: 100847'. (Reference chart: British Admiralty 3946. 100859'. 101808'.90 N. 1996 edition.50 N. 101812'.00 E A traffic lane for south-eastbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (12) 02854'.10 E (b) A traffic lane for north-westbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (9) 03802'. 100843'. 101811'. 101815'. . [27] 40' (13) (17) .) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) A separation (1) (2) (3) (4) zone is bounded 03800'. (3) (6) . section I. 02843'.50 N. V/2 . 100847'. 101811'. . 5 (16) 97136 40' 50' 101˚ 10' 20' AT ONE FATHOM BANK + OFF PORT KLANG _____ * Date of implementation: 0000 hours UTC on 1 December 1998.00 E (17) 02841'.30 E (8) 03800'.40 E (5) 02843'. 02849'.50 E (10) 02852'.80 E (c) OFF PORT KLANG Description of the precautionary area A precautionary area is established by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (14) 02846'.20 N.30 N.70 N.40 N.80 E (9) .00 N.

80 E (21) 02826'. 101842'. 02835'.00 E] in a direction of 0278 to meet the coast and a line drawn from position (26) [02829'.00 N.10 N.60 N. 1997 edition.40 N.) Description of the precautionary area A precautionary area is established by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (30) 02829'.40 E (29) 02824'.80 N.30 N. 1996 edition.80 E 101837'.30 N.40 E (31) 02825'.80 E (32) 02821'. 101836'.40 N.00 E A traffic lane for south-eastbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (27) 02839'.40 N. 101835'. 101835'. 101838'. 02827'.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) A separation (18) (19) (20) zone is bounded 02842'. by a line connecting the following geographical positions: 101813'. 101823'. 101839'. 101828'. 101812'.60 E (b) A traffic lane for north-westbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a separation line connecting the following geographical positions: (24) 02844'. 1996 edition.20 N. (Reference chart: British Admiralty 3946.30 E (23) 02841'.00 N.80 E (25) 02837'.00 N.60 N.50 N.30 E _____ * Date of implementation: 0000 hours UTC on 1 December 1998.10 E (22) 02835'. 101815'.00 N.90 E (33) 02824'. 101825'. Note: These charts are based on revised Kertau Datum.80 E 101827'. section I.00 E (26) 02829'.PORT KLANG TO PORT DICKSON* Note: See ``Rules for vessels navigating through the Straits of Malacca and Singapore'' in part F and mandatory ship reporting system ``In the Straits of Malacca and Singapore'' in part G. 101815'. 101838'.00 N.80 E] in a direction of 0348 to meet the Malaysian coast.00 N. 3947. V/3-1 . 101838'. 101813'.60 N.30 E (28) 02834'. Note: This chart is based on revised Kertau Datum. OFF PORT DICKSON* (Reference charts: British Admiralty 3946.30 E (c) Inshore traffic zone The area between the landward boundary of the traffic separation scheme and the Malaysian coast between a line drawn from position (24) [02844'.

(19) . (28) . [40][42] . ! . In sh or 5 e tra ffi c 40' zo ne (25) . .Port Klang 5 Bukit Jugra 50' [15] (24) . . (22) . (27) [16] (18) . (26) (30) 30' 2˚ . (29) (33) (32) . (20) (21) ! (31) . [38] DW 10' 20' 99018 101˚ 20' 30' 40' PORT KLANG TO PORT DICKSON + OFF PORT DICKSON V/3-2 . (23) .

N.90 E (39) 02811'. section I.30 N.80 E 101836'.20 E _____ * Date of implementation: 0000 hours UTC on 1 December 1998.90 101854'.40 E (36) 02809'.00 E A traffic lane for south-eastbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (40) 02821'. 1997 edition.10 N. 101859'. 102801'.60 N. N.00 E] in a direction of 0348 to meet the Malaysian coast.90 E A traffic lane for north-westbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a separation line connecting the following geographical positions: (38) 02825'. 102801'. 101854'.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) A separation zone is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (34) 02823'.80 E 101836'. V/4-1 .PORT DICKSON TO TANJUNG KELING* Note: See ``Rules for vessels navigating through the Straits of Malacca and Singapore'' in part F and mandatory ship reporting system ``In the Straits of Malacca and Singapore'' in part G.90 N. 101836'.80 N.80 E (50) 02807'.60 E (37) 02823'. (Reference charts: British Admiralty 3946.00 E (35) 02809'. 101839'. 1997 edition.40 N.80 (44) 02805'.40 101839'. (48) 02824'.20 E E E E (46) 02812'. Note: These charts are based on revised Kertau Datum.40 E (41) 02807'.70 N.30 101855'. (47) 02822'. 1983 edition.10 (45) 02803'. 3833.00 south-eastbound traffic is established by connecting the following geographical N. 102801'.20 E (52) 02803'. 101859'.40 (43) 02813'.) Description of the precautionary area A precautionary area is established by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (49) 02811'. 1988 edition.20 N. 101840'. 101841'. 3947. 101842'. N.20 N. OFF MALACCA/DUMAI* (Reference charts: British Admiralty 3947. 2403.60 N.00 N. 101857'. Note: These charts are based on revised Kertau Datum.00 N.60 N.00 E (51) 02800'. 101859'.20 N. 101842'.10 E (b) (c) (d) Inshore traffic zone The area between the landward boundary of the traffic separation scheme and the Malaysian coast between a line drawn from position (38) [02825'. 101839'.80 N.50 E A deep-water route for positions: (42) 02821'. 1996 edition. 102806'.00 N.90 E] in a direction of 0598 to meet the Malaysian coast and a line drawn from position (39) [02811'.00 N.

[65] . 5 Cape Rachado (47) . (37) . (40) (42) DW . (41) (50) . . [32] In sh o re tra ffic 20' zo n e (46) . (49) .Port Dickson 30' ! (48) . [80] DW Tan . (34) . (38) [31] . (45) (52) ! (44) (51) . (39) . (43) jun gK elin g 2˚ 99021 40' 50' 102˚ 10' PORT DICKSON TO TANJUNG KELING + OFF MALACCA/DUMAI V/4-2 . . 5 Tanjung Medang 5 10' (35) (36) .

103800'.MALACCA TO IYU KECIL* Note: See ``Rules for vessels navigating through the Straits of Malacca and Singapore'' in part F and mandatory ship reporting system ``In the Straits of Malacca and Singapore'' in part G.20 N. 01823'. 1994 edition.80 E (c) (d) A deep-water route for south-eastbound traffic is established by connecting the following geographical positions: (79) 01852'. OFF SULTAN SHOAL LIGHTHOUSE* (Reference charts: British Admiralty 2598.30 E (67) 01838'. 1988 edition. 01840'.70 N.80 E 103828'. 3833.00 N. 102816'. 102805'.80 N.20 N.20 N.90 E (76) between the separation zone and a line 01822'. 102801'.20 E (74) (72) 01852'. 103827'. section I. 2403.50 E (64) 02804'.40 N.00 E 103824'. (Reference charts: British Admiralty 3947. 01855'.20 N.40 E 102848'. 2556. 103836'.50 N.10 E]. 102803'. 103811'.80 E (b) A traffic lane for north-westbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a separation line connecting the following geographical positions: (65) 02807'.00 E (63) 01854'.80 N.60 E (80) 02800'. 103825'.20 N.30 E (61) 01823'. 103829'.23 N. 3833. Note: These charts are based on revised Kertau Datum.70 E] in a direction of 0388 to meet the Malaysian coast. 103829'.80 N. 1988 edition.60 E (59) 01810'.40 N.20 N.73 E (83) 01805'.76 E _____ * Date of implementation: 0000 hours UTC on 1 December 1998. 103832'.10 N.80 E 103826'. 102814'.90 N.30 N.60 N. 102820'.00 N. 103826'.80 N.20 N.10 E 103822'. 102813'. then in a direction of 0408 to meet the Malaysian coast and a line drawn from position (70) [01814'. 102806'.94 N. 1990 edition.40 E (60) 01813'.20 E (68) 01825'.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) A separation (53) (54) (55) (56) (57) (58) zone is bounded 02805'. 101859'.30 E (82) 01812'.60 N. 102848'.28 N. 01811'. 1983 edition.70 N. 102806'. 1997 edition.62 N. 01812'.50 N.50 E (78) 01859'. 103829'. 102813'. by a line connecting the following geographical positions: 102804'. V/5-1 . 103823'. Note: These charts are based on revised Kertau Datum.80 E Inshore traffic zone The area between the landward boundary of the traffic separation scheme and the Malaysian coast between a line drawn from position (65) [02807'.) Description of the precautionary area A precautionary area is established by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (81) 01814'. 01809'. 01813'.00 E (66) 01857'.20 N.60 E (69) 01815'. 103815'. 103812'.50 E 102815'. 2403.30 E (75) (73) 01836'.90 N.60 N. 102846'.40 E (62) 01839'.00 E (70) 01814'.20 E] to Pulau Undan Lighthouse [02802'.30 N.24 E (84) 01809'.60 N.90 N. 1983 edition.00 N.70 E A traffic lane for south-eastbound traffic is established connecting the following geographical positions: (71) 02802'.40 E 103812'.30 E (77) 02801'. 102802'.

(72) (79) n Ta ju h To ng or Ins 5 hor e tr affi 50' cz one 5 Bukit Segenting (55) . (63) . (64) . (80) DW . (77) . 40' . (54) . (78) . (53) . 5 Pulau Undan 2˚ [51] .n Ta ju li Ke ng ng 10' ! (71) . (62) . (65) [50] . (66) . (67) . (73) 5 Tanjung Parit 30' 102˚ 10' 20' 30' 40' 50' 103˚ 10' MALACCA TO IYU KECIL (WEST) .

(55) (62) (73) e 40' .(69) (60) . (68) (61) . . (67) . (70) (81) (82) Sultan Shoal 5 . 5 1˚ 10 ' (83) [100] 99020 30 ' 40 ' 50 ' 103˚ 10 ' 20 ' 30 ' 40 ' MALACCA TO IYU KECIL (EAST) + OFF SULTAN SHOAL . [95] ! . (58) . 5 Tanjung Parit 30 ' 5 Pulau Pisang . (57) . (74) 20' . Pulau Iyu Kecil 5 5 Tanjung Piai . (56) . (75) (76) (84) .5 Bukit Segenting Ins ho re tra ffic zon . (59) . .

50 E (96) 01811'.65 E (104) 01809'.80 N.35 N.26 N.65 N.82 E (iv) 01810'.45 E (ii) 01805'.44 E (viii) 01808'.10 E (d) (e) SINGAPORE STRAIT (OFF PULAU SEBAROK/PULAU BELAKANG PADANG)* Description of the precautionary area A precautionary area is established by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (106) 01811'.59 N.90 N.45 N.60 N. 103850'. Note: These charts are based on revised Kertau Datum.38 E 103839'. section I.13 N.18 E (97) 01808'.92 N. 103843'.IN THE SINGAPORE STRAIT (MAIN STRAIT)* Note: See ``Rules for vessels navigating through the Straits of Malacca and Singapore'' in part F and mandatory ship reporting system ``In the Straits of Malacca and Singapore'' in part G. 2403. 103846'.75 E (107) 01811'. 103844'. 01808'. 103849'.38 E (vii) 01809'.92 N. The deep-water route is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (i) 01803'.81 N.45 N. 103849'.90 E (89) 01805'. 1988 edition. 1983 edition. 103845'.45 N.31 E (109) 01809'. 1994 edition.28 E (iii) 01808'. 103849'.65 E A deep-water route is established within the eastbound lane described in paragraph (d).30 E (103) 01807'.60 N. 103847'.65 E _____ * Date of implementation: 0000 hours UTC on 1 December 1998. 103850'.90 N. 1990 edition. 2556.70 E (102) 01805'.26 N.72 E (91) 01807'.95 E (vi) 01810'. 103848'.61 N. 103839'.43 E (94) 01810'.25 E (101) 01801'. 103838'. 103842'.81 N.55 E (99) 01811'.50 N. 103849'.62 N. 103847'.00 N.90 N. 103840'.87 E (v) 01810'.24 E (98) 01810'. (chartlet overleaf) V/6-1 . 103832'. 01810'.96 E 103845'. 103839'.97 N.06 N. 103843'. 103845'. by a line connecting the following geographical positions: 103834'. 103836'.60 N. 3833. 103849'.91 E (c) A traffic lane for westbound traffic is established between the separation zone/line and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (95) 01812'. 103843'. 01807'. 103847'.18 E (108) 01810'.50 N. 103848'.91 E (ix) 01804'. (Reference charts: British Admiralty 2598.35 N.94 N. 103832'.60 N.60 N.13 N.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) A separation (85) (86) (87) (88) zone is bounded 01810'.30 E (x) 01802'.95 E 103843'.67 E (105) 01809'. 103849'.30 E (b) A separation line connects the following geographical positions: (92) 01808'.43 E 103849'.85 E (90) 01803'. 103838'. 103846'.95 N.95 N. (93) 01810'.40 E A traffic lane for eastbound traffic is established between the separation zone/line and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (100) 01805'.47 N.

(101) 99022 35' 103˚ 40' 45' 50' IN THE SINGAPORE STRAIT (MAIN STRAIT) + SINGAPORE STRAIT (OFF PULAU SEBAROK/PULAU BELAKANG PADANG) . (109) (105) . (x) . (viii) (87) . (96) [112] (107) ait Str (106) (99) . . (92) (iii) . (v) . Sebarok . (iv) (94) . (103) 5 Helen Mar Reef (91) . . . (95) 5 Pu. DW 5 5 (89) (ii) [83] . ! (85) . (ix) . (100) . (93) . (vi) DW ! . in Ma .V/6-2 Tanjung Piai 5 5 Sultan Shoal 15' 5 St John's Island 5 [82] . (vii) (97) 5 Buffalo Rock (104) . (108) [115] 1˚ 10' . (102) DW 05' (90) 5 (i) P lli hi p Ch a e nn l . (86) 5 5 Raffles 5 (98) . (88) .

21 E A traffic lane for eastbound traffic is established between the separation line and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (115) 01810'. 103850'.41 N.76 E The focal point of the precautionary area is located at the following geographical position: (121) 01812'.51 N. 103853'.25 E (119) 01812'.43 E (111) 01812'.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) (b) A separation line connects the following geographical positions: (110) 01811'. The deep-water route is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (xi) 01811'. 103852'. 103851'.40 E (118) 01813'. 103852'. 1994 edition. Note: These charts are based on revised Kertau Datum.25 E (113) 01811'. 103850'. (chartlet overleaf) V/7-1 . 1988 edition.21 N.38 N.45 N.57 E (c) (d) SINGAPORE STRAIT (OFF ST.96 N.40 E (xiv) 01810'.27 N.59 N.76 E A deep-water route is established within the eastbound lane described in paragraph (c).11 N. 3833. 103852'.41 N.43 E (xiii) 01811'.75 E (116) 01811'. 103852'. 103852'. 103850'. 103853'.60 N. 103852'.31 E (114) 01812'.58 E (xii) 01812'.51 N. _____ * Date of implementation: 0000 hours UTC on 1 December 1998.27 N. (Reference charts: British Admiralty 2556. JOHN'S ISLAND)* Note: See ``Rules for vessels navigating through the Straits of Malacca and Singapore'' in part F and mandatory ship reporting system ``In the Straits of Malacca and Singapore'' in part G.21 N.85 E (120) 01811'. 103854'.78 N.SINGAPORE STRAIT (OFF ST. JOHN'S ISLAND/PULAU SAMBU)* Description of the precautionary area (a) A precautionary area is established by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (117) 01812'. 103852'.40 E A traffic lane for westbound traffic is established between the separation line and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (112) 01811'. 2403. 1983 edition.20 E (b) Description of the area to be avoided A circular area to be avoided with a diameter of one cable is established around position (121).92 N. 103850'. 103850'. section I.

Area to be avoided 13' . John's Island (117) (114) . [132] 12' (110) . St. (119) . (xi) DW . (115) [108] Pu. JOHN'S ISLAND/PULAU SAMBU) V/7-2 . (xiii) (113) . (111) (xii) . (112) [107] . Anak Sambu 5 1˚ 10' Pu. (116) (120) 5 Batu Berhanti 11' ! (xiv) .15' 14' 5 [128] (118) . . JOHN'S ISLAND) + SINGAPORE STRAIT (OFF ST. Belakang Padang 99023 103˚ 50' 55' SINGAPORE STRAIT (OFF ST. Sambu 09' Pu. (121) ! .

104803'. (chartlet overleaf) V/8-1 .07 N.42 N.45 E (126) 01815'.00 E (136) 01818'.32 E A traffic lane for eastbound traffic is established between the separation zone/line and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (132) 01812'.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) A separation line connects the following geographical positions: (122) 01812'.40 E A traffic lane for westbound traffic is established between the separation zone/line and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (128) 01813'.60 N. 103853'. 104815'. section I.97 N. 103855'. 1988 edition. 104800'. 103855'.00 E (129) 01814'.40 E 103859'. 1990 edition.67 E (c) (d) SINGAPORE STRAIT (OFF TANJUNG STAPA/PULAU BINTAN)* Description of the precautionary area A precautionary area is established by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (135) 01816'.32 E (137) 01815'.SINGAPORE STRAIT (OFF CHANGI/PULAU BATAM)* Note: See ``Rules for vessels navigating through the Straits of Malacca and Singapore'' in part F and mandatory ship reporting system ``In the Straits of Malacca and Singapore'' in part G.01 E (127) 01815'.50 N. 104815'.89 N.60 N.02 N. 3831.05 N. 1988 edition.11 N. 3833.57 N.01 E (b) A separation zone is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (125) 01814'. 103857'.89 N.00 E (138) 01814'. 104803'. 1983 edition. (123) 01813'.40 E (134) 01814'. 103854'. Note: These charts are based on revised Kertau Datum.85 E (130) 01816'.03 E (124) 01814'.38 N. (Reference charts: British Admiralty 2569.67 N. 104803'. 103859'. 104803'.18 E (131) 01816'.40 N.58 E (133) 01813'. 104803'.05 N. 103854'. 2403.63 N.58 E _____ * Date of implementation: 0000 hours UTC on 1 December 1998. 104803'.

(133) ! (132) [119] 5 Batu Berhanti Se lat 5 Pu. (127) (124) . ! (137) [148] 15' . . (125) (129) . Sambu 5 1˚ Ri au 5 Karang Galang 10' Pu.(135) (130) . . [118] (128) . . (131) .V/8-2 Tanjung Stapa 5 20' 5 Changi 5 Bedok [145] (136) . (134) (138) . (123) . . Belakang Padang Pulau Bintan Pulau Batam 99024 55' 104˚ 05' 10' 15' SINGAPORE STRAIT (OFF CHANGI/PULAU BATAM) + SINGAPORE STRAIT (OFF TANJUNG STAPA/PULAU BINTAN) . (126) . (122) .

. (Reference charts: British Admiralty 3831.05 E (144) 01817'. (146) (140) 5 Horsburgh Light 20' .55 N.85 E 104815'.80 N.00 E (b) for south-westbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line following geographical positions: 01818'. 1983 edition. 104815'. 104819'.40 N. 1988 edition. 104815'. AT HORSBURGH LIGHTHOUSE AREA V/9 .25 E 104819'. 104827'.00 E (147) 01825'. Note: These charts are based on revised Kertau Datum. . . section I. (143) (139) .40 N.32 E 01819'. (150) Johor Tanjung Penyusop 1˚ (145) [136] .40 N.95 E 01816'.85 E (147) (c) . (149) 15' Tanjung Sading Tanjung Tondang Pulau Bintan 10' 97143 15' 104˚ 20' 25' 30' _____ * Date of implementation: 0000 hours UTC on 1 December 1998.00 N. (140) 01818'. 104826'. (144) Singapore Strait ! . A traffic lane connecting the (145) (146) A traffic lane connecting the (148) (149) positions: 104827'.50 E for north-eastbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line following geographical positions: 01815'.40 N. 104819'. (141) 25' .30 N.32 N.63 N.70 E (143) 01817'.10 N. 104819'.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) A separation zone is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical (139) 01817'. (141) 01824'. .00 E (142) 01824'.30 N.00 E (150) 01823'. (142) . 104815'. 104827'. 2403. (148) [137] .AT HORSBURGH LIGHTHOUSE AREA* Note: See ``Rules for vessels navigating through the Straits of Malacca and Singapore'' in part F and mandatory ship reporting system ``In the Straits of Malacca and Singapore'' in part G.

97 E (10) 22810'.40 E] in the direction 0348 true to the shore.08 N.IN THE EAST LAMMA AND TATHONG CHANNELS (Reference charts: British Admiralty 937.00 E (4) 22813'. 114811'.67 E (18) 22816'. 114817'.95 N.27 E (16) 22814'.43 N. 114817'. and a line drawn from position (15) [22812'. 114815'.05 N.43 E (8) 22811'. 114811'.68 N. 114811'.25 N. 114811'. 114820'.43 E A traffic lane for outbound traffic established between the separation line specified in (a) and a straight line connecting the following geographical positions: (5) 22809'. and a line drawn from position (18) [22816'.22 E (15) 22812'.12 N. and a line drawn from position 22813'.13 E (d) Inshore traffic zones The area enclosed by the outer limit of the inbound traffic lane and the adjacent coast.00 N.35 N.75 E in the direction 3608 true to the shore.02 N.97 N.67 E] in the direction 2708 true to the shore.42 E (8) 22817'. 114814'. 114816'.00 E A separation line connects the following geographical positions: (5) 22813'. 114820'.15 N. and a line drawn from position (13) [22817'. (6) 22814'.42 E 22812'.65 N. 114817'. The area enclosed by the outer limit of the outbound traffic lane and the adjacent coast. 114817'.38 N. Note: These charts are based on Hong Kong (1963) Datum.93 N.27 E (13) 22817'.43 E (LCS 2) (c) (d) (e) V/10-1 .37 N.37 E A separation (11) (12) (13) (14) line connecting the following geographical positions: 22811'.00 N. 114815'.78 E (10) 22813'.50 E 114814'. 114810'. 114816'.18 E (Lamma Patch) 22816'. 1989 edition.00 E (12) 22816'. 114811'. 114807'.22 E (4) 22810'. 114817'. is designated as an inshore traffic zone.42 N.25 N. 1917.73 N. is designated as an inshore traffic zone.00 E (17) 22816'. 114814'.92 N.33 E (b) (c) A traffic lane for inbound traffic is established between the separation zone/line and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (9) 22814'. 1988 edition.02 N. 114813'.23 E (LCS 1) 22814'.47 E (7) 22816'. 114806'.30 N. 114817'.00 N.87 E (Chesterman) (9) 22810'.15 N.67 E A traffic lane for outbound traffic is established between the separation zone/line and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (14) 22812'.33 N. 114812'.47 N. 1988 edition. 114814'.42 N. 114815'. 114820'. 114810'. Part II: Western approaches to Victoria Port (East Lamma Channel) The traffic separation scheme for the western approaches to Victoria Port (East Lamma Channel) comprises: (a) (b) A separation line connecting the following geographical positions: (1) 22809'. 114820'. 114811'.) Description of the traffic separation schemes The traffic separation schemes in the approaches to Hong Kong consist of two parts: Part I: Eastern approaches to Victoria Port (Tathong Channel) (a) A separation zone is bounded by lines connecting the following geographical positions: (1) 22813'.92 E A traffic lane for inbound traffic established between the separation line specified in (a) and a straight line connecting the following geographical positions: (3) 22809'.07 N. 114812'.37 E A precautionary area established by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (7) 22810'.97 N.00 E (3) 22813'. 114816'.88 E (6) 22810'.23 N.68 N. 114820'.40 E (11) 22814'. 114812'. 114814'.47 N.30 N.58 E (2) 22810'.27 E] in the direction 2148 true to the shore.47 E (2) 22813'.83 N.30 N. 1918.

and a straight line drawn from position (20) in the direction 218. V/10-2 F id 25 h F b (chartlet overleaf) 2000 S W i Shi ' R i (f h) 1 f .45 N.42 E (LCS 1 NE) (17) 22815'. 114810'.87 N.(f) A traffic lane for inbound traffic established between the separation line specified in (e) and straight lines connecting the following geographical positions: (15) 22811'.13 E (LCS 2 SW) (g) Inshore traffic zones (h) A designated inshore traffic zone on the landward side of the inbound traffic lane is established as follows: The area between the outer boundary of the inbound traffic lane specified in (f) and a straight line drawn from the position (15) in the direction 0568T to the shore and a straight line drawn from position (18) in the direction 0638T to the shore.23 N.58T to the shore. 114806'. 114806'.73 N.07 E (LCS 1 SW) (21) 22814'.97 E (20) 22812'.47 N.87 E (Chesterman) (16) 22812'. 114810'. A designated inshore traffic zone on the landward side of the outbound traffic lane as follows: The area between the outer boundary of a part of the outbound traffic lane specified in (g) and the adjacent coast. The existing LCS 1 and LCS 2 will be renamed LCS 2 and LCS 3 respectively. 114811'.10 N.30 N.43 E (Lamma Patch NE) (18) 22816'. 114810'.67 E (LCS 2 NE) A traffic lane for outbound traffic established between the separation line specified in (e) and straight lines connecting the following geographical positions: (19) 22810'.73 N. and a straight line drawn from position (21) in the direction 2318T to the shore. their type and characteristics will remain unchanged. 114807'. 114806'. (i) Remarks: A Safe Water Mark LCS 1 is to be laid in position (1) with the characteristics of Lf1 10 s in conjunction with the amended traffic separation scheme ``Western approaches to Victoria Port (East Lamma Channel)''.97 E (Lamma Patch SW) (22) 22816'.

.(13) (8) . (18) . Inshore traffic zone (5) . (12) HONG KONG 16' ISLAND Tit Cham Chau Insh ore traf one fic z Tung Lung Chau 15' 22˚ . (3) . (6) (10) . (1) (4) . (7) . (9) 14' . . (14) 19' 20' 21' 22' 114˚ 18' IN THE TATHONG CHANNEL . . Clear Water Bay Peninsula 17' (17) . (15) 13' 14' 15' 16' 17' . (11) D’Aguilar Peninsula (16) . (2) 13' .

(18) (22) (14) HONG KONG 16´ ISLAND (17) 15´ (21) (13) Ap Lei Chau 14´ In sh In or e tra ffic sh or e tra zo ffic ne zo ne 13´ (16) (12) (20) LAMMA ISLAND Wong Ma Kok (8) (15) (11) Yuen Kok (19)(9) 12´ 11´ ! (2) (4) (7) 22˚ (6)(10) (3) (1) (5) 06´ 07´ 08´ 09´ 09´ 10´ V/10-4 F id 25 h F b 2000 S W i Shi ' R i (f h) 1 IN THE EAST LAMMA CHANNEL f 114˚10´ 11´ 12´ 13´ 97243 .

VI . as may new editions of the reference charts published after the adoption of the routeing system. Mariners should consult the appropriate nautical publications and charts for up-to-date details on aids to navigation and other relevant information. Charts published by other hydrographic offices may use a different geodetic datum.Section VI AUSTRALASIA CAUTION: The chartlets are for illustrative purposes only and must not be used for navigation. WARNING: The geographical positions given in the descriptions of the routeing systems are only correct for charts using the same geodetic datum as the reference charts indicated under each scheme.

10˚ 20˚ 30˚ 2 1 40˚ 50˚ INDEX: AUSTRALASIA 1: South of Wilson Promontory in the Bass Strait 2: In the Bass Strait 60˚ 99040 120˚ 130˚ 140˚E 150˚ 160˚ 170˚ 180˚ 170˚ 160˚ 150˚ 140˚W 130˚ .

146833'. 146845'. (10) 20' Crocodile Rk.00 S. 10' . 146819'.00 E (4) 39812'.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) A separation zone is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (1) 39811'.00 E (8) 39810'. (1) . Australian AUS 801. 146815'. Note: These charts are based on Australian Geodetic Datum (1966). 146845'.80 S. . 25' Curtis Group 30' 97145 10' 20' 30' 40' 50' 147˚ SOUTH OF WILSON PROMONTORY IN THE BASS STRAIT VI/1 . (8) (6) (7) (4) 5' .00 S.10 S. 146845'.00 E A traffic lane for eastbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (9) 39819'.80 S.80 S.00 E (2) 39815'. 1975 edition.00 S. 146819'.00 E (7) 39810'. (5) Inshore traffic zone .80 S. 146845'.00 E to position 39804'.00 E (10) 39819'. 146825'. 146815'. 146826'. 146815'. 146815'.SOUTH OF WILSON PROMONTORY IN THE BASS STRAIT (Reference charts: British Admiralty 1695A. 55' Wilson Promontory 39˚ .20 E (Oberon Point) (western limit) is designated as an inshore traffic zone.00 E (b) (c) Inshore traffic zone The area between Wilson Promontory and the landward boundary of the traffic separation scheme and lying between a line drawn from position 39802'.00 S. (2) Hogan Group 15' . Rodondo I.00 S. .00 S.00 S.00 S.00 S. (3) . AUS 350. 146828'.00 E (3) 39815'.00 E A traffic lane for westbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a separation line connecting the following geographical positions: (5) 39802'. (9) .20 E (6) 39809'.70 E (Cape Wellington) (South Head) (north-eastern limit) and a line drawn from position 39810'.00 E to position 39804'. 1971 edition.

(7) . (3) . AUS 357A.00 S. . 148814'.60 S.30 S. 1983 edition. 148813'.20 E A traffic lane for eastbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (7) 38849'.00 E (8) 38848'.50 S. 148823'.50 S.20 E (3) 38846'. (1) (2) 40' .00 E (2) 38844'.30 E (5) 38841'.5 miles wide is centred on the following geographical positions: (1) 38841'.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) A separation zone 1.00 S. 148820'.80 E (9) 38844'. Note: These charts are based on Australian Geodetic Datum (1966). 148817'. 148809'. 148816'. 148807'. 1971 edition.80 S. 148810'. (9) . (4) . Tuna Tuna ‘B’ Flounder ‘A’ Halibut ‘A’ Mackerel 20' Kingfish ‘B’ .90 E A traffic lane for westbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (4) 38838'. (8) B S ass tra it 39˚ 97146 20' .80 S.70 E (b) (c) Area to be avoided 38˚ Snapper Barracouta ‘A’ Marlin See description of the area to be avoided “In the Bass Strait” in part D.IN THE BASS STRAIT (Reference charts: Australia AUS 422. (5) .50 S.50 E (6) 38842'. section III Fortescue ‘A’ Bream Perch Cobia Kingfish ‘A’ West Kingfish 20' 40' 148˚ IN THE BASS STRAIT VI/2 ^ (6) .

PACIFIC COAST CAUTION: The chartlets are for illustrative purposes only and must not be used for navigation. WARNING: The geographical positions given in the descriptions of the routeing systems are only correct for charts using the same geodetic datum as the reference charts indicated under each scheme. Charts published by other hydrographic offices may use a different geodetic datum. as may new editions of the reference charts published after the adoption of the routeing system. Mariners should consult the appropriate nautical publications and charts for up-to-date details on aids to navigation and other relevant information.Section VII NORTH AMERICA. VII .

Valdez 1 60˚ 50˚ 2 INDEX: NORTH AMERICA. Alaska 2: In the Strait of Juan de Fuca and its approaches 3: In Puget Sound and its approaches 4: Off San Francisco 5: In the Santa Barbara Channel 6: In the approaches to Los Angeles – Long Beach (A continuation of the Santa Barbara Channel scheme) 7: In the approaches to Salina Cruz Vancouver 3 Seattle 40˚ 4 San Francisco 5 6 Long Beach 30˚ 20˚ 7 10˚ 99029 180˚ 170˚ 160˚ 150˚ 140˚ 130˚ 120˚ 110˚ 100˚ 90˚ . PACIFIC COAST 1: In Prince William Sound.

45 W (15) 60850'. 147803'. 147803'.03 N.12 N.42 W (8) 60858'. 146858'. Note: This chart is based on North American 1983 Geodetic Datum.35 N. by a line connecting the following geographical positions: 146847'.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) A separation (1) (2) (3) (4) zone is bounded 60858'. 146851'.55 N.58 N.38 W (11) 60834'. 147800'.67 N. 147801'.82 W (12) 60815'.70 W (14) 60834'. 146806'.22 W (6) 60834'.75 N.73 W (c) (chartlet overleaf) VII/1-1 .25 W 146849'.40 N.08 N.58 W 147802'. 146844'.45 W A traffic lane for southbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (13) 60817'. ALASKA (Reference chart: United States 16700. 146846'. 60849'.95 W (5) 60816'. 146847'. 60834'.68 N. 1992 edition.38 W (7) 60849'.35 W 147805'.82 W (10) 60849'.IN PRINCE WILLIAM SOUND. 146848'.15 W (b) A traffic lane for northbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (9) 60858'.95 N. 60817'.28 N.92 W (16) 60858'.98 N. 146846'.85 N.70 N.03 N.

50' (10) Bligh I. (9) Glacier I. (4) . (2) . (3) (6) Prince William Sound Smith I. (5) . (8) . (15) . Naked I. 20' . ALASKA VII/1-2 . (13) . .(7). Goose I. . (12) Montague I. 97157 20' 10' 147˚ 50' 40' 30' 20' 10' IN PRINCE WILLIAM SOUND. 60˚ 30' Hinchinbrook I. (11) (14) .Port Valdez 61˚ (16) (1) . . .. 40' .

60 N. Note: These charts are based on North American 1927 Geodetic Datum.20 N.IN THE STRAIT OF JUAN DE FUCA AND ITS APPROACHES (Reference charts: United States National Ocean Survey 18400.60 W 123831'. 1987 edition.60 N.80 124845'.60 W Part II In the Strait of Juan de Fuca there are three traffic separation schemes and a precautionary area: Western lanes (a) A separation (21) (22) (23) zone is bounded 48828'.00 W (17) 48830'.) Description of the traffic separation scheme Part I In the approaches to the Strait of Juan de Fuca there are two traffic separation schemes and a precautionary area: Western approach (a) A separation zone is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (1) 48830'. 1985 edition.80 W W W W W (20) 48829'. 124858'. N.10 N.80 N.90 N. 48813'. 124853'.60 N.70 W South-western approach (a) (b) (c) Precautionary area A precautionary area is bounded as follows: from south-easterly to thence southerly to thence westerly to thence south-westerly to thence north-westerly and northerly by an arc of 7 nautical miles radius.20 N.40 N. 124848'.90 W (25) 48817'. 1982 edition.20 N.50 W (3) 48828'.30 W (6) 48832'. 124852'.30 N.50 N.80 N. N.70 N. 124857'. 48813'. 124852'. 18465. 1986 edition.90 N. 124855'.80 N.40 N. 1986 edition. N.10 48823'. 1984 edition.20 W A traffic lane for south-eastbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (18) 48827'. Canadian Hydrographic Service 3440. 124800'. 124853'. 18440.10 W (10) 48825'. L/C-3606. by a line connecting the following geographical positions: 124843'. 123831'.50 N.80 W (31) 48812'. 123831'. 123830'. 124843'.00 W (14) 48823'.10 N. 18421. 18480. 124854'.40 N. 124851'.50 124843'. 124853'.30 124843'.60 W (24) 48814'.80 W A traffic lane for south-westbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (15) 48826'.20 W (29) 48827'. 124854'.40 N.70 W (26) 48829'.60 W (b) A traffic lane for westbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (5) 48831'. 124843'.00 W (12) 48821'.20 N.10 W (2) 48830'.80 W A separation zone is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (9) 48823'.40 N.50 W (11) 48823'. 1989 edition.00 N.50 W (28) 48818'.20 N.70 48827'.40 N.30 W (8) 48827'. 124853'.20W (c) VII/2-1 .00 W (16) 48824'.80 N. 123857'. 1983 edition. 124841'. L/C-3602.00 W (4) 48828'. 1987 edition.70 N. 124800'.80 W (30) 48812'. 124843'.10 48827'. 18485.90 48830'.60 W (b) A traffic lane for north-westbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (27) 48815'. 124843'. 1989 edition. 18460. 124850'. 124858'.80 W 123856'. centred at thence to the point of origin at (5) (5) (17) (18) (19) (14) 48831'. N.80 W (c) A traffic lane for eastbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (7) 48827'.70 N.40 N. 124856'.40 124848'. 124858'.10 N.90 W A traffic lane for north-eastbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (13) 48820'.

Southern lanes (a) A separation zone is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (32) 48810'.40 N, 123826'.50 W (34) 48812'.50 N, 123827'.30 W (33) 48812'.30 N, 123827'.90 W (35) 48810'.60 N, 123825'.80 W A traffic lane for northbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (36) 48810'.90 N, 123825'.00 W (37) 48813'.60 N, 123826'.10 W A traffic lane for southbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (31) 48812'.40 N, 123830'.20 W (38) 48810'.10 N, 123827'.30 W A separation zone is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (39) 48820'.70 N, 123825'.10 W (41) 48815'.80 N, 123827'.10 W (40) 48816'.20 N, 123828'.50 W (42) 48820'.50 N, 123824'.40 W A traffic lane for southbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (43) 48820'.90 N, 123826'.10 W (27) 48815'.60 N, 123831'.00 W A traffic lane for northbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (37) 48813'.60 N, 123826'.10 W (44) 48820'.20 N, 123823'.40 W

(b)

(c)

Northern lanes (a) (b)

(c)

Precautionary area A precautionary area of radius two miles is centred upon geographical position: (45) 48814'.20 N, 123828'.90 W

VII/2-2

5

5
(6)

Bonilla Point

.

(5)

.

(1)

(17)

Vancouver Island
30'

.

. (2) . (3) . (8) . (15) . (10)
(11)

.

.
(4)

!

. (21) . (20)
(19) .

(26) .

.

.

(7)

.

Stra it of

Jua n

(18) (29)

de

Fuc

Victoria

a

.
(16)

. .

.

Tatoosh Island

.

(9) (12) . (13)

(14)

5

Cape Flattery . .
(28)

5
(39) (43) . . . (42) . (44) 48˚
20'

See description of area to be avoided “Off the Washington Coast” in part D, section II
Washington

(25)

5

. (22) .
(30)

. . (40) . (41) (24) . (45) . ! . (37) (23) . (34) . (33). .
(31) (36) . . . . (35) (38) (32)
10'

(27)

Port Angeles
40' 20'

124˚

40'

20'

IN THE STRAIT OF JUAN DE FUCA AND ITS APPROACHES

IN PUGET SOUND AND ITS APPROACHES
(Reference charts: United States 18421, 1991 edition; 18440, 1991 edition. Note: These charts are based on North American 1983 Geodetic Datum.)

Description of the traffic separation scheme
The traffic separation scheme ``In Puget Sound and its approaches'' consists of a series of traffic separation schemes and precautionary areas broken into three geographic designations as follows: Part I: Rosario Strait Part II: Approaches to Puget Sound Part III: Puget Sound

Part I
Rosario Strait (a) A separation (1) (2) (3) zone is bounded 48847'.10 N, 48846'.50 N, 48845'.97 N, by a line connecting the following geographical positions: 122851'.37 W (4) 48845'.72 N, 122848'.27 W 122849'.98 W (5) 48846'.27 N, 122850'.08 W 122848'.12 W (6) 48846'.90 N, 122851'.40 W

(b)

A traffic lane for northbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (7) 48850'.33 N, 122853'.57 W (9) 48846'.35 N, 122847'.50 W (8) 48847'.13 N, 122850'.08 W A traffic lane for southbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (10) 48844'.95 N, 122848'.28 W (12) 48847'.78 N, 122856'.60 W (11) 48846'.83 N, 122853'.42 W Connecting with precautionary area ``CA'', the waters contained within a circle of radius 1.24 miles centred at geographical position 48845'.30 N, 122846'.50 W. A separation zone is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (13) 48844'.27 N, 122845'.53 W (15) 48841'.60 N, 122843'.82 W (14) 48841'.72 N, 122843'.50 W (16) 48844'.17 N, 122845'.87 W A traffic lane for northbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (17) 48844'.62 N, 122844'.96 W (18) 48841'.80 N, 122842'.70 W A traffic lane for southbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (19) 48844'.08 N, 122846'.65 W (20) 48841'.25 N, 122844'.37 W Connecting with precautionary area ``C'', the waters contained within a circle of radius 1.24 miles centred at geographical position 48840'.55 N, 122842'.80 W. A two-way traffic lane is established between the following geographical positions: (21) 48839'.33 N, 122842'.73 W (25) 48829'.48 N, 122844'.77 (22) 48836'.08 N, 122845'.00 W (26) 48836'.13 N, 122845'.80 (23) 48826'.82 N, 122843'.53 W (27) 48838'.38 N, 122844'.20 (24) 48827'.62 N, 122845'.53 W (28) 48839'.63 N, 122844'.03 W W W W

(c)

(d) (e) (f)

(g)

(h) (i)

(j)

Connecting with precautionary area ``RB'', the waters contained within a circle of radius 1.24 miles centred at geographical position 48826'.38 N, 122845'.27 W.

VII/3-1

Part II

Approaches to Puget Sound The traffic separation scheme in the approaches to Puget Sound consists of a north-east/south-west approach, a north-west/south-east approach, a north/south approach and an east/west approach connecting with precautionary areas as follows: North-east/south-west approach (a) A separation (29) (30) (31) zone is bounded 48825'.37 N, 48824'.13 N, 48820'.32 N, by a line connecting the following geographical positions: 122846'.35 W (32) 48820'.53 N, 122857'.22 W 122847'.97 W (33) 48824'.32 N, 122848'.22 W 122857'.02 W (34) 48825'.53 N, 122846'.63 W

connecting with precautionary area ``RA'', the waters contained within a circle of radius 1.24 miles centred at 48819'.77 N, 122858'.57 W, and thence to: (35) 48816'.25 N, 123806'.58 W (37) 48819'.20 N, 123800'.35 W (36) 48816'.57 N, 123806'.58 W (38) 48819'.00 N, 123800'.17 W (b) A traffic lane for northbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (39) 48825'.20 N, 122845'.73 W (41) 48819'.80 N, 122856'.83 W (40) 48823'.75 N, 122847'.47 W connecting with precautionary area ``RA'', and thence to: (42) 48815'.70 N, 123806'.58 W (43) 48818'.67 N, (c) 122859'.57 W

A traffic lane for southbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (44) 48825'.97 N, 122847'.03 W (46) 48820'.85 N, 122857'.80 W (45) 48824'.62 N, 122848'.68 W connecting with precautionary area ``RA'', and thence to: (47) 48819'.70 N, 123800'.53 W (48) 48817'.15 N, 123806'.58 W

(d)

Connecting with the Port Angeles precautionary area, which is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (49) 48810'.98 N, 123806'.57 W (51) 48809'.98 N, 123827'.70 W (50) 48817'.15 N, 123806'.57 W (52) 48808'.20 N, 123827'.75 W thence along the shoreline to the point of beginning.

North-west/south-east approach (e) A separation (53) (54) (55) zone is bounded 48825'.43 N, 48822'.88 N, 48820'.93 N, by a line connecting the following geographical positions: 123803'.88 W (56) 48820'.82 N, 122859'.62 W 123800'.82 W (57) 48822'.72 N, 123801'.12 W 122859'.30 W (58) 48825'.32 N, 123804'.30 W 122851'.62 W 122857'.77 W

connecting with precautionary area ``RA'', and thence to: (59) 48818'.83 N, 122857'.48 W (61) 48813'.00 N, (60) 48813'.15 N, 122851'.33 W (62) 48818'.70 N, (f)

A traffic lane for northbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (63) 48825'.60 N, 123803'.13 W (65) 48821'.00 N, 122858'.50 W (64) 48823'.20 N, 123800'.20 W connecting with precautionary area ``RA'', and thence to: (66) 48819'.20 N, 122857'.03 W (67) 48813'.35 N, 122850'.63 W

(g)

A traffic lane for southbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (68) 48825'.17 N, 123804'.98 W (70) 48820'.47 N, 123800'.20 W (69) 48822'.48 N, 123801'.73 W connecting with precautionary area ``RA'', and thence to: (71) 48818'.52 N, 122858'.50 W (72) 48812'.63 N, 122852'.15 W

(h)

Connecting with precautionary area ``SA'', the waters contained within a circle of radius 2 miles centred at geographical position 48811'.45 N, 122849'.78 W.

VII/3-2

North/south approach (between precautionary areas ``RB'' and ``SA'') (i) A separation zone is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (73) 48825'.25 N, 122844'.60 W (76) 48813'.38 N, 122849'.15 W (74) 48824'.15 N, 122844'.08 W (77) 48824'.17 N, 122844'.48 W (75) 48813'.33 N, 122848'.78 W (78) 48825'.18 N, 122844'.95 W (j) A traffic lane for northbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (79) 48825'.55 N, 122843'.93 W (81) 48813'.10 N, 122848'.12 W (80) 48824'.08 N, 122843'.38 W (k) A traffic lane for southbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (82) 48825'.17 N, 122845'.62 W (84) 48813'.43 N, 122849'.90 W (83) 48824'.15 N, 122845'.27 W East/west approach (between Port Angeles and ``SA'' precautionary areas) (l) A separation zone is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (85) 48811'.50 N, 122852'.73 W (87) 48812'.48 N, 123806'.58 W (86) 48811'.73 N, 122852'.70 W (88) 48812'.23 N, 123806'.58 W (m) A traffic lane for northbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (89) 48812'.22 N, 122852'.52 W (90) 48812'.98 N, 123806'.58 W (n) A traffic lane for southbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (91) 48811'.00 N, 123806'.58 W (93) 48810'.98 N, 122852'.65 W (92) 48811'.73 N, 123806'.58 W

Part III

Puget Sound The traffic separation scheme in Puget Sound consists of a series of traffic lanes with separation zones with precautionary areas. (a) A separation zone is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (94) 48811'.08 N, 122846'.88 W (97) 48802'.43 N, 122838'.52 W (95) 48806'.85 N, 122839'.52 W (98) 48806'.72 N, 122839'.83 W (96) 48802'.48 N, 122838'.17 W (99) 48810'.82 N, 122846'.98 W connecting with precautionary area ``SC'', the waters contained within a circle of radius 0.62 centred at geographical position 48801'.85 N, 122838'.15 W, (100) 48801'.40 N, 122837'.57 W (103) 47855'.67 N, 122830'.40 W (101) 47857'.95 N, 122834'.67 W (104) 47857'.78 N, 122834'.92 W (102) 47855'.85 N, 122830'.22 W (105) 48801'.28 N, 122837'.87 W connecting with precautionary area ``SE'', the waters contained within a circle of radius 0.62 centred at geographical position 47855'.40 N, 122829'.55 W, (108) 47846'.47 N, 122826'.62 W (106) 47854'.85 N, 122829'.18 W (107) 47846'.52 N, 122826'.30 W (109) 47854'.80 N, 122829'.53 W connecting with precautionary area ``SF'', the waters contained within a circle of radius 0.62 centred at geographical position 47845'.90 N, 122826'.25 W, (110) 47845'.20 N, 122826'.25 W (112) 47840'.30 N, 122827'.88 W (111) 47840'.27 N, 122827'.55 W (113) 47845'.33 N, 122826'.60 W connecting with precautionary area ``SG'', the waters contained within a circle of radius 0.62 centred at geographical position 47839'.68 N, 122827'.87 W, (114) 47839'.12 N, 122827'.62 W (116) 47835'.17 N, 122827'.35 W (115) 47835'.18 N, 122827'.08 W (117) 47839'.08 N, 122827'.97 W connecting with precautionary area ``T'', the waters contained within a circle of radius 0.62 centred at geographical position 47834'.55 N, 122827'.07 W, (118) 47834'.02 N, 122826'.70 W (122) 47819'.98 N, 122826'.83 W (119) 47826'.92 N, 122824'.10 W (123) 47823'.15 N, 122821'.45 W (120) 47823'.07 N, 122820'.98 W (124) 47826'.85 N, 122824'.45 W (121) 47819'.78 N, 122826'.58 W (125) 47833'.95 N, 122827'.03 W connecting with precautionary area ``TC'', the waters contained within a circle of radius 0.62 centred at geographical position 47819'.48 N, 122827'.38 W. connecting

miles

miles

miles

miles

miles

miles

VII/3-3

(b)

A traffic lane for northbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (126) 48811'.72 N, 122846'.83 W (132) 47839'.68 N, 122826'.95 W (127) 48807'.13 N, 122838'.83 W (133) 47834'.65 N, 122826'.18 W (128) 48802'.10 N, 122837'.32 W (134) 47827'.13 N, 122823'.40 W (129) 47858'.23 N, 122834'.07 W (135) 47823'.33 N, 122820'.37 W (130) 47855'.82 N, 122828'.80 W (136) 47822'.67 N, 122820'.53 W (131) 47845'.92 N, 122825'.33 W (137) 47819'.07 N, 122826'.75 W A traffic lane for southbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (138) 48810'.15 N, 122847'.58 W (144) 47845'.90 N, 122827'.18 W (139) 48809'.35 N, 122845'.55 W (145) 47839'.70 N, 122828'.78 W (140) 48806'.45 N, 122840'.52 W (146) 47834'.47 N, 122827'.98 W (141) 48801'.65 N, 122839'.03 W (147) 47826'.63 N, 122825'.12 W (142) 47857'.47 N, 122835'.45 W (148) 47823'.25 N, 122822'.42 W (143) 47855'.07 N, 122830'.35 W (149) 47820'.00 N, 122827'.90 W

(c)

(chartlet overleaf)

VII/3-4

. (7)
50'

. (12)
(1)

48'

.

. (8)
(2)

Patos Island

(11)

.

(6) .

.

.
(5) (4)

(9)

.

. .

. (3)

Sucia Island

!
5
Precautionary area CA .
(19) (13) (16) .

46'

48˚
45'

(10)

. (17)
44'

Matia Island

.

Lummi Island

Orcas Island
(15)

. . . (14)

(18)

42'

(20) .

Precautionary area C

5
123˚
55' 50' 45'

!
97152

40'

IN PUGET SOUND AND ITS APPROACHES: ROSARIO STRAIT ± NORTH

. 48˚ 30' 97153 122˚ 45' 40' IN PUGET SOUND AND ITS APPROACHES: ROSARIO STRAIT ± SOUTH VII/3-6 . (79) . (28) (21) . 55' 50' (33) . . (14) (18) ! Precautionary area C 5 Lummi Island 40' Orcas Island (27) . . Sinclair Island (26) . (44) ! 25' (34) . .(20) . . (39) (82) (73) . . (29) . . . . (15) . (see Part II ) (45) . . (22) t S t r a i 35' Cypress Island Blakely Island Decatur Island i o R o s a r Lopez Island (25) . (78) . Fidalgo Island . (24) Precautionary area RB . (23) 5 .

. .(46) . . (68) . (57) Strait of Juan de Fuca (55) . (29) (73) (45) . . . . (84) (72) . (41) (47) . 10' (52) . (64) (69) (39) (78) . (82) . . (77) (40) 25' .. (59) area RA (43) (71)(62) (50) (48) . . (56)(65) . . . . . .. (93) ! (138) .(32) (70) (31) . (35) 20' (see TSS “In the Strait of Juan de Fuca and its approaches”) . (38) . ! Precautionary 5 area RB Fidalgo Island Victoria (54) . .. (99) .. . Precautionary area SA Port Townsend Puget Sound (see Part III ) Port Angeles 25' 20' 15' 10' 5' Protection Island 123˚ 55' 50' 45' 40' IN PUGET SOUND AND ITS APPROACHES: APPROACHES TO PUGET SOUND . . (126) 5 . (63) . (85) (94) . . . ..(74). (49) (91) Port Angeles precautionary area (76) (60) (67) .. Precautionary (37) . . (86) . (33) . Lopez Island (44) . (90) (87) (88) (92) .Vancouver Island (58) (53) . (83) (30) . . (61) (89) . (80) . (75) . (42) Whidbey Island 48˚ 15' ! (51) . (79) (34) . . (81) . (36) . . ! 5 (66) .

(139) . Precautionary area SF 50' 45' 40' 35' 122˚ 30' . . (98) (140) 5' (96) (97) . (106) (109) 5 . . Precautionary area SE (102) . (131) ! . (126) 5 (94) . (141) 5 ! . 50' (108) . . u Do e bl Bl .(see Precautionary Part II ) area SA . . ! . . ! Whidbey Island Pu 10' (138) . (100) (105) uf f 48˚ . (107) (144) . . (113) . 97155 IN PUGET SOUND AND ITS APPROACHES: PUGET SOUND ± NORTH VII/3-8 . (110) 25' 5 .. . (104) .(128) . 20' . Precautionary area SC (129) (101) . . (127) . ge tS ou nd Port Townsend (95) . (99) . (142) (103) . (130) 55' (143) .

. ! (133) 5 . . (131) 5 . (147) . (132) 40' (117) (114) . (145) Sound . Precautionary area SG Seattle (116) . (137) Tacoma 40' 35' 30' 122˚ 25' 20' 15' 97156 IN PUGET SOUND AND ITS APPROACHES: PUGET SOUND ± SOUTH VII/3-9 . ! (113) . (115) .. (135) (136) (149) . (125) (118) area T 30' Great Peninsula (134) (119) . (124) Vashon Island 25' Maury Island .. . (123) .. 47˚ 35' Precautionary ... (148) (120) . Precautionary area TC 5 (122) . area SF (110) Precautionary 45' Puget (112) (111) . (146) . (121) 20' ! . . Bainbridge Island !5 .(144) .

122831'.1) (a) (b) (c) A separation zone is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (9) 37839'. 122840'.20 W (b) A traffic lane for north-westbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (5) 37849'.80 N.70 W (6) 37858'.50 W (24) 37840'.80 W (c) A traffic lane for north-eastbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (23) 37835'.60 W (3) 37855'.80 W (c) A traffic lane for westbound traffic is established between the separation line and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (30) 37846'. 122835'.20 W (b) A traffic lane for south-westbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (21) 37842'. 122843'.70 N.80 N.30 W (31) 37846'.30 W Main ship channel (a) A separation line connects the following geographical positions: (25) 37845'.50 W (22) 37839'.90 N.90 W (32) 37848'.30 N. 122858'. 123806'. 123802'. 122843'. Note: These charts are based on North American 1983 Geodetic Datum.10 W (8) 37846'. 122857'. 122847'. 122840'. awaiting confirmation of the date of implementation from the Government of the United States (COLREG.90 N.00 W A traffic lane for northbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (13) 37839'.30 W Western approach (a) A separation zone is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (17) 37841'. 122837'.00 N.30 W (16) 37839'.20 N.00 W (19) 37836'. 122839'. 122846'.20 W A traffic lane for southbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (15) 37827'.70 N.37/Add. 1987 edition.10 N.30 W Part III Part IV VII/4-1 .00 W (27) 37848'.20 N. 122848'. 122848'.00 N. 122847'.70 N. 18645. 122858'.30 W (b) A traffic lane for eastbound traffic is established between the separation line and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (28) 37845'. 1990 edition.80 N. 123803'.00 N.00 N.10 N.60 N. 122844'.00 N.30 W (18) 37838'.10 N. 122856'. 123804'.70 W (c) A traffic lane for south-eastbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (7) 37853'.90 N.10 N.2/Circ.40 N. 122837'.50 N.20 W (14) 37827'. 122844'.00 N. 122830'.) Description of the traffic separation scheme The traffic separation scheme off San Francisco consists of four parts: Part I Northern approach (a) A separation zone is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (1) 37848'.90 N.70 W Part II Southern approach Note: Implementation of this amended version of Part II (adopted May 1991) is pending.70 W (29) 37847'.00 N.40 N.90 W (2) 37856'.10 W (20) 37841'.40 W (11) 37827'.00 W (26) 37847'.10 N. 122831'. 122848'. 122848'. 122846'.00 W (10) 37827'.40 W (12) 37839'. 122839'.40 N.50 N.20 N.70 W (4) 37847'.OFF SAN FRANCISCO (Reference charts: United States National Ocean Survey 18680. 122838'. 122834'.

(18) ..(32) 5Fort Pt . 55 North Farallon Middle Farallon S. . . (31) . (34) 40' Pillar Pt (15) (11) (10) (14) . . (17) . . . (23) . (16) (13) (9) (24) . (5) (21) .9 N. (12) .3 N.0 N. 122834'. (29) area . 122841'.Area to be avoided A circular area to be avoided. Area to be avoided .6 W (35) 37850'.3 N. (7) . (1) Precautionary . (30) . (20) .6 W (35) 37850'.E.7 N. (4) Pt Lobos .7 N. 20' 37˚ 123˚ 40' 20' 97148 OFF SAN FRANCISCO VII/4-2 . 38˚ Double Pt Duxbury Pt . 122838'. (19) . . 122841'.0 W The precautionary area is bounded to the east by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (34) 37842'. is centred upon geographical position: (33) 37845'.0 W Pt Reyes (6) .(27) . (35) 5Lime Pt . of radius half a mile. (26) (8) (25) (28) (33) .5 W and connecting the following geographical positions: (34) 37842'.0 N. Pt Bonita 5 .0 W (25) 37845'. Farallon (22) . 122838'.5 W Precautionary area A precautionary area is established bounded to the west by an arc of a circle of radius 6 miles centring upon geographical position (33) 37845'. . (2) . 122838'. . (3) . 122834'.

10 W (16) 34822'.75 N. 119815'. 1987 edition. 120829'.45 W A traffic lane for eastbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (12) 34818'. 34804'.20 N. 1988 edition. 120830'. 120830'.IN THE SANTA BARBARA CHANNEL (Reference charts: United States National Ocean Survey 18700. 120830'.20 W (c) Note: Port Hueneme Fairway A safety fairway is established in the approach to Port Hueneme.90 N. 119818'.40 N.10 W (4) 33843'.20 N.90 W 119815'. 118837'.80 N.30 N.40 W 118835'.10 W A traffic lane for south-eastbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (10) 33842'. 120831'.90 W (15) 34826'.90 N.70 N.) Description of the traffic separation scheme The traffic separation scheme in the Santa Barbara Channel consists of two parts: Part I (a) Between Point Vicente and Point Conception A separation (1) (2) (3) zone is bounded 34820'. Note: These charts are based on North American 1927 Geodetic Datum. 120851'.60 N.00 N.80 N.90 W (5) 34802'. 33844'. by a line connecting the following geographical positions: 120830'. 120852'. 120851'.80 N.00 N.90 N.75 W A traffic lane for westbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (7) 34821'.70 W (6) 34818'.10 W (13) 34823'. 118836'. 120831'. 18720.90 W (9) 33845'.45 W (6) 34818'.50 W (12) 34818'. 119817'.10 W (11) 34801'. 118835'.80 N.90 W (b) A traffic lane for north-westbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (7) 34821'.70 W (b) (c) (chartlet overleaf) VII/5-1 .90 N.90 N.00 N.90 W (14) 34825'.80 N. Part II (a) Between Point Conception and Point Arguello A separation zone is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (1) 34820'.10 W (8) 34804'. 120852'. 120829'.

(2) . Santa Rosa I. (6) (12) BARBARA CHANNEL Ventura Pt Hueneme 5 Port Hueneme (8) 10' San Miguel I. 30' 97149 50' 40' 30' 20' 10' 120˚ 50' 40' 30' 20' 10' 119˚ 50' 40' 30' IN THE SANTA BARBARA CHANNEL . (14) . (11) .Pt Arguello 5 30' (15) . Santa Catalina I. section II (10) . (13) . (9) 5 See “In the approaches to Los Angeles – Long Beach” scheme for continuation Santa Barbara I. Pt Conception 5 (7) 5 Government Pt SANTA Santa Barbara 5 Santa Barbara Pt 20' . (16) . Santa Monica 5 Anacapa Island 34˚ 50' See description of the areas to be avoided “Off the California Coast” in part D. . (5) Pt Dume 5 . . (1) . Santa Cruz I. (4) 40' . . (3) Pt Vicente . .

50 W (11) 33837'.50 W (chartlet overleaf) VII/6-1 .70 N. with the following geographical positions: (10) 33837'.30 N.70 N.90 W (14) 33819'. 118817'. 118835'.50 W (5) 33844'.50 W (9) 33845'.70 N. 118810'.70 N. is centred upon the following geographical positions: (13) 33837'.30 W A traffic lane for northbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (17) 33837'.70 N.70 N. 118806'.10 N.00 W (c) Part II (a) (b) Southern approach A separation zone. 118824'.60 W (6) 33839'.70 N. 118808'.40 W A traffic lane for southbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (15) 33837'.70 N. 18740. 118800'. 118824'.) Description of the traffic separation scheme The traffic separation scheme ``In the approaches to Los Angeles ± Long Beach'' consists of two parts: Part I (a) Western approach A separation (1) (2) (3) zone is bounded 33839'.70 N.90 W 118817'.50 W (19) 33843'. 118837'. 118817'.80 W (17) 33837'.60 W.90 N. two miles wide.50 W (c) Precautionary area The Los Angeles/Long Beach precautionary area consists of the water area enclosed by the Los Angeles/Long Beach breakwater and a line connecting Point Fermin Light.90 W (b) A traffic lane for northbound coastwise traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (7) 33840'. 33838'.IN THE APPROACHES TO LOS ANGELES ± LONG BEACH (A continuation of the Santa Barbara Channel scheme) (Reference charts: United States National Ocean Survey 18746.50 W (12) 33842'. 1986 edition. 118817'. Note: These charts are based on North American 1927 Geodetic Datum.30 W (16) 33819'. 118806'.70 N.50 W (4) 33843'.30 N. 118806'. 1988 edition.70 N.30 N.70 N. 118836'. by a line connecting the following geographical positions: 118817'.70 W 118827'.40 N. 118817'. 118811'.20 N.70 N. at 33842'.60 W A traffic lane for southbound coastwise traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (10) 33837'. 118835'.80 N. 118828'.10 W (8) 33840'. 33838'.50 W (18) 33820'. 118803'.70 N.

(11) (15) (13) . Long Beach . (2) . . (4) .(6) (3) Western approach . (1) area . . (14) (18) 20' 15' 97150 35' 30' 25' 20' 15' 10' 5' 118˚ IN THE APPROACHES TO LOS ANGELES ± LONG BEACH VII/6-2 . (16) . .55' 50' (9) (5) . (7) Precautionary . 40' . (17) (10) 35' 33˚ 30' Southern approach 25' Santa Catalina I. (12) 5 . . . . (8) . Pt Vicente 5 San Pedro Pt Fermin 45' (19) .

095815'.75 N.43 N.75 N.IN THE APPROACHES TO SALINA CRUZ (Reference chart: United States 21441.85 W (8) 16805'. Oaxaca.03 W (10) 15856'. 095817'.00 W (b) (c) Notes: 1 2 Ship movement in the port area is supervised by a Port Vessel Traffic Supervisor on a 24-hour basis. located at geographical position: (23) 16809'.70 N.70 N.00 W (16) 16805'. 095814'. Port Vessel Traffic Supervisor on channel 6 VHF and follow his advice while transiting the scheme.00 W (4) 16806'. A separation zone is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (9) 16805'.31 W (chartlet overleaf) VII/7-1 F id 25 h F b 2000 S W i Shi ' R i (f h) 1 f .70 W (12) 16805'. Note: This chart is based on the World Geodetic System 1972 Datum. 095812'.27 W (3) 15857'.75 N. 095813'.83 W A traffic lane for south-westbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (5) 16806'.70 N.03 W A traffic lane for southbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (13) 16805'. A separation zone is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (1) 16806'. 095812'.73 W A traffic lane for northbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (15) 15856'.85 N. 095820'.35 W (b) (c) Part II (a) Southern approach: recommended for ships of over 500 gross tonnes arriving at or leaving the port of Salina Cruz. 095811'. Oaxaca. 095812'.47 W (2) 15858'. 095811'.70 W (11) 15856'.) Description of the traffic separation scheme The traffic separation scheme is composed of two parts: Part I (a) South-western approach: recommended for oil tankers proceeding to or coming from the three single-point moorings or the oil terminal.75 N.00 N.70 N.73 W (14) 15856'. Any ship intending to use any traffic separation scheme is requested to contact the Salina Cruz. 095811'.70 W (6) 15859'. 095813'. 095819'.15 N.50 N. The master of any ship with appropriate equipment may obtain continuous and precise information on his ship's position in the traffic lane by using the racon identified by the letter Z.23 N. 1986 edition.75 N. 095810'. 095810'.70 N. 095814'.35 N.43 W A traffic lane for north-eastbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (7) 15857'. 095811'.

(23) Racon (Z) Salina Cruz 10´ (Precautionary area: see chartlet in section II of part D) (5) (1) (4) (8) (13) (9) (12) (16) 05´ 16˚ (6) (2) (3) (7) (14) (10) (11) (15) 56´ 20´ 10´ 97247 95˚15´ IN THE APPROACHES TO SALINA CRUZ i (f VII/7-2 F id 25 h F b 2000 S W i Shi ' R h) 1 f .

as may new editions of the reference charts published after the adoption of the routeing system. Charts published by other hydrographic offices may use a different geodetic datum.Section VIII SOUTH AMERICA. VIII . PACIFIC COAST CAUTION: The chartlets are for illustrative purposes only and must not be used for navigation. Mariners should consult the appropriate nautical publications and charts for up-to-date details on aids to navigation and other relevant information. WARNING: The geographical positions given in the descriptions of the routeing systems are only correct for charts using the same geodetic datum as the reference charts indicated under each scheme.

10˚ 0˚ 10˚ 1 2 20˚ 3 30˚ 4 5 6 7 40˚ INDEX: SOUTH AMERICA. PACIFIC COAST 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 8 In the approaches to Arica In the approaches to Iquique In the approaches to Antofagasta In the approaches to Quintero Bay In the approaches to Valparaiso In the approaches to Concepcion Bay In the approaches to San Vicente Bay In the approaches to Punta Arenas 50˚ 97158 80˚ 70˚ 60˚ 50˚ 40˚ VIII/ii .

is centred upon the following geographical positions: (1) 18827'. 070821'.49 S. 26' . (6) 30' 97164 25' 24' 23' 22' 21' 70˚ 20' 19' 18' IN THE APPROACHES TO ARICA VIII/1 . . half a mile wide.49 W A traffic lane for eastbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (5) 18828'.49 W A traffic lane for westbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (3) 18826'.IN THE APPROACHES TO ARICA (Reference chart: Chilean Hydrographic Office 101.49 W 23' (c) 24' Rio L luta 25' (4) .74 S. 070825'. 070821'. 1989 edition.07 W (6) 18829'. 070825'. 070821'.99 S. 070825'.49 S. (5) Arica 29' .07 W (4) 18825'.07 W (2) 18827'.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) (b) A separation zone. Note: This chart is based on South American 1969 Datum.74 S.99 S. (3) 27' (2) . (1) 18˚ 28' .

070810'.4 miles wide. .02 S. 070810'.67 S. 070812'.92 S. 0.27 S. 070812'. (3) 11' (2) . 13' 14' 97165 12' 11' 70˚ 10' 9' 8' IN THE APPROACHES TO IQUIQUE VIII/2 . is centred upon the following geographical positions: (1) 20811'.08 W (6) 20812'.IN THE APPROACHES TO IQUIQUE (Reference chart: Chilean Hydrographic Office 104. 070812'.08 W (c) (4) . .08 W (4) 20810'.08 W (2) 20811'. 070810'.08 W A traffic lane for eastbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (5) 20812'.47 S.08 W A traffic lane for westbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (3) 20810'.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) (b) A separation zone.47 S. (1) Bahia de Iquique 20˚ . Note: This chart is based on South American 1969 Datum. 1988 edition. (5) 12' Iquique (6) .

(3) 37' 23˚ 38' (2) . is centred upon the following geographical positions: (1) 23838'. 070825'.53 S. (1) 39' Antofagasta . 36' .53 S. 070829'.52 W (2) 23838'. 070829'.52 W (6) 23841'.60 W A traffic lane for eastbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (5) 23840'. 070829'. (6) 41' 29' 28' 27' 26' 70˚25' 24' 23' 97159 IN THE APPROACHES TO ANTOFAGASTA VIII/3 .60 W A traffic lane for westbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (3) 23837'. .03 S.IN THE APPROACHES TO ANTOFAGASTA (Reference chart: Chilean Hydrographic Office 212.03 S.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) (b) A separation zone.03 S. 070825'.03 S. 1982 edition.52 W (4) 23836'. 070825'.60 W (4) (c) . (5) 40' . one mile wide. Note: This chart is based on Provisional South American 1956 Datum.

1983 edition.43 S.00 W (6) 32845'. (3) 44' (2) .43 W (c) Farallones de Quintero 42' (4) .93 S. (5) (6) .43 S. is centred upon the following geographical positions: (1) 32844'.43 W A traffic lane for eastbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (5) 32845'. 071832'.IN THE APPROACHES TO QUINTERO BAY (Reference chart: Chilean Hydrographic Office 424. half a mile wide. 071832'. (1) 32˚ 45' 5 .43 S. Note: This chart is based on Provisional South American 1956 Datum. 071836'.43 W A traffic lane for westbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (3) 32843'.93 S. 071836'.43 S.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) (b) A separation zone. Penla. 071836'.00 W (2) 32844'. Los Molles 5 46' 47' Quintero 48' 97160 36' 35' 34' 33' 32' 31' 71˚ 30' 29' IN THE APPROACHES TO QUINTERO BAY VIII/4 . 071832'.00 W (4) 32842'. 43' . .

071837'.70 S.35 S.70 W (4) 33800'. 071837'. 071835'.87 S. 071838'. (4) 1' Pta Gruesa Valparaiso 5 97161 39' 38' 37' 71˚ 36' 35' IN THE APPROACHES TO VALPARAISO VIII/5 .33 S.27 W (2) 33800'.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) (b) A separation zone. 071835'. (2) 33˚ . (3) .38 W A traffic lane for traffic sailing from Valparaiso is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (5) 32857'. (5) (1) . 58' 59' Insh ore t raffic zone . half a mile wide.53 S.IN THE APPROACHES TO VALPARAISO (Reference chart: Chilean Hydrographic Office 511.52 W A traffic lane for traffic sailing towards Valparaiso is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (3) 32857'.65 W (c) Inshore traffic zone The area between the coast and the landward boundary of the traffic separation scheme is designated as an inshore traffic zone. .62 S.82 W (6) 33800'. 1985 edition. 071836'. is centred upon the following geographical positions: (1) 32857'. Note: This chart is based on Provisional South American 1956 Datum. (6) .

073801'.55 W (2) 36835'. 33' (b) . (2) 36' 37' Quiriquina I. is centred upon the following geographical positions: (1) 36833'.IN THE APPROACHES TO CONCEPCION BAY (Reference chart: Chilean Hydrographic Office 611.95 W (3) 36838'.87 S.Loberia 5 36˚ 35' . 073801'. (1) 34' Mo.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) A separation zone. Note: This chart is based on Provisional South American 1956 Datum. (3) 39' Bahia Concepción 97162 5' 4' 3' 2' 1' 73˚ IN THE APPROACHES TO CONCEPCION BAY VIII/6 . is established on each side of the separation zone. 38' .85 S. 073801'. half a mile wide. a quarter of a mile wide. 1985 edition.55 W A traffic lane.27 S.

05 S. (3) .02 W (2) 36843'.73 W (6) 36844'. 073814'. Tumbes . 41' .) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) A separation zone is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (1) 36840'. (4) (1) Pen.47 S.44 W (3) 36843'.54 W A traffic lane for northbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (7) 36839'. (7) 40' 36˚ .72 S.68 S. 073813'. 073810'.86 W (8) 36843'. 1984 edition. 073810'. (6) 5 Bahia San Vicente 44' Pta Gualpen 45' 15' 14' 13' 12' ' 11 73˚10' 9' 8' 7' 97163 IN THE APPROACHES TO SAN VICENTE BAY VIII/7 . 073812'.40 S. 073810'. 073811'. (8) 43' . (2) . Note: This chart is based on Provisional South American 1956 Datum.78 S.78 S.57 W (b) (c) .65 S. 073809'.IN THE APPROACHES TO SAN VICENTE BAY (Reference chart: Chilean Hydrographic Office 613. (5) 42' San Vicente .14 W (4) 36840'.98 W A traffic lane for southbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (5) 36841'.

070853'.30 W (2) 53813'.40 W (6) 53812'.50 W A traffic lane for north-westbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (5) 53811'.47 S. 12' (3) . Note: This chart is based on Elipsoide International Datum.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) (b) A separation zone. half a mile wide. 070848'. (2) 14' . 070851'. 070851'.03 S.IN THE APPROACHES TO PUNTA ARENAS (Reference chart: Chilean Hydrographic Office 1124.97 W A traffic lane for south-eastbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (3) 53812'.35 S. (6) 13' . (4) 58' 57' 56' 55' 54' 70˚ 53' 52' 51' 50' 49' 48' 97166 IN THE APPROACHES TO PUNTA ARENAS VIII/8 . 070849'. .55 S. is centred upon the following geographical positions: (1) 53812'.60 S.43 W 6' (c) 7' 8' 9' Punta Arenas 53˚ 10' 11 ' (5) . (1) .20 W (4) 53814'. 1965 edition.50 S. 070852'.

Charts published by other hydrographic offices may use a different geodetic datum.Section IX WESTERN NORTH ATLANTIC OCEAN. Mariners should consult the appropriate nautical publications and charts for up-to-date details on aids to navigation and other relevant information. GULF OF MEXICO AND CARIBBEAN SEA CAUTION: The chartlets are for illustrative purposes only and must not be used for navigation. WARNING: The geographical positions given in the descriptions of the routeing systems are only correct for charts using the same geodetic datum as the reference charts indicated under each scheme. IX . as may new editions of the reference charts published after the adoption of the routeing system.

25˚ 11 10 12 13 14 15 Cuba 17 16 20˚ Mexico 15˚ 10˚ 95˚ 90˚ 85˚ 80˚ 75˚ 70˚ 65˚ 60˚ 55˚ . Massachusetts 5: In the approaches to Narragansett Bay.55˚ INDEX: WESTERN NORTH ATLANTIC. Maine 4: In the approach to Boston. Rhode Island and Buzzards Bay. Massachusetts 6: Off New York 7: Off Delaware Bay 8: In the approaches to Chesapeake Bay 9: In the approaches to Galveston Bay 10: Off Cabo San Antonio 11: Off La Tabla 12: Off Costa de Matanzas 13: In the Old Bahama Channel 14: Off Punta Maternillos 15: Off Punta Lucrecia 16: Off Cabo Maysi 17: In the approaches to the port of Veracruz Boston 50˚ Newfoundland 1 2 3 4 45˚ Nova Scotia New York 6 5 6 40˚ Washington 7 8 35˚ Charleston New Orleans Galveston 30˚ Flo 9 rida Bahama Is. GULF OF MEXICO AND CARIBBEAN SEA 1: In the approaches to Chedabucto Bay 2: In the Bay of Fundy and approaches 3: In the approaches to Portland.

060836'.35 N.28 N. 1985 edition.00 N.90 N.88 N.40 W (c) Part III (a) (b) (c) A separation line connects the following geographical positions: (18) 45823'.70 W (3) 45823'. 060834'.70 W A traffic lane for eastbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (7) 45822'.80 W A traffic lane for westbound traffic is established between the separation line and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (20) 45825'. 060848'.57 N.15 N.43 N.38 W (16) 45821'. 060823'. 060831'.17 W A traffic lane for north-westbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (13) 45821'.70 W (21) 45824'.68 N.30 N.50 W A traffic lane for southbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (15) 45822'. 060836'.90 N.) Description of the traffic separation scheme The traffic separation scheme ``In the approaches to Chedabucto Bay'' consists of three parts: Part I (a) (b) A separation zone is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (1) 45824'.80 W (chartlet overleaf) IX/1-1 .17 W (4) 45823'.00 W (11) 45819'.50 W (8) 45822'.90 N. 060841'.00 N.20 W (6) 45825'.90 N. 060834'. 060846'.47 N.48 W A traffic lane for westbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (5) 45826'.50 W (12) 45822'. 060858'. 060828'. 060840'. 060846'.50 W (17) 45814'.20 W (2) 45824'. 060837'.80 W (10) 45819'. 060858'.90 N.70 W (19) 45823'. 060827'. L/C-4335. 060844'. 060858'.20 N. 060841'. Note: These charts are based on North American 1927 Geodetic Datum.70 N.50 W (23) 45822'. 1986 edition.IN THE APPROACHES TO CHEDABUCTO BAY (Reference charts: Canadian Hydrographic Service L/C-4013. 060841'. 060833'.80 W A traffic lane for eastbound traffic is established between the separation line and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (22) 45822'.30 N.82 N.60 W (c) Part II (a) (b) A separation zone is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (9) 45822'. 060842'.90 N.30 N. 060836'.30 W (14) 45822'.43 N.

(11) . (18) . 15' 10' 45˚ 61˚ 55' 50' 45' 40' 35' 30' 25' 97167 IN THE APPROACHES TO CHEDABUCTO BAY IX/1-2 . (19) . . (23) . (13) (4) (7) (14) . . (1) . 30' Chedabucto Bay (6) (20) (21) .Isle Madame Michaud Pt. (5) 25' . . (16) 5 . (15) (22) (12) . . (2) (3) . . (10) 20' (17) . (8) . . (9) .

(1) (6) . 30' (2) .50 N. by a line connecting the following geographical positions: 066809'. 44827'. 066812'. 066823'. 066847'. . 40' (11) .IN THE BAY OF FUNDY AND APPROACHES (Reference charts: Canadian Hydrographic Service L/C-4011.20 N.M .40 W (12) 44817'. 066830'. 066855'.60 N.60 N.35 N. 066804'.33 N.00 W A traffic lane for south-westbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (10) 45803'. (9) 45˚ Bay of Fundy 50' Grand Manan I.40 W (5) 44826'.10 N. .83 W (b) A traffic lane for north-eastbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (9) 45801'.92 N. (7) Nova Scotia 10' 44˚ 50' 40' 30' 20' 10' 66˚ 50' 40' 30' 97175 IN THE BAY OF FUNDY AND APPROACHES IX/2 .95 N. (4) St . John (c) 10' (10) .70 W (6) 45802'. 1987 edition.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) A separation (1) (2) (3) zone is bounded 45802'.17 W (11) 44829'.83 N. (8) y’s B ay 20' (3) .55 W 066827'. 066821'. (5) .05 W (8) 44825'. 066806'. .90 W 066852'.33 W (7) 44809'.95 N. 066849'.95 W (4) 44811'. 44814'. . Note: This chart is based on North American 1927 Geodetic Datum. ar (12) .25 W New Brunswick St.17 N.

) Description of the traffic separation scheme The traffic separation scheme ``In the approaches to Portland. Portland Cape Elizabeth 20' IN THE APPROACHES TO PORTLAND. 069859'. . 13009. MAINE (Reference charts: United States 13006. one mile wide. 13260. is centred upon the following geographical positions: (1) 43830'. 069854'. 13290. the areas within separation zones and traffic lanes excluded. 070803'. is established on each side of the separation zone.95 W A traffic lane. 070805'.70 W A traffic lane. Note: These charts are based on North American 1927 Geodetic Datum.IN THE APPROACHES TO PORTLAND. one and a half miles wide.28 N.53 W.82 N. 1985 edition.00 N. 1985 edition. (3) 30' . 1987 edition. (2) 43˚ 20' 10' . 13288. 13286. 069832'. Part II (a) (b) Eastern approach A separation zone.48 W (4) 43807'.17 W (2) 43824'. is centred upon the following geographical positions: (3) 43827'. Part III (a) (b) Southern approach A separation zone.45 miles is centred upon geographical position 43831'. one mile wide. is established on each side of the separation zone.60 N. 1985 edition. Maine'' consists of three parts: Part I (a) Precautionary area A precautionary area of radius 5. one and a half miles wide.18 N. MAINE IX/3 ^ Precautionary area (1) . (4) 97168 10' 70˚ 50' 40' 30' . 1982 edition. 1986 edition.

IN THE APPROACH TO BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS

Note: See mandatory ship reporting system ``For protection of endangered North Atlantic right whales in sea areas off the north-eastern and south-eastern coasts of the United States'' in part G, section I. (Reference chart: United States 13009, 1985 edition. Note: This chart is based on North American 1927 Geodetic Datum.)

Description of the traffic separation scheme
(a) A separation zone, one mile wide, is centred upon the following geographical positions: (1) 42821'.00 N, 070840'.70 W (3) 40849'.50 N, 069800'.00 W (2) 42808'.50 N, 069853'.60 W A traffic lane, two miles wide, is established on each side of the separation zone.

(b)

Precautionary areas
(a) (b) A precautionary area of radius five miles is centred upon geographical position 42822'.70 N, 070848'.00 W. A precautionary area is bounded to the east by a circle of radius 15.5 miles, centred upon geographical position 40835'.00 N, 069800'.00 W, intersected by the traffic separation schemes ``In the approach to Boston, Massachusetts'' and ``Eastern approach, off Nantucket'' (part II of the traffic separation scheme ``Off New York'') at the following geographical positions: (i) 40850'.33 N, 068857'.00 W (ii) 40823'.75 N, 069814'.63 W The precautionary area is bounded to the west by a line connecting the two traffic separation schemes between the following geographical positions: (iii) 40836'.75 N, 069815'.16 W (iv) 40848'.00 N, 069803'.33 W

(chartlet overleaf)

IX/4-1

Boston

!
(1) .
20'

(2)

.

42˚

Cape Cod

40'

Martha’s Vineyard
20'

Nantucket Island

41˚

(iv) .

(i) . . (3)
40'

. (iii)

!

. (ii)

See part II of description of the traffic separation scheme “Off New York”
40' 20'

20'

70˚

40'

20'

69˚

40'

97169

IN THE APPROACH TO BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS

IX/4-2

IN THE APPROACHES TO NARRAGANSETT BAY, RHODE ISLAND, AND BUZZARDS BAY, MASSACHUSETTS
(Reference chart: United States 13218, 1987 edition. Note: This chart is based on North American 1983 Geodetic Datum.)

Description of the traffic separation scheme
The traffic separation scheme ``In the approaches to Narragansett Bay, Rhode Island, and Buzzards Bay, Massachusetts'' consists of two parts:

Part I
(a) (b)

Narragansett Bay approach A separation zone, two miles wide, is centred upon the following geographical positions: (1) 41822'.70 N, 071823'.30 W (2) 41811'.10 N, 071823'.30 W A traffic lane, one mile wide, is established on each side of the separation zone.

Part II
(a) (b)

Buzzards Bay approach A separation zone, one mile wide, is centred upon the following geographical positions: (3) 41810'.20 N, 071819'.10 W (4) 41821'.80 N, 071807'.10 W A traffic lane, one mile wide, is established on each side of the separation zone.

Precautionary areas
A precautionary area of radius 5.4 miles is centred upon geographical position 41806'.00 N, 071823'.30 W. A precautionary area of radius 3.55 miles is centred upon geographical position 41825'.60 N, 071823'.30 W.

Restricted area
Note: A restricted area, two miles wide, extending from the southern limit of the Narragansett Bay approach traffic separation zone to latitude 41824'.70 N, has been established. The restricted area will only be closed to ship traffic by the Naval Underwater System Center during periods of daylight and optimum weather conditions for torpedo range usage. The closing of the restricted area will be indicated by the activation of a white strobe light mounted on Brenton Reef Light and controlled by a naval ship supporting the torpedo range activities. There would be no ship restrictions expected during inclement weather or when the torpedo range is not in use.
Newport Buzzards Bay Precautionary area
30'

5 Brenton Reef
.
(1)

25'

Restricted area .
(4)

Martha’s Vineyard

20'

Rhode Island Sound Block Island .
(2)

15'

Noman’s Land

.
(3)

10'

Precautionary area
5'

41˚

97170

40'

30'

20'

10'

71˚

50'

IN THE APPROACHES TO NARRAGANSETT BAY, RHODE ISLAND, AND BUZZARDS BAY, MASSACHUSETTS

IX/5

OFF NEW YORK
(Reference charts: United States 12300, 1985 edition; 12326, 1986 edition. Note: These charts are based on North American 1927 Geodetic Datum.)

Description of the traffic separation scheme
The traffic separation scheme ``Off New York'' consists of five parts:

Part I
(a) (b)

Precautionary areas A precautionary area of radius seven miles is centred upon Ambrose Light in geographical position 40827'.50 N, 073849'.90 W. A precautionary area is located between part II of this traffic separation scheme (Eastern approach, off Nantucket) and the traffic separation scheme ``In the approach to Boston, Massachusetts''. Details of the precautionary area are contained in paragraph (b) of the description of the precautionary areas in the amended traffic separation scheme ``In the approach to Boston, Massachusetts''.

Part II
(a)

Eastern approach, off Nantucket A separation zone is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (1) 40828'.75 N, 069814'.83 W (3) 40830'.62 N, 070814'.00 W (2) 40827'.62 N, 070813'.77 W (4) 40831'.75 N, 069814'.97 W A traffic lane for westbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (5) 40836'.75 N, 069815'.17 W (6) 40835'.62 N, 070814'.15 W A traffic lane for eastbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (7) 40822'.62 N, 070813'.60 W (8) 40823'.75 N, 069814'.63 W

(b)

(c)

Part III
(a)

Eastern approach, off Ambrose Light A separation (9) (10) (11) zone is bounded 40824'.33 N, 40824'.20 N, 40826'.00 N, by a line connecting the following geographical positions: 073804'.97 W (12) 40827'.00 N, 073840'.75 W 073811'.50 W (13) 40827'.20 N, 073811'.50 W 073840'.93 W (14) 40827'.33 N, 073804'.95 W

(b)

A traffic lane for westbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (15) 40832'.33 N, 073804'.95 W (17) 40828'.00 N, 073840'.73 W (16) 40832'.20 N, 073811'.50 W A traffic lane for eastbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (18) 40825'.05 N, 073841'.32 W (20) 40819'.33 N, 073804'.97 W (19) 40819'.20 N, 073811'.50 W

(c)

Part IV
(a)

South-eastern approach A separation (21) (22) (23) zone is bounded 40803'.10 N, 40806'.50 N, 40822'.45 N, by a line connecting the following geographical positions: 073817'.93 W (24) 40823'.20 N, 073842'.70 W 073822'.73 W (25) 40808'.72 N, 073820'.10 W 73843'.55 W (26) 40805'.32 N, 073815'.28 W

(b)

A traffic lane for north-westbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (27) 40808'.98 N, 073810'.87 W (29) 40824'.02 N, 073841'.97 W (28) 40812'.42 N, 073815'.67 W A traffic lane for south-eastbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (30) 40821'.82 N, 073844'.55 W (32) 39859'.43 N, 073822'.35 W (31) 40802'.80 N, 073827'.15 W

(c)

IX/6-1

Part V
(a)

Southern approach A separation zone is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (33) 39845'.70 N, 073848'.00 W (35) 40820'.87 N, 073847'.07 W (34) 40820'.63 N, 073848'.33 W (36) 39845'.70 N, 073844'.00 W A traffic lane for northbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (37) 39845'.70 N, 073837'.70 W (38) 40821'.25 N, 073845'.85 W A traffic lane for southbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (39) 40820'.53 N, 073849'.65 W (40) 39845'.70 N, 073854'.40 W

(b)

(c)

Note:

Use of LORAN-C enables masters of appropriately equipped ships to be informed highly accurately and continuously about the ship's position in the area covered by this scheme.

(chartlet overleaf)

IX/6-2

New Haven Plum I. Montauk Pt

===>>>

Long Island New York
Gre
(16) .
Precautionary (17) . area (12) . . (18).. (11) (23). . (29) (38) . (24) . ...

at

th Sou

Bea

ch

. (15) . (14) . (9) . (20)

(13) .
. (10) . (19) . (28) . . (25) (27) . . (22) . (26) . (21) (31) . (32)

(30) (39)(34) (35)

. . . . (40) (33) (36) (37)

Atlantic City

30'

74˚

30'

73˚

30'

72˚

===>>>

97171

IX/6-3

Monomoy Pt
30'

Martha’s Vineyard
Pt Ju dith

Noman’s Land Block Island

Nantucket Island

!

See description of traffic separation scheme ‘‘In the approaches to Narragansett Bay, Rhode Island, and Buzzards Bay, Massachusetts’’

See description of area to be avoided ‘‘In the region of Nantucket Shoals’’ in part D

41˚

(6) . (3) . (2)
.

. (5)
5

Nantucket LV

. (4) . (1) . (8)

Precautionary area

30'

(7) .

40˚

30'

39˚
30'

97172

71˚

30'

70˚

30'

OFF NEW YORK 2 [New York 1]

IX/6-4

27 N.75 N.00 N. thence southerly to 38846'.33 N. 075803'. 074845'. 075802'.35 W (c) Part II (a) South-eastern approach A separation zone is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (9) 38827'. 074849'. 074855'.40 N. thence northerly to 38850'. 074834'.90 N. IX/7-1 .83 W.90 W.48 N. thence north-easterly to 38851'.00 N.20 N.00 N.80 W (5) 39800'. 074834'.60 W to 38848'.55 W. 074858'.30 W (14) 38845'.) Description of the traffic separation scheme Part I (a) (b) Eastern approach A separation zone is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (1) 38846'. 074855'. thence northerly to 38854'.80 N.53 N.50 N.00 W (9) 38848'. 075801'.00 W (12) 38827'.50 N.83 W Note for the use of the two-way route: This two-way route is recommended for use predominantly by tug and tow traffic transiting to and from the northeast in order to separate such traffic from large inbound vessel traffic. 074855'. 074841'. 075803'.27 N.OFF DELAWARE BAY (Reference chart: United States 12214. thence westerly by an arc of 6.32 N.50 W A traffic lane for westbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (5) 38848'.80 N.40 W (4) 38850'.20 W (8) 38844'. 074855'.30 W A traffic lane for north-westbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (13) 38828'.20 N.80 N. 075802'.45 N. 075805'. 074855'.00 W. 074850'.00 N.30 W (10) 38849'.30 W.60 N.75 W (4) 38847'. Precautionary area Two-way route A two-way traffic route is bounded on the west and south by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (1) 38850'. 075808'. 074855'. thence south-westerly to 38854'. 074856'. 074857'.25 W (11) 38851'.40 W (b) (c) A precautionary area is established as follows: from 38842'.30 W (6) 38849'.30 W (7) 38850'.80 N.45 W (3) 38847'.60 W A traffic lane for eastbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (7) 38845'. 075801'.45 N.90 W (16) 38827'. 074858'. thence northerly by an arc of 8 nautical miles centred at 38848'. 074841'. 074842'.32 N. 074840'.60 W.65 W (8) 38848'. 1994 edition Note: This chart is based on North American Datum 1983 (WGS 84).60 W A traffic lane for south-eastbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (15) 38842'.60 W to 38855'.60 N.10 N. 074856'.90 N. 074839'. 074858'.80 N.30 N.80 N.80 W. 075805'.45 N.20 W (10) 38843'.75 N. 075805'. 075801'. thence westerly to 38847'.40 W (2) 38846'. 074834'.30 W and is bounded on the east and north by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (6) 39800'.90 W.87 W.33 N. 075803'.40 W.7 nautical miles centred at 38848'.35 N. 074859'. 075801'.00 N.10 N.32 N.23 W (3) 38848'.73 W (2) 38847'.30 W (11) 38844'.80 N. 074858'. thence south-easterly to 38842'. 074834'.

(3) . (11) (7) . (12) (9) 25' 10' 5' 75˚ 55' 50' 45' 40' 35' 97173 OFF DELAWARE BAY IX/7-2 . (10) . Five Fathom Bank . (15) . (10) (9) . area . (5) . (1) . . (7) (11) . (14) . (3) . (5) 39˚ Cape May 55' ! Delaware Bay (1) . (8) 45' Rehoboth Bay 40' Indian River Bay Indian River Inlet 35' 38˚ 30' . (4) (6) Harbour of Refuge 5 . . . .(6) . Precautionary (2) . . 50' (4) . (16) . (2) (8) . (13) .

90 N. 075857'45 W. A traffic lane for outbound traffic is established between the separation lines described in paragraphs (c) and (d).23 W (8) 36849'. (7) 36852'.44 N. half a mile wide.97 N.11 N.80 W (c) 075855'. 075852'. 1989 edition.35 N. IX/8-1 . 075855'.59 N.97 W (b) 075846'.13 N.52 W A separation line connects the following geographical positions: (6) 36855'.80 N.96 N. (13) 36851'.09 W (14) 36848'.70 N. section IV). Part III (a) Southern approach A separation line connects the following geographical positions: (3) 36850'.10 W A traffic lane.94 W (11) 36854'.43 W (d) 075847'.87 N. 1985 edition.18 N. All other ships using the southern approach traffic separation scheme should use the appropriate inbound or outbound traffic lane. 075851'.) Description of the traffic separation scheme The traffic separation scheme ``In the approaches to Chesapeake Bay'' consists of three parts: Part I (a) Precautionary area A precautionary area of radius two miles is centred upon geographical position 36856'. A deep-water route is established between the separation lines described in paragraphs (b) and (c).12 W A separation line connects the following geographical positions: (9) 36849'. Note: These charts are based on North American 1983 Geodetic Datum.29 W A separation line connects the following geographical positions: (12) 36854'.42 W (e) (f) (g) A traffic lane for inbound traffic is established between the separation lines described in paragraphs (a) and (b). Part II (a) (b) Eastern approach A separation line connects the following geographical positions: (1) 36858'.29 W (5) 36855'.33 N.IN THE APPROACHES TO CHESAPEAKE BAY (Reference charts: United States 12200. 075848'. 075855'. 12221. 1986 edition. 075846'. (4) 36852'. is established on each side of the separation line. The types of ships which are recommended to use the deep-water route are given in the description of the deep-water route (see part C. 075852'. 075846'.52 N. 075852'.92 W 075854'.67 N. 12207.65 W (2) 36856'. 075856'. (10) 36852'.

. (13) Virginia Beach DW (3) . 97174 IN THE APPROACHES TO CHESAPEAKE BAY IX/8-2 . (12) . . (5) . (1) (2) . (8) (9) . (10) . (6) 55' Precautionary area Cape 5 Henry (11) . (4) . (7) . 50' 36˚ . (14) 76˚ 55' 50' . DW .

20 N. 094824'. 094820'. (2) (8) . (7) ! (5) . 11332. 094835'. 1986 edition.20 W Note: A pilot boarding area is located near the centre of the inshore precautionary area.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) A traffic separation zone is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (1) 29817'. (5) 29818'.70 N. . 1987 edition.93 W A traffic lane for north-westbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (5) 29818'.20 N. (12) ! .60 W (12) 29806'.10 N. 094827'.80 W (b) (c) Precautionary areas (a) An inshore precautionary area positions: (7) 29816'. Due to heavy ship traffic. Galveston (11) .IN THE APPROACHES TO GALVESTON BAY (Reference charts: United States National Ocean Survey 11323. (4) .20 W (b) An offshore precautionary area is established. 094824'.90 W 094837'.80 W (3) 29809'. 094835'.10 N. (6) 10' (3) .40 N. .10 W (10) 29819'. .40 N. mariners are advised not to anchor or linger in this precautionary area except to pick up or disembark a pilot.00 W (13) 29806'. is established.23 W (4) 29817'.10 W 094839'.40 N.15 N. 094827'.04 N.00 N. (1) .36 W (2) 29809'. bounded by a line connecting the following geographical 094837'.00 N. (11) 29818'. 094834'. 094838'.80 N. .80 W (14) 29809'. (10) .00 W (8) 29807'.90 W (8) 29807'. (14) (13) 29˚ 97176 40' 94˚ 30' 20' 10' IN THE APPROACHES TO GALVESTON BAY IX/9 .05 N.00 W 094834'. 094837'.00 W A traffic lane for south-eastbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (7) 29816'.90 W (6) 29811'. 094826'.70 N. Note: These charts are based on North American 1927 Geodetic Datum. 094826'. (9) 20' .20 N.10 N. 094826'. 094823'.10 N. . bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (6) 29811'. (9) 29819'.

00 N. for northbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (5) 21845'.80 N. 084834'.20 W A traffic lane. British Admiralty 1220. 084847'.00 N.90 N. 085807'.40 N. 084842'. one mile wide.90 N. 084825'.00 W is designated as an inshore traffic zone. 1934 edition. and the point on the coast marked by the co-ordinates 22814'. Note: These charts are based on North American 1927 Geodetic Datum. 1977 edition.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) (b) A separation zone. Note: These charts are based on North American 1927 Geodetic Datum.10 W (2) 22819'.50 W (4) 22801'. 085807'. for southbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (3) 21842'.00 N. 084849'.00 N. 085811'. 084840'. 1980 edition. 1977 edition. 084844'. (chartlet overleaf) IX/10-1/11-1 .00 N. 3867.80 W (6) 22826'.20 W (c) Inshore traffic zone The area within the lines bounded by the following geographical positions: Punta Plumaies (22802'. positions (5) and (6) of the traffic separation scheme Off La Tabla. 2579. 084851'.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) (b) A separation zone. 1101 and 1122. 2579. two miles wide. is centred upon the following geographical positions: (1) 21843'. 084848'. three miles wide.50 W A traffic lane. for south-westbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (3) 22821'. 084829'.90 W A traffic lane.20 W A traffic lane.00 N.40 N. British Admiralty 1220. OFF LA TABLA (Reference charts: Instituto Cubano de Hidrografia 1001. 085811'. two miles wide. three miles wide.20 W).00 W (c) Inshore traffic zone The area within the lines bounded by the following geographical positions: Punta del Holandes (21848'. 1101 and 1122. 085803'.70 N.00 W (6) 22801'.80 N.20 W (2) 22801'.60 N.70 N. two miles wide. 1980 edition. 085803'.30 W). 3867.50 W is designated as an inshore traffic zone.00 N. is centred upon the following geographical positions: (1) 22827'. for north-eastbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (5) 22818'.90 W (4) 22829'.OFF CABO SAN ANTONIO (Reference charts: Instituto Cubano de Hidrografia 1001. positions (5) and (6) of the Off Cabo San Antonio traffic separation scheme and a point on the coast marked by the co-ordinates 22800'. 1934 edition.

(4) (1) (6) 30´ 25´ (3) 20´ (2) La Tabla (5) Inshore traffic zone 15´ 10´ 5´ (4) (2) (6) Pt a.P 22˚ m lu Inshore traffic zone ai es 55´ Cabo San Antonio 50´ Punta del Holandes 45´ (5) (1) (3) 10´ 5´ 85˚ 55´ 50´ 45´ 40´ 35´ 30´ OFF CABO SAN ANTONIO + OFF LA TABLA IX/10-2/11-2 97244 .

and Cayo Bahõ a de Cadiz Lighthouse (23812'. (9) 20' Inshore traffic zone 5 5 5 Cayo Punta de Molas Bahia de Cadiz 15' 10' 5' Costa de Matanzas 23˚ 97280 5' 81˚ 55' 50' 45' 40' 35' 30' OFF COSTA DE MATANZAS IX/12 .80 W (9) 23820'.80 W A traffic lane.90 W) is designated as an inshore traffic zone. 3001. 2001.30 W (6) 23825'. 081808'.00 W (2) 23825'. 080854'. Note: These charts are based on North American 1927 Geodetic Datum.10 N.50 N. 1934 edition.00 W (3) 23823'.30 N. 080828'. 2579.OFF COSTA DE MATANZAS (Reference charts: Instituto Cubano de Hidrografia 1001. for eastbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (7) 23821'. for westbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (4) 23826'.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) A separation zone. Nicolas Channel (4) .00 W (8) 23822'. 080853'. . 081807'. . . 1126.50 N.50 N.00 N. 081807'.50 N.50 N. 4002 and 4101.60 W (5) 23827'. 30' (5) .00 W A traffic lane. one mile wide. . 1101. 080828'. two miles wide. 080854'. . 4001. (6) 25' (2) (1) . 1980 edition.00 W (b) (c) Inshore traffic zone The area within the lines bounded by the following geographical positions: Punta de Molas (23811'. 081808'. two miles wide. British Admiralty 1220.15 W). positions (7). 1102.50 N. 1977 edition.00 N. (3) (8) (7) . 1127. 080827'. 3867. is centred upon the following geographical positions: (1) 23823'. (8) and (9) of the traffic separation scheme  Off Costa de Matanzas.00 N. 080828'.

20 N. two miles wide. half a mile wide.30 N. (10). 077826'. 1980 edition.70 W (12) 22807'. two miles wide. 1103.70 N. 1934 edition.20 N. for south-eastbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (9) 22846'. is centred upon the following geographical positions: (1) 22848'. and Point Mangle (21859'. 4001. 078806'.00 W (11) 22817'.40 N.70 N.10 W (6) 22837'.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) A separation zone.90 N.IN THE OLD BAHAMA CHANNEL (Reference charts: Instituto Cubano de Hidrografia 1001.40 W (2) 22835'.40 W (8) 22810'. for north-westbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (5) 22850'. 3001.00 W (3) 22818'. (5) (1) (9) 50´ Insh ore traf fic z (6) 40´ one (10) (2) Cayo Coco 30´ Ins Cayo Romano ho re tra ffic zo (7) Lobos Cay 20´ ne (11) (3) (8) CUBA (4) (12) Punta Mangle 50´ 40´ 30´ 20´ 10´ 22˚ 97245 30´ IN THE OLD BAHAMA CHANNEL IX/13 F id 25 h F b 2000 S W i 78˚ 50´ 40´ Shi ' R i (f 10´ h) 1 f . 077839'.00 N. 078807'.20 N.80 N.30 N.40 W (4) 22809'.80 W A traffic lane. 078805'. 1102. British Admiralty 1220. 1977 edition. (11) and (12) of the traffic separation scheme for the Old Bahama Channel. 2579. 1129.40 N.30 W A traffic lane. 4002 and 4104. Note: These charts are based on North American 1927 Geodetic Datum.80 N.00 W (10) 22833'. 078843'.60 W (b) (c) Inshore traffic zone The area within the lines bounded by the following geographical positions: the point on the coast marked by the co-ordinates 22830'. 078853'. 077841'. positions (9). 077827'. 1130.30 W. 078847'. 078845'. 3867.40 W) is designated as an inshore traffic zone. 077837'. 077838'. 077829'.30 W (7) 22820'.20 N.

80 N. two miles wide. (5) . Note: These charts are based on North American 1927 Geodetic Datum. 1977 edition.25 N. 1103.20 W (b) (c) Inshore traffic zone The area within the lines bounded by the following geographical positions: Punta Central (21840'.80 N. (7) . 1934 edition.60 W). 076853'. (9) 21o 5 40' Punta Maternillos 5 35' Punta Ganado 10' 5' OFF PUNTA MATERNILLOS 97281 77o 55' IX/14 . (8) and (9) of the traffic separation scheme Off Punta Maternillos. (1) . 55' (4) . 076854'. 4001 and 4002.90 W (6) 21846'.10 N. one mile wide.80 W A traffic lane.80 W (9) 21842'. 3001.20 W A traffic lane. 45' (3) Inshore traffic zone Punta Central . (8) . 3867. 077812'. 077804'.80 N. two miles wide. 076859'. 077804'. 077802'. 1980 edition. for north-westbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (4) 21853'. and Punta Ganado (21831'.00 W (5) 21849'.20 N. is centred upon the following geographical positions: (1) 21851'.75 W) is designated as an inshore traffic zone. 077806'.20 N.00 N. 076855'. British Admiralty 1220.OFF PUNTA MATERNILLOS (Reference charts: Instituto Cubano de Hidrografia 1001.00 W (2) 21847'. for south-eastbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (7) 21849'. . 2579.80 W (3) 21844'. positions (7).50 N. 1130. 077808'.50 N. 077801'.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) A separation zone.00 W (8) 21845'. 50' .70 N. (2) (6) .

. (7) .30 W A traffic lane. one mile wide.40 W A traffic lane. 075846'. 075843'.20 W (8) 21809'.00 N. 075833'. 4002 and 4104.00 N.20 W (3) 21807'. (8) and (9) of the traffic separation scheme Off Punta Lucrecia. 5' f 5 e tr affi (8) cz one . 1131.70 W (5) 21813'.30 N. 1980 edition. 3001. 075842'.90 N.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) A separation zone.20 W (9) 21804'. 4001. Bahia de Sama Ins (6) hor (3) 5 Punta Lucrecia (9) Punta Morales 97282 45' 40' 35' 75˚ 30' 25' 20' OFF PUNTA LUCRECIA IX/15 F id 25 h F b 2000 S W i Shi ' R 21˚ i (f h) 1 .00 W (2) 21811'. 2579. Note: These charts are based on North American 1927 Geodetic Datum. 1103.20 W (6) 21809'.10 N. 3867. 15' (5) . 075826'. 075836'.40 N. 075834'. 075823'. . 075825'. 075841'. 1934 edition. two miles wide.70 N. . 075832'. and Punta Morales (20855'.40 W).80 N.80 W) is designated as an inshore traffic zone 20' (4) .30 N. British Admiralty 1220. 1132.OFF PUNTA LUCRECIA (Reference charts: Instituto Cubano de Hidrografia 1001. is centred upon the following geographical positions: (1) 21815'. positions (7). for south-eastbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (7) 21812'.20 N.20 N. 1977 edition. (2) 10' . 3002. two miles wide. (1) . for north-westbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (4) 21817'.50 W (b) (c) Inshore traffic zone The area within the lines bounded by the following geographical positions: Bahia de Sama Lighthouse (21807'.

00 N.00 N. 074802'. two miles wide. 1977 edition.00 W (4) 20805'. 073858'.80 N. 3867. 1134. 4002. (3) (1) (5) 20´ Punta Fraile Punta Maysi 15´ Inshore traffic zone 10´ Punta Negra 5´ (6) (2) (4) 20˚ 97246 15´ 10´ 5´ 74˚ 55´ OFF CABO MAYSI IX/16 . 4104 and 4106.10 N. 1980 edition. 074802'. centred upon the following geographical positions: (1) 20822'.00 N.80 W (2) 20805'. 074814'. Note: These charts are based on North American 1927 Geodetic Datum. 074813'. and Punta Negra (20805'. British Admiralty 1220. 3001. 1133.00 W A traffic lane. for northbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (3) 20823'. 4001.OFF CABO MAYSI (Reference charts: Instituto Cubano de Hidrografia 1001.60 W (6) 20805'. two and a half miles wide. 3103.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) (b) A separation zone.70 N.75 W). 3002. 073858'.10 W) is designated as an inshore traffic zone. for southbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (5) 20821'. 073855'. 1103.60 W (c) Inshore traffic zone The area within the lines bounded by the following geographical positions: Punta Fraile (20819'.55 N. 073855'. two and a half miles wide. 1934 edition. positions (5) and (6) of the traffic separation scheme Off Cabo Maysi.80 W A traffic lane. 2579.80 N.

095859'. 095857'. 095859'. IX/17-1 . 095853'.90 N.00 N.00 N. 095858'.00 N. 095846'.90 N.00 W (b) (c) Precautionary area A precautionary area is established bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (10) 19815'. using the radar beacons of: ± Sacrificios Island.43 W (17) 19815'. 096801'.00 N. 096800'. 095845'.00 N. 095845'.00 N.05 W (12) 19815'.43 W (6) 19811'. 096800'.00 W A separation zone bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (5) 19811'.05 W A traffic lane for southbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (15) 19819'.65 W A traffic lane for northbound traffic is established between the separation zone and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (17) 19815'.43 W back to position (10).07 N.62 W (14) 19819'. identified on the radar by Morse letter ``Z'' and located in geographical position: (28) 19810'. 095845'. 095853'.00 W (10) 19815'.43 W (2) 19814'.50 N.00 N.50 N.00 N.) Description of the traffic separation scheme The traffic separation scheme in the approaches to Veracruz. 095848'.43 W A traffic lane for eastbound traffic is established between separation zone (a) and separation zone (b).00 N.65 W (21) 19812'. identified on the radar by Morse letter ``O'' and located in geographical position: (29) 19808'.00 W (18) 19819'.49 N.53 W. 096805'.43 W (8) 19810'. 095853'. 095858'. 096800'. 095853'.92 W (7) 19810'.62 W (13) 19815'. 095853'. (b) (c) (d) Part II (a) North approach: Recommended for vessels entering or leaving the port of Veracruz A separation zone bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (11) 19819'. 1991 edition. 095857'.IN THE APPROACHES TO THE PORT OF VERACRUZ (Reference chart: United States 28302. ± Santiaguillo Island.77 W (23) 19807'.90 N.00 N.00 N.00 W (7) 19810'. 095853'.00 N. 095858'.00 W (16) 19815'. 095853'.47 W.65 W (16) 19815'.65 N. 095857'.52 N.00 N.43 W (4) 19812'.50 N. Note: This chart is based on World Geodetic System 84 Datum.60 W A traffic lane for westbound traffic is established between separation zone (a) and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (9) 19815'. Mexico consists of two parts: Part I (a) East approach: Recommended for vessels entering or leaving the port of Veracruz A separation zone bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (1) 19814'.50 N. Note: Masters of all appropriately equipped ships should have continual access to highly accurate information on the position of their ships in the traffic lane. 095845'.00 N.00 N.00 W (3) 19812'.

(15) (11) (14) (18) 20´ Precautionary area (see chartlet for area to be avoided in section II of part D) (16) (12) (13) (17) (21) (10) (2) (3) (6) (7) (8) (9) (1) (4) (5) 15´ VERACRUZ (28) Precautionary area Racon (Z) Punta Mocambo (23) 10´ Racon (O) Area to be avoided (see chartlet in section II of part D) (29) 05´ nt Pu o aC l ya 19˚ 10´ 15´ 05´ 96˚ 55´ 50´ 45´ IN THE APPROACHES TO THE PORT OF VERACRUZ IX/17-2 97248 .

Section X ASIA. X . Charts published by other hydrographic offices may use a different geodetic datum. as may new editions of the reference charts published after the adoption of the routeing system. PACIFIC COAST CAUTION: The chartlets are for illustrative purposes only and must not be used for navigation. WARNING: The geographical positions given in the descriptions of the routeing systems are only correct for charts using the same geodetic datum as the reference charts indicated under each scheme. Mariners should consult the appropriate nautical publications and charts for up-to-date details on aids to navigation and other relevant information.

PACIFIC COAST 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: In the Fourth Kuril Strait In the Proliv Bussol Off the Aniwa Cape In the approaches to the Gulf of Nakhodka Off the Ostrovnoi Point 30˚ 20˚ 99044 110˚ 120˚ 130˚ 140˚ 150˚ 160˚ 170˚ 180˚ X/ii .60˚ 1 50˚ 3 2 4 5 40˚ INDEX: ASIA.

00 E (3) 49843'. Racon . 154832'. Note: This chart is based on the single geodetic datum for Soviet nautical charts.80 N.10 E (4) 50803'. 154834'. two miles wide. ANTSIFEROVA 10' PARAMUSHIR .) Description of the traffic separation scheme A separation zone is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (1) 50805'. (3) . 155814'.10 E Note: A traffic lane. 1989 edition. (4) (1) 5 Racon 5 v ilye Vas 50˚ M ys Ch etv ér tyy Ku r ils kiy Pr oli 50' v (2) MAKANRUSHI .70 N. .50 N. is established on each side of the separation zone.20 E (2) 49845'.IN THE FOURTH KURIL STRAIT (Reference chart: USSR 1083. 155816'. 40' ONEKOTAN 97178 20' 30' 40' 50' 155˚ 10' 20' IN THE FOURTH KURIL STRAIT X/1 .30 N.

20 N. (2) (3) 30' . 1989 edition. (4) 47˚ 50' SIMUSHIR BROUTONA 40' Pr oli vB us so l CHIRPOY .90 E (3) 46825'. (1) . four miles wide. 151803'. . 20' 45' 97182 151˚ 15' 30' 45' IN THE PROLIV BUSSOL X/2 .00 N. Note: This chart is based on the single geodetic datum for Soviet nautical charts.IN THE PROLIV BUSSOL (Reference chart: USSR 1075.50 E (4) 47800'.30 N.50 E (2) 46827'. 151828'.00 N.) Description of the traffic separation scheme A separation zone is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (1) 47802'.80 E Note: A traffic lane. 151833'. 150858'. is established on each side of the separation zone.

two miles wide. 143835'. 143824'.00 E (western limit) and a line drawn from position 46803'. 143820'.00 E (eastern limit) is designated as an inshore traffic zone.30 E to position 45859'. 143832'.00 N.00 N. 5 SAKHALIN 30' Aniwa Bay I Cape Aniwa 5 (4) . 143820'.80 N. (5) ffi tra e or ne sh zo n .00 N.00 E A traffic lane. 1981 edition.50 N. (2) La Perouse Strait 30' HOKKAIDO 5 45˚ 30' 143˚ 30' 144˚ 30' 97179 OFF THE ANIWA CAPE X/3 .20 N.00 E (6) 46805'.90 N. 143825'. (6) .00 E (3) 45858'. four miles wide.50 E (b) (c) Inshore traffic zone The area between the landward boundary of the traffic separation scheme and Sakhalin Island and lying between a line drawn from position 46803'. 143828'.00 E to position 46806'. 143820'. 143840'.00 E (2) 45854'. A separation line forming the outside boundary of the traffic lane north of the separation zone connects the following geographical positions: (4) 45859'.20 N.) Description of the traffic separation scheme (a) A separation zone. .20 E (5) 45858'. Note: This chart is based on the single geodetic datum for Soviet nautical charts. 143830'. is centred upon the following geographical positions: (1) 45854'.50 N. .OFF THE ANIWA CAPE (Reference chart: USSR 702.00 N. (3) c 46˚ 5 (1) . is established south of the separation zone.

00 N. 132856'.80 E An outside boundary of the traffic lane east of the separation zone connects the following geographical positions: (5) 42810'.50 N. 133807'.30 E (10) 42833'. 133800'.30 E 133800'. 133802'. A separation line connects the following geographical positions: (1) 42834'.20 E and a circular traffic lane two miles wide.50 E to position 42843'.30 E (eastern limit) and a line drawn from position 42840'. 133807'. 132852'. 42835'.30 E (15) 42839'.50 N. 1978 edition.80 N.80 N.90 E A traffic lane.00 N. An outside boundary of the traffic lane north of the separation zone connects the following geographical positions: (12) 42835'. A separation zone is bounded by lines connecting the following geographical positions: (2) 42827'.60 E An outside boundary of the traffic lane west of the separation zone connects the following geographical positions: (7) 42827'.20 E (e) (f) Part II (a) A separation zone.00 N.00 N.30 E (4) 42810'. 133803'.00 N. 133802'.30 E (2) 42827'.IN THE APPROACHES TO THE GULF OF NAKHODKA (Reference charts: USSR 700.00 E (16) 42839'.00 N.20 E (6) 42827'. 1063. 132858'. 133807'. ships should strictly keep within traffic-lane boundaries.50 N.20 E (b) (c) (d) Inshore traffic zone The area between the north-eastern landward boundary of the roundabout and the northern boundary of the separation zone and the Russian Federation coast.00 N. 132856'. 133807'.00 N. 132850'.30 E (b) (c) (d) A traffic lane. is centred upon the following geographical positions: (9) 42836'.80 N.40 N.30 E to position 42839'. CAUTION: While navigating in the traffic separation scheme.00 E (8) 42810'.30 N.50 N.50 N.90 E (north-western limit).30 N. one mile wide. centred upon the following geographical position: 42838'.40 E (3) 42810'.90 E (11) 42833'.) Description of the traffic separation scheme The traffic separation scheme consists of two parts: Part I (a) A roundabout consists of a circular traffic separation zone. 132857'.40 E 133803'. 132859'. 133800'. two miles in diameter. 132858'. 132855'. Note: These charts are based on the single geodetic datum for Soviet nautical charts.50 N. is established south of the separation zone. and lying between a line drawn from position 42841'.00 E A separation (12) (13) (14) zone is bounded 42835'.40 N.00 N.20 E and then to position 42842'. 42837'. 133807'.30 E (14) 42837'.50 N. 132856'. by lines connecting the following geographical positions: 133807'.00 N.20 N. is designated as an inshore traffic zone. 132857'. X/4-1 . 1989 edition.20 E (13) 42835'. one and a half miles wide.00 N. 132859'. 132856'. is established on each side of the separation line. one mile wide.

5 5 5 5 5 Nakhodka Bay C. . . (12) . . (14) Inshore traffic zone . (11) (see description of the separation scheme “Off the Ostrovnoi Point”) 30' (7) . Povorotni 50' 5 (9) (1) . (13) . (16) 40' . (6) . (8) (3) (4) (5) 10' 42˚ 50' 97181 133˚ 10' 20' 30' 40' 50' IN THE APPROACHES TO THE GULF OF NAKHODKA X/4-2 . 20' Japan Sea . (10) . . (2) . . (15) .

5 5 5 Ostrovnoi Pt Nakhodka Bay . three miles wide. two miles wide.80 N. (1) .00 E (10) 42834'.60 E (12) 42827'.60 N. 133846'.40 E A traffic lane. is established on each side of the separation zones.50 E 42842'. is established on each side of the separation zone. 133845'. (b) CAUTION: The traffic lane north of the separation zone (lane between points (5) and (6)) in part I is designated for the navigation of Soviet ships only.70 E (8) following geographical positions: 42835'.20 N.00 N. (2) . Note: This chart is based on the single geodetic datum for Soviet nautical charts. (4) 50' 40' .80 E 42837'. 133820'.00 E (11) 42832'.30 N. . 133818'. 133820'.80 N. 133817'. 133842'. 133828'. 133830'.) Description of the traffic separation scheme The traffic separation scheme consists of two parts: Part I (a) Two separation zones are bounded by lines connecting the (i) (1) 42835'. . (11) 30' . (9) . (3) (10) .50 N. (12) 20' Japan Sea 10' (see description of the separation scheme “In the approaches to the Gulf of Nakhodka”) 50' 133˚ 10' 20' 30' 40' 50' 42˚ 97180 OFF THE OSTROVNOI POINT X/5 .40 N.50 N.80 E (b) A traffic lane.50 E (3) (2) 42836'.40 N. 133826'. (7) C.40 E 42833'.10 N. 133824'. 133840'. Part II (a) A separation zone is bounded by lines connecting the following geographical positions: (9) 42831'. 1975 edition.00 E (4) and (ii) (5) 42838'. (8) . (6) .50 E (7) (6) 42844'.OFF THE OSTROVNOI POINT (Reference chart: USSR 700. Povorotni5 (5) .20 N.

80˚ INDEX THE SECTIONS OF PART C Arctic Circle I II 60˚ 40˚ IV Tropic of Cancer III Equator III 20˚ 0˚ Tropic of Capricorn 20˚ 40˚ 60˚ Antarctic Circle 180˚ 160˚ 140˚ 120˚ 100˚ 80˚ 60˚W 40˚ 20˚ 0˚ 20˚ 40˚ 60˚E 80˚ 100˚ 120˚ 140˚ 160˚ 180˚ .

Charts published by other hydrographic offices may use a different geodetic datum. WARNING: The geographical positions given in the descriptions of the routeing systems are only correct for charts using the same geodetic datum as the reference charts indicated under each scheme.Section I BALTIC SEA CAUTION: The chartlets are for illustrative purposes only and must not be used for navigation. I . as may new editions of the reference charts published after the adoption of the routeing system. Mariners should consult the appropriate nautical publications and charts for up-to-date details on aids to navigation and other relevant information.

64˚ 62˚ Helsinki Oslo Stockholm Tallinn 60˚ 58˚ Göteborg 1 2 56˚ Kobenhavn INDEX: DEEP-WATER ROUTES IN THE BALTIC SEA 1: Navigation through the entrances to the Baltic Sea 2: Between Hatter Rev and Hatter Barn 3: Off the east coast of Langeland 4: North-east of Gedser 4 3 Kiel 54˚ 97183 10˚ 15˚ 20˚ 25˚ I/ii .

000 tonnes deadweight. in view of the fact that 17 metres is the maximum obtainable depth without dredging in the area north-east of Gedser and that the charted depths. taking into account the possibility of depths being as much as 2 metres less than charted. I/1 . as specified in paragraph 9. in certain areas in Store Baelt (Hatter Rev. (b) (c) _____ * This became paragraph 8. and (iv) be aware that anchoring may be necessary owing to the weather and sea conditions in relation to the size and draught of the ship and to the sea level and. (ii) participate in the radio position reporting system (SHIPPOS) operated by the Government of Denmark.2* of the introduction to class 7 of the International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code (IMDG Code).2 in Amendment 25-89 to the IMDG Code. as mentioned above. in this respect. when passing through the entrances to the Baltic Sea. (iii) use for the passage the pilotage services locally established by the coastal States.4. even under normal conditions. and (iii) use for the passage the pilotage services locally established by the coastal States. (ii) have on board suitable electronic position-fixing equipment to make use of hyperbolic systems providing sufficient position-fixing accuracy for navigating in these areas. That. Vengeancegrund and in the narrow route east of Langeland) when constrained by their draught. and (iii) exhibit the signal prescribed in rule 28 of the International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea.620(15)) [It is recommended:] (a) That ships over 40.5. take special account of the information available from the pilot and from radio navigation information services in the area. That ships with a draught of 13 metres or more should. (ii) be equipped with a VHF radiotelephone installation capable of operating on appropriate frequencies. ships carrying a shipment of class 7 radioactive materials. furthermore: (i) be equipped with a VHF radiotelephone installation capable of operating on appropriate frequencies. should: (i) participate in the ship reporting system (SHIPPOS) operated by the Government of Denmark. should: (i) not pass the area unless they have a draught with which it is safe to navigate through the area. 1972. may be decreased by as much as 2 metres owing to unknown and moving obstructions. irrespective of size or draught.NAVIGATION THROUGH THE ENTRANCES TO THE BALTIC SEA (Extract from resolution A. and additionally taking into account the possible changes in the indicated depth of water caused by meteorological or other effects.

) Description of the deep-water route A deep-water route with a minimum depth of water below mean sea level of 19 metres is bounded by lines connecting the following geographical positions: (i) 55855'.65 N. [5] (iii) .61 N. Sejro 5 Hatter Rev (ii) 55' .78 E (vi) 55853'.07 E Note: Ships which are not obliged by reason of their draught (13 metres or less) to use the deep-water route should use the traffic separation scheme which lies east of that route and where there is a minimum depth of water below mean sea level of 15 metres.DEEP-WATER ROUTE BETWEEN HATTER REV AND HATTER BARN (Reference chart: Danish 128. (vi) .60 E (iii) 55853'. 1985 edition.42 E (ii) 55854'. 010848'. 010849'.58 N.40 N. 010851'. Note: This chart is based on European Datum.39 E (iv) 55850'. 010849'.30 E (vii) 55854'.20 N.52 N. 010856'.68 E (v) 56850'. Inshore traffic zone 55˚ 50' [6] Røsnæs 5 Puller 45' 5 RØSNÆS 97079 50' 11˚ DEEP-WATER ROUTE BETWEEN HATTER REV AND HATTER BARN I/2 . DW (vii) .15 N. Bosserne (i) . (iv) . 010848'. Hatter Barn See description of traffic separation scheme “At Hatter Barn” (part B. 010855'. section I) DW (v) .

40 E (25) 55810'. 010859'.00 N. 011802'.) Description of the deep-water route A deep-water route with a minimum depth of water below mean sea level of 19 metres is connecting the following geographical positions: (1) 55811'. Note: These charts are based on European Datum.80 (10) 54852'.20 N. (19) DW . (20) DW 58' 2' 97185 11˚ 2' 4' . 12' (7) .80 (6) 55802'.40 N.80 N.10 E (14) 54841'.80 E (24) 55809'. (22) (4) .30 (3) 55808'. 5' Kappel 45' (5) .80 N.20 (8) 54858'.60 N.30 E bounded by a line E E E E E E E E E E E E Note: Ships with draughts in excess of 13 metres are recommended to use the deep-water route because of navigational difficulties for such ships in following the nationally recommended track which lies to the east.10 E (16) 54848'. (23) 8' (10) . (15) (6) . 010849'. 010850'. 010847'. 010853'. 011800'.90 N. .30 (4) 55804'.30 N. (21) DW 4' 3' (12) . 55˚ (2) .20 N. (16) 50' 55˚ .40 N. 010858'. .50 E (18) 54856'. 010859'.40 N. . 11' .30 N. 010852'.30 N. 011800'. 011800'.70 N.50 N.40 N. 010859'. 196. 010859'.10 N. (13) DEEP-WATER ROUTE OFF THE EAST COAST OF LANGELAND 45' 50' 55' 11˚ I/3 . (25) 10' (9) .20 N. 010850'. (20) DW (1) . (14) 40' . .. 010858'. (18) 55' (24) 9' LANGELAND DW Hov (3) .DEEP-WATER ROUTE OFF THE EAST COAST OF LANGELAND (Reference charts: Danish 142. 010859'. 010857'.70 (13) 54840'.10 (2) 55810'.30 N.40 N.00 E (15) 54844'. 1989 edition. .20 N. 010845'. (6) . (17) Taars DW 7' 6' Albuen (11) . 010846'. . 011800'.60 E (22) 55804'.00 E (17) 54852'. .50 (9) 54856'.60 (5) 55803'.90 N. 011802'.90 (11) 54848'.40 N. (8) .60 N.40 E (21) 55804'.10 E (20) 55801'. 010850'. . 010859'. 010847'.60 E (19) 54858'. 1985 edition.30 N.20 E (23) 55808'.50 (12) 54844'.60 (7) 54859'.

012814'.10 (2) 54836'.20 N.10 N. (5) 35' . 012844'. . (3) .90 bounded by a line E E E Notes: 1 2 The deep-water route is connected to the northern termination of the traffic separation scheme ``South of Gedser''. 012815'. 1984 edition. in such a manner that eastbound ships proceed on the south side of the deep-water route and westbound ships on the north side.90 E (5) 54835'.00 (3) 54846'.50 N. are recommended to use the areas to the north and south of this route.30 E (6) 54831'.30 N.40 E (4) 54846'. other than ships which. 012843'. because of their draught. (6) 97184 12˚ 15' DW 20' 25' 30' 35' 40' DEEP-WATER ROUTE NORTH-EAST OF GEDSER I/4 . (1) . 012817'.DEEP-WATER ROUTE NORTH-EAST OF GEDSER (Reference chart: Danish 187. Note: This chart is based on European Datum. 012813'.) Description of the deep-water route A deep-water route with a minimum depth of water below mean sea level of 17 metres is connecting the following geographical positions: (1) 54831'.90 N. (4) 54˚ 45' DW DW DW 40' DW (2) . .40 N. Ships. must use the deep-water route.

Mariners should consult the appropriate nautical publications and charts for up-to-date details on aids to navigation and other relevant information. WARNING: The geographical positions given in the descriptions of the routeing systems are only correct for charts using the same geodetic datum as the reference charts indicated under each scheme. as may new editions of the reference charts published after the adoption of the routeing system.Section II WESTERN EUROPEAN WATERS CAUTION: The chartlets are for illustrative purposes only and must not be used for navigation. II . Charts published by other hydrographic offices may use a different geodetic datum.

INDEX: DEEP-WATER ROUTES IN WESTERN EUROPEAN WATERS 6 1: Deep-water route leading to the port of Antifer 2: Deep-water route forming part of the north-eastbound traffic lane of the Strait of Dover and adjacent waters traffic separation scheme 3: Deep-water routes forming parts of routeing system ‘‘Off Friesland’’ 4: Deep-water route leading to Europoort 5: Deep-water route leading to IJmuiden 6: Deep-water route west of the Hebrides 55˚ 3 5 4 London 2 Antwerp 1 50˚ Le Havre 97186 10˚ 5˚ 0˚ 5˚ II/ii .

000810'.40 N.70 W (4) 49845'.80 W (6) 49858'.10 N. . 50˚ .30 N. 000806'.20 W Note: This deep-water route is a continuation of the buoyed fairway leading from Antifer harbour. positions: 000806'.80 N. France) Description of the deep-water route The deep-water route is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical (1) 49855'. (2) 49844'. (4) (3) 5 Antifer 5 Le Havre 30' 97190 30' 0˚ DEEP-WATER ROUTE LEADING TO ANTIFER II/1 .20 N. (3) 49844'.50 W 000808'.50 W 000839'. .70 N. . (2) (5) . (1) (6) DW DW .DEEP-WATER ROUTE LEADING TO THE PORT OF ANTIFER Â (Reference charts: 6614-T. 000840'.80 W (5) 49847'. 6614-D by Service hydrographique et oceanographique de la Marine.

15' DW Area to be avoided in the Dover Strait (see part D.70 N and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (i) 51823'. section I) 25' (ii) . noting that the sea-bed is relatively unstable.) Description of the deep-water route The deep-water route forming part of the north-eastbound traffic lane between the separation zone described in paragraph (i) and the separation zone/line described in paragraphs (c) and (d) of the traffic separation scheme ``In the Strait of Dover and adjacent waters'' has been established between latitude 51809'. 002800'.82 N. 5' Dunkerque 51˚ Calais 97189 25' 30' 35' 40' 45' 50' 55' 2˚ 5' 10' 15' 20' DEEP-WATER ROUTE FORMING PART OF THE NORTH-EASTBOUND TRAFFIC LANE OF THE STRAIT OF DOVER AND ADJACENT WATERS TRAFFIC SEPARATION SCHEME II/2 .80 E Note: Limiting depths available in the route should be ascertained by reference to the latest large-scale navigational charts of the area.DEEP-WATER ROUTE FORMING PART OF THE NORTH-EASTBOUND TRAFFIC LANE OF THE STRAIT OF DOVER AND ADJACENT WATERS TRAFFIC SEPARATION SCHEME Note: See ``Recommendations on navigation through the English Channel and Dover Strait'' in part F.40 N.30 N. Note: This chart is based on Ordnance Survey of Great Britain (1936) Datum. In the area of the deep-water route east of the separation line ships are recommended to avoid overtaking. (Reference chart: British Admiralty 1610.80 E (ii) 51822'.62 E (iii) 51818'. 3. and adjacent waters” (see part D. 002804'. Area to be avoided around the F3 station within the separation scheme “In the Strait of Dover (i) . 2. A deep-water route forming part of the north-eastbound traffic lane is established to the north-west of the Sandettie Bank and masters considering the use of this route should take into account the proximity of traffic using the south-westbound lane. The main traffic lane for north-eastbound traffic lies to the south-east of the Sandettie Bank and shall be followed by all such ships as can safely navigate therein having regard to their draught. 002805'. 1989 edition. DW Ramsgate 20' DW DW (iii) . section I) 10' Notes: WARNING 1.

60 E the following geographical positions: (4) 52801'.00 E (61) 53829'. 004810'.91 N. 1988 edition. 004808'. paragraphs (b). 1978 edition. (g) and (h).88 N.50 E (59) 52818'. (d) ``Friesland Junction'' precautionary area (e) (f) Deep-water route from the traffic separation scheme ``Off Botney Ground'' to the precautionary area ``Friesland Junction'' (g) The deep-water route is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (26) 53857'.01 E (41) 53855'.88 N. paragraphs (n). 53. 1037 (INT 1045).00 N. 1988 edition.59 N. 1988 edition.32 E (25) 54800'.96 E Geographical positions (28).80 N.48 E (13) 53822'. Netherlands Hydrographic Office 1014 (INT 1043). Note: These charts are based on European Datum (1950).88 E (31) 54801'.00 E (60) 53804'.47 E (5) 52809'.) Description of the deep-water routes Deep-water route from North Hinder to traffic separation scheme ``Off Brown Ridge'' (a) The deep-water route is bounded by a line connecting (1) 52855'.92 E (28) 54801'.40 E (12) 53803'. 002842'. 1984 edition.17 N. 1989 edition. 003828'.24 N.20 N.00 E (30) 54802'. 003839'.58 N. 002842'.81 N. paragraphs (f). 1978 edition. in section II of part B). (Reference charts: British Admiralty 1405. Deep-water route from traffic separation scheme ``Off Brown Ridge'' to traffic separation scheme ``West Friesland'' (c) The deep-water route is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (11) 53802'.20 N. 003822'.60 E (54) 53834'. The deep-water route is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (53) 53836'.47 E (h) Deep-water route from North Hinder to Indefatigable Bank via DR1 lightbuoy (i) _____ * The routeing system ``Off Friesland'' replaced the ``Deep-water route from North Hinder to TW/1 and TW/2 lightbuoys.96 E Geographical positions (41) to (56) form the traffic separation scheme ``Off Botney Ground'' (see ``Off Friesland''. 002836'. 003843'. section II. 002836'. 002833'.71 E (14) 53819'.02 E (29) 54805'.23 N. 004846'.89 N. (o) and (p).91 N.00 E (58) 52818'. 003826'. 003814'. The ``Friesland Junction'' precautionary area is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (26) 53857'.46 N. 004859'. in section II of part B). 1035 (INT 1046). 002844'.74 E Geographical positions (13) to (27) form the traffic separation scheme ``West Friesland'' (see ``Off Friesland''.00 N.23 N.67 E (3) 51854'. paragraphs (j).DEEP-WATER ROUTES FORMING PARTS OF ROUTEING SYSTEM ``OFF FRIESLAND''* Note: See ``Off Friesland'' in part B. 1988 edition. 002843'.34 E (31) 54801'. 1505 and 2182A.00 E (3) 51854'.02 E (42) 54800'.00 E (57) 53804'. 002844'.20 N. German Hydrographic Office 50 (INT 1045). (c) and (d). which were cancelled at 0000 hrs UTC on 1 December 1990.76 N.94 N. 002835'. section II and ``Mandatory route for tankers from North Hinder to the German Bight and vice versa'' in part G. 004810'. (k) and (l). 004820'.20 N. in section II of part B). 005800'. via S2 lightbuoy'' and the ``Deep-water route from North Hinder to TW/1 and TW/2 lightbuoys via DR1 lightbuoy''.33 E (6) 52854'.14 N.57 N.54 N. 002833'.00 E (b) Geographical positions (1) and (6) to (12) form the traffic separation scheme ``Off Brown Ridge'' (see ``Off Friesland''.25 E (2) 52809'. 1408. 004808'. 1406. in section II of part B). (29) and (32) to (40) form the traffic separation scheme ``East Friesland'' (see ``Off Friesland''. II/3-1 . 003800'. 003805'.20 N.75 N. 003818'.92 N. 002856'.49 E (4) 52801'. 1986 edition. 003844'.78 N.

5 m at LLWS. which have a depth of 26. The least water depth found in these areas was more than 29 m at LLWS except for a few patches just north of the parallel 528 N. 003813'. The least water depth found in these areas was more than 23 m at LLWS except for one wreck in geographical position 52846'.Notes: 1 Least water depths The deep-water routes from North Hinder to the traffic separation scheme ``Off Brown Ridge'' and from the traffic separation scheme ``Off Brown Ridge'' to the traffic separation scheme ``West Friesland''. See also the note pertaining to the traffic separation scheme ``German Bight western approach''. 2 Least water depths The deep-water routes from the traffic separation scheme ``Off Botney Ground'' to precautionary area ``Friesland Junction'' and ``From North Hinder to Indefatigable Bank via DR1 lightbuoy''.17 N.83 E. the traffic lanes of the traffic separation scheme ``Off Botney Ground''. II/3-2 . the precautionary area ``Friesland Junction''. The least water depth over that wreck found by wire-sweeping was 20. and the traffic lanes of the traffic separation schemes ``Off Brown Ridge'' and ``West Friesland'' were closely surveyed in the period 1981 to 1986.0 m at LLWS. and the traffic separation scheme ``East Friesland'' were closely surveyed in the period 1981 to 1986.

.Friesland Junction precautionary area (see part B. (11) TE DR1 . (54) 30' (61) (13) . (5) . (1) . (60) (12) . . . . (3) North Hinder Junction precautionary area (see “In the approaches to Hook of Holland and at North Hinder” in part B. . DW (14) (57) . (41) (53) . . (26) (25) . XE L 53˚ Den Helder (6) DW DW 30' IJmuiden . (4) 5 R North Hinder Europoort 52˚ . (28) 54˚ . (2) . section II ) (42) (31) (30) (29) . DW . DW . section II ) 97187 2˚ 30' 3˚ 30' 4˚ 30' 5˚ DEEP-WATER ROUTES FORMING PARTS OF ROUTEING SYSTEM ``OFF FRIESLAND'' II/3-3 . (59) (58) . DW . . .

a special indicator is brought on board by the pilot. 003853'. which border the midchannel zone on each side. 003857'.02 E (ii) 52801'. 003857'.00 E (x) 51857'. 003856'. 003802'.72 N.30 E (xiii) 52800'.20 E (iii) 52802'. each 300 m wide.95 N. 1350 (INT 1415).90 E and 003844'. (ii) Those ships which.60 E the least water depth in the deep-water route is 22. 003809'.37 E (viii) 51857'.) Description of the deep-water route The deep-water route is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (i) 52800'.78 E (xii) 52801'. 003851'.50 m at mean LLWS. 002854'. 2 II/4-1 . For optimum use of this aid in the mid-channel zone and in the eastern part of the deep-water route. 1986 edition.92 N. 1983 edition. 1540 (INT 1475). 1449 (INT 1472).03 N.15 E (xi) 52801'. are confined to the mid-channel zone are strongly advised to make use of the above equipment.90 E the least water depths in the deep-water routes are as follows: (a) 23. Electronic navigational aids (i) The Decca Navigator Chain (Holland Chain) enables masters of deep-draught ships equipped with a Decca receiver to be informed continuously and highly accurately about the ship's deviation from. Note: These charts are based on European Datum.17 N.32 E (iv) 51858'. because of their draughts.50 m at mean LLWS.90 E and 003853'.00 N. 003809'.17 E (vii) 52800'. 003800'. 1988 edition. (iii) Between longitudes 003844'.60 N.DEEP-WATER ROUTE LEADING TO EUROPOORT (Reference charts: Netherlands Hydrographic Office 1349 (INT 1416). 003854'.60 E (vi) 52800'.15 E and position (i) Notes: 1 Least water depth (i) West of longitude 003827'. (ii) Between longitudes 003827'. each 300 m wide. 003800'.78 N. 1986 edition. and progress along.65 N.50 N. the axes of the route.50 m at mean LLWS in the two peripheral zones.90 E an overall least water depth is established at 23. (v) The above depths are checked and maintained by frequent surveys and dredging. (iv) East of longitude 003853'.50 m at mean LLWS in a mid-channel zone 600 m wide centred upon the axis of the route.27 N.50 m at mean LLWS in the two peripheral zones. 002859'.52 E (ix) 51857'.30 N.00 m at mean LLWS in a mid-channel zone 600 m wide centred upon the axis of the route. which border the midchannel zone on each side.60 E the least water depths in the deep-water route are as follows: (a) 23.07 N. (b) 22.92 E (position (26) of the Maas West outer traffic separation scheme) (v) 51859'. (b) 22.

10' See “Deep-water routes forming parts of routeing system ‘Off Friesland’ ” Maas Centre precautionary .(vi) DW . . section II) 50' 97188 40' 3˚ 20' 40' 4˚ DEEP-WATER ROUTE LEADING TO EUROPOORT II/4-2 . (v) . (ix) . (x) (iv) . (viii) (vii) . . DW . . DW 52˚ Europoort See description of traffic separation scheme “In the approaches to Hook of Holland and at North Hinder” (part B. (ii) area (xi) (xii) (iii) (xiii) (i) North Hinder Junction precautionary area . . .

00 E 18. positions: 003848'.89 N.09 N.78 N. 30' (9) (10) DW (4) . Traffic centre IJmuiden The traffic centre IJmuiden will organize the use of the dredged channel and will monitor the traffic up to a distance of about 20 miles.90 N. (12) IJmuiden 25' 52˚ 20' 50' 4˚ 10' 20' 30' 97191 DEEP-WATER ROUTE LEADING TO IJMUIDEN II/5 .33 004812'.DEEP-WATER ROUTE LEADING TO IJMUIDEN (Reference charts: Netherlands 1450. . (2) . (5) DW . (1) Racon . 1985 edition. 004824'.31 E (12) 52827'.28 N. 004832'.55 004823'. 004813'. (11) (3) .08 E (10) 52829'.16 004813'. (6) DW DW DW . (4) 52829'. . 1974.00 E 17.) Description of the deep-water route The deep-water route is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical (1) 52828'.90 m at mean LLWS (c) between longitudes 004822'.02 E E E E E E Notes: 1 Least water depth The least water depths in the deep-water route are as follows: (a) between longitudes 003845'.34 E (8) 52827'.01 N. Information on the times and conditions when the dredged channel is navigable will be broadcast by the traffic centre IJmuiden on VHF channel 12 with a normal working range of 35 miles. 004828'. the axis of the route.15 N. Note: These charts are based on European Datum. (6) 52830'.20 m at mean LLWS (b) between longitudes 004812'.10 E (7) 52831'.00 E and 004812'. and progress along.58 N.64 E (11) 52828'. 1986 edition.00 E 17. .49 003841'. 1985 edition. (8) . 004812'.54 N. . 1350 (INT 1415).40 m at mean LLWS. (3) 52829'.96 N.42 N.00 E and 004822'.00 E and 004832'.33 N.30 E (9) 52830'. 004822'. (5) 52830'. 2 Electronic navigational aids A dedicated Decca indicator will be brought on board by the pilot to enable the ship to be informed continuously and highly accurately about its deviation from. 3 35' (7) .03 004832'. (2) 52828'.

00 W (4) 58835'. 008800'.00 W (5) 58840'. (4) 40' DW (6) 30' . 007813'.000 gross tonnage are recommended. as confirmed by detailed hydrographic surveys.50 N.80 N. es 40' 10' Barra Rum 57˚ 50' (8) . 1996 edition.50 W (7) 57838'. 006830'. 1996 edition.50 N. Kilda to the north-west and is bounded by lines connecting the following geographical positions: (1) 56846'. 2635. 1996 edition. 1996 edition.DEEP-WATER ROUTE WEST OF THE HEBRIDES* (Reference charts: British Admiralty 2720. 008810'. Note: These charts are based on Ordnance Survey of Great Britain (1996) Datum.70 W (8) 56846'. (2) ch (7) .) Description of the deep-water route The deep-water route lies between the Outer Hebrides Isles on its south-east side and the Flannan Islands and St.00 W Notes: 1 2 The depths in the route. are nowhere less than 28. (5) .70 N.10 N. 007803'. 008810'.00 W (6) 58824'. . to use this route in preference to sailing through the restricted waters of the Minches.10 N. (1) 50' 40' Mingulay Berneray 97270 8˚ 30' 20' 10' 7˚ 50' 40' 30' 20' 10' _____ * Date of implementation: 0000 hours UTC on 1 December 1998. 008800'. weather conditions permitting. 006823'.5 m. 30' 20' 10' .75 W (2) 57834'. 2721. Laden tankers of over 10. . (3) 20' Flannan Isles 10' Lewis DW 58˚ Gasker 50' St. British Admiralty 2722. Kilda North Uist Monach Isles Benbecula Skye 20' 30' South Uist DW See Recommendations on navigation around the United Kingdom coast in part E Th e M in .50 W (3) 58820'. Note: These charts are based on Ordnance Survey of Great Britain (1936) Datum. DEEP-WATER ROUTE WEST OF THE HEBRIDES II/6 .75 N.75 N.

as may new editions of the reference charts published after the adoption of the routeing system. Mariners should consult the appropriate nautical publications and charts for up-to-date details on aids to navigation and other relevant information. WARNING: The geographical positions given in the descriptions of the routeing systems are only correct for charts using the same geodetic datum as the reference charts indicated under each scheme. III .Section III SOUTH-EAST ASIA CAUTION: The chartlets are for illustrative purposes only and must not be used for navigation. Charts published by other hydrographic offices may use a different geodetic datum.

(See Rules for vessels navigating through the Straits of Malacca and Singapore in part F) 3˚ 30' Malacca 2˚ 1 30' Singapore Sumatera 2 1˚ INDEX: DEEP-WATER ROUTES IN SOUTH-EAST ASIA 1: Deep-water routes within the traffic separation schemes in the Strait of Malacca 2: Deep-water routes forming part of the eastbound lane of the traffic separation scheme “In the Singapore Strait” 101˚ 30' 30' 0˚ 102˚ 30' 103˚ 30' 104˚ 30' 105˚ 97134 III/ii .

In sh or e tra DW ffic zo n 20' e (46) . (43) jun gK elin g 10' 5 Tanjung Medang 5 .20 E A deep-water route for south-eastbound traffic is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions of the traffic separation scheme ``Malacca to Iyu Kecil'': (77) 02801'. . 101836'.50 E (79) 01852'. 3947. 101839'.00 N. (78) 2˚ 5 .10 N. (45) .90 N.10 E (45) 02803'.20 N.40 E (46) 02812'.70 N. Tan .) Description of the deep-water routes (a) A deep-water route for south-eastbound traffic is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions of the traffic separation scheme ``Port Dickson to Tanjung Keling'': (42) 02821'. 1996 edition. Pulau Medang ! (44) (77) .00 N. (80) DW . 102805'.80 N.80 E (44) 02805'. (79) Pulau Rupat 50' 99025 30' 40' 50' 102˚ 10' DEEP-WATER ROUTES WITHIN THE TRAFFIC SEPARATION SCHEMES IN THE STRAIT OF MALACCA _____ * Date of implementation: 0000 hours UTC on 1 December 1998. 101859'. Note: These charts are based on revised Kertau Datum.80 E (43) 02813'.80 E (b) Note: See ``Rules for vessels navigating through the Straits of Malacca and Singapore'' in part F. 30' ! (48) . 102801'.DEEP-WATER ROUTES WITHIN THE TRAFFIC SEPARATION SCHEMES IN THE STRAIT OF MALACCA* (Reference charts: British Admiralty 3946. (42) . 102813'.30 N.30 E (78) 01859'. 101854'. 101839'.90 E (48) 02824'. 101836'. III/1 .00 N. 1997 edition.30 E (47) 02822'.60 E (80) 02800'. 101855'.60 N.40 N. 5 Cape Rachado (47) . 101836'.

103838'. 103849'.30 E (x) 01802'.57 E Note: Attention is drawn to the Rules for vessels navigating through the Straits of Malacca and Singapore (see part F).97 N. 5' . 103852'.45 N.82 E (iv) 01810'.21 N. The deep-water route is established within the eastbound lane described in paragraph (c) of the traffic separation scheme ``Singapore Strait (off St.38 E (vii) 01809'.40 E (xiv) 01810'. 103850'.) Description of the deep-water routes (a) The deep-water route is established within the eastbound lane described in paragraph (d) of the traffic separation scheme ``In the Singapore Strait (main Strait)''.90 N.95 N.27 N.61 N.DEEP-WATER ROUTES FORMING PART OF THE EASTBOUND TRAFFIC LANE OF THE TRAFFIC SEPARATION SCHEME IN THE SINGAPORE STRAIT* (Reference charts: British Admiralty 2556. 2403. 1983 edition. John's Island)''. 103847'. The deep-water route is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (i) 01803'.60 N. (vii) .95 E (vi) 01810'. Pulau Sakijang 5 Area to be avoided (xii) .90 N.28 E (iii) 01808'.44 E (viii) 01808'.43 E (xiii) 01811'. 103852'. Note: These charts are based on revised Kertau Datum. (viii) Pu. 103848'. 103842'.95 N.87 E (v) 01810'. ! 5 (iv) .78 N. Kepala Dyernih 103˚ 40' 45' 50' 97192 DEEP-WATER ROUTES FORMING PART OF THE EASTBOUND TRAFFIC LANE OF THE TRAFFIC SEPARATION SCHEME ``IN THE SINGAPORE STRAIT'' _____ * Date of implementation: 0000 hours UTC on 1 December 1998. 103850'. 103845'.10 E Note: (b) Reference is made to rule 1 of the Rules for vessels navigating through the Straits of Malacca and Singapore (see part F). 103839'. 103849'. Belakang Padang Takong Kecil 5 (ii) .45 E (ii) 01805'. (x) Pu. DW Ph illi pC n ha ne l 1˚ Pemping Br. DW 5 Helen Mar Reef . DW .81 N.26 N. (vi) 5 Buffalo Rock . The deep-water route is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (xi) 01811'. (v) . (ix) (i) . DW .92 N. (xi) . 3833. (xiv) . (xiii) Batu Berhanti 10' 5 5 Raffles 5 (iii) . III/2 . 1994 edition. 1988 edition.91 E (ix) 01804'.58 E (xii) 01812'. 103843'. 103846'.

WARNING: The geographical positions given in the descriptions of the routeing systems are only correct for charts using the same geodetic datum as the reference charts indicated under each scheme. Charts published by other hydrographic offices may use a different geodetic datum. IV . Mariners should consult the appropriate nautical publications and charts for up-to-date details on aids to navigation and other relevant information. as may new editions of the reference charts published after the adoption of the routeing system. GULF OF MEXICO AND CARIBBEAN SEA CAUTION: The chartlets are for illustrative purposes only and must not be used for navigation.Section IV WESTERN NORTH ATLANTIC OCEAN.

55˚ INDEX: WESTERN NORTH ATLANTIC OCEAN. 25˚ CUBA 20˚ MEXICO 15˚ 10˚ 95˚ 90˚ 85˚ 80˚ 75˚ 70˚ 65˚ 60˚ 55˚ 97193 . GULF OF MEXICO AND CARIBBEAN SEA 1: Deep-water route in the southern approach to Chesapeake Bay 50˚ Newfoundland 45˚ Nova Scotia Boston New York 40˚ Washington 1 35˚ Charleston New Orleans Galveston 30˚ Florida Bahama Is.

and naval aircraft carriers.97 N. It is recommended that a ship using the deep-water route: . 075852'. .12 W (10) 36852'.2 avoid.70 N.23 W (9) 36849'. as far as practicable. draughts defined as greater than 13. or Chesapeake Bay Junction Lighted Buoy CBJ. 075855'. 075852'.80 W (11) 36854'. 1989 edition.35 N. 075846'.DEEP-WATER ROUTE IN THE SOUTHERN APPROACH TO CHESAPEAKE BAY (Reference chart: United States 12221. . Note: This chart is based on North American 1983 Datum. All other ships approaching the Chesapeake Bay traffic separation scheme should use the appropriate inbound or outbound traffic lane of the traffic separation scheme ``In the approaches to Chesapeake Bay''.) Description of the deep-water route A deep-water route is established in the southern approach of the traffic separation scheme ``In the approaches to Chesapeake Bay'' between the separation lines which connect the following geographical positions of the traffic separation scheme (see part B. section IX): (6) 36855'. overtaking other ships operating in the deep-water route.11 N.18 N.94 W (7) 36852'.29 W (8) 36849'. 2 3 IV/1-1 .52 N. 075855'.43 W Notes: 1 It is recommended that the following ships use the deep-water route when bound for Chesapeake Bay from sea or to sea from Chesapeake Bay: deep-draught ships. on the north end of the route. 075846'.5 m/45 ft in fresh water.1 announce its intention on VHF-FM channel 16 as it approaches Chesapeake Bay Southern Approach Lighted Whistle Buoy CB on the south end.3 keep as near to the outer limit of the route which lies on the starboard side as is safe and practicable.

(9) (8) 97194 55' 75˚ 50' DEEP-WATER ROUTE IN THE SOUTHERN APPROACH TO CHESAPEAKE BAY IV/1-2 . 55' DW . (10) DW 50' 36˚ .Atlantic Ocean 37˚ Precautionary area . (7) . . (6) (11) .

INDEX ALL AREAS TO BE AVOIDED 80˚ Arctic Circle 8 7 9 5 6 19 11 20 Tropic of Cancer 18 14 15 16 13 17 21 Equator 12 24 23 25 4 10 23 1 22 1: In the region of the Rochebonne Shelf 2: In the English Channel and its approaches 3: In the Dover Strait 4: Around the F3 station in the Dover Strait 5: At North Hinder Junction Point 6: At Maas Centre 7: In the region of the Orkney Islands 8: In the region of the Fair Isle 9: In the region of the Shetland Islands 10: Between The Smalls Lighthouse and Grassholme Island 60˚ 30 40˚ 26 20˚ 0˚ 27 28 Tropic of Capricorn 11: In the region of Nantucket Shoals 12: In the region of the Bermuda Islands 13: Off the Florida coast 14: At Louisiana Offshore Oil Port (LOOP) in the Gulf of Mexico 15: In the approaches to the port of Veracruz 16: At the maritime oil terminal off Cayo Arcas 17: In the Gulf of Campeche 18: In the region of the North-west Hawaiian Islands 31 32 19: Off the Washington coast 29 20: Off the California coast 21: In the approaches to Salina Cruz 22: In the region of Vorioi Sporadhes Islands 23: North of the Straits of Tiran 24: North of Sharm el Sheikh harbour 25: At the southern extremity of the Sinai Peninsula 26: In the region of Fasht Buldani 27: In the region of Mahé Island in the Seychelles 33 28: In the region of the Aldabra Islands in the Seychelles 29: At Alphard Banks [abolished] 30: In the region of Cape Terpeniya (Sakhalin) 31: In the region of the Great Barrier Reef 32: In the region of Three Kings Islands 33: In the Bass Strait 20˚ 40˚ 60˚ Antarctic Circle 180˚ 160˚ 140˚ 120˚ 100˚ 80˚ 60˚W 40˚ 20˚ 0˚ 20˚ 40˚ 60˚E 80˚ 100˚ 120˚ 140˚ 160˚ 180˚ .

Charts published by other hydrographic offices may use a different geodetic datum. Mariners should consult the appropriate nautical publications and charts for up-to-date details on aids to navigation and other relevant information.Section I NORTH-WESTERN EUROPEAN WATERS CAUTION: The chartlets are for illustrative purposes only and must not be used for navigation. as may new editions of the reference charts published after the adoption of the routeing system. WARNING: The geographical positions given in the descriptions of the routeing systems are only correct for charts using the same geodetic datum as the reference charts indicated under each scheme. I .

9 9 8 7 60˚ 55˚ 10 3 2 4 5 6 50˚ 1 45˚ INDEX: AREAS TO BE AVOIDED IN NORTH-WESTERN EUROPEAN WATERS 1: In the region of the Rochebonne Shelf 2: In the English Channel and its approaches 3: In the Dover Strait 4: Around the F3 station within the separation scheme “In the Strait of Dover and adjacent waters” 5: At North Hinder Junction Point 6: At Maas Centre 7: In the region of the Orkney Islands 8: In the region of the Fair Isle 9: In the region of the Shetland Islands 10: Between The Smalls Lighthouse and Grassholme Island 15˚ 10˚ 5˚ 0˚ 5˚ 10˚ 40˚ 35˚ I/ii 97250 .

002826'. Local knowledge is essential for safe passage because of navigational hazards in the area.00 N. 30' 3˚ 30' 2˚ 30' 1˚ 50' 5 Île d’Yeu 40' 30' 20' 5 .IN THE REGION OF THE ROCHEBONNE SHELF (Reference chart: British Admiralty 2648) Description of the area to be avoided In order to avoid the risk of pollution due to an accident in the area. all tankers carrying oil should avoid the area contained within a circle of radius seven miles centred upon geographical position 46810'. Roches Semées 10' Area to be avoided 5' 46˚ 97195 40' 35' 30' 25' 20' 15' 10' IN THE REGION OF THE ROCHEBONNE SHELF I/1 . ÎIe de Ré 10' 5 46˚ 20' Île d’Oléron Rochefort 50' 5 15' 40' 5 30' La Congrée Pierre Levée .00 W.

. 1988 edition.30 N.90 N.IN THE ENGLISH CHANNEL AND ITS APPROACHES (Reference charts: British Admiralty 2454. . 1982 edition. 001812'. 001848'.10 N.40 W These areas are established to avoid hazard to navigational aids which are established at the geographical positions listed above. Poole Bournemouth dles Neeannel Ch (see Note 1) Isle of Wight Bill of Portland St Alban’s Head 30' Areas to be avoided (see Note 2) Separation scheme “Off Casquets” (see part B. 000836'. (2) (3) (1) Casquets 5 Inshore traffic zone Guernsey 5 Alderney R e ac of A r lde y ne Notes 1: See “Recommendations on navigation around the United Kingdom coast” in part E 2: See “Recommended directions of traffic flow in the English Channel” in part E 50˚ Cherbourg 30' 5 5 30' 5 Sark 99036 2˚ 30' 1˚ 30' IN THE ENGLISH CHANNEL AND ITS APPROACHES I/2 . and which are considered vital to the safety of navigation.35 W (3) 50818'.10 W (2) 50812'. 2450.) Description of the areas to be avoided All ships should avoid the areas within circles of radius 2 miles centred upon the following geographical positions: (1) 50805'. Note: These charts are based on Ordnance Survey of Great Britain (1936) Datum. . section II ) . Note: See ``Recommendations on navigation through the English Channel and the Dover Strait'' in part F.

Note: These charts are based on Ordnance Survey of Great Britain (1936) Datum.IN THE DOVER STRAIT (Reference charts: British Admiralty 1610.3 miles centred upon the following geographical position: 51808'.) Description of the area to be avoided All ships should avoid the area within a circle of radius 0. section II ) 6' 25' 1˚ 30' 35' 97196 IN THE DOVER STRAIT I/3 . 12' Goodwin Sands 10' 51˚ Area to be avoided South Foreland 5 R 8' Traffic separation scheme ‘‘In the Strait of Dover and adjacent waters’’(see part B. 001834'. and which is considered vital to the safety of navigation.03 E This area is established to avoid hazard to the navigational aid which is established at the above geographical position. 1989 edition. 1987 edition.58 N. 1828.

it has been decided to establish an ``Area to be avoided'' centred on the F3 station. Note: The small differences in values of this location and position (i) of the description of the deep-water route forming part of the north-eastbound traffic lane in the separation scheme ``In the Strait of Dover and adjacent waters'' are due to the different geodetic datums of the reference charts on which the traffic separation scheme and this area to be avoided are based. I/4 . 002800'. 26' 25' Area to be avoided 51˚ 24' 23' 22' DW 21' 99006 55' 2˚ 5' AROUND THE F3 STATION WITHIN THE SEPARATION SCHEME ``IN THE STRAIT OF DOVER AND ADJACENT WATERS'' _____ * Date of implementation: 0000 hours UTC on 1 July 1999.000 crossing movements per annum and has suffered collision damage seven times over the past 10 years. Therefore. 1998 edition. Note: This chart is based on European Datum (1950)).90 N. The area to be avoided is centred on the following geographical position: 51823'. Description of the area to be avoided The F3 station is an area of heavy crossing traffic with some 11.AROUND THE F3 STATION WITHIN THE SEPARATION SCHEME ``IN THE STRAIT OF DOVER AND ADJACENT WATERS''* (Reference chart: British Admiralty 2449. with the aim of preventing further damage.59 E with a radius of 500 metres.

003853'. 1986 edition. I/5/6 .) The following area to be avoided by all ships is established within the precautionary area off North Hinder: an area bounded by a circle of radius 0.6 miles centred upon the following geographical position: 52801'. 1350 (INT 1415). AT MAAS CENTRE (Reference charts: Netherlands Hydrographic Office 1349 (INT 1416).5713 E Note: See chartlet attached to the description of the traffic separation scheme ``In the approaches to Hook of Holland and at North Hinder'' in section II of part B.7657 N.AT NORTH HINDER JUNCTION POINT (Reference charts: Netherlands Hydrographic Office 1035. Note: These charts are based on European Datum. 1449 (INT 1472).) The following area to be avoided by all ships not compelled to adhere to the deep-water route is established within the precautionary area off the entrance to the Rotterdam Waterway: an area bounded by a circle of radius 0. 002851'. 1986 edition.18 E Note: See chartlet attached to the description of the traffic separation scheme ``In the approaches to Hook of Holland and at North Hinder'' in section II of part B. 1983 edition.5 miles centred upon the following geographical position: 52800'. 1349 (INT 1416) Note: These charts are based on European Datum.13 N.

00 W (5) 59828'. 1988 edition. ships of more than 5. 002819'.IN THE REGION OF THE ORKNEY ISLANDS (Reference charts: British Admiralty 1954. 003815'.11 W Thence along the coast of Hoy to (1).11 W (11) 58855'.00 W (4) 59828'.00 N. 002809'.00 W (3) 59817'.) Description of the area to be avoided In order to avoid the risk of oil pollution and severe damage to the environment of Orkney.00 N.00 N. 003821'.73 N. 003850'. 003821'.00 W (6) 59824'.000 gross tonnage carrying oil or other hazardous cargoes in bulk should avoid the area bounded by lines connecting the following geographical positions: (1) 58846'. 002809'. Note: These charts are based on Ordnance Survey of Great Britain (1936) Datum. 1988 edition. 003850'.90 W (Old Head) Then around the coast of South Ronaldsay and Mainland to: (10) 58857'.84 N.00 N.00 N.15 N.00 W (9) 58844'.00 W (8) 58850'. 002854'.00 N.69 W (Tor Ness) (2) 58855'. (4) (5) 30' North Ronaldsay (6) 20' (3) + Area to be avoided Area to be avoided 10' (7) MAINLAND 59˚ (10) (2) (11) Scapa Flow South Ronaldsay HOY See “Recommendations on navigation around the United Kingdom coast” in part E Pe Flotta Tor Ness (1) ntla nd Firt h 30´ 20´ 10´ (8) 50´ (9) Old Head 3˚ 50´ 40´ 30´ 20´ 10´ 50´ 40´ 2˚ IN THE REGION OF THE ORKNEY ISLANDS I/7 97252 . 003817'. 002835'.97 N. 1942.00 N.00 W (7) 59805'.

IN THE REGION OF THE FAIR ISLE (Reference charts: British Admiralty 1119.5 miles centred upon geographical position 59832'. (Area to be avoided In the region of the Shetland Islands) 40´ Area to be avoided 35´ Fair Isle Channel FAIR ISLE 59˚ 30´ Area to be avoided f 25´ 97253 55´ 50´ 45´ 1˚40´ 35´ 30´ 25´ 20´ IN THE REGION OF THE FAIR ISLE I/8 F id 25 h F b 2000 S W i Shi ' R i (f h) 1 . Note: See part E. ships of more than 5. Recommended routes in the Fair Isle Channel.00 N.000 gross tonnage carrying oil or other hazardous cargoes in bulk should avoid the area contained within a circle of radius 6.00 W. 1989 edition Note: This chart is based on Ordnance Survey of Great Britain (1936) Datum. 001838'.) In order to avoid the risk of oil pollution and severe damage to the environment of Fair Isle.

30 W (21) 60839'.87 N.00 W (16) 60842'.00 W (24) 60842'.00 N. 000853'.40 N. 1989 edition.00 N.50 N.00 W (d) Precautionary area in the south-eastern approaches to Yell Sound A precautionary area is established in the south-eastern approaches to Yell Sound.IN THE REGION OF THE SHETLAND ISLANDS (Reference charts: British Admiralty 1119.00 W (18) 60840'. 002809'. 1233.000 gross tonnage should avoid the area bounded by lines connecting the following geographical positions: (1) 60839'. ships of more than 5. 000853'.00 N.70 N.40 W (31) 60836'.40 W (26) 60824'. 000855'. 001809'.50 W Thence up the eastern side of Colgrave Sound to: (30) 60835'. 001809'.80 N.40 N.00 W (Funzie Ness) (6) 60833'.30 N.) Description of the areas to be avoided and precautionary areas (a) North of Shetland In order to avoid the risk of oil pollution and severe damage to the environment and economy of Shetland. 000858'.00 W (13) 59842'. 000802'. 000829'. 001809'. 000812'.80 N. 001810'.000 gross tonnage carrying oil or other hazardous cargoes in bulk should avoid the area bounded by lines connecting the following geographical positions: (10) 60802'.30 N.20 W (5) 60834'. Note: These charts are based on Ordnance Survey of Great Britain (1936) Datum.00 W (15) 60815'. all ships of more than 5.70 W (4) 60838'.50 N. 1989 edition. 001817'.80 N.00 W (29) 60833'. 000848'. 000812'.50 N.00 N.30 W (22) 60840'.50 N.00 W (14) 60802'.90 W Thence along the west coastline to position (10) (c) Precautionary area in the northern approaches to Yell Sound A precautionary area is established in the northern approaches to Yell Sound.00 N.00 W I/9-1 .20 W (28) 60834'. 001822'.40 N.00 W (23) 60842'. 001802'. 1986 edition. 3292. 001822'. 002848'.00 W (19) 60837'.50 N.20 N. 000858'. 001817'.30 N. 002848'. The area is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (25) 60827'.50 N. 001826'. 000855'. The area is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (20) 61804'.00 W (17) 60842'. 001812'.50 W (Rams Ness) Thence up the eastern side of Colgrave Sound to: (7) 60835'.20 W (Helli Ness) (11) 59859'. 000848'.50 W (27) 60838'.20 N.80 N. 001809'.30 N. 001809'. 000858'.30 W (2) 61804'. 002809'.00 N.50 N.80 W Thence along the coastline to position (1) (b) West and south of Shetland In order to avoid the risk of oil pollution and severe damage to the environment of Shetland.30 W (3) 61804'.37 W (Perie Bard Lt) (12) 59841'.80 N.40 W (8) 60836'. 001817'.40 N.00 W (9) 60838'.80 N.

(11) 59859'.87 N.50 001812'.40 000802'. (26) 60824'.00 001809'. The area is bounded by a line connecting the 001802'.(e) Precautionary area in the approaches to Lerwick in the approaches to Lerwick. (2) (20) (3) 61˚ Area to be avoided 1 Muckle Flugga Precautionary area 1 50´ UNST (16) (24) (17) (23) (22) (18) (19) (1) (21) (9) (30) (7) (8) (31) (6) (5) (29) (28) 40´ (4) (27) Yell YELL Sd Esha Ness Sullom Voe Precautionary area 2 30´ (25) Ve Skerries Area to be avoided 2 Out Skerries Precautionary area 3 (26) 20´ (15) MAINLAND Bressay 10´ Foula Lerwick (14) (10) (11) 60˚ (13) (12) 97251 50´ 40´ 30´ 20´ 10´ 2˚ 50´ 40´ 30´ 20´ 10´ 1˚ 50´ 40´ 30´ 20´ 10´ 0˚ IN THE REGION OF THE SHETLAND ISLANDS I/9-2 F id 25 h F b 2000 S W i Shi ' R (See area to be avoided In the region of the Fair Isle) (See Recommended routes in the Fair Isle Channel.37 001810'.40 N. (10) 60802'. in part E) 40´ i (f h) 1 Sumburgh Head 50´ f .50 N.20 W W W W (Perie Bard) W (Helli Ness) A precautionary area is established following geographical positions: (25) 60827'. (12) 59841'.00 N.00 N.

20 N.) Description of the area to be avoided In order to avoid the risk of pollution due to a stranding in this area. gas carriers. all tankers. 005841'.50 N.BETWEEN THE SMALLS LIGHTHOUSE AND GRASSHOLME ISLAND (Reference chart: British Admiralty 1478. Area to be avoided Grassholme . which is in the close vicinity of important breeding grounds for sea-bird populations. (2) Skomer Island The Smalls (5) .30 W (3) 51842'. Note: This chart is based on Ordnance Survey of Great Britain (1936) Datum.50 N. chemical tankers carrying noxious liquid substances.25 W (4) 51841'. 005833'.50 N.50 W 51˚ 45' (1) .50 N. and all other ships of 500 gross tons or over should avoid the area bounded by lines connecting the following geographical positions: (1) 51844'. 005840'. 005827'. . (3) . (4) See “Recommendations on navigation around the United Kingdom coast” in part E 40' 40' 35' 5˚ 30' 25' 20' 97197 BETWEEN THE SMALLS LIGHTHOUSE AND GRASSHOLME ISLAND I/10 F id 25 h F b 2000 S W i Shi ' R i (f h) 1 f . 1988 edition.25 W (2) 51844'.50 W (5) 51842'. 005827'.

WARNING: The geographical positions given in the descriptions of the routeing systems are only correct for charts using the same geodetic datum as the reference charts indicated under each scheme.Section II NORTH AND CENTRAL AMERICAN WATERS CAUTION: The chartlets are for illustrative purposes only and must not be used for navigation. II . Charts published by other hydrographic offices may use a different geodetic datum. as may new editions of the reference charts published after the adoption of the routeing system. Mariners should consult the appropriate nautical publications and charts for up-to-date details on aids to navigation and other relevant information.

60˚ INDEX: AREAS TO BE AVOIDED IN NORTH AND CENTRAL AMERICAN WATERS 1: In the region of Nantucket Shoals 2: In the region of the Bermuda islands 3: Off the Florida coast 4: At Louisiana Offshore Oil Port (LOOP) in the Gulf of Mexico 5: In the approaches to the port of Veracruz 6: At the maritime oil terminal off Cayo Arcas 7: In the Gulf of Campeche Nantucket 8: In the region of the North-west Hawaiian Islands 1 9: Off the Washington coast 10: Off the California coast 11: In the approaches to Salina Cruz 10 50˚ 9 40˚ Louisiana 4 3 8 5 6 7 2 Bermuda 30˚ Tropic of Cancer 20˚ 11 10˚ Equator 0˚ 170˚ 160˚ 150˚ 140˚ 130˚ 120˚ 110˚ 100˚ 90˚ 80˚ 70˚ 60˚ 50˚ 40˚ 30˚ 20˚ .

. Note: This chart is based on North American 1927 Geodetic Datum. Ma Area to be avoided . (3) 40' Traffic separation scheme “Off New York” (See details in section IX of part B ) 30' 97199 20' 10' 70˚ 50' 40' 30' 20' 10' 69˚ IN THE REGION OF NANTUCKET SHOALS II/1 .50 N.IN THE REGION OF NANTUCKET SHOALS (Reference chart: United States 13009.50 N.50 W (4) 41804'. 069831'.00 W (6) 41823'. Bo sto n.50 W (5) 41823'. 1985 edition.20 N.40 N. 069819'. (5) Nantucket Island 20' ach to (1) . (4) Nantucket Shoals 10' ssa chu set ts” 41˚ 50' (2) .00 W (2) 40843'.) Description of the area to be avoided Because of the great danger of stranding and for reasons of environmental protection.50 W (3) 40844'. 070800'.50 N.000 gross tons should avoid the area bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (1) 41816'. 070802'.80 W Cape Cod pro ap the B ) In e “ ar t em f p sch IX o tion tion ara sec sep in ffic tails Tra e de (Se 40' 30' (6) . . all ships carrying cargoes of oil or hazardous materials and all other ships of more than 1.50 N. 070812'. 069819'.

065810'.) Description of the area to be avoided Because of the great danger of stranding on the extensive reefs fringing Bermuda to the west.00 W) Note: Mariners are warned to navigate with extreme care in the approaches to the Bermuda islands due to the extensive and dangerous fringing reefs. 064829'. The only safe approach to the islands is from the south-east.80 N. should avoid the area outside the reefs bounded by lines connecting the following geographical positions: (1) Gibb's Hill Lighthouse (5) 32839'. Note: This chart is based on World Geodetic System 72 Datum. whether or not bound for Bermuda ports.00 W (2) 32808'.00 W (32821'. 064853'.000 gross tons.00 W) (6) 32839'.00 W (8) St. and for reasons of environmental protection. north and north-east of the islands. preferably in daylight. David's Lighthouse (4) 32824'.00 N. (7) Area to be avoided 30' 5 (4) . 064839'. .00 N.00 W (7) 32832'.00 N. 064838'. 065810'.00 N. (6) 40' . 064853'. (5) . BERMUDA ISLANDS St Georges Island (8) 5 St David’s 20' Hamilton h) 1 10' 40' 30' Hamilton Island 5 (1) (3) . 064850'.00 N. all ships carrying cargoes of oil or hazardous materials and all other ships of more than 1.10 N. 1983 edition.00 N.IN THE REGION OF THE BERMUDA ISLANDS (Reference chart: British Admiralty 360.00 W (3) 32812'. 32˚ Gibb’s Hill i (f .00 W (32815'. The outer navigational aids may be unreliable. (2) 10' 65˚ 50' IN THE REGION OF THE BERMUDA ISLANDS II/2 F id 25 h F b 2000 S W i Shi ' R 97201 f .

50 N.50 W (38) 24834'. 081851'.30 W (17) 24857'. 080807'. 081850'. 081852'.OFF THE FLORIDA COAST (Reference charts: United States 11420.20 W (chartlet overleaf) II/3-1 .20 N.06 W (42) 24826'. 082826'.65 W (26) 24827'. 080806'. 081853'.00 N. 081853'.10 W (b) In the vicinity of Key West Harbour The area bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions is designated as an area to be avoided: (23) 24827'.00 N. 080816'.20 W (4) 25800'. 080802'. 081807'.60 N.10 N.60 N. 081843'.50 N. 081856'. 083800'.20 N.15 W (22) 25845'.73 W (33) 24834'. 082843'.31 N.50 W (7) 24822'.70 N.50 W (41) 24828'.10 N.70 N.95 N.90 W (44) 24832'. 082843'.20 N.20 N.35 N.60 N. 11460. 1988 edition. 083800'. 080853'.30 N. 081859'.80 N.00 W (2) 25838'.00 N. 081858'. 081849'.00 W (14) 24843'. 080847'.40 W (46) 24845'.50 W (20) 25831'.10 W (12) 24833'.17 W (21) 25839'.60 N.00 N. 081843'.20 W (8) 24828'.40 W (24) 24823'.75 N.35 N. 080813'. 081835'.00 W (10) 24829'.00 N.17 W (18) 25809'. 081859'.70 W (13) 24838'. 081854'. 082803'.10 W (9) 24828'.80 W (35) 24838'.80 W (39) 24833'.40 W (d) Surrounding the Tortugas Islands The area bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions is designated as an area to be avoided: (43) 24832'.60 N. Note: These charts are based on North American 1983 Datum. 081855'.10 N.00 N. 081848'. 081843'. 080806'. 080837'.44 N.00 N.55 W (37) 24836'.60 N.50 W (29) 24827'.15 W (5) 24837'.50 W (47) 24845'.90 W (45) 24839'. 082853'.00 N. 081826'. 081817'.70 N. 081850'.10 W (6) 24829'.50 W (28) 24829'.70 N.70 W (c) Surrounding the Marquesas Keys The area bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions is designated as an area to be avoided: (30) 24826'.40 W (51) 24832'. 082846'. 081843'.50 N.60 N.90 N. 080846'.78 W (31) 24823'.17 W (19) 25824'.95 N. 080803'. 082827'.85 W (11) 24833'. 082853'. 1988 edition.00 N.) Description of the areas to be avoided In order to avoid risk of pollution and damage to the environment of these sensitive areas.20 N.90 N.40 N.55 W (36) 24837'. 081848'.80 N.50 W (48) 24842'.50 W (40) 24831'. 081853'.00 W (25) 24826'.91 N. 082837'.00 W (3) 25822'.05 W (49) 24839'.00 N.00 N.10 W (34) 24843'.00 N.15 N. 082854'.60 W (32) 24823'. all ships carrying cargoes of oil and hazardous materials and all other ships greater than 50 metres in length should avoid the following areas: (a) In the vicinity of the Florida Keys The area bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions is designated as an area to be avoided: (1) 25845'.65 W (27) 24829'. 082847'.05 W (50) 24835'. 080806'.50 N. 080827'.70 N.30 W (16) 24851'. 080809'.40 W (15) 24846'.

(28) . . (29) . (18) 30' Area to be avoided 82˚ Florida Bay (46) . (31) . . (40) (10) (11) . . (3) . (30) . . . (49) . (37) (38) . . (7) (19) . (44) . . 30' . Miami (11) . . . (24) .. (40) (10) (41) . (16) . Gulf of Mexico . (27) (6) (42) (26) (23) (8) . (31) (24) (7) (5) St r t ai s o f F o l ri (35) . . (17) .(28) . . (25) . (30) . . (4) 25˚ . . . (47) . (2) 30' .(9) (8) (42) . (27) (23) . (32) (13) . . (33) Marquesas (50) Keys . (45) . . . (37) (12) (38) . (9) (41) . .(35) (36) . . (36) . 30' Area to be avoided See detail Area to be avoided 97203 83˚ 30' 82˚ 30' 81˚ 30' 80˚ OFF THE FLORIDA COAST II/3-2 F id 25 h F b 2000 S W i Shi ' R i (f h) 1 f . da . (39) . (43) (51) . (26) (29) (25) Key W est 26˚ (1) (22) .. (21) (20). . . (48) (34) . (39) . (15) (14). .

00 089852'. N.25 N. N.50 089859'. each bounded by a circle of geographical positions: (10) 28854'.13 (5) 28848'.35 (9) 28852'.10 N.50 090800'.50 W and six areas to be avoided.32 W (15) radius 500 m. N. N.78 089858'.62 090804'.10 (1) 28855'. (chartlets overleaf) II/4-1 F id 25 h F b 2000 S W i Shi ' R i (f h) 1 f .08 (8) 28852'.83 (3) 28853'. 1989 edition. N. N.465 m radius centred at to a point (b) Areas to be avoided The following areas to be avoided by all ships not calling at the deepwater port are established within the precautionary area: an area to be avoided bounded by a circle of radius 600 m centred upon the following geographical position: (3) 28853'. 28853'.03 W Note: Ship movement in the port area is monitored and supervised by a Port Vessel Traffic Supervisor on a 24-hour basis. Any ship planning to enter this precautionary area is requested to contact the LOOP Deepwater Port Vessel Traffic Supervisor on channel 10 VHF-FM and comply with his instructions while transiting the area.70 089856'.AT LOUISIANA OFFSHORE OIL PORT (LOOP) IN THE GULF OF MEXICO (Reference charts: United States 11340. 090801'.62 W (13) (11) 28853'.38 N.42 W 090802'. N.75 N. N.63 089857'.20 N. 090800'.92 089855'. 090800'.55 W 090803'. N. 090800'. 090801'.13 N. N.62 W W W W W W W W W W W A precautionary area is established in the area bounded as starting at a rhumb line to then an arc with a 4.27 N. 28852'. 11358.38 (2) 28853'.07 (7) 28854'.85 (3) 28853'.465 m radius centred at to a point then a rhumb line to then a rhumb line to then a rhumb line to then a rhumb line to then a rhumb line to then an arc with a 4. Note: These charts are based on North American 1927 Geodetic Datum.) Description of a precautionary area and areas to be avoided (a) Precautionary area follows: (1) 28855'. 1988 edition. 089859'. centred upon the following 28851'.77 090801'.98 W (14) (12) 28852'.12 N.12 090801'.10 (4) 28851'.60 (6) 28852'.

(8) (12) (4) .Grand Isle Fourchon Booster Station 10' East Timbalier I. Single-point mooring buoys (SPMs) 29˚ See details below • • • • Areas to be avoided • • • Platform pumping complex (PPC) Precautionary area 50' 20' 10' 90˚ 50' 40' (1) . Areas to be avoided 600 m radius at platform pumping complex (PPC) (10) 55' (2) • . Precautionary area 4465 m radius from PPC . • (14) • • • (13) • • ^ 500 m radius at single-point moorings (SPMs) (9) . (6) ^ . (5) 50' 28˚ 97198 05' 90˚ 55' AT LOUISIANA OFFSHORE OIL PORT (LOOP) II/4-2 . ^ (Anchorage) . (15) (3) (11) (7) .

60 W (7) 19810'. 1991 edition.53 W starting on the coast in geographical position: (19) 19812'. Note: This chart is based on World Geodetic System 84 Datum.49 N.00 W (on the coast) 20´ (16) Precautionary (20) area (21) Z (28) (22) (23) (17) Precautionary area (10) 15´ (19) VERACRUZ (See TSS 'In the approaches to the port of Veracruz' (7) in section IX of part B) (8) O (29) 10´ Punta Mocambo (26) Area to be avoided 05´ (27) Z = Sacrificios Island O = Santiaguillo Island nta Pu l ya Co (24) (25) 19˚ 50´ 97259 15´ 10´ 05´ 96˚ 55´ 45´ IN THE APPROACHES TO THE PORT OF VERACRUZ II/5 .03 N.7 miles.10 W (on the coast) (25) 19802'. 096802'. 096805'. 096809'.70 W to geographical position: (20) 19813'. 095846'.AREA TO BE AVOIDED IN THE APPROACHES TO THE PORT OF VERACRUZ (Reference chart: United States 28302. Note: This chart is based on World Geodetic System 84 Datum.43 W (26) 19805'. toxic or nuclear waste should avoid the area bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (24) 19802'. 096801'.07 N. centred on the lighthouse on the Island of Sacrificios. 095853'. located in geographical position: (28) 19810'. 095858'. 1991 edition.20 N.04 W (27) 19803'. 095846'.80 N. chemical.93 N. given the magnitude of the topographical obstacles which make navigation within the area hazardous.60 W (8) 19810'. 096801'.57 N.20 N.) Description of the area to be avoided With the aim of protecting the National Marine Park from the risk of pollution. which may be caused by the grounding of ships in the area.90 N.) Description of the precautionary area A precautionary area is established comprising the islands and reefs where the approach channels to the port of Veracruz are situated.77 W (22) 19809'. all ships of more than 500 gross tonnage and ships of less than 500 gross tonnage transporting oil.40 N. 096802'.90 N.39 W thence bounded by a line connecting geographical position (20) and the following geographical positions: (21) 19812'. This area is bounded by an arc of a circle with a radius of 4.04 W (on the coast) PRECAUTIONARY AREA IN THE APPROACHES TO THE PORT OF VERACRUZ (Reference chart: United States 28302. 096806'.

00 W 2 Special provisions Ship movement in the area is monitored and controlled by a maritime traffic controller on a 24-hour basis.78 N.28 N.28 N.57 W (2) 20810'.68 W (4) 20812'.50 N. (ii) . 091858'.O. 091859'.75 W (iii) 20812'.42 N.98 W (6) 20809'. 091857'.45 W (7) 20807'. 091859'. . 091857'.00 W (ii) 20812'. .25 N.43 W (3) 20811'. 092800'.50 N. (4) (3) . 092800'. (6) 10' (1) .47 N.58 W Notes: 1 Anchorage An anchorage is established bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (i) 20807'. . (5) 5 Cayo Arcas (iii) . 091850'.85 N. 091850'.47 N.75 W (iv) 20807'. 091844'. Any ship planning to enter the area to be avoided is requested to contact the maritime traffic controller on VHF channel 16 and to comply with the appropriate regulations while transiting the area.03 W (5) 20811'. (i) Area to be avoided Recommended tracks in the Gulf of Campeche (see part E ) 20˚ 50' 97205 5' 92˚ 55' 50' 45' AT MARITIME OIL TERMINAL OFF CAYO ARCAS II/6 .47 N.) Description of the area to be avoided The area to be avoided by ships not involved in the oil-related activities being conducted in the area is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (1) 20807'. (2) . 091844'. (iv) . 28 June 1975 edition. . (7) .AT MARITIME OIL TERMINAL OFF CAYO ARCAS (Reference chart: United States Naval Oceanographic Office H. 1233.

40 N. (iv) . 092814'. 092804'.60 N. (1) .20 W (2) 19838'. Any ship planning to enter the area to be avoided is requested to contact the maritime traffic controller on VHF channel 16 and to comply with the appropriate regulations while transiting the area. (4) . Note: This chart is based on North American 1927 Geodetic Datum.58 W 2 Special provisions Ship movement in the area is monitored and controlled by a maritime traffic controller on a 24-hour basis.60 N. . (i) 15' . AKAL-C Radar station Area to be avoided .80 W (6) 19815'. 092808'. (6) . (2) . 092822'.00 N. 840.IN THE GULF OF CAMPECHE Â (Reference chart: Direccion General de OceanografõÂ a. KU-89 Radar station 19˚ 30' IXTOC-1 . 091852'.20 N. . 092817'.20 W (4) 19824'.) Description of the area to be avoided The area to be avoided by ships not involved in the oil-related activities being conducted in the area is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (1) 19838'.20 W Notes: 1 Anchorage An anchorage is established bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (i) 19815'.33 W (iv) 19815'.00 W (3) 19835'. . (5) (iii) . Radar station (8) .28 N. (3) .90 W (7) 19812'. (ii) .33 W (iii) 19820'.28 N. 091852'.28 N.00 N. 091857'.10 W (8) 19823'. 092810'.M. 091859'.00 W (5) 19820'. Mexico S.30 N.20 N. (7) Recommended tracks in the Gulf of Campeche (see part E ) 97204 15' 92˚ 45' IN THE GULF OF CAMPECHE II/7 .28 N. 091859'. 1987 edition.58 W (ii) 19820'. 091857'.

170835' W (Maro Reef) (5) 25800' N. 164840' W (Necker Island) (8) 23805' N.000 gross tons carrying cargoes of oil or hazardous materials should avoid the areas contained within a circle of radius 50 nautical miles centred upon the following geographical positions: (1) 27850' N. 166815' W (French Frigate Shoals) (7) 23835' N. 175850' W (Pearl and Hermes Reef) (2) 26800' N. all ships of more than 1. 173855' W (Lisyanski Island) (3) 25845' N.IN THE REGION OF THE NORTH-WEST HAWAIIAN ISLANDS (Reference chart: United States 540. 171845' W (Laysan Island) (4) 25825' N. 168800' W (Gardner Pinnacles) (6) 23845' N. which is designated as a wildlife refuge. 1984 edition.) Description of the areas to be avoided In order to avoid the risk of pollution due to an accident in the area. 161855' W (Nihoa) 30˚ Kure Midway Pearl and Hermes Reef HAW AII AN OR SA Lisyanski Laysan Maro Reef Gardner Pinnacles ND WI CH IS LA ND S 25˚ Areas to be avoided French Frigate Shoals Necker Nihoa Kauai Niihau Kaula Areas to be avoided Oahu Molokai Lanai Kahoolawe Maui HAWAII 20˚ 97200 180˚ 175˚ 170˚ 165˚ 160˚ 155˚ IN THE REGION OF THE NORTH-WEST HAWAIIAN ISLANDS f II/8 F id 25 h F b 2000 S W i Shi ' R i (f h) 1 . Note: This chart is based on Old Hawaiian Datum.

30 N.70 N. all ships.50 N. and 18480. or other ship owned or operated by a Contracting Government and used. naval auxiliary. 13 April 1991.20 W (5) 47807'. for the time being.50 W (2) 48823'. 124811'. 124838'. 124846'. only on government non-commercial service. 24 October 1992. 23rd edition. 23rd edition.F C lat ter de y Fuc a 20´ 10´ 48° (4) Area to be avoided 50´ Destruction I. W A S H I N G T O N 40´ 30´ 20´ 10´ (5) (6) 20´ 10´ 50´ 40´ 30´ 20´ 10´ 50´ 40´ OFF THE WASHINGTON COAST 97254 125° 124° II/9 .50 W (3) 48825'. . 124838'.30 N.90 W (6) 47807'.) Description of the area to be avoided In order to reduce the risk of a marine casualty and resulting pollution and damage to the environment of the Olympic Coast National Marine Sanctuary.* including barges. 124847'.00 W _____ * This ATBA does not apply to any warship.70 N. 30´ (3) (2) (1) VANCOUVER Stra it o f J uan I. barge (whether towed by a government or commercial tug). carrying cargoes of oil or hazardous materials should avoid the area bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (1) 48823'. 125815'.70 N.20 W (4) 47851'.OFF THE WASHINGTON COAST (Reference charts: United States 18500.

(7) California San 10' ta B arb San Miguel I.40 W (4) 33859'. Santa Rosa I.00 N. Area to be avoided .40 N. 120807'.50 W (2) 33854'. all ships. (5) . should avoid the following areas: (a) In the region of San Miguel. (2) . Santa Cruz I.30 N. 119856'.5 nautical miles centred upon the following geographical position is designated as an area to be avoided: (9) 33828'. (8) (4) .OFF THE CALIFORNIA COAST (Reference chart: United States 18720.70 N. 119802'.00 N. . (1) 50' .30 W (3) 33846'. (3) 40' Pacific Ocean Area to be avoided 30' Santa Barbara I. ara Cha nne l . including but not limited to tankers and other bulk carriers and barges. 20' 40' 30' 20' 10' 120˚ 50' 40' 30' 20' 10' 119˚ 97202 OFF THE CALIFORNIA COAST II/10 . engaged in the trade of carrying cargo.50 W (8) 34801'.80 W (5) 34810'.60 N. 119818'. 34˚ Anacapa I.00 W (6) 34814'. 119817'. 120839'.60 W (b) In the region of Santa Barbara Island off the coast of southern California The area contained within a circle of radius 7.00 N.00 N. 119812'. 1990 edition. Santa Cruz and Anacapa Islands off the coast of southern California The area bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions is designated as an area to be avoided: (1) 33858'.20 W (6) . 120839'. 120831'. except those bound to and from ports on one of the islands within the area.) Description of the areas to be avoided In order to avoid risk of pollution in the area designated as the Channel Islands National Marine Sanctuary. Note: This chart is based on North American 1983 Datum.40 N. Santa Rosa.80 W (7) 34810'.

41 N. Note: This chart is based on the World Geodetic System 1972 Datum. 095810'. 095815'.75 W (21) 16807'.75 N. 095812'. Any ship planning to enter this precautionary area is requested to contact the Salina Cruz Port Vessel Traffic Supervisor on channel 6 VHF and follow his advice while transiting the areas.28 W Note: Ship movement in the port area is monitored and supervised by a Port Vessel Traffic Supervisor on a 24-hour basis.75 N.63 N.) Description of a precautionary area and areas to be avoided (a) Precautionary area A precautionary area is established by an arc of a circle of 4 miles radius centred on the lighthouse of Salina Cruz.94 W (20) 16808'.90 W as far as geographical position: (13) 16805'. centred respectively on the following geographical positions: (19) 16808'. Oaxaca.00 W (b) Areas to be avoided The following areas to be avoided by ships that are not going to carry out operations at the single-point moorings and the oil terminal at the port of Salina Cruz. 095812'.95 N.24 W starting at the coastline at geographical position: (17) 16807'. each bounded by a circle of 400 m radius. 095813'.11 N. 095813'. Mexico. 095812'. Mexico. at geographical position: (22) 16809'.73 W continuing in a straight line as far as geographical position: (16) 16805'.IN THE APPROACHES TO SALINA CRUZ (Reference chart: United States 21441.70 N.00 W and from geographical position (16) in a straight line as far as the coastline at geographical position: (18) 16809'. are established within the precautionary area: Three circular areas to be avoided. 1986 edition. Oaxaca. 095810'.85 N. Salina Cruz (18) (22) 16˚ 10´ (20) (17) Areas to be avoided (21) Pr ec na ry (16) (13) 10´ 97258 95˚ 15´ IN THE APPROACHES TO SALINA CRUZ II/11 F id 25 h F b 2000 S W i 05´ Shi ' R are a i au tio (f h) 1 f (19) Precautionary area .

III .Section III OTHER AREAS TO BE AVOIDED OTHER AREAS: 1: In the region of the Vorioi Sporadhes islands 2: North of the Straits of Tiran 3: North of Sharm El Sheikh harbour 4: At the southern extremity of the Sinai Peninsula 5: In the region of Fasht Buldani  6: In the region of Mahe Island in the Seychelles 7: In the region of the Aldabra Islands in the Seychelles 8: At Alphard Banks [abolished] 9: In the region of Cape Terpeniya (Sakhalin) 10: In the region of the Great Barrier Reef 11: In the region of Three Kings Islands 12: In the Bass Strait CAUTION: The chartlets are for illustrative purposes only and must not be used for navigation. as may new editions of the reference charts published after the adoption of the routeing system. WARNING: The geographical positions given in the descriptions of the routeing systems are only correct for charts using the same geodetic datum as the reference charts indicated under each scheme. Charts published by other hydrographic offices may use a different geodetic datum. Mariners should consult the appropriate nautical publications and charts for up-to-date details on aids to navigation and other relevant information.

INDEX OTHER AREAS TO BE AVOIDED 80˚ Arctic Circle 1: In the region of the Vorioi Sporadhes Islands 2: North of the Straits of Tiran 3: North of Sharm el Sheikh harbour 4: At the southern extremity of the Sinai Peninsula 5: In the region of Fasht Buldani 6: In the region of Mahé Island in the Seychelles 7: In the region of the Aldabra Islands in the Seychelles 8: At Alphard Banks [abolished] 9: In the region of Cape Terpeniya (Sakhalin) 10: In the region of the Great Barrier Reef 11: In the region of Three Kings Islands 12: In the Bass Strait 9 1 60˚ 40˚ 3 4 5 20˚ Tropic of Cancer 2 Equator 6 7 Tropic of Capricorn 10 11 8 12 0˚ 20˚ 40˚ 60˚ Antarctic Circle 180˚ 160˚ 140˚ 120˚ 100˚ 80˚ 60˚W 40˚ 20˚ 0˚ 20˚ 40˚ 60˚E 80˚ 100˚ 120˚ 140˚ 160˚ 180˚ .

00 E (4) 39800'.00 E (7) 39830'. designated to be a Marine Sanctuary. 024800'. 024810'.00 N.00 E (6) 39825'. 024825'.IN THE REGION OF THE VORIOI SPORADHES ISLANDS (Reference charts: Greek Hydrographic Office 31 (INT 3704).00 N. all ships carrying chemical. 023851'.00 N. 024800'.00 N.00 N.00 E (1) 35´ (7) Nisídha Psathoúra 30´ (6) Area to be avoided Nisídha Yioúra Nísos Kirá Panayiá Nisídha Pipéri (2) 25´ 20´ Nísos Alónnisos V O R I OI SPORADHES 15´ Nísos Peristéra Area to be avoided 10´ Nisídha Skántzoura 05´ (5) (3) 39˚ 45´ 50´ 55´ 24˚ 05´ 10´ 15´ 20´ 25´ 97256 IN THE REGION OF THE VORIOI SPORADHES ISLANDS III/1 F id 25 h F b 2000 S W i (4) Shi ' R i ( li h) 1 f .00 N. 1987 edition Note: This chart is based on European Datum.00 N. 024810'. toxic or nuclear substances and tankers of more than 500 gross tonnage carrying oil should avoid the area bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (1) 39834'. 023851'.00 E (5) 39802'.) Description of the area to be avoided In order to avoid risk of pollution and damage to the environment in the area surrounding the Vorioi (North) Sporadhes islands.00 E (3) 39800'.00 E (2) 39820'.

00 N. the environment and the economy of the area.00 N. 034840'. 034826'.00 E (6) 28806'. all locations are to be reduced by 0'.00 N.) Description of the area to be avoided In order to avoid the risk of severe damage to critical ecosystems. 034826'. To conform with a change from European Datum 1950 to WGS 84.50 E (4) 28818'. 034829'.00 E (7) 28801'. 1950. 034831'.00 E (1) (2) 45´ SINAI P E N I N S U LA 40´ ed Are a to be a void 35´ Dahab 30´ 25´ (3) 20´ (4) Are a to be a ed void 15´ SAUDI (5) ARABIA 10´ (6) 05´ (7) 28˚ 15´ 20´ 25´ 34˚30´ 35´ 40´ 45´ 50´ 55´ NORTH OF THE STRAITS OF TIRAN III/2 97257 .50 E (5) 28811'.00 E (2) 28846'. 1986 edition Note: This chart is based on European Datum. all ships carrying dangerous or toxic cargoes.00 N.00 E (3) 28824'.00 N.00 N.02 in longitude. should avoid the area bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (1) 28846'. 034828'. or any other ship exceeding 500 gross tonnage.50 N.07 in latitude and by 0'.NORTH OF THE STRAITS OF TIRAN (Reference chart: British Admiralty 3595. 034837'.

20 E (2) 27850'. 034820'.60 E Râs Nusrâni (1) SINAI PENINSULA STRAIT OF TIRAN 27˚ 55´ Area to be avoided (3) (2) 50´ 97260 34˚20´ 25´ III/3 F id 25 h F b 2000 S W i NORTH OF SHARM EL SHEIKH HARBOUR Shi ' R i ( li h) 1 Sharm el Sheikh Râs Umm Sid f .) Description of the area to be avoided In order to avoid the risk of severe damage to critical ecosystems. should avoid the area bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (1) 27858'.00 N.02 in longitude. all ships carrying dangerous or toxic cargoes. all locations are to be reduced by 0'.07 in latitude and by 0'.00 E (3) 27851'. 1950. 034817'. 034825'. To conform with a change from European Datum 1950 to WGS 84.NORTH OF SHARM EL SHEIKH HARBOUR (Reference chart: British Admiralty 2375. 1988 edition Note: This chart is based on European Datum. or any other ship exceeding 500 gross tonnage. the environment and the economy of the area.00 N.50 N.

00 E Sharm el Sheikh (1) SINAI PENINSULA Râs Umm Sid 50´ (6) (2) 27˚ 45´ Area to be avoided (5) Râs Muhammad (3) (4) 40´ 97261 5´ 10´ 34˚15´ 20´ AT THE SOUTHERN EXTREMITY OF THE SINAI PENINSULA III/4 . should avoid the area bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (1) 27851'. 034817'. all ships carrying dangerous or toxic cargoes.) Description of the area to be avoided In order to avoid the risk of severe damage to critical ecosystems. 034804'. 034807'. all locations are to be reduced by 0'.00 E (5) 27843'.00 N.00 N.10 N.20 N. 034816'.30 N. 034819'.AT THE SOUTHERN EXTREMITY OF THE SINAI PENINSULA (Reference chart: British Admiralty 2375. 1988 edition Note: This chart is based on European Datum.00 E (3) 27842'. 034806'.18 N. To conform with a change from European Datum 1950 to WGS 84. the environment and natural resources contained within the declared boundaries of the Ras Muhammad National Park.02 in longitude.07 in latitude and by 0'.00 E (6) 27848'.00 E (2) 27847'.60 E (4) 27841'. or any other ships exceeding 500 gross tonnage. 1950.

90 E (7) 28811'. 2882.12 N.90 N. (3) (6) .78 E (3) 28808'.000 gross tonnage. (5) 49˚ 05' 10' 15' 20' 25' 50' 97211 IN THE REGION OF FASHT BULDANI III/5 .98 N. 049803'. 3775. 049820'. Note: These charts are based on Nahrwan Datum.50 E (2) 28818'. Area to be avoided 05' Ra’s as Saffaniyah 28˚ 55' . and all other vessels of more than 50. (4) Ra’s Tanaquib 45' 50' 55' . 10' .50 E (6) 28806'. 048855'.00 E 20' (2) . should avoid the area bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (1) 28813'. 049808'.) Description of the area to be avoided In order to avoid the risk of pollution due to stranding or of damage to major sub-sea oil and gas pipelines in this area. 1987 edition.IN THE REGION OF FASHT BULDANI (Reference charts: British Admiralty 3774. 1981 edition. all tankers.01 E (5) 27850'. TSS ‘‘Marjan/Zuluf’’ 15' .39 N. (1) (7) .21 E (4) 27853'. 048853'. 1986 edition.00 N. 049818'. 048851'. which is in the close vicinity of important seagrass banks and prawn breeding grounds.31 N. gas carriers and chemical tankers carrying noxious liquid substances regardless of size.10 N.

00 03842'. should avoid the areas bounded by lines connecting the following geographical positions: (a)  West of Mahe (1) 04840'.80 (2) 04849'. S.00 056824'. .00 (3) 05850'. .00 S.00 055838'. and (6) (7) (8) (9) 04831'. (4) Area to be avoided .50 S.00 S. Bird I. 055825'. (8) .00 04826'. all ships of more than 200 gross tonnage. S.00 03845'.20 055834'. 740.00 055836'.80 (4) 04842'. (2) .00 055841'.00 057800'. S. (1) Île Desroches Plate I. 054822'.00 055832'. S. 054858'. Note: These charts are based on South East Island Datum. S. Denis I. (5) .00 S. (3) . (3) . 057813'.00 (2) 05850'.00 E (7) 03840'.50 053852'. 055832'. 1990 edition.50 055808'.00 E (8) 04833'. (1) Silhouette I. 055825'. (6) Frigate I. (7) La Digue . S.90 E thence along the low water line on the west  and south-east coasts of Mahe to the point of commencement. (4) . 1990 edition. S. S. (2) 6˚ 97210 54˚ 55˚ 56˚ 57˚  IN THE REGION OF MAHE ISLAND IN THE SEYCHELLES III/6 .00 S.50 (3) 05806'.00 E (6) 03840'. IN THE REGION OF MAHE ISLAND IN THE SEYCHELLES (Reference charts: British Admiralty 721. Mahé I. .50 E E E E E (6) . (9) 4˚ Area to be avoided Praslin I. S.00 E E E E (b)  East of Mahe (1) 05810'.00 S. (8) .00 E E E E (5) 04800'.) Description of the areas to be avoided In order to avoid risk of pollution and damage to the environment. . (5) 5˚ . S. whether or not bound for ports in the Seychelles. . (7) . 055840'.00 (4) 05812'.00 056802'.00 S.00 (5) 04849'.

) Description of the area to be avoided In order to avoid risk of pollution and damage to the environment in this area of unique wildlife. 10˚ 11˚ 12˚ 5 Cap St Sebastien 97209 46˚ 47˚ 48˚ 49˚ IN THE REGION OF THE ALDABRA ISLANDS IN THE SEYCHELLES III/7 . 1965 edition.IN THE REGION OF THE ALDABRA ISLANDS IN THE SEYCHELLES (Reference chart: British Admiralty 758. 9˚ 5 Aldabra Islands Cosmoledo Group Assumption I. all ships of more than 500 gross tons carrying cargoes of oil or hazardous materials should avoid the area contained within a circle of radius 30 nautical miles centred upon geographical position 09836' S. 046821' E. Area to be avoided Astove I.

80 E and of radius 6 nautical miles. III/8 .) Note: This chart is based on Cape Datum. 1998 edition. 020851'.40 S.) The area to be avoided. 203. centred on 35802'.AT ALPHARD BANKS (Reference chart: British Admiralty 2083. is abolished*. _____ * Date of implementation: 0000 hours UTC on 1 July 1999. as described in SN/Circ.

5 from Terpeniya Lighthouse (5) 12.000 gross tonnage carrying oil or hazardous cargoes.6 miles at 1468. (1) 30' (4) .2 miles at 2088. Cape Davydov 40' Cape Georgiya 5 Cape Terpeniya Tyuleniy I. Area to be avoided . The area is bounded by a line passing through Cape Davydov and the points defined as follows: (1) 21. Sakhalin Cape Bellinsgauzena 30' 20' 10' Zaliv (Bay of) Terpeniya Poluostrov (Peninsula of) Terpeniya Cape Povorotnyy 50' 49˚ (5) .IN THE REGION OF CAPE TERPENIYA (SAKHALIN) (Reference chart: British Admiralty 2405) Description of the area to be avoided The area described below should be avoided by ships of more than 1.0 miles at 3078. .5 from Terpeniya Lighthouse and thence eastward to the coast. (3) 48˚ 97207 30' 40' 50' 144˚ 10' 20' 30' 40' 50' 145˚ 10' 20' 30' 40' 50' 146˚ IN THE REGION OF CAPE TERPENIYA (SAKHALIN) III/9 . for reasons of conservation of unique wildlife in the area and of inadequate survey.7 from Terpeniya Lighthouse (4) 20.5 miles at 1268 from Terpeniya Lighthouse (3) 41.8 miles at 1008 from Terpeniya Lighthouse (2) 40. (2) 20' 10' .

) Description of the area to be avoided In order to avoid the risk of pollution and damage to the environment in the Capricornia Section of the Great Barrier Reef Marine Park. Note: This chart is based on the Australian Geodetic Datum. (3) 5 . 151855' E (13) 23815' S. 151852' E thence to the point of commencement. 151840' E (6) 23832' S.IN THE REGION OF THE GREAT BARRIER REEF (Reference chart: AUS 819. Area to be avoided . (6) (7) . April 1978 edition. 1966. 152826' E (11) 23820' S. (2) Lady Musgrave I. (1) 5 . (8) . 151835' E (3) 23855' S. 151850' E (5) 23857' S. 151835' E (2) 23853' S. 151839' E (14) 23810' S. (11) (10) . 151856' E (8) 23833' S. Wistari Reef . 152828' E (10) 23825' S. (12) . 30' 5 C. Polmaise Reef Fitzroy Reef Curtis I. 151853' E (4) 23857' S. Capricorn (9) . 151840' E (7) 23836' S. 152828' E (9) 23830' S. . 152824' E (12) 23820' S. all ships in excess of 500 gross tonnage should avoid the area bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (1) 23810' S. (4) (5) 45' Gladstone 5 15' 30' 5Bustard Head 152˚ 15' 30' 24˚ 45' 97208 IN THE REGION OF THE GREAT BARRIER REEF III/10 . North Reef Broomfield Reef 15' (13) . North West I. Heron I. . Fairfax I. . Llewellyn Reef 5 North Point Hoskyn I. (14) .

Pri nce s Is.50 S. 1992 edition. Note: These charts are based on World Geodetic System 1972 Datum.00 S. 172800'.50 E (2) 34806'. 4111. ships of 500 gross tons or more should avoid the area bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (1) 34806'.00 S. West I. 172812'. declared to be a Wildlife Sanctuary.00 E (1) (2) 06´ 07´ Area to be avoided North East I.50 S.50 E (4) 34813'. 08´ THREE KINGS 34° 09´ ISLANDS 10´ South West I.IN THE REGION OF THREE KINGS ISLANDS (Reference charts: New Zealand 41. 172800'.) Description of the area to be avoided In order to avoid risk of pollution and damage to the environment in the area around the Three Kings Islands. 1991 edition. 172812'.00 E (3) 34813'. Great Island 11´ 12´ Area to be avoided 13´ (4) (3) 14´ 172° 01´ 02´ 03´ 04´ 05´ 06´ 07´ 08´ 09´ 10´ 11´ 12´ 13´ IN THE REGION OF THREE KINGS ISLANDS III/11 97255 .

40' . Kingfish ‘B’ . (8) Tuna Snapper . 1966. . 147844' E (3) 38841' S. (6) 20' Barracouta ‘A’ Area to be avoided Bream Perch (2) Fortescue ‘A’ Cobia Kingfish ‘A’ West Kingfish (3) (4) Halibut ‘A’ Mackerel . Separation scheme “In the Bass Strait” (see part B. 148826' E (6) 38819' S. 148835' E (7) 38808' S. 148813' E (5) 38832' S. 148831' E (8) 38805' S. section VI ) B ass ait Str 39˚ 20' 40' 148˚ 20' 99037 IN THE BASS STRAIT III/12 . (7) Tuna ‘B’ Marlin Flounder ‘A’ . Note: This chart is based on the Australian Geodetic Datum. (1) . 148824' E (9) The low water line in latitude 37858' S Thence along the low water line to the point of commencement. April 1971 edition. 148806' E (4) 38841' S.) Description of the area to be avoided The area described below should be avoided by ships of more than 200 tons gross tonnage. The area is bounded by lines joining the following points: (1) The low water line in latitude 38815' S.IN THE BASS STRAIT (Reference chart: Australian AUS 422. (9) 38˚ . (2) 38835' S. (5) .

RECOMMENDED DIRECTIONS OF TRAFFIC FLOW IN THE GERMAN BIGHT Note: See the following traffic separation schemes in the German Bight: ``Terschelling±German Bight''. ``Elbe approach'' and ``German Bight western approach'' (part B. ``Jade approach''. Recommended directions of traffic flow are established between the traffic separation scheme ``Elbe approach'' and the eastern ends of the traffic separation schemes ``Terschelling±German Bight'' and ``German Bight western approach'' as shown in the chartlet below. section II). (12) (2) 5 Deutsche Bucht Lightvessel (4) (1) (6) (3) Helgoland Lighthouse 10´ (7) (17) TSS ‘‘Jade approach’’ (22) (23) (2) (5) (8) (3) (1) (11) (5) (6) (10) (12) (4) (8) (7) (3) (21) 05´ (2) 5 Elbe Lightvessel 54˚ TSS ‘‘Elbe approach’’ (29) 55´ TSS ‘‘Terschelling – German Bight’’ (28) re Insho traffic zone 50´ Wangerooge Langeoog 45´ 40´ 97262 25´ 30´ 35´ 40´ 45´ 50´ 55´ 8˚ 05´ 10´ RECOMMENDED DIRECTIONS OF TRAFFIC FLOW IN THE GERMAN BIGHT 1 M d 28 h F b 2000 S W i Shi ' R i (f h) 1 f Spiekeroog .

Notes: 1 2 See chartlet attached to the description of the traffic separation scheme ``Off Casquets'' in section II of part B. 2/3 M d 28 h F b 2000 S W i Shi ' R i (f h) 1 f . Orkney Islands and the Fair Isle in section I of part D. See ``Recommendations on navigation through the English Channel and the Dover Strait'' in part F. These routes are recommended for use by all ships transiting the area. proceeding parallel to a line connecting the centres of those areas. RECOMMENDED ROUTES IN THE FAIR ISLE CHANNEL Recommended directions of traffic flow are established in the Fair Isle Strait as follows: (a) a single recommended route to the north of Fair Isle for use by westbound traffic.RECOMMENDED DIRECTIONS OF TRAFFIC FLOW IN THE ENGLISH CHANNEL Ships proceeding from the traffic separation scheme ``Off Casquets'' to the traffic separation scheme ``In the Strait of Dover and adjacent waters'' or vice versa are recommended to leave the mid-Channel areas to be avoided to port. and (b) separate recommended routes to the south-west of Fair Isle with eastbound traffic taking a route northeast of North Ronaldsay. Note: See chartlets attached to the descriptions of the areas to be avoided for Shetland Islands. and with westbound traffic taking a route to the south-west of Fair Isle.

4 In the North Channel The present requirements and recommendation as set out in Ships' Routeing continue to apply.7 In the English Channel and Dover Strait All ships navigating in this area should have on board the latest edition of Chart 5500. Reporting requirements The following recommendations are associated with the areas set out in the previous paragraph and in Recommended routes in the Fair Isle Channel. .3 In the Minches Except due to stress of weather or any other case of force majeure. laden tankers over 10. . Bride's Bay and Milford Haven.5 Off Smalls and Grassholme Channel Laden tankers over 10. Route Fair Isle Pentland Firth The Minches Isles of Scilly Dover Strait TSS Casquets TSS Ship condition laden laden laden or in ballast laden ALL SHIPS ALL SHIPS Report to Coastguard Shetland Pentland Stornoway Falmouth Dover or Cap Gris Nez Jobourg Report on VHF channel 16 16 16 16 69 69 4-1 . Mariners Routeing Guide English Channel and Southern North Sea. or other equivalent guides. and should not use the scheme in restricted visibility or other adverse weather.8 In the Firth of Forth Laden tankers should avoid the area between Bass Rock and the coast. Difficulties can be encountered when transiting either with or against the tide and masters should ensure that a close watch is kept at all times on the course.000 gross tonnage should not use the channel between Grassholme Island and Skomer Island unless moving between the anchorage in St. speed and position of their vessels. there may be a case for transiting with the tide to reduce the time spent in the Firth. . Masters of laden tankers not bound to or from Flotta and Scapa Flow should not use the Pentland Firth in restricted visibility or adverse weather. . . no laden tanker should use the narrow passage through Rathlin Sound. In addition.6 In the Needles Channel Due to tidal problems and apparent movement of the sand banks in this channel. At other times. when at least one hour from the Estimated Time of Arrival of entering the route.000 gross tonnage using the traffic separation scheme between Land's End and the Isles of Scilly should keep at least three miles to seaward of Wolf Rock.RECOMMENDATIONS ON NAVIGATION AROUND THE UNITED KINGDOM COAST The following recommendations are made for specific locations around the coast of the United Kingdom: . Ships intending to use the following routes. and on final departure.1 In the Pentland Firth Mariners intending to use the Pentland Firth should be aware of very strong tidal streams and sets.2 Off the Isles of Scilly Laden tankers over 10. should report to Coastguard as described below. all laden tankers over 10. . although masters should take account of the general navigational warning above.000 gross tonnage should avoid this channel.000 gross tonnage should not pass through the Minches. .

Format of reports The reporting should be in accordance with IMO resolution A. _____ * This has been revoked by resolution A.648(16)* adopted on 19 October 1989 and should include the following: ALFA BRAVO CHARLIE DELTA ECHO FOXTROT GOLF INDIA MIKE OSCAR PAPA QUEBEC Name and call sign of the ship Day of month (two figures) and time in hours and minutes (UT (GMT) in four figures) Latitude (4 figures + N or S) and longitude (5 figures + E or W) True bearing (first 3 figures) and distance in nautical miles from identified landmark True course in degrees (3 figures) Speed in knots and decimal of knots (3 figures) Last port of call Destination VHF Channels monitored Deepest draught in metres and centimetres Type and quantity (tonnes) of cargo Brief details of damage/deficiency/other limitations. 4-2 .851(20).

30 (5) 41816'.90 N. 009822'.38 (2) 41818'.85 E] with a radius of 5 nautical miles limited by lines joining geographical positions (1) (see above) and (8) [41826'.3 Western precautionary area A circular sector pointed on geographical position (10) [41817'.25 Southern limit: a line joining the geographical positions: (4) 41821'. 009806'.ROUTEING MEASURES IN THE STRAIT OF BONIFACIO* Note: See mandatory ship reporting system ``In the Strait of Bonifacio'' in part G.2 Eastern precautionary area A circular sector pointed on geographical position (7) [41822'.18 N. 009828'. 009801'.40 E].1 Categories of ships concerned All ships. 009806'.47 E] and joining geographical positions (6) (see above) and (12) [41813'.37 N. Â (Reference chart: French 7024 of the SHOM [Service hydrographique et oceanographique de la Marine (Hydrographic and Oceanographic Service of the French Navy)] (INT 3350) Note: This chart is based on European Datum.1 Categories of ships concerned All ships of more than 20 metres of overall length transiting through the Strait. 2. 009823'.75 N.75 E E (3) 41819'. 009806'.50 E] and joining geographical positions (4) (see above) and (9) [41819'.33 E] with a radius of 5 nautical miles limited by lines joining geographical positions (3) (see above) and (11) [41821'. _____ * Date of implementation: 0000 hours UTC on 1 December 1998.75 N. section I.58 N. 009803'. 1.55 N.57 N.2 Description Northern limit: a line joining the geographical positions: (1) 41822'. 5-1 M d 28 h F b (chartlet overleaf) 2000 S W i Shi ' R i (f h) 1 f . 009822'.51 E E E (6) 41816'.05 N.96 N.18 E 2 Precautionary areas at the extremities of the two-way route 2.15 E].) 1 Two-way route in the Strait of Bonifacio 1. 2.31 N. 009824'. 009815'.00 N. 009815'.

25' (1) . (10) . (5) 15' (12) . (11) ! .(8) . 20' (3) . 41˚ 10' 55' 9˚ 5' 10' 15' 20' 25' 30' 99011 IN THE STRAIT OF BONIFACIO . (6) . (9) (2) ! . . (4) . (7) . .

Recommended directions of traffic flow are established in the approaches to Ras Shukheir Oil Terminal. July.RECOMMENDED DIRECTIONS OF TRAFFIC FLOW OFF RAS SHUKHEIR Note: See ``Rules for ships navigating in the Gulf of Suez'' in part F. Ramadan and Morgan oilfields as shown in the chartlet below. Ramadan Oilfield July Oilfield 15' Morgan Oilfield ! Ras Shukheir Terminal Ras Shukheir 5 See description of the traffic separation scheme ‘‘In the Gulf of Suez’’ (section IV of part B) 10' 28˚ 5' 97213 15' 20' 25' 33˚ 30' 35' RECOMMENDED DIRECTIONS OF TRAFFIC FLOW OFF RAS SHUKHEIR 6 .

00 W (10) 18848'. 093807'. 091851'. 092806'. 091853'.75 W (9) 18844'.00 N.70 N.03 N. 091851'.50 W (11) 19816'. 092801'. 091843'.95 N.00 N.00 W (iv) 18842'.50 W (6) 18843'. 091857'. 091853'.03 W (3) 18845'.33 W (19) 18850'.50 W A track for ships northbound from the vicinity of Isla del Carmen to latitude 20815' N is defined by the following geographical positions: (16) 18844'.30 W A track for ships northbound from the vicinity of Isla del Carmen to the main oilfield platform area is defined by the following geographical positions: (9) 18844'.) Description of the recommended tracks The following tracks are recommended for use by ships of 1. 092849'. 091841'.30 W (1) 18852'. 091854'. 092848'. Note: This chart is based on North American 1927 Geodetic Datum.90 W (14) 18844'. 091859'.80 N.20 W (2) 18844'.33 N.30 W (8) 18850'.90 N.42 N. 092830'. 093813'.50 W (8) 18850'.47 N. 091859'.80 W (17) 20815'.50 N.000 gross tons and upwards: (a) A track for ships westbound from the vicinity of Isla del Carmen to the Port of Dos Bocas is defined by the following geographical positions: (1) 18852'.75 W (13) 18848'.80 N.RECOMMENDED TRACKS IN THE GULF OF CAMPECHE Â (Reference chart: Direccion General de OceanografõÂ a.50 N.03 W (21) 18849'.M.50 N.45 N.47 N. 840. 093813'.72 W (b) (20) 18852'.47 N.70 N.33 W A track for ships southbound from the main oilfield platform area to the vicinity of Isla del Carmen is defined by the following geographical positions: (12) 19816'.10 N.67 W (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) Precautionary areas Two precautionary areas are established at the junctions of the recommended tracks. 7-1 .25 W (7) 18842'.53 W A track for ships eastbound from the Port of Dos Bocas to the vicinity of Isla del Carmen is defined by the following geographical positions: (5) 18828'. 093808'.50 N. 092802'.67 W (4) 18829'. 091851'.47 N. 092801'.00 W (iii) 18847'.50 N.50 N. 091851'. 091859'.67 W Notes: 1 Anchorage An anchorage off the Port of Dos Bocas is established within limits connecting the following geographical positions: (i) 18842'.50 N.25 W 2 Loran ``C'' covers the area of the recommended tracks and is recommended for use by suitably fitted ships. Mexico S.00 W (10) 18848'.50 N. 093808'.72 W A track for ships southbound from latitude 20815' N to the vicinity of Isla del Carmen is defined by the following geographical positions: (15) 20815'. 092830'.45 N.80 N.25 W (ii) 18847'.50 N. 092805'.50 W (13) 18848'. 093808'.50 N. 091851'. 091854'. 1987 edition. bounded by lines connecting the following geographical positions: (a) (18) 18850'.97 N.

(21) . (11) ^ 20˚ 30' An i te bi d ch or in g A (iii) h nc in or g p h ro pr oh 19˚ ib ite d (18). (8) . . . (17) Area to be avoided ‘‘In the Gulf of Campeche’’ (see part D. (9) (16) area Isla del Carmen (7) (4). (1) . (iv) . . . section II) (12) Anch o ring prohibited . . (ii) . (i) . section II) (15) . (10) Precautionary (14) . (2) .Area to be avoided ‘‘Off Cayo Arcas’’ (see part D. . (6) . . (13) . (19) (20) . . 30' (5) Port of Dos Bocas 97214 15' 93˚ 45' 30' 15' 92˚ 45' 30' RECOMMENDED TRACKS IN THE GULF OF CAMPECHE 7-2 . (3) . .

2000 S W i 5.3 Masters of ships approaching from the west are advised to embark their deep-sea pilot as far westward in the English Channel as practicable and make an early decision either to request helicopter delivery or to approach a pilot station (e. i ( li h) 1 f . allowance must be made for the effects of squat at the passage speed. when planning their passage through the Dover Strait and its approaches. masters of vessels constrained by their draught are strongly advised to consult the Sailing Directions.g.2 In assessing a safe under-keel allowance. with increased risk of collision in these areas. 4. 1. and for the effects of waves and swell resulting from local and distant storms.2 Masters of ships taking a deep-sea pilot in the North Sea are advised to embark the pilot prior to sailing. Arrangements can also be made to embark district pilots in the western approaches to the English Channel (see paragraph 4. ships proceeding from the western part of the English Channel to the Dover Strait and vice versa are strongly recommended to use the traffic separation scheme ``Off Casquets''.1 Masters of ships passing through the English Channel and the Dover Strait should take into account the possibility of availing themselves of the services of an adequately qualified deep-sea pilot* in connection with the requirements of safe navigation.1 Mariners should be aware that concentrations of fishing vessels and recreational craft may be encountered in the English Channel and the Dover Strait and should navigate with caution. Ships should not use the English inshore traffic zone as a route to these pilot stations if they can safely use the north-east traffic lane of the traffic separation scheme and make a judicious crossing of the south-west traffic lane in accordance with rule 10(c) of the 1972 Collision Regulations. when crossing the north-eastbound traffic lane of the traffic separation scheme ``In the Strait of Dover and adjacent waters''. 4.1 Masters of ships. 4 Pilotage 4. 1. 3 Fishing and recreational sailing activities 3. and to be guided by the recommendations for under-keel allowance contained therein. Mariners' Routeing Guides and Deep-Draught Planning Guides published for the area by hydrographic offices. Brixham or Cherbourg). To achieve this.2 Ships crossing or leaving or joining the easterly or westerly flow of traffic between the traffic separation schemes ``Off Casquets'' and ``In the Dover Strait and adjacent waters'' should cross as nearly as practicable at right angles or join or leave at as small an angle as practicable to the recommended directions of traffic flow. 5 Under-keel allowance for deep-draught ships 1-1 M d 28 h F b _____ * Reference is made to the Recommendation on the use of adequately qualified deep-sea pilots in the North Sea.4 Ships wishing to embark a Thames district pilot should proceed to the NE Spit or the Sunk pilot stations.4 Ships leaving the traffic separation scheme ``At West Hinder'' and intending to proceed through the Dover Strait should.1 Subject to any factors that may adversely affect safe navigation.3 Attention is drawn to the warnings relating to the use of the ``Deep-water route forming part of the northeastbound traffic lane of the Strait of Dover and adjacent waters traffic separation scheme''. Shi ' R 5. 2 Crossing traffic 2.486(XII)). Fishing vessels are reminded of the requirements of rule 10(i) and sailing vessels and all other vessels of less than 20 metres in length of the requirements of rule 10(j) of the 1972 Collision Regulations. Mariners are reminded that when risk of collision is deemed to exist the rules of the 1972 Collision Regulations fully apply and in particular the rules of part B. should ensure that there is an adequate under-keel clearance at the time of passage.RECOMMENDATIONS ON NAVIGATION THROUGH THE ENGLISH CHANNEL AND THE DOVER STRAIT 1 Use of ships' routeing system 1. of which rules 15 and 19(d) are of specific relevance in the crossing situation. 4. for uncertainties in charted depths and tide levels.3). English Channel and Skagerrak (Assembly resolution A.1 Heavy crossing traffic exists in parts of the English Channel and the Dover Strait. keep to the north-east of the north-eastern limit of the ``Deep-water route forming part of the north-eastbound traffic lane of the Strait of Dover and adjacent waters traffic separation scheme''. sections II and III. 1.

as set out in the MAREP scheme. should take appropriate measures to overcome these defects before entering the Dover Strait. 7 Ship movement reporting scheme (MAREP) 7. 9 Navigation information service 9.1 When calculating the depth of water. It is recommended that all merchant ships of 300 gross tonnage and over participate in the scheme. 8 Defects affecting safety 8.1 A voluntary ship movement reporting scheme (MAREP) has been established jointly by the Governments of the United Kingdom and France in the English Channel and the Dover Strait. section II of part C. areas to be avoided and recommended directions of traffic flow involved.1 All ships navigating in the English Channel and the Dover Strait are recommended to make use of the information broadcasts made by the information services operated by the Governments of the United Kingdom and France. mariners are reminded that the height of the tide in mid-Strait can be up to one metre less than that predicted for the adjacent standard port.6 Tidal height predictions 6. and to keep watch on VHF as appropriate. in addition to reporting such defects by participating in the MAREP scheme. 1-2 . Note: See section II of part B.1 Ships having defects affecting operational safety. deep-water routes. section I of part D and part E for description of traffic separation schemes.

2 For the purpose of efficient and expeditious traffic management. and to keep watch on VHF as appropriate.1 All vessels entering the Straits are strongly recommended to participate in the reporting system (TUBRAP) established by the competent authority and concerning which the appropriate information has been promulgated by notices to mariners and other means. vessels may use the anchorages designated for this purpose. or section(s) of it. 2 Ship reporting and navigation information 2. 1. 6 Anchorage f When required. in accordance with the TUBRAP scheme.RULES AND RECOMMENDATIONS ON NAVIGATION THROUGH THE STRAIT OF ISTANBUL. in the interest of safety of navigation and protection of the marine environment. 1972. the competent authority may temporarily suspend the particular TSS. THE STRAIT OF CANAKKALE AND THE MARMARA SEA* Ë 1 Use of Ships' Routeing 1.2 A vessel that is not able to comply with the requirements of the TSS shall inform the traffic control station well in advance. 2.3 In order to ensure safe transit of vessels which cannot comply with the TSS. _____ * Hereinafter referred to as ``the Straits''.1 Vessels navigating in the Straits shall exercise full diligence and regard for the requirements of the traffic separation schemes (TSSs). whether in ballast or loaded condition and whether carrying any hazardous and noxious cargo. 1. 3 Pilotage 3.1 Masters of vessels passing through the Straits are strongly recommended to avail themselves of the services of a qualified pilot in order to comply with the requirements of safe navigation. 2 M d 28 h F b 2000 S W i Shi ' R i ( li h) 1 . as defined in relevant international conventions. 4 Daylight transit Vessels having a maximum draught of 15 m or more and vessels over 200 m in overall length are advised to navigate the Straits in daylight. 2. the competent authority may temporarily suspend two-way traffic and regulate one-way traffic to maintain a safe distance between vessels.3 All vessels navigating in the Straits are recommended to make use of the information broadcasts made by the information services operated by the competent authority. 5 Towing Passage of a vessel under tow may only be carried out when using tugboat(s) or vessel(s) suitably equipped for the operation in order to ensure safe navigation. and inform the vessels sailing in the area and advise them to comply with rule 9 of the International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea. vessels intending to pass through the Straits are strongly advised to give prior information on the size of the vessel. In such circumstances.

1. when overtaking another ship within a lane. should only cross the south. 1.2 Ships proceeding south from Suez should be alert for tankers heading for the SUMED oil terminal off Ain Sukhna.4 All ships north.7 Ships anchored in the designated waiting area for Ras Shukheir should ensure that they are never less than 0.1 Ships should take into account that crossing traffic may be encountered in the traffic junction eastward of Ain Sukhna and in the precautionary area off Ras Shukheir.6 Tankers leaving the Ras Shukheir oil terminal and intending to join the northbound traffic lane should only do so when no through southbound traffic is in the vicinity and should always report their movements to other ships beforehand on VHF. when navigating through the precautionary area off Ras Shukheir or in the vicinity of the July oilfield. They should also show their deck lights.3 Ships navigating in the Gulf of Suez are requested to keep continuous listening watch on the Suez Gulf Traffic Information Broadcasts and report to ``SUZ'' as from 1 January 1983 any aids to navigation which are malfunctioning or are out of position and which are not already included in the Suez Gulf Traffic Information Broadcasts. 2. not to enter the separation zone or force the overtaken ship to do so.3 Northbound tankers heading for the SUMED oil terminal should report their intention of using the traffic junction off Ain Sukhna on the appropriate frequencies. should avoid overtaking in the traffic lanes in these areas. and should be in a high state of readiness to manoeuvre in these areas. Ramadan and Morgan oilfields.5 All ships proceeding in and out of Ras Shukheir oil terminal. Particular care is required for strict adherence to the confines of relevant traffic lanes. including service and supply craft serving the oil workings in July. 2.1 All ocean ships should have their radar in effective use by day and night throughout the passage between Shaker Island and Suez Port as an aid to achieving maximum feasible lane conformity and avoiding risk of collision. 2. 2.and south-bound. 2. Within the precautionary area local rules relating to crossing traffic apply.25 miles from the edge of the southbound traffic lane and should pay special regard to their correct light signals for ships at anchor.2 Exceptional care is needed.RULES FOR SHIPS NAVIGATING IN THE GULF OF SUEZ 1 General provisions 1. 2.and north-bound traffic flow through the precautionary area off Ras Shukheir. 2 Rules 2. 3 M d 28 h F b 2000 S W i Shi ' R i ( li h) 1 f .

.1 South Sand Bluff (International No.1 Laden tankers should maintain a minimum distance of 20 nautical miles off the following landmarks: . they are to adjust their course to pass through the westbound traffic lanes.3 During the winter season (16 April to 15 October).2 Bashee River (Mbashe Point) (D6438) . on approaching the winter zone.3 Hood Point (D6420) . sea and current conditions.2 Quoin Point (D6322) .RULES FOR NAVIGATION OF LADEN TANKERS OFF THE SOUTH AFRICAN COAST* 1 Laden1 tankers.1. off the South African coast. 1 Definition: laden tanker means any tanker other than a tanker in ballast having in its cargo tanks residual cargo only.2 Laden tankers engaged on voyages solely between ports in the Republic of South Africa are exempted from the provisions in paragraphs 1 and 2 of these regulations and are to maintain a minimum distance of 10 nautical miles off salient points of the coast. when setting courses to their ports of loading and discharging. to ensure that they can remain on their summer load line throughout.5 Cape Columbine (D5810). thence altering course to position Slangkop Point Light 0708(T) 6 20 nautical miles. they may remain within the summer zone as close to the separation line as possible. should adhere to the following: .3 Cape Point (D6120) . 2 Laden tankers. steer a course to pass through the eastbound or southern lanes of the traffic separation schemes off the Alphard Banks and FA Platform. should similarly maintain a minimum distance of 25 nautical miles when passing the points listed in 1. subject to weather. when eastbound off the South African coast. 4 M d 28 h F b _____ * Date of implementation: 0000 hours UTC on 1 December 1998. 2000 S W i Shi ' R i (f h) 1 f . when westbound. Exemptions 3 The following exemptions to the laden tanker rules apply: . when between Cape Agulhas and Cape Receife.1 and 1.1 Cape Agulhas (D6370) . course may be altered to the rendezvous area 5 nautical miles to the west of Green Point Light (D5900) (replenishment area shown on chart SAN 1013). Cape Point Light bears 0008(T) 6 20 nautical miles. However.1 Vessels calling at Cape Town (Table Bay) to rendezvous with service craft or helicopters should follow the recommended routes until.2 These tankers should then steer to pass through the westbound or northern lanes of the traffic separation schemes off the FA Platform and the Alphard Banks and then maintain a minimum distance of 20 nautical miles from the following landmarks: . . From this position. In the vicinity of the Alphard Banks and the FA Platform. . in the case of laden tankers when proceeding westbound.4 Slangkop Point (D6110) . D4664) . and for the minimum period necessary.2 and.4 Cape Receife (D6390). westbound laden tankers should maintain the minimum distance of 20 nautical miles off the appropriate landmarks in paragraph 1.

and. Vessels shall take into account the precautionary areas where crossing traffic may be encountered and be in a maximum state of manoeuvring readiness in these areas. For the purpose of these Rules the following definitions shall apply: Note: The above definitions do not prejudice the definition of ``vessel constrained by her draught'' described in rule 3(h) of the International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea. Eastbound deep-draught vessels navigating in the deep-water routes in Phillip Channel and Singapore Strait shall. All deep-draught vessels and VLCCs navigating within the traffic separation schemes are recommended to use the pilotage service of the respective countries when they become available.000 dwt and above shall be deemed to be a very large crude carrier (VLCC). In the event of an emergency or breakdown of a vessel in the traffic lane the vessel shall. All vessels having defects affecting operational safety shall take appropriate measures to overcome these defects before entering the Straits of Malacca and Singapore.5 metres at all times during the entire passage through the Straits of Malacca and Singapore and shall also take all necessary safety precautions. in compliance with rule 18(d) of the International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea. 5-1 . Rule 1 Rule 2 Rule 3 Rule 4 Rule 5 Rule 6 (b) (c) _____ * Date of implementation: 0000 hours UTC on 1 December 1998. avoid impeding the safe passage of a vessel constrained by her draught which is exhibiting the signals required by rule 28 and which is obliged to cross that precautionary area. II 1 General provisions Deep-draught vessels and VLCCs shall allow for an under-keel clearance of at least 3. A tanker of 150. when approaching any of the precautionary areas. consistent with safe navigation. as far as practicable. taking note of the local warning system. Information relating to the movement of ships constrained by their draught as referred to in paragraphs (a) and (b) above will be given by radio broadcasts. Vessels proceeding in the traffic separation schemes. in compliance with rule 18(d) of the International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea. as far as practicable and safe. Masters of deep-draught vessels and VLCCs shall have particular regard to navigational constraints when planning their passage through the Straits. 2 3 4 III Rules Eastbound deep-draught vessels shall use the designated deep-water routes. 1972. (a) Vessels proceeding in the westbound lane of the traffic separation scheme ``In the Singapore Strait'' when approaching Raffles Lighthouse shall proceed with caution. 1972. leave the lane by pulling out to the starboard side. All vessels navigating in the area of the traffic separation scheme should monitor these radio broadcasts and take account of the information received. when navigating through the traffic separation schemes. 1972. avoid impeding the safe passage of a vessel constrained by her draught which is exhibiting the signals required by rule 28 and which is obliged to cross the westbound lane of the scheme in order to approach the single-point mooring facility (in approximate position 01811'.42 N. shall proceed with caution. All vessels navigating within the traffic separation scheme shall proceed in the appropriate traffic lane in the general direction of traffic flow for that lane and maintain as steady a course as possible. avoid overtaking. 103847'. taking note of the local warning system. and.50 E) from Phillip Channel. The particulars of such broadcasts are promulgated by Notices to Mariners.RULES FOR VESSELS NAVIGATING THROUGH THE STRAITS OF MALACCA AND SINGAPORE* I 1 2 Definitions A vessel having a draught of 15 metres or more shall be deemed to be a deep-draught vessel.

Difficult and unwieldy tows are also advised to broadcast similar information. Rule 11 IV Mariners are warned that local traffic could be unaware of the internationally agreed regulations and practices of seafarers and may be encountered in or near the traffic separation schemes. Rule 9 Rule 10 All vessels navigating in the Straits of Malacca and Singapore are requested to report by radio to the nearest shore authority any damage to or malfunction of the aids to navigation in the Straits. VLCCs and deep-draught vessels navigating in the Straits of Malacca and Singapore are advised to broadcast.31 E and between position 01811'. eight hours before entering the traffic separation schemes. draught. speed and times of passing One Fathom Bank Lighthouse.18 E and 01808'. navigational information giving name. shall proceed with caution. deep-water routes in the Phillip Channel and in Singapore Strait. 103850'.13 N. 103844'.65 N.40 E. WARNING 5-2 .25 E and 01811'. (a) (b) Vessels which are fitted with VHF radio communication are to participate in the ship reporting system adopted by the Organization. and shall be in a maximum state of manoeuvring readiness. proceed at a speed of not more than 12 knots over the ground in the following areas: (a) (b) (c) At One Fathom Bank traffic separation scheme. and should take any precautions which may be required by the ordinary practice of seamen or by the special circumstances of the case. Rule 8 All vessels navigating in the routeing system of the Straits of Malacca and Singapore shall maintain at all times a safe speed consistent with safe navigation. or any aids out of position in the Straits. owners and operators should ensure that their vessels are adequately equipped in accordance with the appropriate international conventions/recommendations. Flag States. 103852'. 103849'.51 N.Rule 7 VLCCs and deep-draught vessels navigating in the Straits of Malacca and Singapore shall.59 N. as far as it is safe and practicable. and westbound lanes between positions 01812'. Raffles Lighthouse and Horsburgh Lighthouse. deadweight tonnage.

6 . the fishing banks of Newfoundland north of latitude 438 N and pass outside regions known or believed to be endangered by ice.NAVIGATION IN THE VICINITY OF THE GRAND BANKS OF NEWFOUNDLAND All ships proceeding on voyages in the vicinity of the Grand Banks of Newfoundland shall avoid. as far as practicable.

1974. only on government non-commercial service. The participation of ships in accordance with the provisions of adopted ship reporting systems shall be free of charge to the ships concerned. for the time being. The Organization will collate and disseminate to Contracting Governments all relevant information with regard to any adopted ship reporting system. harmful substances and/or marine pollutants. and protection of the marine environment. Refer also to the General principles for ship reporting systems and ship reporting requirements. Where a co-ordinated ship reporting system is adopted and established.INTERNATIONAL CONVENTION FOR THE SAFETY OF LIFE AT SEA. (g) After adoption of a ship reporting system in accordance with this regulation. This regulation and its associated guidelines and criteria do not apply to any warship. Such systems shall be operated in accordance with the guidelines and criteria developed by the Organization* pursuant to this regulation. Contracting Governments shall refer proposals for the adoption of ship reporting systems to the Organization. provisions of the guidelines and criteria developed by the Organization* shall be taken into account. 1 . The Organization is recognized as the only international body for developing guidelines. Before proceeding with a proposal for adoption of a ship reporting system. however. the Organization shall disseminate details of the proposal to those Governments which have a common interest in the area covered by the proposed system. such ships are encouraged to participate in ship reporting systems that have been adopted in accordance with this regulation. including guidelines for reporting incidents involving dangerous goods. when adopted and implemented in accordance with the guidelines and criteria developed by the Organization* pursuant to this regulation. adopted by the Maritime Safety Committee of the Organization by resolution MSC. The Organization shall ensure that adopted ship reporting systems are reviewed under the guidelines and criteria developed by the Organization. Any adopted ship reporting system shall have the capability of interaction and the ability to assist ships with information when necessary. wherever possible. including the relevant provisions of the United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea. or certain categories of ships or ships carrying certain cargoes in accordance with the provisions of each system so adopted. they should formulate proposals for a co-ordinated ship reporting system on the basis of agreement between them. it shall have uniform procedures and operations. However. Nothing in this regulation or its associated guidelines and criteria shall prejudice the rights and duties of Governments under international law or the legal regime of international straits. AS AMENDED Regulation V/8-1 ± Ship reporting systems (a) Ship reporting systems contribute to safety of life at sea.851(20). Ship reporting systems not submitted to the Organization for adoption do not necessarily need to comply with this regulation. the Government or Governments concerned shall take all measures necessary for the promulgation of any information needed for the efficient and effective use of the system.43(64). adopted by the Organization by resolution A. In developing such systems. naval auxiliary or other vessel owned or operated by a Contracting Government and used. the guidelines and criteria developed by the Organization. criteria and regulations on an international level for ship reporting systems. The initiation of action for establishing a ship reporting system is the responsibility of the Government or Governments concerned. A ship reporting system. shall be used by all ships. The master of a ship shall comply with the requirements of adopted ship reporting systems and report to the appropriate authority all information required in accordance with the provisions of each system. Where two or more Governments have a common interest in a particular area. Governments implementing such systems are encouraged to follow. safety and efficiency of navigation. All adopted ship reporting systems and actions taken to enforce compliance with those systems shall be consistent with international law.* (b) (h) (c) (i) (d) (j) (k) (e) (l) (f) * Refer to the Guidelines and criteria for ship reporting systems.* Contracting Governments may submit such systems to the Organization for recognition.

Mariners should consult the appropriate nautical publications and charts for up-to-date details on aids to navigation and other relevant information. Charts published by other hydrographic offices may use a different geodetic datum.Section I MANDATORY SHIP REPORTING SYSTEMS 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: In the Great Belt Traffic area The Dover Strait/Pas de Calais Off Ushant Off Finisterre In the Strait of Gibraltar traffic separation scheme area In the Strait of Bonifacio In the Straits of Malacca and Singapore In the Torres Strait and the Inner Route of the Great Barrier Reef Systems for protecting North Atlantic right whales in sea areas off the north-eastern and south-eastern coasts of the United States CAUTION: The chartlets are for illustrative purposes only and must not be used for navigation. as may new editions of the reference charts published after the adoption of the reporting system. I . WARNING: The geographical positions given in the descriptions of the reporting systems are only correct for charts using the same geodetic datum as the reference charts indicated under each scheme.

INDEX MANDATORY SHIP REPORTING SYSTEMS 80˚ Arctic Circle 1: In the Great Belt Traffic area 2: The Dover Strait/Pas de Calais 3: Off Ushant 4: Off Finisterre 5: In the Strait of Gibraltar traffic separation scheme area 6: In the Strait of Bonifacio 7: In the Straits of Malacca and Singapore 8: In the Torres Strait and the Inner Route of the Great Barrier Reef 9: Off the north-eastern and south-eastern coasts of the United States 2 3 4 9 5 9 6 1 60˚ 40˚ Tropic of Cancer 20˚ Equator 7 0˚ Tropic of Capricorn 8 20˚ 40˚ 60˚ Antarctic Circle 180˚ 160˚ 140˚ 120˚ 100˚ 80˚ 60˚W 40˚ 20˚ 0˚ 20˚ 40˚ 60˚E 80˚ 100˚ 120˚ 140˚ 160˚ 180˚ .

011809'. navigational problems or other hazards. Authority to whom reports should be sent and available services Format 3. Northbound ships: When passing a line connecting the following points: Stigsnñs: 55812'.1 The report required from a ship entering the VTS area contains only information which is essential to achieve the objectives of the system. ice. times and geographical positions for submitting reports.2. 2. Langeland W: 55800'.2 the ship's course. U). speed. call sign and position is needed for establishing the identity of the ship (letters A.5 Services offered 3.5. B.1 The GBT provides information to shipping about specific and urgent situations which could cause conflicting traffic movements and other information concerning safety of navigation. F. electro-optic sensors. content of reports.20 E (érespids.1 The GBT provides an information service to shipping in the area.80 N. 011815'.1 Format.1 the ship's name. water level. 3. The boundaries are identical with the reporting lines stated in paragraph 3.40 E (Hov Iso. Omù: 55808'.1 The ship report to the VTS Centre shall be drafted in accordance with the format shown in appendix 1. VHF bearings.2 Detected and identified ships are monitored by radar.2 Content 3.: .3 the ship's route (Eastern or Western Channel). which provide large-scale coverage of the VTS area.50 E (Gulf Oil's pier).1. WGS 84). 010857'. . which does not release ship masters from their responsibility for the navigation of their ship.00 N. current. I/1-1 M d 28 h F b 2000 S W i Shi ' R i (f h) 1 f . 3. 141 (13th edition).00 N. which are also identical to the boundaries of the VTS area: Southbound ships: When passing latitude 55835'.80 E (south of Korsebùlle Rev). 3. The service is based on information from radar stations. J. Light). 4 Information to be provided to participating ships and procedures to be followed 4.648(16).2 The reference charts are Danish charts Nos.3.1 The reporting system covers an area of the central part of the Great Belt 26 nautical miles long. 010848'.4. information as to whether a pilot is embarked and information about deficiencies are considered to be important pieces of information in order to be able to service the safe navigation of the ship (letters E. for instance information about weather.3.5. Q). and ± all ships with an air draught of 15 m or more.40 N. i. The information requested from ships is derived from the Standard Reporting Format shown in paragraph 2 of the appendix to the annex to IMO resolution A. The area lies within the boundaries as shown on the chartlet given in appendix 2. .1.00 N. C or D). radio reports from ships and Danish coastal radio stations and compilation of meteorological and hydrographical data. Geographical coverage of the system and the number and edition of the reference chart used for the delineation of the system 2 2.4 Authority 3. 3 3. 010844'. its deadweight tonnage and air draught are essential pieces of information for the efforts to protect the West Bridge (letters L. 3.1 Categories of ships required to participate in the system Ships required to participate in the ship reporting system in the Great Belt Traffic (GBT) area: ± ships with a gross tonnage equal to or exceeding 50 GT. 142 (14th edition) and 143 (11th edition) (Datum: World Geodetic System 1984. Hov: 55808'.1 The Danish Navy is the VTS authority responsible for the vessel traffic service in the ``Great Belt Traffic'' (GBT) area.e. 3. Omù). its operation and training of its personnel. Thurù Rev: 55801'.20 N.IN THE GREAT BELT TRAFFIC AREA 1 1.1 Ships shall submit their reports when entering the VTS area defined by the following reporting lines.3 Position for submitting reports 3.10 E (Thurù Rev Lightbuoy).

report to GBT via a Danish coastal radio station two hours prior to passage of the bridge area. irrespective of size and draught. C or D position. frequencies on which reports should be transmitted and information to be reported 5. GBT is monitoring the VHF channels 16. The transmission is free of charge.1 Harbours within the VTS area are covered by provisions about mandatory pilotage for certain ships bound for or coming from Danish harbours. Exempted from the mandatory pilotage are ships of which the masters have sailed on at least five occasions during the past six months in the same area with the same ship. has been adopted by IMO. 6.620(15) 6.5.2. situated in the narrows of the Eastern Channel between the islands of Sjñlland and Fyn.2 The call to GBT shall preferably be made on VHF. adopted on 19 November 1987. L ship's route (Eastern or Western Channel).3 If a ship needs to anchor due to breakdown.4 The report required from a ship entering the VTS area shall contain the following information as mentioned under paragraph 3. Q defects and deficiencies which restrict manoeuvrability.4 IMO resolution A. 5.5 Mandatory pilotage 6.1 6.3 West Bridge f M d 28 h F b 2000 S W i Shi ' R i (f h) 1 6. shall also inform GBT of other communication methods. which shall be sent as a message with the system identifier ``GBT''. adverse weather.000 tonnes deadweight and with an air draught of less than 18 m.1 The International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea are applicable throughout the GBT area. and U deadweight tonnage and air draught.2.or south-bound).620(15) also recommends that ships with a draught of 13 m or more or carrying radioactive materials passing through the entrances to the Baltic Sea use for the passage the pilotage services locally established by the coastal States.4.4. Mandatory pilotage applies to oil tankers of 1.1 Voice communications between the VTS Centre and shipping is provided by a combination of VHF. channel 11 or 10. I/1-2 . All ships navigating in the area should listen to the announced broadcast. changes in the indicated depth of water. 5.000 tonnes deadweight and ships. if possible.2 Relevant rules and regulations in force in the area of the system Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea Traffic separation scheme ``Between Korsoer and Sprogoe'' 6.2 Resolution A.620(15). all gas carriers and ships carrying a shipment of radioactive materials. etc.4. recommends that ships of over 40. HF and CB radio transceivers distributed around the remote sensor sites. 5.2 Information of general interest to shipping in the area will be broadcasted by GBT on VHF channel 11 and will be preceded by an announcement on channel 16.. and the report shall be transmitted on that channel or any other available channel as assigned by GBT. 4. Navigation through the entrances to the Baltic Sea. 6.500 tons deadweight and upwards.3.1. 6. GBT can recommend suitable anchorages in the VTS area.1 The traffic separation scheme ``Between Korsoer and Sprogoe''.1 Passage through the navigation lanes at the West Bridge is allowed only for ships below 1.1 and appendix 1: A Ship's name and call sign.3 If a ship is unable to communicate on VHF it should. This report. and rule 10 of the International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea therefore applies. carrying radioactive materials when passing through the entrances to the Baltic Sea should participate in the ship reporting system (SHIPPOS) operated by the Government of Denmark.1 IMO resolution A. low visibility. 6 6. 5 Communication required for the system. E course (north. 11 and 10. The language used for communication shall be Danish or English. 6. all chemical tankers carrying dangerous liquefied chemicals in bulk. 6. F speed. J pilot embarked. The anchorages are marked on the nautical charts covering the area and are shown in the chartlet (see appendix 2).

all experienced as watchkeeping officers in the Danish merchant fleet. tracking ships and navigational aids (buoys. 7. which at all times is stationed in the VTS area and capable of fulfilling the main objectives of the VTS. daylight TV).2 In order to obtain the maximum benefit from each system. be possible to continue the operation by handing over the responsibility to the VTS Guard Vessel. The radar tracker and display systems are optimized for the specific range of tasks appropriate to VTS operation. radio direction-finding and electro-optic sensors. and meteorological and hydrographical sensors. The VTS system comprises five remote sensor sites and one control centre (VTS Centre). 7. 7. monitor and display the status of all of the VTS sensors. 7.). Langeland (radar.e. 7. VHF. 1 CB communication system. VHF communications and DF). daylight TV. HF. 7. Site 3: Sprogù island (radar.1. electro-optic (E/O) facilities and other sensors 7. IR. 4 daylight TV systems.1 Shore-based facilities to support operation of the system Shore-based facilities 7. Site 2: Maale. 7.4 Radiocommunication facilities The radiocommunications equipment at the VTS Centre consists of six VHF radios.2 An integrated network of three marine navigational radar systems provides surveillance of the VTS area.3 All of the sensors mentioned below will be controlled by and monitored at the VTS Centre. 7.3 Personnel qualifications and training f M d 28 h F b 2000 S W i Shi ' R i (f h) 1 7. I/1-3 . 8 Information concerning the applicable procedures if the communication facilities of the shore-based Authority fail 8.1 In the event that the radiocommunication system or the radar system at the VTS Centre break down it will.1. 2 low-light-level TV systems (LLLTV).2 Radar. compiled and displayed. The sites provide surveillance of the VTS area using a combination of radar. etc. one HF radio and one CB radio in order to be able to detect and identify distress messages from ships. the various sensors are placed as follows: Site 1: Romsù island (IR. 2 DF systems.3.7 7.3 Data communications between the remote sites and the VTS Centre will be made via a standard 64 kbit/s Kilostream data link and a low-bit-rate channel (9.1.2 The training of the personnel comprises an overall study of the navigation safety measures established in Danish waters and in particular Route T and the VTS area. including DSC facilities.1 The Centre is situated at the Naval Regional Centre at Korsùr.1 The VTS Centre will be staffed by civilian personnel (officer's rank). VHF communications and DF).2. The VTS Centre will at all times be manned with a duty officer and two operators.6 kbaud).2. 2 infra-red sensor systems (IR). 3 VHF communication systems. 1 HF communication system. Site 5: West Bridge (LLLTV. daylight TV). including a study of the relevant international (IMO) and national provisions with respect to safety of navigation. Site 4: Hov.1 Information necessary to evaluate the activities within the VTS area is compiled via VTS area remotecontrolled sensors comprising: 3 high-resolution radar systems. MET & HYD sensors). i. The training also includes thorough real-time simulations in different ship bridge simulators.3.2. east coast of Fyn (radar. 7. The operator can from each of the consoles control.4 There are four operator consoles in the VTS Centre. The duty officers hold a master's certificate and the operators hold a master's or a chief mate's certificate. which allows these activities to be carried out without disruption of normal operations. CB communications. one of which is intended for system maintenance and diagnostic purposes. The trainees are trained as well in navigating ships through the VTS area as servicing shipping from the VTS Centre. via portable VHF.1. where data and information are collected.

C/D Position. 010844'. Further. WGS 84).00 N.40 E (Hov Iso. Reports shall be sent on VHF.10 E (Thurù Rev Lightbuoy).20 N.00 N. 141 (13th edition) and 142 (14th edition) (Datum: World Geodetic System 1984.40 N.or south-bound). which displays radar targets. Authority receiving the report Communication f M d 28 h F b 2000 S W i Shi ' R i (f h) 1 2 3 4 Danish charts Nos. F Speed.50 E (Gulf Oil's pier). 011809'.20 E (érespids. Northbound ships: When passing a line connecting the following points: Stigsnñs: 55812'. of which three are portable. channel 11 or 10.3 The Guard Vessel's crew is trained weekly in taking over the responsibility of operation from the VTS Centre (radar tracks and VHF communication) and later handing back the new and updated situation to the VTS Centre.80 E (south of Korsebùlle Rev). Position for submitting reports: Southbound ships: When passing latitude 55835'. it is equipped with ECDIS. 010848'. Reference charts Reporting format System identifier: GBT (Great Belt Traffic) Data to be transmitted: Designator Information A Ship's name and call sign. and two radars. 011815'. L Ship's route (Eastern or Western Channel). Omù: 55808'. Light). 8. one of which has ARPA capabilities. J Pilot embarked. Hov: 55808'.80 N. 010857'. Q Defects and deficiencies which restrict manoeuvrability.2 The Guard Vessel is equipped with six VHF sets. Langeland W: 55800'. B Time. Thurù Rev: 55801'.8. SUMMARY OF SHIP REPORTING SYSTEM IN THE GREAT BELT 1 Ships required to participate: ± ships with a gross tonnage equal to or exceeding 50 GT and ± all ships with an air draught of 15 m or more. E Course (north. Omù). I/1-4 . 5 6 VTS Centre Great Belt Traffic.00 N. U Deadweight tonnage and air draught.

Appendix 1 Drafting of radio reports to the VTS ``Great Belt Traffic'' area Designator System identifier A B C D E F J L Q U Ship Time (UTC) Position Position Course Speed Pilot Route information Deficiencies Tonnage (dwt)/air draught Function GBT Name and call sign Only if report has been transmitted via coastal radio station Geographical position by two 4-digit groups. deficiencies or restrictions of manoeuvrability State ship's deadweight tonnage and air draught in metres Information required I/1-5 M d 28 h F b 2000 S W i Shi ' R i (f h) 1 f .or south-bound In knots (2-digit group) State whether a pilot is on board (e. PILOT EMBARKED) State which channel the ship intends to pass (Eastern or Western Channel) Brief details of defects. or True bearing and distance given in nautical miles from an identifiable point (state name) North.g.

2 ute T 15´ Vresen Agerso Stigsnaes f 10´ DW Omo Ho Route H Thuro R 30´ 40´ 50´ ou te H Lolland 97265 11° I/1-6 M d 28 h F b 10´ 20´ 2000 S W i La ng el S of V limit TS are a an d 55° Shi ' R i 5´ (f h) 1 S limit of V TS ar ea v .Appendix 2 VTS area ``Great Belt Traffic'' Lushage 45´ Rosnaes Route T Asnae s 40´ N limit of VTS area T ute Ro 35´ Sjælland 55° 30´ Romso Maale Musholm Kerteminde No.1 Eastern Channel Ro ute T 25´ Fyn Nyborg Halsskov Korsor VTS Centre 20´ Sprogo st We Bri d ge Ro Knudshoved No.

when reporting to DOVER COASTGUARD. Reports should be made using VHF voice transmissions. if applicable. ships of less than 300 gross tonnage should continue to make reports under the existing voluntary arrangements in circumstances where they: . However. cargo or equipment of the ship or any other circumstances affecting normal navigation in accordance with the provisions of the SOLAS and MARPOL Conventions. class and quantity. for reasons of commercial confidentiality. L Route information P Hazardous cargo. This will be achieved automatically if a transponder is used. are ``not under command'' or at anchor in the TSS or its ITZs. 2 Geographical coverage of the system and the number and edition of the reference chart used for the delineation of the system The system covers a 65-mile stretch of the Dover Strait/Pas de Calais and is bounded by a line to the east drawn from North Foreland to the border between France and Belgium. ships can fulfil the reporting requirements of a CALDOVREP through the use of automatic ship identification transponders approved by the Organization. to communicate that section of the report which provides information on cargo by non-verbal means prior to entering the system. and by a line to the west drawn from the Royal Sovereign Light Tower.000). scale 1:150. However. This threshold is the same as used in the existing voluntary MAREP scheme (SN/Circ. 000857'. The short title for the ship report is CALDOVREP. Q or R Breakdown. or .000) and 2451 (1991 edition. through the Bassurelle Light Buoy (at its assigned position of 50832'.1 Format The information given below is derived from the format-type given in paragraph 2 of the appendix to resolution A. IMO identification number (or MMSI for transponder reports) C or D Position (expressed in latitude and longitude or bearing to and distance from a landmark). _____ * Date of implementation: 0000 hours UTC on 1 July 1999.2 Content A report from a ship to the shore-based authorities should contain the following information to achieve the objectives of the system: A Name of the ship. The area of the reporting system is covered by modern hydrographic surveys and areas of unstable sea-bed are regularly resurveyed to ensure navigational safety. . The MAREP arrangements outside the coverage area of this system remain unchanged. have defective navigational aids. 3. damage and/or deficiencies affecting the structure. annex. the VTS operators will establish the relationship between the ship's position and the information supplied by the position-fixing equipment available to them.851(20). A ship may elect. times and geographical positions for submitting reports. Authority to whom reports should be sent and available services The reports required from ships entering the area covered by the system are position reports similar to the existing MAREP/POSREP arrangements. call sign. E and F Course and speed of the ship. O Vessel's draught. f I/2-1 M d 28 h F b 2000 S W i Shi ' R i (f h) 1 . are ``restricted in their ability to manoeuvre''. these arrangements replace the existing MAREP scheme for ships of 300 gross tonnage and over. 3 Format and content of reports.IN THE DOVER STRAIT/PAS DE CALAIS* 1 Categories of ships required to participate in the system Ships of 300 gross tonnage and over are required to participate in the system. and also chart 7312 of the French Navy Hydrographic and Oceanographic Service (INT 1072) (1994 edition. scale 1:150. Information on course and speed will help operators to identify one ship among a group of ships. The reference charts are British Admiralty charts 2449 (1998 edition.80 N. 3.80 E) to the coast of France. Note: On receipt of a position message. page 4). Also relevant is the British Admiralty chart 5500 ± Mariners' Routeing Guide English Channel and Southern North Sea and the French Navy Hydrographic and Oceanographic Service (SHOM) chart 8001 ± Guide pour la preÂparation de la traversee de la Manche. scale 1:375000).167. Within the coverage area.

8 E) to the coast of France.3. .4 Authority The shore-based Authorities are the Regional Centre for Surveillance and Rescue Operations.3. MRCC Dover (call sign: DOVER COASTGUARD) ± provided by HM Coastguard. In particular. Information is broadcast at the following times and on the following frequencies: Station Gris Nez Dover Frequency VHF channel 79 VHF channel 11 Times H + 10 H + 40 Additional broadcasts in times of poor visibility H + 25 H + 55 (call sign: GRIS NEZ TRAFFIC) (call sign: DOVER COASTGUARD) Information broadcasts will be preceded by an announcement on VHF channel 16 and broadcasts from both stations will end with a reminder about the time of the next broadcast and the VHF frequency on which it will be made. Confidential information may be transmitted by other means. frequencies on which reports should be transmitted and information to be reported f If necessary. particularly in relation to positioning and navigational assistance. 3. individual information can be provided to a ship. 4 Information to be provided to participating ships 5 The radiocommunications equipment required for the system is that defined in the GMDSS for sea area A1. Both Gris Nez and Dover sites monitor shipping in the TSS in the Dover Strait/Pas de Calais using radar. particularly in relation to items Q and R of the reporting format. The ship reports can be made by voice on VHF radio using channel 13 (GRIS NEZ TRAFFIC) or channel 11 (DOVER COASTGUARD). special reporting arrangements can be made on a ship-by-ship basis. I/2-2 M d 28 h F b 2000 S W i Shi ' R i (f h) 1 Radiocommunications requirements for the system. 1972 (as amended) apply throughout the reporting area. which is part of the United Kingdom's Department of the Environment. and each provides regular information about weather and navigational hazards as part of the joint Channel Navigation Information Service (CNIS). South-westbound traffic should report to the shore at DOVER COASTGUARD on the English coast when within VHF range of North Foreland and not later than when crossing the line drawn from North Foreland to the border between France and Belgium (see appendix). subject to the approval of both GRIS NEZ TRAFFIC and DOVER COASTGUARD. 6 Relevant rules and regulations in force in the area of the system The International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea. using a suitably adapted DSC facility on VHF channel 70. 000857'. and the Maritime Rescue Co-ordination Centre.8 N. Transport and the Regions.1 Crossing traffic Reports to the nearer of the two shore stations should be made on departure from a port within the coverage area. through the Bassurelle Light Buoy (at its assigned position of 50832'.3 Geographical position for submitting reports North-eastbound traffic should report to GRIS NEZ TRAFFIC on the French coast 2 nautical miles before crossing the line from the Royal Sovereign Light Tower. CROSS Gris Nez (call sign: GRIS NEZ TRAFFIC) ± provided by the French Ministry with responsibility for maritime navigation. Ship reports to DOVER COASTGUARD can alternatively be made by automatic ship-identification transponder. Further reports should be made to the relevant shore station whenever there is a change of navigational circumstance. Recognizing that cross-Channel ferries generally operate according to published schedules. Ships carrying dangerous or hazardous cargoes and bound to or from any port within the proposed reporting area must comply with the European HAZMAT Directive (EC Directive 93/75). or by equipment conforming to the standards adopted for the Universal AIS Transponder. where available. rule 10 of those Regulations applies to the IMO-adopted TSS. 3.

7 Shore-based facilities to support operation of the system DOVER COASTGUARD The Channel Navigation Information Service (CNIS) has radar. an information processing and retrieval system (IPRS). The proposed reporting area is included within those limits. New targets entering radar range are automatically tagged with a unique track number. or dangerous goods (IMDG Code).1 CNIS facility The CNIS processing and display system receives inputs from the radar and VHF DF equipment. Fairlight. North Foreland. access to the United Kingdom's HM Coastguard operational radiocommunications.3 VHF DF facilities The CNIS automatically displays vectors generated from the DF systems at Dover. VHF directionfinding (DF). Fairlight ± The antenna is 126 m above mean ordnance datum and covers the area from Dover to the western boundary of the CNIS area.000. The CNIS supports the primary responsibilities of preserving safety of life at sea and co-ordinating responses to incidents. No. Recording equipment automatically stores information from all tracks. the English Channel and the Atlantic in order to prevent accidental marine pollution. radio VHF Digital Selective Calling (DSC). course and speed information of up to 300 tracks is automatically updated and recorded. These are TERMA dual X-band systems. Operators can add vessel information to the associated IPRS database (such as name and cargo) and can display that supporting information on a separate screen. All of the DF systems may be set to one of a number of the VHF channels used in the area. The same Regulations require ships to monitor VHF channel 16 or other specific frequencies in certain areas. harmful liquid substances (MARPOL Annex II). or six hours before departure. DOVER COASTGUARD maintain a continuous watch on traffic in the Dover Strait/Pas de Calais. The Regulations make provision. should a distress call be sent. and require the reporting of any accident within 50 miles of the French coast and the taking of any action required by the maritime Authorities to reduce risks. The message sent to the CROSS must make clear the ship's intended movements in territorial waters and the status of its ability to manoeuvre and navigate. 7. and Automatic Identification System (AIS) facilities. and . throughout the vessel's passage through the CNIS area. the Joint Decree of the Prefet maritime de l'Atlantique and the   Prefet maritime de la Manche et de la Mer du Nord (No. 92/97 ± Brest. to send an advance report to the appropriate CROSS five hours before entering territorial waters. The United Kingdom has established a pollution control zone under the Merchant Shipping (Prevention of Pollution) (Limits) Regulations 1996. The radars are located at: . although the operational range of each radar is limited by radar video units to 35 nautical miles to prevent the track table from filling up with vessels which are not entering the CNIS area. each comprising main and back-up transceivers (type 232075) and a single antenna. . I/2-3 . VHF DF vectors appear when a VHF radio transmits on the frequency selected on the VHF DF equipment. for each of the three radars.2 Radar facilities f M d 28 h F b 2000 S W i Shi ' R i (f h) 1 Three surveillance radars cover the CNIS area and the area of the mandatory ship reporting system. channel 16 receivers monitor the distress channel. 7. 03/97 ± Cherbourg) control navigation in the approaches to the French coast in the North Sea. 7. in particular. Margate ± The antenna is 118 m above mean ordnance datum and covers the area from the southern area of the North Sea to Dover. noxious substances (MARPOL Annex III). Ships causing pollution within the area can be prosecuted and fined more than £250. Mont St. preparing to pass through or remain in French territorial waters. Frieux and Cap Gris Nez. CNIS is capable of providing an automatic alarm to identify any track which strays into an unauthorised area. The position. Dover ± The antenna is 125 m above mean ordnance datum and covers the area from North Foreland to Hastings. The radars have a maximum operational range of 75 nautical miles. Each display shows processed images (tracks) from any of the three radar inputs overlaid on a synthetic map of a selected area. Data from the Margate and Fairlight radars are transmitted to DOVER COASTGUARD via microwave links. CNIS operators have access to Lloyd's Register and hazardous cargo data on a separate computer. for ships transporting hydrocarbons (MARPOL Annex I). processes the information and presents it on any or all of six displays. giving the CNIS a 900-track capability. In parallel. which can either be replayed on the system or specific track movements can be plotted onto an A0-size sheet of paper.  In addition to these international requirements.

at: . All situations can be recorded. 7.5 kHz. which is continually monitored.000 tracks. VHF DSC channel 70 (continuously monitored) . channel 6 (inter-ship/scene of search for SAR). VHF Air (AM) on 132. channel 67 (small ship safety) ± secondary SAR. channel 99 (Coastguard private channel). allowing coverage of the whole of the reporting area. continuously monitored) One station (Cap Gris Nez) has facilities to send and receive information on MF.5 VHF DSC facilities A VHF channel 70 digital selective calling system has been installed as part of the GMDSS requirement. channel 10 (counter-pollution). Cap Gris Nez. giving a complete visual display of the area covered. channel 16 (continuously monitored) . 7. 7. VHF radio receivers are located at Dover. while their associated transmitters are at West Hougham (near Folkestone) to gain optimum coverage of 13 VHF channels. DSC communications are available to all operator positions at DOVER COASTGUARD. Mont St.7 Radar facilities GRIS NEZ TRAFFIC is equipped with two radar installations. which can be recorded and saved for up to a year. . GRIS NEZ TRAFFIC specifically has the following facilities. . channel 80 (marinas). channel 74 (Dover port control). . channel 14 (Thames port control) ± receive only. channel 69 (inter-ship. channel 9 (pilotage) ± receive only. . . 7. channel 13 (on which ships are requested to send their reports ± again. .7. channel 30 (special operations). This information is displayed as an icon on an electronic charting package covering the CNIS area. channel 12 (Thames port control) ± receive only. . the observation of ships entering prohibited areas. channel 16 (international distress) ± continuously monitored. archived. The VHF channels used are: .4 Radiocommunication facilities Radiocommunications terminals are sited in the consoles of the MRCC Dover Operations Room. Each station can send or receive on: . Frieux. . MF is also fitted at Dover. . and . . the identification of tracks infringing rule 10 of the COLREGs. . Other VHF transmitters are fitted at Fairlight and North Foreland radio sites and are controlled via land lines. . DSC takes priority over all other operations. and replayed either on screen or in the form of a print-out. Its purpose is to provide rapid distress alerting between vessels and the shore. channel 73 (channel 0 back-up). channel 11 (port operations and CNIS) ± continuously monitored. GRIS NEZ TRAFFIC Similar facilities to those at DOVER COASTGUARD are also available at GRIS NEZ TRAFFIC. .6 AIS facilities DOVER COASTGUARD can interrogate ships fitted with transponders to gain information on their identity and position. port operations and CNIS) . and the monitoring of ships at anchor. both through radiotelegraphy and DSC on a frequency of 2187. The two centres act in partnership in the operation of the CNIS. channel 0 (SAR). the monitoring of ships which make abrupt changes of course and speed. Advanced functions include alarms signalling risk scenarios. . channel 13 (inter-ship and port operations).65 MHz .9 Radiocommunication facilities CROSS Gris Nez is equipped with four VHF radio installations. 7.8 Particular features The system at GRIS NEZ TRAFFIC allows the simultaneous monitoring of 1. routine calling of vessels and AIS facilities. The two radar installations are linked to a single processing system. I/2-4 M d 28 h F b 2000 S W i Shi ' R i (f h) 1 f .

3 How to report By voice on VHF radio. or 5 W portable radios at DOVER COASTGUARD. Q or R Breakdown. through the Bassurelle Buoy (at its assigned position of 50832'. SUMMARY 1 2 Categories of ships to report When and where to report All ships of 300 gross tonnage and over. Information will also be made available to Port State Control inspectors. O Vessel's draught. and not later than when crossing the line drawn from North Foreland to the border between France and Belgium.7. 9 Measures to be taken if a ship fails to comply with the requirements of the system The primary objective of the system is to facilitate the exchange of information between the ship and the shore and so support safe navigation and the protection of the marine environment. Each installation can monitor two frequencies simultaneously within an accuracy of 0. then information will be passed to the relevant Flag State Authorities for investigation and possible prosecution in accordance with national legislation.58. using channel 13 (GRIS NEZ TRAFFIC) or channel 11 (DOVER COASTGUARD). Report to the nearer of the two shore stations on departure from a port within the area covered.11 Personnel Both DOVER COASTGUARD and GRIS NEZ TRAFFIC are staffed by personnel experienced in the management of ship reporting systems. North-eastbound traffic: To GRIS NEZ TRAFFIC on the French coast 2 nautical miles before crossing the line from the Royal Sovereign Light Tower.80 N. 7. damage and/or deficiencies affecting the structure. if applicable. Frieux. Confidential information may be transmitted by other means.80 E) to the French coast. Alternatively to DOVER COASTGUARD by automatic ship-identification transponder. IMO identification number (or MMSI for transponder reports) C or D Position (expressed in latitude and longitude or bearing to and distance from a landmark) E and F Course and speed of the ship. each transmitter/receiver can be operated from the radar site.10 Direction-finding equipment GRIS NEZ TRAFFIC is equipped with two VHF radio direction-finders installed at Cap Gris Nez and Mont St. cargo or equipment of the ship or any other circumstances affecting normal navigation in accordance with the provisions of the SOLAS and MARPOL Conventions. All means will be used to encourage and promote the full participation of ships required to submit reports under SOLAS regulation V/8-1. Limited coverage can also be achieved using emergency 25 W transceivers. In the event of a failure there. If reports are not submitted and the offending ship can be positively identified. If CNIS operations are jeopardised at either DOVER COASTGUARD or GRIS NEZ TRAFFIC. allowing VHF calls to be located precisely. Radars have dual transmitter/receivers. L Route information P Hazardous cargo. f M d 28 h F b 2000 S W i Shi ' R i (f h) 1 I/2-5 . 000857'. call sign. 4 Reporting format A Name of the ship. Radiocommunications are controlled at the MRCC. 8 Alternative communication if the shore-based facilities fail The CNIS is designed with sufficient system redundancy to cope with normal equipment failure. South-westbound traffic: To DOVER COASTGUARD on the English coast when within VHF range of North Foreland. or using equipment conforming to the standards adopted for the Universal AIS Transponder. class and quantity. controlled either from MRCC Dover or the radar site. then the other site can assume total control.

RADAR SURVEILLANCE Margate Ramsgate NORTH SEA RA EILLANCE SURV DAR 30' North Foreland Deal DOVER COASTGUARD Dover Folkstone Lim it o f VT Sa rea BE I LG A FR NC Appendix Dunkerque Rye r th Wo ing o Sh reh am 51˚ UM Calais E n ve ha ew N Fairlight GRIS-NEZ TRAFFIC Mont St. Lim Le Touquet R DA it o fV 30' SU RV EI LL TS are a AN CE 99026 0˚ 30' 1˚ 30' 2˚ 30' 3˚ . Frieux 5 Boulogne Greenwich RA .

OFF USHANT
1 Categories of ships required to participate in the system Ships of more than 300 gross tonnage are required to participate in the system. This threshold is that used within the framework of the MAREP system, recently amended with regard to the categories of ships included (IMO document SN/Circ. 167, annex, page 4). 2 Geographical coverage of the system and the number and edition of the reference chart used for the delineation of the system

The reporting system covers a circular area 35 miles in radius centred on the Ile d'Ouessant (Stiff radar tower). The TSS covers the entire area. However, the Corsen/Ouessant vessel traffic service gathers all information relating to traffic within the area for which the MRCC Corsen is responsible, bounded as follows: ± to the south: parallel 47847'.90 N (via the Pointe de Penmarc'h) ± to the west: meridian 008800'.00 W ± to the north: a line connecting the positions 48850'.00 N, 008800'.00 W 49830'.00 N, 004800'.00 W 48853'.00 N, 002820'.00 W 48849'.00 N, 001849'.00 W 48837'.50 N, 001834'.00 W (Baie de Mont St. Michel) The reference chart which includes all the area of coverage for the system is the French chart No. 6989 of the Navy Hydrographic and Oceanographic Service. 3 Format and contents of report, times and geographical positions for submitting report, Authority to whom reports should be sent and available services

The reports required from ships entering the area covered by the system are position reports similar to the MAREP POSREP-type reports sent to the VTS by ships reporting within the scheme. A ship may elect, for reasons of commercial confidentiality, to communicate that section of the report which provides information on cargo by non-verbal means prior to entering the system. The information given below is derived from the format-type given in paragraph 2 of the appendix to the annex to resolution A.648(16) of IMO. 3.1 Content The report required should include: .1 information considered to be essential: ± the name of the ship, its call sign or IMO identification number, its position (letters A and C or D); ± information considered necessary; ± the course and speed of the ship (letters E and F). When they receive a position report message, the VTS operators attempt to correlate the position of the ship with the information at their disposal: ± radar echo at the position indicated ± direction-finder readings ± description of the surroundings given by the ship's watch ± position in relation to other ships (in the event of heavy traffic) ± course and speed. Information on course and speed are therefore additional elements allowing the VTS operators to correlate the position announced and, if necessary, to identify one ship among a group of ships; ± access to the north-eastbound lane of the ``Off Ushant'' traffic separation scheme is prohibited to certain cargoes (oils, noxious liquid substances MARPOL A and B in particular). In order to allow the VTS operators to monitor application of the traffic regulations within the TSS approved by IMO, ships requiring to transit in the north-eastbound lane must confirm that they are not transporting a cargo for which passage in this area is prohibited; and .2 in addition, in accordance with the provisions of the SOLAS and MARPOL Conventions, the ships must report information relating to defects, damage, deficiencies or other limitations as well as, if necessary, information relating to pollution incidents or loss of cargo.

I/3-1

M

d

28 h F b

2000 S W i

Shi ' R

i

(f

h) 1

f

3.2 Recipient of report The shore-based authority is the Corsen/Ouessant vessel traffic service (voice communication call sign USHANT TRAFFIC) installed at the CROSS Corsen site. The Regional Centre for Surveillance and Rescue Operations ± CROSS Corsen ± is a service provided by the Department of Maritime Affairs, a department of the Ministry of Equipment, Transport and Tourism. It combines the maritime rescue co-ordination centre (MRCC) and the VTS as well as carrying out functions for the French Administration (monitoring fishing, monitoring pollution). The VTS ± ± ± broadcasts a regular information bulletin at H + 10 min and H + 40 min. This bulletin includes: information on traffic urgent warnings to mariners concerning the area special weather bulletins.

In addition, a regular weather bulletin is broadcast every three hours from 0150 hours UTC. This information is broadcast in French and in English on VHF channel 79 after a call on channel 16. If necessary, the VTS is capable of providing individual information to a ship, in particular with regard to positioning and navigational assistance. 4 Information to be provided to participating ships and procedures to be followed The VTS processes the requests for anchoring made by the ships in the area for which the MRCC Corsen is responsible. Detected and identified ships are monitored by radar, which in no way releases the masters from responsibility for their navigation. The vessel traffic services in the Channel inform each other of the transit of ships, in particular those having hazardous cargoes. First, the identification for a southbound ship which has reported in accordance with the MAREP recommendations to the VTS at Jobourg is transmitted to the VTS at Corsen/Ouessant, which then sets up an HPA at the north-east racon radio beacon of the Ushant traffic separation scheme. 5 Communication requirements for the system, frequencies on which reports should be transmitted and information to be reported

The radiocommunications equipment required for the system is that defined in the GMDSS for sea area A1. The ship reports will be made by voice on VHF radio. The channels defined are channel 13, monitored permanently by the VTS, as well as channels 79 and 80, which are also used to broadcast safety information. However, information of commercial confidentiality may be transmitted by non-verbal means. The frequencies mentioned above will be used pending modifications made necessary by the use of an automatic identification system for which the draft definition of operational standards is under review. In some cases, it could be decided to use the medium-frequency band for communication with ships, according to procedures which will be specified subsequently. 6 Relevant rules and regulations in force in the area of the system The International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea are applicable throughout the area of coverage of the system. The ``Off Ushant'' traffic separation scheme has been approved by IMO and therefore rule 10 applies (document MSC XXXVIII/22, annex 7, pages 7 and 8). In addition to the international regulatory scheme there are national regulations regarding vessel traffic and ship reporting. These are specifically: ± Decree No. 84/93 of the port-admiral for the Atlantic of 11 October 1993 regulating navigation in the ``Off Ushant'' TSS, the associated inshore traffic area and the fairways and waters of Fromveur, Four, Helle and Raz de Sein. Repealing a previous decree of 14 December 1978, it makes reporting mandatory for ships intending to use the north-eastbound lane of the TSS (situated in territorial waters) as well as inshore fairways. This decree repeats the provisions of the MSC document concerning the conditions for entry to the north-eastbound lane. The conditions for entry to the fairways and waterways are also specified. ± Joint prefectorial decree 326 Cherbourg/18/81 Brest of 13 May 1981 regulating navigation in the approaches to the French coast in the Channel and the Atlantic in order to prevent accidental marine pollution.
f M d 28 h F b 2000 S W i Shi ' R i (f h) 1

I/3-2

±

This decree, concerning ships having hazardous cargoes, stipulates in particular: ± for ships intending to enter French territorial waters, mandatory ship reporting with a 6-hour advance warning. In addition to information concerning the identity of the ship, the report must specify the place and time of entry into French waters, the port arrived from and the destination, the cargo and the state of manoeuvrability and navigational capacities, ± a mandatory channel 16 VHF watch while travelling through territorial waters, ± navigation at less than 7 miles from the coast is forbidden for ships of more than 1,600 gross tonnage, ± mandatory reporting to the French shipping authorities of any damage occurring at less than 50 miles from the French coast. Within the area of applicability of the proposed system, the provisions of this decree apply more specifically in the following cases: ± transit, via the north-eastbound lane of the TSS, of a ship having a cargo which is not prohibited in this lane but which comes under the decree, ± traffic coming from or going towards the Port de Brest with hazardous cargoes. Decree No. 54/84 of the port-admiral for the Atlantic of 31 July 1984 regulating entry, movement and berthing of foreign ships in the internal waters of the second maritime region.

In addition to these provisions of a regulatory nature, also relevant are the Franco-British MAREP recommendations regarding ships of more than 300 gross tonnage and in particular those facing specific difficulties. Application of these recommendations for the Ouessant area is as follows for the VTS: ± for northbound traffic, taking account of the information transmitted by ships approaching the TSS, plotting and radar monitoring and sending to the Jobourg VTS of MAREP information for ships having hazardous cargoes or facing specific difficulties in order to allow this VTS to set up an arrival forecast for the ship at the Casquets TSS; ± for southbound traffic, prior receipt, by the Jobourg VTS, of MAREP information concerning hazardous shipping or shipping facing specific difficulties and which have reported to Les Casquets. Plotting and radar monitoring of the ships identified. 7 Shore-based facilities to support operation of the system The Corsen/Ouessant vehicle traffic service is set up at the Regional Centre for Surveillance and Rescue Operations at Corsen. This service has radar and radio facilities. 7.1 Radar facilities The surveillance radar type THOMSON TRS 3405 is installed at the Stiff tower at Ouessant. The installation includes three transmitter/receivers, a main antenna and a stand-by antenna. The nominal range of the radar is 64 miles. The antenna is positioned at 110 m above the chart zero. Technical staff are permanently on duty at the tower. Radar messages are sent to the centre at Corsen via a radio-relay system where they are processed and then used by the staff on watch. The watch is carried out using visual display screens. The operators work using synthetic radar display. Each ship detected in the area of applicability has its echo noted as an automatically referenced radar track. Additional information is collected by the operators for each track identified. The vessel traffic service is equipped with a system for processing and storing radar data that allows statistics and course calculations to be printed. A complete reorganization of the processing and display chain will be carried out in the near future. The extraction and follow-up performances of the new system will be improved. Aids for the operators will form part of the new equipment. The operator will be alerted automatically as soon as violations or unusual behaviour is detected. It is also intended to add the Lloyd's file, on CD-ROM, to the ``ships'' file. It will be possible to obtain the record of a ship's track rapidly, to print texts and courses automatically and to write messages. Other databases will be used on office-type computers. 7.2 Radiocommunications facilities Surveillance staff use the radio equipment installed at the Stiff tower in the Corsen centre. The vessel traffic service has the use of four single-channel VHF transmitter/receivers. If necessary, the VTS may, from time to time, use the VHF and MHF radio equipment belonging to the MRCC. These are VHF installations at Stiff, at the Pointe du Raz and at the Corsen site. The VTS is also equipped with VHF air and UHF installations, allowing links with aircraft carrying out surveillance missions. A renovation of the equipment is being undertaken. With regard to radio facilities, it will include the installation of channel 70 digital selective calling VHF equipment at Stiff and at the Pointe du Raz. The vessel traffic service operators use VHF radio direction-finding equipment precise to within 0.58. One is installed at the Pointe du Raz, the other at the Phare de Creac'h lighthouse. On each radio direction-finder it is possible to select two different tracks.

I/3-3

M

d

28 h F b

2000 S W i

Shi ' R

i

(f

h) 1

f

8

Alternative communication if the communication facilities of the shore-based Authority fail

The vessel traffic service VHF radiocommunications equipment is installed at Ouessant. It includes four singlechannel transmitter/receivers plus a multi-channel transmitter/receiver on stand-by. A multi-channel transmitter/ receiver normally dedicated to the MRCC Corsen completes the installation. In the event that the radio-relay system between Stiff and Corsen breaks down, two emergency multi-channel VHF transmitter/receivers installed at the Corsen site can be used. If none of the VTS VHF equipment is operational at the Corsen Centre, it would still be possible for the naval staff on watch at Stiff to intervene, as that staff has its own radio equipment and would be able to maintain contact with the ships. It should be noted that, in the event that the surveillance radar breaks down, this watch would take over temporarily from the vessel traffic service at Corsen/Ushant, pending the arrival, by the most rapid means (helicopter), of the VTS staff on Ile d'Ouessant. A breakdown involving several of the VTS VHF radios would not remove all possibility of contact between the VTS and the ships. There is therefore no reason to provide for a specific procedure in this event. If it became necessary to establish an MHF link in the event of a breakdown at the MHF installation at the Corsen Centre, the inshore radio station, Le Conquet Radio, would be called upon.

SUMMARY
1 1.1 General Vessels concerned: all vessels having a gross registered tonnage equal to or exceeding 300 tons.

1.2 Area on entering which the vessels should report: on entering a circular area 35 miles in radius centred on the Ile d'Ouessant (Stiff radar tower). 1.3 Reference chart: chart No. 6989 of the French Navy Hydrographic and Oceanographic Service. 1.4 Reporting format (in accordance with resolution A.648(16), General principles for ship reporting systems and ship reporting requirements, including guidelines for reporting incidents involving dangerous goods, harmful substances and/or marine pollutants): Name of system: OUESSREP Data to be transmitted: Heading Information A Name + call sign + IMO number C or D Position E Course F Speed P Cargo, if presence on board of potentially dangerous cargoes (for vessels in the northeastbound lane). Q Defects (if relevant) R Pollution/dangerous goods lost overboard (if relevant) In the event of defect, pollution or goods lost overboard, additional information may be requested. 1.5 Authority to whom the report should be sent: Regional Centre for Surveillance and Rescue Operations at Corsen/Ouessant (CROSS Corsen), call sign USHANT TRAFFIC. (In addition to the vessel traffic service (VTS), the Centre carries out the functions of a rescue co-ordination centre (RCC), call sign CROSS CORSEN.) 1.6 Communication facilities The reports will be transmitted by radiotelephone in VHF on channel 13 or, in the event of failure, on channel 79, according to the information given by the Centre. It is proposed that the reports be transmitted in the future by automatic means when the relevant standards have been put in place by the Organization.
f

I/3-4

M

d

28 h F b

2000 S W i

Shi ' R

i

(f

h) 1

Guernsey

Herm Sark

30´

a of M of are ndary Bou

R

orse CC C

n
Limit of VTS area

Jersey

49˚
Île de Bréhat Île de Batz

30´ Ushant I.

Pointe du Raz

FRANCE

48˚

Pointe de Penmarc’h

Île de Groix 30´

Belle Île

47˚

30´

30´

30´

30´

30´

30´

30´

OFF USHANT

IN THE ``OFF FINISTERRE'' TRAFFIC SEPARATION SCHEME AREA
1 Categories of ships required to participate in the system Ships of the following general categories are required to participate in the reporting system: .1 All ships of 50 m or more in length overall. .2 All ships, regardless of length, carrying hazardous and/or potentially polluting cargo, as defined paragraph 1.4 of resolution MSC.43(64). .3 Ships engaged in towing or pushing another vessel where the combined length of the ship and tow pushed vessel exceeds 50 m. .4 Any category of vessel less than 50 m in length overall which is using the appropriate traffic lane separation zone in order to engage in fishing. .5 Any category of ship less than 50 m in length overall which is using the appropriate traffic lane separation zone in an emergency in order to avoid immediate danger. 2 2.1 Geographical coverage of the system and the number and edition of the reference chart used for the delineation of the system The .1 .2 .3 reporting system will cover the area (appendix 1) between the coast and the following lines: a bearing of 1308 (T) to Cape Villano lighthouse; a bearing of 0758 (T) to Cape Finisterre lighthouse; and the meridian of longitude 010810'.00 W.

in or or or

This area includes the traffic separation scheme ``Off Finisterre'' and associated inshore traffic zones adopted by IMO resolution A.767(18). 2.2 The reference chart which includes all of the area of coverage for the system is Spanish Hydrographic Office 41. 3 Format and content of reports, times and geographical positions for submitting reports, Authority to whom reports should be sent, available services Format

The ship report, short title ``FINREP'', shall be made to the ship reporting centre located at Finisterre. 3.1 The information requested from ships shall be provided in the standard reporting format given in paragraph 2 of the appendix to the annex to IMO resolution A.648(16). A ship may elect, for reasons of commercial confidentiality, to communicate that section of the FINREP ENTRY report which provides information on cargo (line P) by non-verbal means prior to entering the system. 3.2 Content The report from a ship to the VTS should contain only information which is essential to achieve the objectives of the system: .1 Information considered essential: A Name of the ship, call sign, IMO identification number. C or D Position. G and I Last and next port of call. P Hazardous cargo, class and quantity, if applicable. Q or R Breakdown, damage and/or deficiencies affecting the structure, cargo or equipment of the ship or any other circumstances affecting normal navigation, in accordance with the provisions of the SOLAS and MARPOL Conventions. .2 Information considered necessary: E and F Course and speed of the ship. Note: On receipt of a position message, operators of the VTS will establish the relation between the ship's position and the information supplied by the facilities available to them. The information on heading and speed will facilitate the VTS operator's task of identifying a ship within a group.

I/4-1

M

d

28 h F b

2000 S W i

Shi ' R

i

(f

h) 1

f

3.3

Geographical position for submitting reports

Ships entering the area of coverage shall report to the Finisterre Traffic VTS when crossing the limits mentioned in paragraph 2.1 or when leaving the ports or anchorages in the area. To facilitate the positioning of ships and to ensure compliance with the International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea, 1972, and especially rule 10 thereof, radio beacons with a range of more than 32 nautical miles have been installed on the coast, located at Mount Xastas, Cape Finisterre and Cape Villano. 3.4 Authority The shore-based Authority is Finisterre VTS, which forms part of the Area Search and Rescue and Pollution Control Co-ordination Centre (CZCS Finisterre). The CZCS Finisterre is a Co-ordination Centre under the authority of the Spanish Government Search and Rescue and Maritime Safety Division. The Division, administered by the Ministry of Development, is entrusted, amongst other responsibilities, with providing services relating to maritime search and rescue, vessel traffic control and assistance, and prevention and control of pollution of the marine environment. 3.5 Services offered Finisterre VTS broadcasts regular information regarding warnings to mariners and traffic, navigational and weather conditions in the area, in Spanish and in English. 4 Information to be provided to participating ships and procedures to be followed In addition to the general information stated above, Finisterre Traffic can provide a particular vessel with information regarding her position, course and speed or the identification of the traffic in her vicinity. The ship should request this additional information. 5 Radiocommunication equipment required for the system, frequencies on which reports should be transmitted and information to be reported

The radiocommunication equipment required for the system is that defined in the GMDSS for sea areas A1 and A2. .1 The system will be based on VHF voice communications and will be interactive, with an interchange of data between ships and the ship reporting centre. The channels defined are channels 16 and 11, with channel 74 as a supplementary option. .2 In special circumstances, the hectometric waveband may also be used for the interchange of information between the ship and the Vessel Traffic Service. .3 Information of commercial confidentiality may be transmitted by non-verbal means. Details are as follows: Fax: + 34 81 76 77 40 (available by auto-link) Telex: 82268 Radiotelex selective call: 0993 Answerback: SAFIS Frequencies scanned: 4179 kHz, 6269 kHz, 8297.6 kHz, 8298.1 kHz, 12 520 kHz, 16 688.5 kHz .4 The language used for reports in the system will be English, using the IMO Standard Marine Communication Phrases (SMCPs)* where necessary, or Spanish if appropriate. .5 Communications associated with reporting in accordance with the requirements of this system will be free of charge. 6 Rules and regulations in force in the area of the system 6.1 The International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea (COLREG), 1972 are applicable throughout the area of coverage of the proposed system. 6.2 7 7.1 The TSS ``Off Finisterre'' has been approved by IMO and therefore rule 10 of COLREG applies. Shore-based facilities to support operation of the system The .1 .2 .3 .4 Finisterre VTS (FINISTERRE TRAFFIC) is provided with the following facilities: Telephone, facsimile and telex communications; 2 sets of VHF radiocommunication equipment with digital selective calling (DSC); 1 set of radiocommunication equipment in MF/HF bands with DSC; 2 sets of radiocommunication equipment with radiotelex in MF/HF bands;

_____ * Trials of the SMCPs will commence after 6 June 1997.

I/4-2

M

d

28 h F b

2000 S W i

Shi ' R

i

(f

h) 1

f

4 .. remote station at Malpica is provided with the following facilities: 2 sets of VHF radiocommunication equipment (marine band).5 .1 .3 The location of radar antennae ensures that.2 . 1 VHF marine and aeronautical band direction-finder.4 In addition.3 . 1 duplicate X-band radar facility. 1 set of VHF radiocommunication equipment (aeronautical band). 1 duplicate X-band radar facility. the coast radio stations at Ortegal.6 3 real-time display consoles for S.3 .2 The . remote station at Mount Xastas-Torinan is provided with the following facilities: 2 sets of VHF radiocommunication equipment (marine band).3 . and 1 VHF radio direction-finder in marine and aeronautical bands. A maintenance team.5 .5 .6 . 1 weather station.7 The . La Coruna. 8. in the event of failure of the facility.5 The relay station at Mount Aro is provided with a microwave relay station for relaying telecontrol.6 . 2 display consoles for monitoring and viewing. coverage by another station will be provided. can be used as an alternative so as to ensure VHF/MF communication with ships in case of need.4 .6 .7 The . 1 set of VHF radiocommunication equipment (aeronautical band). Finisterre and Vigo. and 1 MF/HF marine band direction-finder. 1 X-band radar facility. stands ready to repair to the extent possible any breakdowns which may occur.5 . 1 VHF marine and aeronautical band direction-finder. 1 VHF marine and aeronautical band direction-finder. on call 24 hours a day. 1 set of VHF radiocommunication equipment (aeronautical band). 8.4 7. operated by the Telephone Ä Company.and X-band radar signals and raw video from remote radar stations. 8. direction-finding and communications signals. remote station at Cape Corrubedo is provided with the following facilities: 2 sets of VHF radiocommunication equipment (marine band). 8 Alternative communication if the communication facilities of the shore-based Authority fail 8.2 . and 1 MF/HF marine band direction-finder. 7.1 The system is designed to avoid as far as possible any irretrievable breakdown of equipment which would hinder the functioning of the services normally provided by the Finisterre VTS. 1 weather station. and 1 MF/HF marine band direction-finder. f M d 28 h F b 2000 S W i Shi ' R i (f h) 1 I/4-3 .2 The most important items of equipment and power sources are duplicated and the facilities are provided with emergency generating sets as well as with UPS units. 1 duplicate S-band radar facility.1 .7 7.4 . radar.3 7.1 . 1 weather station. 1 S-band radar facility.2 .

Toriñana Inshore traffic zone Mte Xastas 43° 55´ C. Finisterre (T) 075° 50´ Limit of VT a S are 45´ 10´ 5´ 55´ 50´ 45´ 40´ 35´ 30´ 25´ 20´ 15´ 10´ 5´ I/4-4 97267 10° 9° .Appendix 1 Traffic Separation Scheme ``Off Finisterre'' ± area of mandatory reporting 40´ 35´ 30´ m Li S VT of it ea ar 13 20´ 25´ 0° ( T) 15´ Limit of VTS area Cabo Villano 10´ 5´ C.

.2 Content The report from a ship to the VTS should contain only information which is essential to achieve the objectives of the system: . Note: On receipt of a position message. to communicate that section of the GIBREP ENTRY report which provides information on cargo (line P) by non-verbal means prior to entering the system.4 any category of vessel less than 50 m in length overall which is using the appropriate traffic lane separation zone in order to engage in fishing. 2 Geographical coverage of the system and the number and edition of the reference chart used for the delineation of the system in or or or 2.1 or when leaving the ports or anchorages in the area. Authority to whom reports should be sent. 3 Format and content of reports. for reasons of commercial confidentiality.1 all ships of 50 m or more in length overall. and .1 The reporting system will cover the area (appendix 1) between longitudes 005858' W and 005815' W.2 The reference chart which includes all of the area of coverage for the system is Spanish Hydrographic Office 105. 3. When the Tangier VTS is in operation in Morocco. .4 of resolution MSC. if applicable.43(64). 3.1 Information considered essential: A Name of the ship. carrying hazardous and/or potentially polluting cargo. A double report should be amended. 2. cargo or equipment of the ship or any other circumstances affecting normal navigation. in accordance with the terms which will be established in the future. This area includes the traffic separation scheme ``In the Strait of Gibraltar'' and its designated inshore traffic zone. I/5-1 M d 28 h F b 2000 S W i Shi ' R i (f h) 1 f . damage and/or deficiencies affecting the structure. IMO identification number.648(16). as defined paragraph 1. . and Q or R Breakdown.3 ships engaged in towing or pushing another vessel where the combined length of the ship and tow pushed vessel exceeds 50 m. short title ``GIBREP''. class and quantity.1 Format The information requested from ships shall be provided in the standard reporting format given in paragraph 2 of the appendix to the annex to IMO resolution A. 3. in accordance with the provisions of the SOLAS and MARPOL Conventions. ships sailing in the area of coverage shall notify TANGIER TRAFFIC. The information on heading and speed will facilitate the VTS operator's task of identifying a ship within a group.2 all ships. . shall be made to the ship reporting centre located at Tarifa. times and geographical positions for submitting reports. P Hazardous cargo. G and I Last and next port of call.2 Information considered necessary: E and F Course and speed of the ship.``IN THE STRAIT OF GIBRALTAR'' TRAFFIC SEPARATION SCHEME AREA 1 Categories of ships required to participate in the system Ships of the following general categories are required to participate in the reporting system: . C or D Position.5 any category of ships less than 50 m in length overall which is using the appropriate traffic lane separation zone in an emergency in order to avoid immediate danger. call sign. regardless of length. available services The ship report. operators of the VTS will establish the relation between the ship's position and the information supplied by the facilities available to them. A ship may elect.3 Geographical position for submitting reports Ships entering the area of coverage shall report to the Tarifa Traffic VTS when crossing the limits mentioned in paragraph 2.

. The CZCS Tarifa is a Co-ordination Centre under the authority of the Spanish Government Search and Rescue and Maritime Safety Division. and prevention and control of pollution of the marine environment. 4 Information to be provided to participating ships and procedures to be followed In addition to the general information stated above. The channels defined are channels 16 and 10.5 Services offered Tarifa VTS broadcasts regular information regarding warnings to mariners and traffic.4 Authority The shore-based Authority is Tarifa VTS. TARIFA TRAFFIC could provide a particular vessel with information regarding her position. I/5-2 .3 . vessel traffic control and assistance.1 The International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea (COLREG).3 Information of commercial confidentiality may be transmitted by non-verbal means.1 kHz. 8298. is entrusted. h) 1 M d 28 h F b 2000 S W i Shi ' R i (f f _____ * Trials of the SMCPs will commence after 6 June 1997. with providing services relating to maritime search and rescue. 2 sets of VHF radiocommunication equipment with digital selective calling (DSC). The Division.4 . 3. 1 set of radiocommunication equipment in MF/HF bands with DSC. administered by the Ministry of Development. 2 sets of radiocommunication equipment with radiotelex in MF/HF bands. navigational and weather conditions in the area. 2 display consoles for monitoring and viewing. amongst other responsibilities.and X-band radar signals and raw video from remote radar stations.1 . in Spanish and in English. 8297.5 kHz . Shore-based facilities to support operation of the system The . the hectometric waveband may also be used for the interchange of information between the ship and the VTS. 1972.7 Tarifa VTS (TARIFA TRAFFIC) is provided with the following facilities: Telephone. 5 Radiocommunication equipment required for the system. if appropriate. and 1 VHF radio direction-finder in marine and aeronautical bands. .6 . facsimile and telex communications. The ship should request this additional information. 3 real-time display consoles for S. 12 520 kHz. 16 688. with an interchange of data between ships and the ship reporting centre. Details are as follows: Fax: + 34 56 68 06 06 (available by auto-link) Telex: 78262 Radiotelex selective call: 0994 Answerback: SATAR Frequencies scanned: 4179 kHz. frequencies on which reports should be transmitted and information to be reported The radiocommunication equipment required for the system is that defined in the GMDSS for sea areas A1 and A2. course and speed or the identification of the traffic in her vicinity. with channel 67 as a supplementary option. are applicable throughout the area of coverage of the proposed system.1 The TSS ``In the Strait of Gibraltar'' has been approved by IMO and therefore rule 10 of COLREG applies. using the IMO Standard Marine Communication Phrases* (SMCPs) where necessary or Spanish. .2 7 7.5 Communications associated with reporting in accordance with the requirements of this system will be free of charge.5 .4 The language used for reports in the system will be English. 6. which forms part of the Area Search and Rescue and Pollution Control Co-ordination Centre (CZCS Tarifa).2 . .2 In special circumstances. 6269 kHz. 6 Rules and regulations in force in the area of the system 6.3.1 The system will be based on VHF voice communications and will be interactive.6 kHz.

3 8 Alternative communication if the communication facilities of the shore-based Authority fail 8. remote station at Cape Trafalgar is provided with the following facilities: 1 VHF radio direction-finder. 8. I/5-3 M d 28 h F b 2000 S W i Shi ' R i (f h) 1 f .1 . 1 digital selective calling). 8. operated by the Telephone Company. 8. on call 24 hours a day. and 1 S-band radar facility. A maintenance team. so as to ensure VHF/MF communication with ships in case of need. 1 aeronautical band.1 The system is designed to avoid.3 . 5 sets of VHF transmitters and receivers (3 marine band.4 The .3 .2 The most important items of equipment and power sources are duplicated and the facilities are provided with emergency generating sets as well as with UPS units. marine and aeronautical bands. and 1 S-band radar facility.3 The location of radar antennae ensures that.1 . marine and aeronautical bands.2 .4 In addition.4 remote station at Ceuta is provided with the following facilities: 1 VHF radio direction-finder.2 . coverage by another station will be provided. 1 aeronautical band. 1 digital selective calling). in the event of failure of the facility. 1 X-band radar facility. 5 sets of VHF transmitters and receivers (3 marine band. 7. 1 X-band radar facility. the coast radio stations at Tarifa and Algeciras.7. stands ready to repair to the extent possible any breakdowns which may occur. any irretrievable breakdown of equipment which would hinder the functioning of the services normally provided by the Tarifa VTS. can be used as an alternative. as far as possible.2 The .

Appendix 1 Geographical coverage of system ± lines of notification Limit of VTS area Tarifa Limit of VTS area Ceuta I/5-4 97266 r lga rafa C.T S PAI N 10´ 5´ 36° 55´ 50´ MOROCCO Tangier 6° 55´ 50´ 45´ 40´ 35´ 30´ 25´ 20´ 15´ .

1 Format and contents of the report. Use of an automatic identification system will be implemented in accordance with IMO decisions. both permanently watched by the station. damage. Following receiving a report. 4 Information to be provided to ships and procedures to be followed Detected and identified ships are monitored by radar.18 E (west end of the south limit of the two-way route). information relating to pollution incidents or loss of cargo. 3 3.75 N. if appropriate: ± cargo (in case of transport of petroleum products. her call sign or IMO identification number (letter A) ± time and position (letters C or D) ± course and speed (letters E and F) ± draught (letter O) ± additional information.1 The radiocommunication equipment required for the system is VHF. Ships shall transmit their reports on entering the precautionary areas defined in the documents about routeing measures in the Strait of Bonifacio. which in no way releases their master from their responsibility for safe navigation. or when passing the following lines: ± Eastbound: . 009806'. if necessary. A line linking Pointe de Rondinara in Corsica to point 41822'. 7024 of the SHOM (Hydrographic and Oceanographic Service of the French Navy) (International chart No. common call sign: BONIFACIO TRAFFIC. after 1 February 1999. France).55 N. Possession of this information enables the operators to broadcast safety messages to other ship traffic and to ensure more effective tracking of the trajectories of ships concerned. and ± information on weather conditions. times and geographical positions for submitting report.30 E (east end of the south limit of the two-way route) 3. Bonifacio Traffic will provide: ± information on navigational conditions (status of aids to navigation.IN THE STRAIT OF BONIFACIO* 1 2 Categories of ships required to participate in the system Geographical coverage of the system and reference chart Ships of 300 gross tonnage and over are required to participate in the system. Italy) and Pertusato Naval Signal Station (Corsica. Authority to whom reports should be sent. dangerous or polluting substances) (letter P) ± defects or damage (letter Q) In addition. A line linking the beacon of Capo Testa in Sardinia to point 41816'. ships must report information on any defect. The reporting system covers a circular area with a radius of 20 nautical miles centred on Bonifacio. in accordance with provisions of SOLAS and MARPOL Conventions. 009823'. ± Westbound . A line linking the beacon of Cap de Feno in Corsica to point 41819'. 009822'.58 N. The reference chart is the French chart No. _____ * Date of implementation: 0000 hours UTC on 1 December 1998. back-up VHF channel 16.18 N.38 E (east end of the north limit of the two-way route) . 5 Radiocommunications required for the system. deficiency or limitations as well as. An IMO circular will provide for another back-up VHF channel. 009806'. if necessary. presence of other ships and their position at the moment of contact). frequencies on which reports should be transmitted and information to be reported 5. I/6-1 . Ship reports shall be transmitted by voice on VHF channel 10. 3350).51 E (west end of the north limit of the two-way route) . available services Content The report required shall include: ± information considered essential: ± the name of the ship.2 Recipient of report f M d 28 h F b 2000 S W i Shi ' R i (f h) 1 The shore-based authorities are La Maddalena Coast Guard Station (Sardinia. A line linking Punta Galera in Sardinia to point 41821'.

The language used shall be English or languages indicated in nautical publications. Duty officers are qualified Senior Chief Petty-officers. the report must specify the place and time of entry into French waters. 7 7. remains in force as far as it recommends each flag State to prohibit or at least strongly discourage the transit by certain categories of ships (operative paragraph 1).1 The International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea (COLREGs) are applicable throughout the area of coverage of the system. the cargo and the status of manoeuvrability and navigational capacities.766(18) about navigation in the Strait of Bonifacio.2 mandatory watch on VHF channel 16 while travelling through territorial waters.5.1 for ships intending to enter French territorial waters.3 The regulation (arrete) of the Prefet maritime for Mediterranean region n8 23/83 dated 6 May 1983 rules à  navigation in the approaches of the French coast in order to prevent accidental marine pollution. 8 Alternative communication if the communication facilities of the shore-based Authority fail Each station will assure relief of the other one in case of failure.1 above in the appendix ``Summary''. 6 Rules and regulations in force in the area of the system 6. They will remain in force.3 mandatory reporting of any damage occurring at less than 50 miles from the French coast.4 French regulations (arrete) of the Prefet maritime n8 1/83 dated 15 February 1983 and 7/93 dated 5 March à  1993 and Italian decree of the Minister of Merchant Marine dated 26 February 1993 prohibit transit through the Strait of Bonifacio for French and Italian ships carrying oil products or hazardous goods. 5. covering the whole area.  6. for ships carrying hazardous or polluting cargoes. adopted on 4 November 1993. Detail of fax call number to be published in nautical information documents. This instrument has the following provisions: .2 The IMO resolution A. 6. and .3 Personnel operating the system: stations will be manned by Naval personnel on a 24-hour basis. the port arrived from and the destination. mandatory ship reporting with a six-hour advance warning.2 Shore-based facilities to support operation of the system Stations will be equipped with radar installations assisted by computer. Its ship reporting provisions are replaced by those of the present instrument. I/6-2 M d 28 h F b 2000 S W i Shi ' R i (f h) 1 f .3 Information of commercial confidentiality may be transmitted by non-verbal means. 7.2 The report required from a ship is mentioned in paragraph 3. Stations will be equipped with a duplicated VHF equipment. In addition to information concerning the identity of the ship.  6. .1 7.

51 E (west end of the north limit of the two-way route) . 4 Communications facilities The reports are to be transmitted on VHF channel 10 (or on channel 16 if not possible).38 E (east end of the north limit of the two-way route) . 009823'. A line linking Pointe de Rondinara in Corsica to geographical position 41822'. A line linking Punta Galera in Sardinia to geographical position 41821'. common call sign: BONIFACIO TRAFFIC. (In accordance with resolution A.75 N. Ships shall transmit their reports on entering the precautionary areas defined in the documents about routeing measures in the Strait of Bonifacio. additional information may be requested. A line linking the beacon of Capo Testa in Sardinia to geographical position 41816'. 009822'. f I/6-3 M d 28 h F b 2000 S W i Shi ' R i (f h) 1 . 3350).2 General Vessels concerned Area on entering which vessels shall report All ships of 300 gross tonnage and over. or when passing the following lines: ± Eastbound: . A line linking the beacon of Cap de Feno in Corsica to geographical position 41819'.18 E (west end of the south limit of the two-way route). pollution or goods lost overboard.851(20) ± General principles for ship reporting systems and ship reporting requirements. hazardous or polluting substances) Defect or damage (if relevant) Polluting/dangerous goods lost overboard (if relevant) In the event of defect.Appendix SUMMARY (Ship reporting system) 1 1. harmful substances and/or marine pollutants) Name of system: BONIFREP Data to be transmitted: Heading A C or D E and F O P Q P 3 Information Name + call sign + IMO number Time and position Course and speed Draught Cargo (in case of transport of oil products.58 N. 7024 (International chart No. including guidelines for reporting incidents involving dangerous goods. 009806'.18 N. ± Westbound: .1 1.30 E (east end of the south limit of the two-way route) 1.55 N.3 2 Reference chart Reporting format French (SHOM) chart No. Authority to whom the report shall be sent Pertusato Naval Signal Station (France) ± La Maddalena Coast Guard Station (Italy). 009806'.

40' 35' 30' Pointe de Rondinara 25' Cap de Feno Bonifacio Pertusato 20' Capo Testa La Maddalena Punta Galera 15' boundary of reporting system 10' 5' 41˚ 45' 50' 55' 9˚ 5' 10' 15' 20' 25' 30' 35' 40' 99013 IN THE STRAIT OF BONIFACIO I/6-4 .

3 Format. .3 vessels engaged in towing or pushing with a combined gross tonnage of 300 and above. in order to avoid immediate danger. and any category of vessels less than 50 metres in length or less than 300 gross tonnage which are fitted with . I/7-1 M d 28 h F b 2000 S W i Shi ' R 3. damage and/or deficiencies affecting the structure. . when Pulau Jangkat Beacon (00857'.1 The operational area of STRAITREP covers the Straits of Malacca and Singapore between longitudes 100840' E and 104823' E as shown in the chartlets attached as appendix 1 and appendix 2. Royal Malaysian Navy or the equivalent charts published by the competent hydrographic authority. 103842'.50 N.3 i (f h) 1 f .851(20). 3.5 all passenger vessels that are fitted with VHF. .1 Ships entering the operational area shall report when crossing the limits mentioned in paragraph 2. .6 VHF and.89 N.1 Categories of ships required to participate in the system Ships of the following categories are required to participate in the ship reporting system: . P Hazardous cargo. A Name of ship.1 Information considered essential. operators of the VTS will establish the relation between the ship's position and the information supplied by the facilities available to them. in an emergency. Authority to whom reports should be sent. each has an assigned VHF channel as shown in appendix 3.35 E) or when leaving port or anchorages in the area or before joining the traffic lane of the TSS. call sign. .99 E). cargo or equipment of the ship or any other circumstances affecting normal navigation in accordance with the provisions of the SOLAS and MARPOL Conventions.2 Content The report required from a ship contains only information which is essential to meet the objectives of the STRAITREP: . The information requested from ships is derived from the Standard Reporting Format given in paragraph 2 of the appendix to IMO resolution A.2 Information considered necessary when requested by VTS authority. use the appropriate traffic lane or separation zone. content of report.2 vessels of 50 metres or more in length.IN THE STRAITS OF MALACCA AND SINGAPORE* 1 1.87 N. class (if applicable). Note: On receipt of a position message.1 or when crossing a line joining Tanjung Piai (01815'.58 N.20 N. and available services The ship report (short title STRAITREP) shall be made to the VTS authorities as follows: 3.2 Ships entering the operational area shall also report when approaching from the south via Selat Riau.47 E). 104805'.2 The reference charts which include the operational area of STRAITREP are the Malaysian Chart Series MAL 515. 104811'.75 E) and Pulau Karimun Kecil (01809'. times and geographical positions for submitting reports. The area is divided into nine sectors. The information on heading and speed will facilitate the VTS operator's task of identifying a ship within a group. regardless of length or gross tonnage.72 E) is abeam.4 of resolution MSC.1 vessels of 300 gross tonnage and above.43(64). C or D Position.1 Format The ship report shall be drafted in accordance with the format shown in appendix 4. 103824'. 521 and 523 of the Hydrographer. abeam of Karang Galang Light (01809'. 2. and when approaching from the East Johor Strait. as defined in paragraph 1. E and F Course and speed of ship. abeam of Eastern Buoy (01817'.4 vessels of any tonnage carrying hazardous cargo. and Q or R Breakdown. _____ * Date of implementation: 0000 hours UTC on 1 December 1998. Geographical position for submitting reports . . or via Selat Durian. or with a combined length of 50 metres or more. 103830'. The area includes the routeing system in the Straits of Malacca and Singapore. IMO identification number (if available). Geographical coverage of the system and the number and edition of the reference chart used for the delineation of the system 2 2.

23 E) (ii) Sultan Shoal Light (01814'. 4. 3. 5. 104808'.. This broadcast will be preceded by an announcement on the appropriate VHF channel assigned to the sector. 4 Information to be provided to ships and procedures to be followed 4. 103851'. on reaching sector 7. Rules and regulations in force in the area of the system 6.3 A ship approaching from any direction other than those specified above shall. Information of general interest to ships will be broadcast on VHF channel 16 and any other channel as may be specified by the appropriate VTS authority. 1972 are applicable throughout the operational area of STRAITREP.38 N.54 N. 103821'. 5 Radiocommunications required for the system. frequencies on which reports should be transmitted and information to be reported The radiocommunications required for the STRAITREP is as follows: 5. and the report shall be transmitted on that channel or any other available channel as assigned by the appropriate VTS authorities. 6. 103856'.48 N.81 N.06 E) (vi) Tanjung Stapa Light (01820'. 103844'.3 6 Information of commercial confidentiality may be transmitted by non-verbal means.1 STRAITREP will be based on VHF voice radiocommunication and will be interactive.and S-band radar signals from remote radar stations.37 E) (v) Bedok Light (01818'. .57 N. f M d 28 h F b 2000 S W i Shi ' R i (f h) 1 I/7-2 .2 The language used for communication shall be English. 104824'.1 Klang VTS ± telephone.4 Authority The VTS authorities for the STRAITREP are as follows: (i) sector 1 to sector 5 Klang VTS.and S-band radar signals from remote radar stations. and (iii) sector 7 to sector 9 Singapore VTS.24 E) (vii) Horsburgh Light (01819'. sector 8 or sector 9 as appropriate. report by giving the vessel's position in terms of bearing and distance from one of the following reference points: (i) Pulau Iyu Kecil Light (01811'. 103838'.2 Depending on the sector which a ship is in.98 E) (iii) Raffles Light (01809'. The call to the appropriate VTS authority shall be made on the VHF channel assigned to the particular sector in which the ship is located as indicated in appendix 3.30 N.1 STRAITREP also provides information to ships about specific and critical situations which could cause conflicting traffic movements and other information concerning safety of navigation. facsimile and telex communication ± 4 sets of VHF radiocommunication equipment ± 4 real-time display consoles for X.44 E) As an alternative. ± 4 sets of VHF radio direction-finders in marine bands. . (ii) sector 6 Johor VTS. 7 Shore-based facilities to support operation of the system The facilities of the STRAITREP are as follows: . facsimile and telex communication ± 11 sets of VHF radiocommunication equipment ± 4 real-time display consoles for X-band radar signals from remote radar stations.2 Johor VTS ± telephone.3 Singapore VTS ± telephone. the position can also be given in latitude and longitude.2 The Rules for Vessels Navigating through the Straits of Malacca and Singapore as approved by IMO are applicable throughout the area. 5. every ship shall also maintain a VHF radiotelephone listening watch on the appropriate VHF channel.60 N. facsimile and telex communication ± 6 sets of VHF radiocommunication equipment ± 6 real-time display consoles for X. using the IMO Standard Marine Communication Phrases where necessary.1 The International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea.55 E) (iv) Sakijang Light Bn (01813'.

6 Tanjung Piai ± 1 X-band radar facility ± 1 S-band radar facility ± VHF transmitters and receivers .4.8 Alternative communication if the communication facilities of the shore-based Authority fail 8.4. i (f h) 1 f . I/7-3 M d 28 h F b 2000 S W i 8.11 Bedok Lighthouse ± 2 sets of VHF/DF radio direction-finder .12 Bedok ± 1 X-band radar facility . Shi ' R .4.9 Raffles Lighthouse ± 1 X-band radar facility . as far as possible.1 STRAITREP is designed to avoid.4 Remote stations: . A maintenance team is available 24 hours a day to attend to any breakdown.4. John's Island ± 1 X-band radar facility .4.10 St.4.13 Horsburgh Lighthouse ± VHF transmitters and receivers ± 1 X-band radar facility .14 Jurong Control ± 2 sets of VHF/DF radio direction-finder. the adjacent station can provide the necessary coverage.3 Cape Rachado ± 1 X-band radar facility ± 1 S-band radar facility ± VHF transmitters and receivers . 8.4.4.1 Pulau Angsa ± 1 X-band radar facility ± 1 S-band radar facility ± VHF transmitters and receivers .8 Sultan Shoal Lighthouse ± VHF transmitters and receivers ± 1 X-band radar facility . any irretrievable breakdown of equipment which would hinder the functioning of the services normally provided by the respective VTS authorities.4.4 Pulau Undan ± 1 X-band radar facility ± 1 S-band radar facility ± VHF transmitters and receivers .2 The most important items of equipment and power sources are duplicated and the facilities are provided with emergency generating sets as well as with Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS) units.4.5 Bukit Segenting ± 1 X-band radar facility ± 1 S-band radar facility ± VHF transmitters and receivers .7 Bukit Pengerang ± 1 X-band radar facility ± 1 S-band radar facility ± VHF transmitters and receivers .4.2 Bukit Jugra ± 1 X-band radar facility ± 1 S-band radar facility ± VHF transmitters and receivers .3 STRAITREP is also designed in such a manner that if one station fails.4.4.4.

STRAITREP reporting points Pulau Angsa Sector 1 Angsa 100˚40' E Port Klang 3˚ Bukit Jugra Appendix 1 STRAITREP operational area (sectors 1 to 9) Sector 2 Jugra 30' Cape Rachado Sector 3 Cape Rachado DW DW Pulau Undan 2˚ Sector 4 M ala cca Undan Bukit Segenting (see chartlet for sectors 7 to 9) Str ait iai Sector 6 Piai Ta n jun Sector 5 Segenting gP 30' Sector 8 Sector 9 Sector 7 1˚ 30' 99014 30' 101˚ 30' 102˚ 30' 103˚ 30' 104˚ 30' 105˚ .

104˚23' E STRAITREP reporting points 40' Appendix 2 STRAITREP operational area (sectors 7 to 9) 30' Co ng ntr o Sector 6 l Singapore Jur o 5 Bedok ij ak ! 5Changi Eastern 5Tanjung Stapa 5 Horsburgh 20' 5 Pulau Iyu Kecil 5 Tanjung Piai Sultan Shoal 5 an g ! Sector 9 5S 5R a s ffle ! ! Pulau Karimun Kecil Sector 8 5 Karang Galang 10' Pulau Bintan Pulau Batam Selat Riau DW Pulau Karimun Besar Sector 7 1˚ 5 Pulau Jangkat Se la tD ur ia n 20' 30' 40' 50' 104˚ 10' 20' 30' 40' 99015 .

or True bearing (first 3 digits) and distance given in nautical miles from a clearly identifiable point (state landmark) A 3-digit group A 3-digit group Indicate ``Yes'' or ``No'' to whether vessel is carrying hazardous cargo. chemicals. deficiencies or other limitations Brief detail of type of pollution (oil. etc. If ``Yes''.Appendix 3 Assigned VHF channels for sectors in the mandatory reporting system In the Straits of Malacca and Singapore (STRAITREP) Sector Sector 1 Sector 2 Sector 3 Sector 4 Sector 5 Sector 6 Sector 7 Sector 8 Sector 9 VHF Channels VHF channel 66 VHF channel 88 VHF channel 84 VHF channel 61 VHF channel 88 VHF channel 88 VHF channel 73 VHF channel 14 VHF channel 10 VTS Authorities Klang VTS Klang VTS Klang VTS Klang VTS Klang VTS Johor VTS Singapore VTS Singapore VTS Singapore VTS Appendix 4 Drafting of radio reports to the mandatory ship reporting system In the Straits of Malacca and Singapore (STRAITREP) Designator A C Ship Position Function Information required Name and call sign A 4-digit group giving latitude in degrees and minutes suffixed with N (north) or S (south) and a 5-digit group giving longitude in degrees and minutes suffixed with E (east) or W (west). position expressed as in (C) or (D) f M d 28 h F b 2000 S W i Shi ' R i (f h) 1 D Position E F P True course Speed in knots and tenths of knot Hazardous cargo on board Q R Defects/damage/deficiencies/other limitations Description of pollution or dangerous goods lost overboard I/7-6 . Brief detail of defects. the class (if applicable).) or dangerous goods lost overboard.

Authority to whom reports should be sent and available services The ship report. . paragraph 1.1 The ship reporting centre will provide information to shipping on potentially conflicting traffic movements resulting from the analysis of incoming reports.2 Charts AUS 376 (Torres/Endeavour Straits) and AUS 367. as shown in the chartlet at appendix 1. using field ``Q'' within the prescribed PR message format. Because of the extensive size of the REEFREP area it is not intended to routinely broadcast traffic information across the whole area but to advise individual ships as necessary. The ship reporting centre will maintain details of MSI for the REEFREP area for the information of participating ships.2 Certain sections of the route in the Torres Strait and the far northern sector of the inner route of the GBR present a particular navigational hazard in situations where large ships might be passing or overtaking. Examples include concentrations of fishing vessels. any relevant traffic information held by the centre will be passed to them.2 All ships.2. 2. etc. Examples of the format and content of all required reports are shown at appendix 2. to communicate that section of the REEFREP ENTRY report which provides information on cargo (line P) by non-verbal means prior to entering the system. will continue to be issued in the appropriate broadcasts from MRCC AUSTRALIA. and the waters of the Great Barrier Reef (GBR) between the Australian coast and the outer edge of the GBR. especially deeper draught ships. from the latitude of Cape York (10840' S) southwards to 228 S. will be made to the ship reporting centre located at Hay Point in Queensland.1 Entry and Exit Reports: Ships will be required to provide a full REEFREP position report (PR) when passing the first designated reporting point on entering the REEFREP operational area.2 Intermediate position reports: Ships transiting the operational area will also be required to provide brief position reports at defined reporting points. for reasons of commercial confidentiality. position. carrying in bulk hazardous and/or potentially polluting cargo. A ship may elect. short title ``REEFREP''.1 and . AUS 370 to 375 (Queensland coast) provide largescale coverage of the operational area. using normal PR formats. Position reports will be limited to the identity of the ship. including other advice received from ships or local maritime authorities. The intermediate reporting positions will be generally about 100±120 nautical miles apart. This can be achieved by including cargo information in the AUSREP sailing plan (SP) message. any variation to the last reported speed and any further information the master considers to be of value to the system.43(64). in accordance with the definitions at resolution MSC.4. . 2 Geographical coverage of the system and the number and edition of the reference chart used for the delineation of the system 2.1 The reporting system will cover the general area. including the Endeavour Strait. covering the Torres Strait between longitude 141845' E and 143845' E. . or entering a port within the area. unless an AUSREP SP message has been sent well in advance.3 Traffic information. unusual weather conditions. which impacts on navigational safety will be passed to ships in relevant areas. also international series small-scale charts AUS 4602 and 4603. 4 Information to be provided to participating ships and procedures to be followed f 4. When finally departing the REEFREP area. times and geographical positions for submitting reports. in the form of navigational warnings (AUSCOAST warnings).1 All ships of 50 m or greater in overall length. Shi ' R 4. . in which case an abbreviated REEFREP PR will suffice.4 Normal maritime safety information (MSI). regardless of length. . . When the ship reporting centre considers that ships are approaching such sections.IN THE TORRES STRAIT REGION AND THE INNER ROUTE OF THE GREAT BARRIER REEF 1 Categories of ships required to participate in the system Ships of the following general categories are required to participate in the reporting system: .3 Ships engaged in towing or pushing where either the towing or pushing vessel or the towed or pushed vessel is a vessel prescribed within the categories in subparagraphs . I/8-1 M d 28 h F b 2000 S W i 4. centred on 108 S latitude. i (f h) 1 4. the REEFREP system will associate the required PR and the designated reporting point and automatically recognize this report as an exit message. failure or breakdown affecting the safety of the ship will be required to provide a defect report. 3 Format and content of report.3 Defect reports: Ships within the reporting area suffering damage.

frequencies on which reports should be transmitted and information to be reported 5. using the IMO Standard Marine Communication Phrases where necessary.4 The language used for reports in the system will be English. 5.1 Seaphone through the commercial VHF coastal network. 5. and . 578). 5. with an interchange of data between ships and the ship reporting centre.2 SATCOM.1 The system will be based on VHF voice communications and will be interactive.1 The existing port information centre at Hay Point. 7.5 Communication required for the system. on the central Queensland coast.2 VHF channels 5.5 Communications associated with reporting in accordance with the requirements of this system will be free of charge. 7. which will be equipped to provide a high standard of service to meet the system requirements and will be operated by trained and experienced personnel. with service levels being constantly monitored. has been designated as the ship reporting centre for the system. 5.2 The system will include radar coverage at certain focal areas in the Torres Strait and inner route of the GBR.5 The hardware and software for the system is being developed. 7 Shore-based facilities to support operation of the system 7. Qualifications and Training of Vessel Traffic Service (VTS) Operators (MSC/Circ. 7. Radar will be installed in the Torres Strait. 18 and 19 in the international maritime mobile band have been allocated for the reporting points in the system.3 Information of commercial confidentiality may be transmitted by non-verbal means.4 7. f . 8 Alternative communication if the communication facilities of the shore-based Authority fail I/8-2 M d 28 h F b 2000 S W i Shi ' R i (f h) 1 In the event of failure of the system VHF communications. close to the main shipping route through the inner route of the GBR and Hydrographers Passage.3 HF radio through Townsville Radio (VIT). a report from a participating ship can be passed by any of the following methods: . Other regulations apply domestic law in accordance with the terms of international conventions.3 All VHF communications and radar data will be relayed into the ship reporting centre.7 The REEFREP ship reporting system information will be interfaced with the AUSREP system operated by MRCC AUSTRALIA. in the vicinity of Cairns and in the Whitsunday Islands area. Operator standards will be in accordance with Guidelines on the Recruitment. The DGPS service will provide additional high-accuracy navigational assistance throughout the reporting area. . The system will be operated to quality standards. 6 Rules and regulations in force in the area of the system Compulsory pilotage rules apply in the northern section of the inner route (Cape York to Cairns) and in Hydrographers Passage. 7.6 Measures are in hand to install DGPS Broadcast Stations operating in the MF band (285±325 kHz) on Horn Island (Torres Strait) by the end of 1995 and further stations in the inner route of the GBR during 1996/98. 7.

Appendix 1 Ship reporting system Torres Strait and Great Barrier Reef areas Great North East Channel Thursday Is. Papua New Guinea 10° Torres Strait Prince of Wales Channel 12° I er nn te Rou CORAL SEA Cape Flattery 14° COOKTOWN 16° Grafton CAIRNS Mourilyan Lucinda Grafton Passage Palm Passage Palm 18° TOWNSVILLE Abbot Point Hydrographers Passage 20° QUEENSLAND MACKAY Hay Point High Peak 22° Capricorn Channel Limit of VTS area Recognised entrances / exits Great Barrier Reef Marine Park boundary Route Ship Reporting Points BRISBANE 140° 142° 144° 146° 148° 150° 152° 154° 156° 97263 GLADSTONE Curtis Channel 24° 26° I/8-3 .

routeing through the area and departing the area through Grafton Passage bound for Pusan via Jomard Entrance. G. U. O. if outside reporting area) Date/Time of entry in system and point of entry (not required if advised at C) Pilot embarked or ordered Intended route Draught Cargo Defects/deficiencies (only if relevant) Ship type and length (metres) Remarks U. L. if outside reporting area) Date/Time of entry in system and point of entry (not required if advised at C) Pilot embarked or ordered Intended route Draught Cargo Defects/deficiencies (only if relevant) Ship type and length (metres) Remarks J. MERIDIAN/VIPM 020200Z TOWNSVILLE VARIOUS 15 Ð Example 2: Ship entering the reporting area northbound for Port Moresby. J. G. P. G. using inner route and Great North East Channel. E. Format A. P. O. L. J. I/8-4 . P. Q. Format A. NO* INNER ROUTE TO GRAFTON 10 COAL NIL BULK CARRIER/250 JOINING INNER ROUTE AT BREWER 020400Z Example REEFREP ENTRY A.Appendix 2 Examples of reports for the REEFREP reporting system REEFREP ENTRY (Full report) Example 1: Ship sailing from a port within the reporting area. C. Ship's name and call sign Date/Time of position (UTC) Name of Reporting Point Course (normally ``VARIOUS'') Speed Departed (port. O. Q. X. B. C. E. PILOT EMBARKED INNER ROUTE AND GREAT NORTH EAST CHANNEL 10 GENERAL CARGO Example REEFREP ENTRY A. E. B. P. E. B. Q. F. X. H. X. F. RESEARCH/65 CONDUCTING RESEARCH ON PASSAGE J. F. U. U. L. MERIDIAN/VIPM 020200Z HIGH PEAK VARIOUS 15 BRISBANE h) 1 M d 28 h F b 2000 S W i Shi ' R i (f f _____ * Pilot not mandatory for this area of the GBR. H. O. B. L. C. X. C. Ship's name and call sign Date/Time of position (UTC) Name of Reporting Point Course (normally ``VARIOUS'') Speed Departed (port. G. F.

Format A. ENTERPRISE/VIPM 030205Z 1400S 14400E BOTH RADARS UNSERVICEABLE IN HEAVY RAIN SQUALLS. X. X. C. Format A. X. X. Ship's name and call sign Date/Time of position Latitude/Longitude or Reporting Point Nature of defect/damage Remarks Example REEFREP DEFECT A. Ship's name and call sign Name of Reporting Point Speed (if change from last report) Remarks REEFREP DEFECT Example 1: Ship reporting defect within reporting area. F. X. K. B. C. ENTERPRISE/VIPM 030215Z 1401S 14001E 8. F. C. K. Format Example REEFREP EXIT A. I. ENTERPRISE/VIPM C. Q.5 LARGE CONCENTRATION OF FISHING VESSELS VICINITY HANNAH ISLAND Example 2: Ship defect repaired. CHARLOTTE SPEED NOW 11. C. K. I.5 DEFECT REPAIRED. ALSO MINOR STEERING DEFECT PROCEEDING TO ANCHOR 180 HANNAH ISLAND LT 1. F. K. I. Format A. B. B. Ship's name and call sign Point of exit Destination (via route) Remarks (must include ``FINAL REPORT'') Example REEFREP EXIT A. Ship's name and call sign Point of exit Destination (via route) Remarks (must include ``FINAL REPORT'') A.0 TO EFFECT REPAIRS Example REEFREP REPORT A. X. X. X. MITSUBISHI/XUGT COOK SINGAPORE VIA LOMBOK FINAL REPORT f Example REEFREP DEFECT A.REEFREP REPORT Example: Ship reporting at an intermediate reporting point within reporting area. X. Format A. Q. B. C. F. Ship's name and call sign Date/Time of position Latitude/Longitude or Reporting Point Speed Remarks REEFREP EXIT Example 1: Ship westbound reporting exit from reporting area at Torres Strait. I. REJOINING ROUTE Example 2: Ship reporting exit from reporting area at Palm Passage. IRON MAIDEN/RXTP PALM PUSAN VIA ROSSEL ISLAND FINAL REPORT I/8-5 M d 28 h F b 2000 S W i Shi ' R i (f h) 1 . X.

NORTHERN STAR/CPIM CAIRNS Example 4: Ship eastbound reporting exit from reporting area at Great North East Channel. Format A. K. K. FINAL REPORT Example REEFREP EXIT A. Ship's name and call sign Point of exit Destination (via route) Remarks (must include ``FINAL REPORT'') Example REEFREP EXIT A. K. ARRIVED CAIRNS. K.Example 3: Ship reporting arrival at a port within reporting area (after transiting from another port also within the area). X. I. I. ENTERPRISE/VIPM DARNLEY PORT MORESBY DIRECT FINAL REPORT I/8-6 M d 28 h F b 2000 S W i Shi ' R i (f h) 1 f . I. Ship's name and call sign Point of exit Destination (via route) if outside REEFREP area Remarks (must include ``FINAL REPORT'') X. X. Format A. X.

NAVTEX. if applicable. Communication systems between ship and shore are described in paragraphs 7 and 8. 3. respectively.00 N.2 To obtain seasonal right whale advisories which are broadcast periodically. NOAA Chart 11009. a voyage in which a ship is in the area to visit one or multiple ports or traverse the area before leaving for a port outside the reporting area). and the Great South Channel east and south-east of Massachusetts (appendix 1). 70837'. Massachusetts at 42839'.00 W. then south to 41800'. route. Commercially sensitive information received in conjunction with the reporting system shall be kept confidential. 4 Information to be provided to participating ships and procedures to be followed f Ships will be provided with the following information: 4.2 South-eastern United States Geographical boundaries of the south-east area include coastal waters within about 25 nautical miles along a 90 nautical miles stretch of the Atlantic seaboard in Florida and Georgia (appendix 2).60 W with the southern and northern boundary at latitudes 30800'. Co-ordinates of the area are as follows: from a point on Cape Ann.00 N and 31827'. speed. NOAA Chart 13009.00 N. then north-east to 42805'. content of report. position when entering the system. ships will not be required to report in again after leaving a port in the area or when exiting the system. These advisories are based on surveys that are flown seasonally and in daylight and good weather conditions only.4 Authority The Authority for both areas of the system is the United States Coast Guard.00 W.00 W. and that ship strikes pose a serious threat to whales and may cause damage to ships.00 N. except sovereign immune vessels which are exempt from reporting by SOLAS regulation V/8-1(c). The area extends from the shoreline east to longitude 80851'. then north-east to 42845'.1 Format.00 N. 68831'. 3 3. mariners would also be advised to monitor Coast Guard Broadcast Notice to Mariners. 69817'. 68831'. and. The sighting information may be useful only for brief periods as the whales move and surveys detect only a small percentage of the whales present. Massachusetts Bay. 70813'.00 W. 4. 3.00 W.00 W. below.00 N. NOAA Weather Radio. the Cape Cod Canal Vessel Traffic Control and the Bay of Fundy Vessel Traffic Control. call sign or IMO identification number. available services Format The format for reporting is as set forth in paragraph 2 of the appendix to resolution A. then west to 41800'. 2 2.00 N. 2.REPORTING SYSTEMS FOR PROTECTION OF ENDANGERED NORTH ATLANTIC RIGHT WHALES IN SEA AREAS OFF THE NORTH-EASTERN AND SOUTH-EASTERN COASTS OF THE UNITED STATES* 1 Categories of ships required to participate in the systems All ships of 300 gross tonnage or greater are required to participate in the reporting systems.1 Mariners shall be informed that they are entering an area of critical importance for the protection of the highly endangered right whale. 70810'. and destination. and then along the Massachusetts shoreline of Cape Cod Bay and Massachusetts Bay back to the point on Cape Ann at 42839'. Authority to whom the reports should be sent.00 W. course.851(20). _____ * Date of implementation: 0000 hours UTC on 1 July 1999. times and geographical positions for submitting reports. then west to 42804'. in the north-eastern ship reporting system area only. that such whales are present. An example of a transmission between ship and shore is at appendix 3.3 Geographical position for submitting reports Participating ships are required to report to a shore-based authority only when entering the reporting area during a single voyage (that is. I/9-1 M d 28 h F b 2000 S W i Shi ' R i (f h) 1 .00 N. 3.00 W. then south-east to 42810'. 70802'. 70837'.00 N.2 Content Ships are required to provide the following information: the name of the ship.1 Geographical coverage of the systems and the number and edition of the reference charts used for the delineation of the systems North-eastern United States Geographical boundaries of the north-east area include the water of Cape Cod Bay.00 N.

This regulation. mariners will also be requested to report any whale sightings and dead. the Convention on the International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora. Response and Co-operation. the International Convention on the Prevention of Pollution from Ships. and other treaties.3 Mariners would be advised to consult with NAVTEX. For ships using Inmarsat-C.1 The reporting system in the north-eastern United States will operate independently of the system in the southeastern United States. where appropriate. 5. the International Convention for the Regulation of Whaling. Radiocommunications required for the systems. either through direct-printing telegraphy (Inmarsat-A/-B. adopting domestic legislation and promulgating regulations through domestic law. Notice to Mariners.1 The shore-based Authority for those ships reporting via Inmarsat-C is the United States Coast Guard. the nautical charts for information on the boundaries of the right whale critical habitat and the national marine sanctuary.7) or National Imagery and Mapping Agency (NIMA) Publication 117. MF.4. rules have been promulgated. and the National Marine Fisheries Service. 2000 S W i 7. or entangled marine mammals to the nearest local Coast Guard station. is implemented and enforced consistent with international law.2. videos. relevant State agencies.2. the Marine Mammal Protection Act. 5. and other educational materials are available from shipping agents. using the IMO Standard Marine Communication Phrases where necessary.4 In the message back to the ship. 5. and precautionary measures that mariners may take to reduce the risk of hitting right whales. the United States Coast Pilot. Mariners will further be advised that information placards. 7 Shore-based facilities to support operation of the systems I/9-2 M d 28 h F b 7. The United States Coast Guard maintains communication stations along the United States east coast. frequencies on which reports should be transmitted and the information to be reported 5. the Coast Guard. the Whaling Convention Act. applicable regulations. including.1 and a message will be automatically transmitted back to the ship.5 Commercially sensitive information will be kept confidential. HF or VHF).3 Ships not equipped with Inmarsat-C are required to report in standard format to the shore-based Authority described in paragraph 7. injured.6 The United States will review the ship reporting systems no later than five years after their implementation date. to examine advances made in ship communication technologies and to ensure effective operation of the systems. Ships reporting through such direct-printing telegraphy systems will receive a message from the shore-based Authority described in paragraph 7. a regulation has been promulgated which prohibits most approaches within 500 yards (460 metres) of a northern right whale.5 5 Where available. the Safety of Life at Sea Convention. Relevant domestic legislation includes the Ports and Waterways Safety Act. The system in the north-eastern United States will operate year-round. Relevant laws in force include domestic legislation and regulations to implement the International Convention on Collision Regulations. also via Inmarsat-C.2 The small percentage of ships that do not have Inmarsat-C capabilities will be required to contact the nearest Coast Guard communication station through appropriate communication channels. 4. handling. The email addresses to be used for this reporting will be provided well in advance of implementation of the systems through Notices to Mariners. MF or VHF) or by telephony (Inmarsat-A/-B. and retrieval. Inmarsat-C SafetyNET (satellite text broadcasts). 6 Rules and regulations in force in the areas of the systems The United States has taken appropriate action to implement international conventions to which it is a party. and the system in the south-eastern United States will operate from 15 November through 15 April.2 The systems require ships to report in standard format. Information about these stations can be found in the GMDSS Master Plan (GMDSS/Circ. pilots. Standard phrases in a prescribed format will be used in all direct-printing telegraphy and radiotelephony communications. HF. For example. port authorities. preferably through Inmarsat-C. the Endangered Species Act. the International Convention on Oil Pollution Preparedness. specific and timely information on whale locations will be provided to ships. including those relating specifically to right whales or governing ship operations. as well as other domestic law.4 The language used for reports in the systems is English. 5. In some cases. Shi ' R i (f h) 1 f . the Marine Protection Resources and Sanctuaries Act. 4. Information received from the ships will be sent electronically to a central location for data storage. and a variety of other acts. 5. the message will be sent to the shore-based Authority described in paragraph 7.

and an individual equipment or site failure is unlikely to affect the ability of a mariner to contact a Coast Guard facility to make a required report. have built-in redundancies and overlapping coverage areas. by design. The Coast-Guard-operated MF. and VHF voice communications systems. HF. I/9-3 M d 28 h F b 2000 S W i Shi ' R i (f h) 1 f . and it is expected that this will minimize the system's downtime. NAVTEX Broadcast Notice to Mariners can be used to notify mariners of the temporary failure of the system and can provide mariners with basic information necessary to avoid right whales. Downtime is likely to be minimal and is not expected to result in increased ship strikes and whale mortality.8 Alternative communications if the communication facilities of the shore-based Authority fail Short-term failure of the reporting systems due to communications problems will not result in a loss of life. the standard protocol now used for such systems will be used to re-route incoming and outgoing communications through an alternate address. though some delay may occur. For those ships reporting through Inmarsat-C or direct-printing radiotelegraphy. and will have minimal impact on the safety of vessels.

Appendix 1 43˚ Cape Ann Lim it o 30' f VT Sa ell St g wa en rea s Ma sa ch us sB ett Cape Cod Ba nk Cape Cod Canal ay 42˚ Cape Cod Bay Buzzards Bay 30' Nantucket Sound 41˚ 99027 71˚ 30' 70˚ 30' 69˚ 30' I/9-4 .

30' 5 20' 10' 30˚ 5 99028 30' 20' 10' 81˚ 50' 40' 30' I/9-5 .S im o ns I. 10' 5 31˚ Cum berla Georgia nd I.Appendix 2 rines I. Cathe pe lo I 30' . 40' St. 50' 5 40' Florida Amelia I. Sa Limit of VTS area 20' Brunswick St .

or. and other educational material are available from shipping agents. Whales can damage ships' sonar dome. NAVTEX. Right whale critical habitat and the Stellwagen Bank National Marine Sanctuary are also marked on charts. Right whale information placards. such surveys locate only a small percentage of the whales. port authorities. Recommend monitoring Coast Guard Broadcast Notice to Mariners. or dead whales to the Coast Guard on VHF channel 16. and the National Marine Fisheries Service. These advisories and reports are based on surveys which are conducted seasonally. Inmarsat-C SafetyNET. and Notices to Mariners for information on precautionary measures that may be taken to reduce the risk of hitting right whales and for applicable regulations. Recommend consulting NAVTEX. in the north-east only. the United States Coast Pilot. relevant State agencies. propeller. videos. I/9-6 M d 28 h F b 2000 S W i Shi ' R i (f h) 1 f . whale entanglements. and they cannot be conducted at night or in inclement weather. NOAA Weather Radio. however. and shaft. Right whales are critically endangered and at risk from ship strikes. the United States Coast Guard. Cape Cod Canal Vessel Traffic Control and Bay of Fundy Vessel Traffic Control for latest advisories and sightings reports. Urge exercising prudent seamanship to avoid approaching right whales. the information from them remains valid only for a short period of time because the whales move.Appendix 3 Example of message from the ship A B D E H I L Ship name Call sign or IMO Identification Number Course Speed Entry Destination Route Example of message back to the ship 00016April1999 From: Shore-based Authority To: M/V Ship You are entering an area where North Atlantic right whales exist. Mariners are requested to report right whale sightings.

Mariners should consult the appropriate nautical publications and charts for up-to-date details on aids to navigation and other relevant information. WARNING: The geographical positions given in the descriptions of the routeing systems are only correct for charts using the same geodetic datum as the reference charts indicated under each scheme. Charts published by other hydrographic offices may use a different geodetic datum.Section II MANDATORY ROUTEING SYSTEMS 1: Mandatory route for tankers from North Hinder to the German Bight and vice versa CAUTION: The chartlets are for illustrative purposes only and must not be used for navigation. II . as may new editions of the reference charts published after the adoption of the routeing system.

INDEX MANDATORY ROUTEING SYSTEMS 80˚ 1: Mandatory route for tankers from North Hinder to the German Bight and vice versa Arctic Circle 60˚ 1 40˚ Tropic of Cancer 20˚ Equator 0˚ Tropic of Capricorn 20˚ 40˚ 60˚ Antarctic Circle 180˚ 160˚ 140˚ 120˚ 100˚ 80˚ 60˚W 40˚ 20˚ 0˚ 20˚ 40˚ 60˚E 80˚ 100˚ 120˚ 140˚ 160˚ 180˚ .

84 N.) Description of the mandatory route Deep-water route from North Hinder to traffic separation scheme ``Off Brown Ridge'' (a) The deep-water route is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (1) 52855'.48 E (d) A traffic lane for southbound traffic is established between the separation zone in paragraph (b) above and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (12) 53803'.47 E (2) 52809'.78 N.85 E (9) 52854'. Shi ' R i (f h) 1 II/1-1 . 003822'. 003814'. 003822'.14 N. 003818'.71 E (1) 52855'.11 N.38 E (10) 53802'.20 N.00 E Traffic separation scheme ``Off Brown Ridge'' (b) A separation zone is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (7) 53803'. 003814'. 003817'.34 E (c) A traffic lane for northbound traffic is established between the separation zone in paragraph (b) above and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (6) 52854'.00 E (11) 53802'.25 E f M d 28 h F b 2000 S W i _____ 1 This mandatory route for tankers coincides with the eastern route of the routeing system ``Off Friesland'' and the traffic separation scheme ``German Bight western approach'' and replaces the ``Recommended route for tankers from North Hinder to the German Bight and vice versa'' as from 0000 hours UTC on 3 June 1997.33 E (3) 51854'.75 N.25 E (4) 52801'. British Admiralty. 002835'.92 N.88 N. 003826'. 003821'.75 N.23 N. 003823'. 002833'. 002843'.60 E (6) 52854'. 002842'.87 E (8) 52855'.58 N.00 E (5) 52809'.81 N.17 N.17 N. Netherlands Hydrographic Office and German Hydrographic Office INT number 1042 1043 1045 1046 1412 1413 1414 1415 1416 1419 1420 1509 1510 NL number ± 1014 1037 1035 1353 2593 2322 3371 1507 1505 ± ± 1972 1970* German number 1001 1002 50 53 87 84 244 ± 95 96 202 193 ± ± 2910* 103 196 BA number 2182B 2182A ± ± ± 2593 2322 3371 1507 1505 1503 1504 ± ± ± 1187 1406 1408 * Passage Planning Charts Note: These charts are based on European Datum. 003818'.MANDATORY ROUTE FOR TANKERS FROM NORTH HINDER TO THE GERMAN BIGHT AND VICE VERSA1 (Reference charts: International.

004859'. carrying noxious liquid substances in bulk as assessed as categories C or D of Annex II to the International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships.72 E (22) 53857'.11 N. 006803'.20 N.91 N.71 E (14) 53819'. 003847'.85 E (21) 53859'.57 N. 003842'.000 tons gross tonnage and upwards.000 tons gross tonnage and upwards. (35) and (39) coincide with the positions (15). 003826'. as modified by the Protocol of 1978 relating thereto (MARPOL 73/78).17 E (g) A traffic lane for north-eastbound traffic is established between the separation zone in paragraph (f) above and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (14) 53819'. 003828'.66 E (34) 54808'. 004846'.94 N.00 E (17) 53820'.34 E (38) 54806'.78 N.89 N. 004810'. as modified by the Protocol of 1978 relating thereto (MARPOL 73/78).94 N.20 N.21 N.12 N. (11).02 E (13) 53822'.99 N. 003836'. carrying oils as defined under Annex I to the International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships.00 E (35) 54808'.00 N. The area is bounded by a line connecting (26) 53857'.34 E (31) north of the traffic separation scheme ``West the following geographical positions: 54805'. 004823'. 004808'.96 E Traffic separation scheme ``East Friesland'' (j) A separation zone is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (32) 54802'. 003838'. 005800'.48 E (13) 53822'.00 E (36) 54805'.90 N.40 E (12) 53803'.12 E (19) 53846'. 006800'. 004820'. (c) Ships of 10.32 E (40) 54807'.22 N.000 tons gross tonnage and upwards. 1973.60 N.00 E (18) 53831'. 004820'. 005820'. 1973.37 E (25) 54800'. 1973.39 N. 003828'. (b) ships of 5.00 N. 005819'. 006801'.89 N.32 E Note: The positions (38). 005819'. carrying liquefied gases in bulk.00 N.62 N. 006801'.32 E (23) 53830'.00 E (l) A traffic lane for south-westbound traffic is established between the separation zone in paragraph (j) above and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (39) 54810'.73 N. II/1-2 M d 28 h F b These ships shall avoid the sea area between the mandatory route and the adjacent Frisian Islands' coast.59 N. 003844'. 2000 S W i The following classes of ships are obliged to use the route: (a) tankers of 10.00 E (30) (28) 54801'.69 N.32 E 54802'. 004815'. 004810'.90 N.69 N.47 E (20) 53856'.Deep-water route from the traffic separation scheme ``Off Brown Ridge'' to the traffic separation scheme ``West Friesland'' (e) The deep-water route is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (11) 53802'. 004859'. and (d) ships of 10. 003831'.00 N.20 E (29) 54805'. as modified by the Protocol of 1978 relating thereto (MARPOL 73/78). 003818'.14 N.20 N.74 E Traffic separation scheme ``West Friesland'' (f) A separation zone is bounded by a line connecting the following geographical positions: (15) 53842'.66 E (k) A traffic lane for north-eastbound traffic is established between the separation zone in paragraph (j) above and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (28) 54801'.14 N.92 E 54801'. (34).40 E (27) 53843'. 005800'. 004846'.33 E (33) 54804'. 003839'.12 N.67 N. 003839'. carrying noxious liquid substances in bulk as assessed as categories A or B of Annex II to the International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships.000 tons gross tonnage and upwards. 004836'.81 E Precautionary area ``Friesland Junction'' (i) A precautionary area is established directly to the Friesland''. Shi ' R i (f h) 1 Application and use of the route f .59 N. 005800'.00 E (16) 53822'. 004836'.90 E (37) 54804'.74 E (24) 53845'. (8) and (14) of the traffic separation scheme ``German Bight western approach''.10 N.00 E (h) A traffic lane for south-westbound traffic is established between the separation zone in paragraph (f) above and a line connecting the following geographical positions: (26) 53857'.02 E (29) (25) 54800'.97 N. 004859'.17 N. except when joining or leaving the route at the nearest point of the route to the port of departure or destination which permits a safe passage to or from that port.

United Kingdom or Continental North Sea ports south of 538 N and offshore and shore-based oil-loading facilities in the North Sea area. as far as practicable. should follow the recommended direction of traffic flow in the precautionary area (indicated by dashed open-outlined arrows in the charts) and shall. Numerous offshore structures situated within the limits of the separation zones and/or situated in the proximity of the route are equipped with X.2 TSS ``Off Botney Ground''. Germany or the Netherlands north of latitude 538 N and vice versa. II/1-3 M d 28 h F b 2000 S W i Shi ' R i (f h) 1 f . Shipmasters should enter this deviation in the ship's log. as appropriate. when joining or leaving the route: (a) shall do so at the nearest point of the route to the port of departure or destination which permits a safe passage to or from that port. This alternative western route is formed by the following routeing measures: .1 Deep-water route from North Hinder to Indefatigable Bank via DR1 lightbuoy.The classes of ships referred to above shall use the mandatory route or part of it: (i) when sailing from North Hinder to the Baltic or to North Sea ports of Norway. instead. cannot safely navigate the mandatory route ± in particular the southern part of it (the routeing measures a. However. Pilotage Ships required to use the ``Mandatory route for tankers from North Hinder to the German Bight and vice versa'' are referred to resolution A. because of their draught. (iii) when sailing between United Kingdom or Continental North Sea ports south of 538 N and Scandinavian or Baltic ports. (ii) when sailing between North Sea ports of the Netherlands and/or Germany.3 Deep-water route from the TSS ``Off Botney Ground'' to the precautionary area ``Friesland Junction''. keep to the starboard side of the deep-water routes forming part of the mandatory route. These ships shall use the appropriate traffic lanes of the traffic separation schemes forming part of the route. adopted on 19 November 1981. including Orkney and Shetland Islands. and . safety zones of 500 m (0. and (b) should be aware that oil and gas production facilities and mobile offshore drilling units may be encountered in the proximity of the route.486(XII). Denmark. English Channel and Skagerrak''. this provision does not apply to ships sailing between ports on the east coast of the United Kingdom. except in cases of adjacent port areas. Sweden.27 nautical mile) radius are established around all offshore structures. . Joining or leaving the route The classes of ships referred to above. Notes: 1 2 It is recommended that an efficient electronic position-fixing device appropriate for the area should be carried on board. and (iv) when sailing between North Hinder. ``Recommendation on the use of adequately qualified deep-sea pilots in the North Sea. Ships which. b and c above) ± are exempted from the requirement to use the southern part of the mandatory route and are strongly recommended to use the western route of the routeing system ``Off Friesland'' or part of it.and S-band racons.

. (11) (1) . . . (35) . . (24) (18) (13) . . (3) North Hinder Junction precautionary area 97274 30' 3˚ 30' 4˚ 30' 5˚ 30' 6˚ MANDATORY ROUTE FOR TANKERS FROM NORTH HINDER TO THE GERMAN BIGHT AND VICE VERSA II/1-4 . (28) (25) . .. (17) (14) . (30) (39) (29) (37) .East Friesland Friesland Junction precautionary area (31) . . . (34) . . (23) 30' (16) . . . . (36) . . (21) (38) West Friesland (27) . (6) 53˚ DW Den Helder DW 30' IJmuiden (2) . (5) . (4) 5 North Hinder Europoort 52˚ .. (8)(9). (20) . 54˚ (26) . . (32) . (15) (19) . Off Brown Ridge (7) (12) . (40) (33) . (10) . (22) . .

3..e. provided that duplication of routes of similar convenience between the same entry and exit points shall not be necessary. 1 OBJECTIVES 1. so far as ships are concerned. designation and substitution of archipelagic sea lanes. within such routes. 2 DEFINITIONS AND CLARIFICATIONS 2.8 An archipelagic sea lanes proposal shall provide sea lanes suitable for the continuous and expeditious passage of foreign ships and aircraft in the normal mode through or over the archipelagic waters and the adjacent territorial sea.7 Subject to paragraph 3.2 Partial archipelagic sea lanes proposal An archipelagic sea lanes proposal by an archipelagic State which does not meet the requirement to include all normal passage routes and navigational channels as required by UNCLOS. the Government shall explain in its proposal the suitability of such sea lanes for such continuous and expeditious passage. 3. International air traffic services (ATS) routes above the archipelagic waters to be used by civil aircraft engaged in international air navigation are subject to the approval process of ICAO. IMO may adopt only such archipelagic sea lanes as may be agreed by the Government of the proposing archipelagic State. 3 PROCEDURES AND RESPONSIBILITIES Procedures and functions of IMO 3. IMO shall retain continuing jurisdiction (i. all normal navigational channels. 3. In proposing archipelagic sea lanes. the IMO shall ensure that the proposal is disseminated to all Governments and ICAO so as to provide them with sufficient opportunity to comment on the proposal. competence) over the process of adopting archipelagic sea lanes until such time that sea lanes including all normal passage routes have been adopted as required by UNCLOS. 3. 3. IMO will ensure that the proposed sea lane is in accordance with the relevant provisions of UNCLOS and determine if the proposal is a partial archipelagic sea lanes proposal. consideration and adoption of proposals for the adoption.1 The terms used in connection with matters relating to archipelagic sea lanes have the same meaning as in UNCLOS.4 Following a proposal to the IMO by an archipelagic State.9. the Government of an archipelagic State which wishes to designate archipelagic sea lanes shall propose to IMO for adoption archipelagic sea lanes including all normal passage routes and navigational channels as required by UNCLOS. 1 . These terms include: .2 When adopting a proposed archipelagic sea lane. Use of an air route above a designated archipelagic sea lane by civil aircraft engaged in international air navigation shall be in accordance with any relevant requirements of the International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO).3 .1 The purpose of these provisions is to provide guidance for the preparation.1 All normal passage routes and navigational channels as required by UNCLOS All normal passage routes used as routes for international navigation or overflight through or over archipelagic waters and.1 Archipelagic State .4 Archipelagic sea lane Archipelagic sea lanes passage Innocent passage Responsibilities of Governments and recommended practices 3.1 IMO is recognized as the competent international organization responsible for adopting archipelagic sea lanes in accordance with the relevant provisions of UNCLOS and these provisions.5 In order for IMO to ensure that sea lanes proposed for adoption include all normal passage routes.2 . 3.3 Upon receipt of a proposal for designating archipelagic sea lanes and before consideration for adoption. The legal regime for archipelagic sea lanes is contained in Part IV of the United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea (UNCLOS). . other States may request that the archipelagic State propose additional sea lanes to include all other normal passage routes used as routes for international navigation or overflight through or over archipelagic waters as required by UNCLOS.General provisions for the adoption. UNCLOS provides that designation and substitution of an archipelagic sea lane by an archipelagic State automatically includes a corresponding air route above the sea lane.6 The Government of an archipelagic State considering proposing archipelagic sea lanes should consult at an early stage with other user Governments and the IMO. 2.2 The following terms are also used in connection with matters relating to archipelagic sea lanes: . designation and substitution of archipelagic sea lanes INTRODUCTION This Part takes into account the unique character of archipelagic sea lanes as a routeing system.

edition and.6 If an archipelagic State does not designate sea lanes and air routes thereabove.5 Except for internal waters within archipelagic waters. expeditious and unobstructed transit between one part of the high seas or an exclusive economic zone and another part of the high seas or an exclusive economic zone.7 Where a partial archipelagic sea lanes proposal has come into effect. 6. the archipelagic State is ultimately required to propose for adoption archipelagic sea lanes including all normal passage routes and navigational channels as required by UNCLOS. hampered or obstructed. 5 SUBSTITUTION OF ARCHIPELAGIC SEA LANES AND TRAFFIC SEPARATION SCHEMES 5.3 The provisions of this Part and Part A of the IMO publication on Ships' Routeing concerning the 7.1 Ships and aircraft shall exercise in accordance with UNCLOS their right of archipelagic sea lanes passage in the normal mode solely for the purpose of continuous. the archipelagic State shall periodically inform IMO on its plans for conducting further surveys and studies that will result in the submission to IMO of proposals for adoption of all normal passage routes and navigational channels as required by UNCLOS. shall be made available at least six months before the sea lanes come into effect. so far as practicable the outer limits of the sea lanes where 2 . the right of archipelagic sea lanes passage may be exercised through the routes normally used for international navigation.13 Archipelagic sea lanes adopted by IMO shall come into effect on a date promulgated by the Government of the archipelagic State that proposed the sea lanes.9 The archipelagic State shall give appropriate publicity to any danger to navigation within archipelagic sea lanes of which it has knowledge. together with copies of the reference charts listed in the proposed sea lanes showing the axis of the proposed sea lanes.1 Archipelagic sea lane proposals shall conform with the relevant provisions of UNCLOS. so far as practicable. when circumstances require. substitute other sea lanes or traffic separation schemes for any sea lanes or traffic separation schemes previously designated or prescribed by it. where possible. the right of archipelagic sea lanes passage may continue to be exercised through all normal passage routes used as routes for international navigation or overflight in other parts of archipelagic waters in accordance with UNCLOS. Axis lines do not indicate any routes or recommended tracks as defined in Part A of the IMO Publication on Ships' Routeing. 6. ships of all States enjoy the right of innocent passage through archipelagic waters and the territorial sea. shall be considered. provided that such ships and aircraft shall not navigate closer to the coasts than 10 per cent of the distance between the nearest points on islands bordering the sea lane.9 The proposal shall also indicate if it is a partial archipelagic sea lane proposal. including Article 39. 6.3 Routeing measures in the vicinity shall also be considered. as well as the configuration of the archipelagic State. 3. That date shall not be earlier than six months after the date of designation of the sea lanes by that Government. which shall be communicated to IMO by that Government. 5. 6. the geodetic datum of the reference charts used for the proposed sea lanes.3) the outer limits of the sea lane should. 7.8 The right of archipelagic sea lanes passage shall not be suspended.1 An archipelagic State may. traffic is not separated. Governments shall also include the number.3. and the requirements of this Part.4 Within archipelagic sea lanes.11 It is recommended that in areas where the 10 per cent rule applies (see paragraph 6.2 The provisions of this Part concerning the designation of archipelagic sea lanes apply equally to the substitution of archipelagic sea lanes.1 Axis lines of archipelagic sea lanes are shown on charts for the purpose of defining the sea lanes. 4.12 If IMO adopts a partial archipelagic sea lane proposal as a partial system of archipelagic sea lanes. 3.10 In proposing archipelagic sea lanes. 6.2 Ships and aircraft in archipelagic sea lanes passage shall respect applicable sea lanes and the relevant provisions of UNCLOS. 4 CRITERIA FOR CONSIDERATION AND ADOPTION OF PROPOSALS prescription of traffic separation schemes apply equally to the substitution of traffic separation schemes. including Article 53. hydrographic surveys and nautical charts of the area. 6. In such a case. or revised charts to depict the sea lanes. 4. 7 REPRESENTATION ON CHARTS 4. after giving due publicity thereto. 3. 6 USE OF ARCHIPELAGIC SEA LANES AND NORMAL PASSAGE ROUTES 6. 6. along with the general location of these lanes and time frame for this effort. except in traffic separation schemes. including a listing of geographical co-ordinates with geodetic datum that define axis turning points. Ships shall also respect any traffic separation schemes in archipelagic sea lanes established in accordance with Part A of the IMO publication on Ships' Routeing. 5. Either Notices to amend charts. 3.3 Ships and aircraft in archipelagic sea lanes passage shall not deviate more than 25 nautical miles to either side of the axis lines defining archipelagic sea lanes. be clearly indicated on the charts. 6.2 The axis of designated archipelagic sea lanes.2 The adequacy of aids to navigation.

usually magenta. Symbol Note 1 Limit of area in which 10% rule applies Outer limit Not usually shown on charts but referred to in notes The following note provides an example of the type of information which should be included in the note: 3 .6 Unless otherwise specified. Description 1 2 3 Notes: 1 The axis line will be shown through other routeing measures without interruption. Turning points are indicated by joined pecked lines. Cautionary and explanatory notes on charts ASL ± ARCHIPELAGIC SEA LANES Archipelagic Sea Lanes as defined in UNCLOS have been designated in the area of this chart. The full legend Archipelagic Sea Lane (see Note) may. in accordance with Part A of the IMO Publication on Ships' Routeing. however. 7. any route or recommended track.5 Not usually shown on charts but referred to in notes Shown on charts in conjunction with symbol for axis line (paragraph 7. while in archipelagic sea lanes passage. within the areas indicated thus: . The legend ASL (see Note) should normally be used. They are included to illustrate the information likely to be found on charts and as an aid to those designing archipelagic sea lanes proposed for adoption by IMO. usually magenta.3 The legends.5. It should be noted that the axis line of the ASL does not indicate the deepest water. be used in cases where it is considered appropriate. Symbol for outer limits of archipelagic sea lanes Axis line of archipelagic sea lane Legend Turning point of axis line of archipelagic sea lane ASL (see Note) Symbol Note 1 2 3 2 3 7. and referred to in complementary hydrographic publications.4.3).11 and 6.4 Use of legends on charts and in notes Use of legend the International Hydrographic Organization as guidance for the representation of details of archipelagic sea lanes and associated measures on nautical charts. to which due publicity shall be given. Vessels exercising archipelagic sea lanes passage shall not deviate more than 25 miles from the charted axis line and shall not navigate. Where a traffic separation scheme exists in a narrow channel in such a sea lane. since it may not necessarily form the centre line of a routeing measure established in Archipelagic Sea Lanes. symbols and notes appearing in paragraphs 7.the 10 per cent rule applies (see paragraphs 3. and any prescribed traffic separation schemes shall be clearly shown on all appropriate scale charts.6 and 7. symbols are printed on charts in colour.7 are recommended by 7.7 The solid half-circle indicator is on the side of the limit of the area which lies within 10% of the distance between the nearest points on islands bordering the sea lane. symbols are printed on charts in colour. rules for the use of traffic separation schemes apply. Description 1 2 Note: 1 7.5) Symbol for axis line of archipelagic sea lanes Unless otherwise specified. Legend Archipelagic Sea Lane ASL 7. 7. 7.

WARNING: The geographical positions given in the descriptions of the reporting systems are only correct for charts using the same geodetic datum as the reference charts indicated under each scheme. as may new editions of the reference charts published after the adoption of the reporting system. Mariners should consult the appropriate nautical publications and charts for up-to-date details on aids to navigation and other relevant information. I .Section I ADOPTED ARCHIPELAGIC SEA LANES 1: Partial system of archipelagic sea lanes in Indonesian archipelagic waters CAUTION: The chartlets are for illustrative purposes only and must not be used for navigation. Charts published by other hydrographic offices may use a different geodetic datum.

No.000. corrected to 17 February 1997. No.000. No. 109819'. No.25 06818'. corrected to 9 December 1995. Indonesian Navy Hydrographic Office.00 S.000. corrected to 11 March 1995. 149.00 E Notes for the use of this archipelagic sea lane: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Geographical positions (I-1) to (I-3) define the axis line from the South China Sea through the Natuna Sea. Indonesian Navy Hydrographic Office. chart 1:4.00 E (I-12) (I-5) 02801'. Bessel 1841. S. S. S. Geographical positions (I-3) to (I-5) define the axis line from the Natuna Sea to the Karimata Strait. chart number and scale. March 1993.000. Bessel 1841. S. 147.33 105833'.00 E (I-10) (I-3) 00850'. I/1-1 . December 1995. chart 1:200.000. Geographical positions (I-7) to (I-12) define the axis line through the western Java Sea. 66.000. 78. March 1995. chart 1:1. chart 1:1.50 106812'.25 104841'. 38. chart 1:200. corrected to 15 February 1992.00 N. Bessel 1841.33 S. No. corrected to 11 May 1996.000.00 E (I-15) (I-8) 03846'. Indonesian Navy Hydrographic Office.50 06824'. (I-1) to (I-15).00 N.00 05857'.000.75 S. 71.33 E (I-11) (I-4) 00812'. 108810'.50 05817'. corrected to 15 September 1997. Indonesian Navy Hydrographic Office. chart 1:500. February 1989.00 E (I-9) (I-2) 03800'. Bessel 1841. S. corrected to 15 September 1997. 106854'.000. points reflected on chart): Indonesian Navy Hydrographic Office. S.00 N.75 S. chart 1:500. WGS 72) No. Bessel 1841.50 105846'.PARTIAL SYSTEM OF ARCHIPELAGIC SEA LANES IN INDONESIAN ARCHIPELAGIC WATERS* Part I SEA LANE I: SOUTH CHINA SEA±NATUNA SEA±KARIMATA STRAIT± WESTERN JAVA SEA±SUNDA STRAIT±INDIAN (HINDIA) OCEAN (Reference charts (publisher. Geographical positions (I-12) to (I-15) define the axis line through the Sunda Strait into the Indian (Hindia) Ocean.50 106827'. Geographical positions (I-5) to (I-7) define the axis line through the Karimata Strait. (I-5) to (I-8). Indonesian Navy Hydrographic Office. March 1995. corrected to 6 March 1993.42 E E E E E E E _____ * Date of implementation: 6 months after the date of designation of the sea lanes by the Government of Indonesia (see SN/Circ. (I-1) to (I-7).000. (I-1) and (I-2).50 106844'. No. (I-9) to (I-12).000. Indonesian Navy Hydrographic Office. 108851'.25 05817'. Indonesian Navy Hydrographic Office. June 1990. 109833'.25 05815'. 2. 05812'.00 S. 148.50 E (I-14) (I-7) 02845'. Bessel 1841. 109833'. 106816'. September 1981.00 S. WGS 84. (I-3) and (I-4).00 E (I-13) (I-6) 02816'. September 1988. No.200). 108827'. chart 1:500. (I-8) to (I-15). 106844'. (I-13) to (I-15). Description of the archipelagic sea lane The axis line connects the following geographical positions: (I-1) 03835'.

chart 1:1.000. WGS 72) No. 128.000. Indonesian Navy Hydrographic Office. (II-6) to (II-8). (c) Geographical positions (II-6) to (II-7) define the axis line through the Bali Sea. No. 291. Bessel 1841.00 E (I-3) 00850'. chart No. Part II SEA LANE II: CELEBES (SULAWESI) SEA±MAKASAR STRAIT±LOMBOK STRAIT± INDIAN (HINDIA) OCEAN (Reference charts (publisher. June 1996.33 E Notes for the use of this archipelagic sea lane: (a) Geographical positions (IA-1) to (I-3) define the axis line from the Singapore Strait through the Natuna Sea.000 (II-4) to (II-8). (IA-1) to (I-3). corrected to 11 May 1996. Bessel 1841. corrected to 2 July 1988. Indonesian Navy Hydrographic Office.00 07800'. Indonesian Navy Hydrographic Office. 117805'.SEA LANE IA: SPUR FROM NORTH OF PULAU MERAPAS TO POINT (I-3) (Reference charts (publisher. July 1988. chart 1:1.000. Bessel 1841. corrected to 17 February 1997. corrected to 17 February 1997. October 1997. S. chart number and scale. (II-1) to (II-4).00 08800'.00 116800'.00 E (II-8) 05828'.00 E (II-7) (II-4) 03845'.000. (II-4) and (II-5). (d) Geographical positions (II-7) to (II-8) define the axis line through Lombok Strait to the Indian (Hindia) Ocean I/1-2 . (IA-1) to (I-3).000. S. corrected to 20 October 1997. WGS 72. No. corrected to 4 August 1997. September 1988. 113. chart 1:500.00 N. No.000. 121.000.00 N. 106816'. 104855'. chart 1:500. 119833'. 111.000.00 E (II-6) (II-3) 02840'. Description of the archipelagic sea lane The axis line connects the following geographical positions: (II-1) 00857'. chart number and scale.00 N. October 1993. 38. points reflected on chart): Indonesian Navy Hydrographic Office. August 1997.00 S. February 1989.00 116850'. Bessel 1841) Description of the archipelagic sea lane The axis line connects the following geographical positions: (IA-1) 01852'.000.000. 1:1. No.000. Bessel 1841. points reflected on chart): Indonesian Navy Hydrographic Office. chart No. (II-1) to (II-8). chart 1:4. September 1988. Indonesian Navy Hydrographic Office.00 S. S. 2.00 09801'.00 N. (b) Geographical positions (II-3) to (II-6) define the axis line between Borneo (Kalimantan) and Celebes (Sulawesi) islands. (II-7) and (II-8).00 115836'.00 E (II-5) (II-2) 00800'. Indonesian Navy Hydrographic Office. corrected to 7 July 1997. WGS 72. Indonesian Navy Hydrographic Office.000. corrected to 20 July 1996. 119800'.00 E E E E Notes for the use of this archipelagic sea lane: (a) Geographical positions (II-1) to (II-2) define the axis line from the Celebes (Sulawesi) Sea to the Makasar Strait. No. 1:4. 118817'. 2.00 S. 118817'. chart 1: 200.

(IIIA-6) 02837'.00 N. Bessel 1841) Description of the archipelagic sea lane The axis line connects the following (IIIA-1) 03827'.50 E (IIIE-2) (IIIE-1) 04812'. corrected to 13 October 1997. September 1996. Bessel 1841. 1:1.00 E 03820'. Bessel 1841. 3. Indonesian Navy Hydrographic Office. (IIIA-3) 01812'.000. 1:1.50 S. (d) Geographical positions (IIIA-9) to (IIIA-13) define the axis line through the Ombai Strait and Sawu Sea between Sumba and Sawu Islands to the Indian (Hindia) Ocean. July 1993.000. May 1991. corrected to 10 June 1995. (IIIA-1) to (IIIA-11). 404. corrected to 13 November 1993. 1: 500. 366. corrected to 15 June 1996. chart No. December 1985. corrected to 17 February 1997.00 N. 403. Indonesian Navy Hydrographic Office. 142. chart No.00 08825'.00 123834'. chart number and scale. (IIIA-2) to (IIIE-2). (IIIA-1) to (IIIA-3). S.000. corrected to 24 August 1996. Bessel 1841) Description of the archipelagic sea lane The axis line connects the following geographical positions: (IIIA-2) 01840'.50 E (IIIA-8) 126857'. S. (b) Geographical positions (IIIA-5) to (IIIA-7) define the axis line through the Seram Sea. corrected to 14 September 1996. 1: 500.00 121818'.75 E E E E E E Notes for the use of this archipelagic sea lane: (a) Geographical positions (IIIA-1) to (IIIA-5) define the axis line from the Pacific Ocean through the Maluku Sea.000. points reflected on chart): Indonesian Navy Hydrographic Office. Indonesian Navy Hydrographic Office.000. Indonesian Navy Hydrographic Office. chart No. chart number and scale.00 125820'. chart No. I/1-3 .00 10844'. June 1991. 112.000. (c) Geographical positions (IIIA-7) to (IIIA-9) define the axis line through the western Banda Sea to the Ombai Strait. (IIIA-1) to (IIIA-3).00 09803'.000. 1:1. 357.00 N. chart No. Indonesian Navy Hydrographic Office. chart No.Part III SEA LANE IIIA: PACIFIC OCEAN±MALUKU SEA±SERAM SEA±BANDA SEA± OMBAI STRAIT±SAWU SEA±INDIAN (HINDIA) OCEAN (Reference charts (publisher. Bessel 1841.00 S. (IIIA-5) 01853'. corrected to 14 September 1996. chart No. Bessel 1841.00 N.00 S.00 09823'. (IIIA-2) 01840'.00 E (IIIA-13) 125830'. S. January 1990. corrected to 7 July 1997.00 120845'. Bessel 1841. 3. corrected to 17 February 1997.000.20 N. 1:500. 1:1.10 N. Bessel 1841. (IIIA-9) and (IIIA-10). March 1985. (IIIA-10) to (IIIA-13). 1:4. Bessel 1841. 125830'.000. Indonesian Navy Hydrographic Office.00 N. chart No. chart No. chart No. (IIIA-3) to (IIIA-6). 403. Indonesian Navy Hydrographic Office. Indonesian Navy Hydrographic Office. 1:1. Bessel 1841. (IIIA-2) and (IIIE-1). December 1985.00 S.000. March 1985.000. chart No.000. August 1993.000. 1:1.00 E (IIIA-11) 127802'. 363. Indonesian Navy Hydrographic Office. S. SEA LANE IIIE: SPUR FROM POINT (IIIA-2) TO (IIIE-2) (Reference charts (publisher. Bessel 1841. points reflected on chart): Indonesian Navy Hydrographic Office. Bessel 1841. S. (IIIA-4) to (IIIA-8).000. (IIIA-9) to (IIIA-13). (IIIA-4) and (IIIA-5).00 E (IIIA-10) 126820'.00 122855'.00 10812'. (IIIA-4) 00809'.000. (IIIA-7) 02853'.50 E (IIIA-9) 126854'. 357. 1:1.40 E Notes for the use of this archipelagic sea lane: (a) Geographical positions (IIIA-2) to (IIIE-2) define the axis line from the Maluku Sea to the Celebes (Sulawesi) Sea.000. Indonesian Navy Hydrographic Office. 367. September 1996. 125810'. geographical positions: 127840'. corrected to 15 September 1997.000.000.000. (IIIA2) to (IIIE-2).000. 126801'. chart No. 126857'.00 E 04832'.000. 1:4. corrected to 13 October 1997.00 E (IIIA-12) 126830'. October 1993.

06844'. August 1993. BANDA SEA± LETI STRAIT±TIMOR SEA (Reference charts (publisher. corrected to 24 August 1996.000. chart number and scale. Indonesian Navy Hydrographic Office. (IIIC-1) and (IIIC-2). 1:1.000. 366. chart number and scale. 142. 142. BANDA SEA±ARAFURU SEA (Reference charts (publisher.000. Indonesian Navy Hydrographic Office. (IIIB-2).00 S. 122811'. 127833'. 146. chart No.000. Indonesian Navy Hydrographic Office. Bessel 1841. chart No. corrected to 13 October 1997. Bessel 1841.00 S. points reflected on chart): Indonesian Navy Hydrographic Office. June 1991. corrected to 1 April 1995. March 1985.000. chart No. March 1985. 1:1. points reflected on chart): Indonesian Navy Hydrographic Office. (IIIA-8) to (IIIC-2). Bessel 1841) Description of the archipelagic sea lane The axis line connects the following geographical positions: (IIIA-11) 09823'. SEA LANE IIIC: SPUR FROM POINT (IIIA-8) TO (IIIC-2). Bessel 1841. (IIIA-11) and (IIID-1).00 S. I/1-4 .000. corrected to 7 July 1997. 1:1. Bessel 1841) 3. Indonesian Navy Hydrographic Office. points reflected on chart): Indonesian Navy Hydrographic Office. (IIIC-1) and (IIIC-2).00 E (IIIC-1) (IIIB-1) 04800'.00 E 08831'.00 S. Bessel 1841) 3. chart No. Indonesian Navy Hydrographic Office. (IIIA-11) and (IIID-1). (IIIA-8) to (IIIB-2). (IIIB-2). corrected to 15 September 1997. corrected to 1 April 1995. 1:4.000. chart number and scale.000.00 E Notes for the use of this archipelagic sea lane: (a) Geographical positions (IIIA-8) to (IIIC-2) define the axis line through the Banda Sea to the Arafuru Sea. 131845'. corrected to 13 October 1997. (IIIA-11) and (IIID-1). 1:1. corrected to 7 July 1997. May 1991.00 S.000. 125830'. (IIIA-8) and (IIIB-1). SAWU SEA±SEA BETWEEN SAWU AND ROTI ISLANDS±INDIAN (HINDIA) OCEAN (Reference charts (publisher. 146.000. SEA LANE IIID: SPUR FROM POINT (IIIA-11) TO (IIID-1). chart No. 1:4.00 S. chart No.000.000. 367.000. Indonesian Navy Hydrographic Office. corrected to 10 June 1995. 1:1. August 1993.000. (IIIA-8) and (IIIB-1).SEA LANE IIIB: SPUR FROM POINT (IIIA-8) TO (IIIB-2). chart No. Bessel 1841. March 1985. corrected to 13 October 1997.000. May 1991. October 1993. chart No.000.000.000.000. 122855'.00 S. 1:4. Bessel 1841. July 1993.000. 1:1. Bessel 1841.00 S.00 E 132835'. 367. Indonesian Navy Hydrographic Office. 1:1. 125840'.00 E (IIID-1) 10858'.00 E Notes for the use of this archipelagic sea lane: (a) Geographical positions (IIIA-8) to (IIIB-2) define the axis line through the Banda Sea and Leti Strait to the Timor Sea. chart No.00 E (IIIC-2) 06810'. Indonesian Navy Hydrographic Office.000. chart No. Description of the archipelagic sea lane The axis line connects the following geographical positions: (IIIA-8) 03820'. Bessel 1841. corrected to 24 August 1996.00 E Notes for the use of this archipelagic sea lane: (a) Geographical positions (IIIA-11) to (IIID-1) define the axis line from the Sawu Sea to the Sea between Sawu and Roti Islands to the Indian (Hindia) Ocean. chart No. 125840'.000. 1:1. 3.00 E (IIIB-2) (IIIB-1) 04800'. Description of the archipelagic sea lane The axis line connects the following geographical positions: (IIIA-8) 03820'.00 S. October 1993. Bessel 1841. 112. 125830'.

BRUNEI SINGAPORE Se al an eI I 105˚ 110˚ 115˚ 120˚ 125˚ 130˚ 135˚ INDONESIAN ARCHIPELAGIC SEA LANES I. II AND III 99007 MAL SUMATERA A AYSI SARAWAK 0˚ Se a Se la ne a la KALIMANTAN IRIAN JAYA ne JAWA BALI SUMBAWA FLORES SUMBA Sawu Roti I III SULAWESI SERAM 5˚ TIMOR 10˚ AUSTRALIA 15˚ .

105˚ 110˚ INDONESIAN ARCHIPELAGIC SEA LANE I I/1-6 99008 IA YS LA MA IA-1 SINGAPORE I-3 I-4 SUMATERA I-12 I-13 I-15 I-14 I-9 I-1 I-2 SARAWAK 0˚ KALIMANTAN I-5 I-6 I-7 I-8 5˚ JAWA 10˚ .

BRUNEI SARAWAK II-1 II-2 0˚ KALIMANTAN SULAWESI II-3 II-4 5˚ II-5 Madura II-6 II-7 BALI SUMBAWA FLORES II-8 SUMBA 10˚ Sawu 99009 115˚ 120˚ INDONESIAN ARCHIPELAGIC SEA LANE II I/1-7 .

IIIE-2 IIIE-1 IIIA-1 IIIA-2 IIIA-3 IIIA-4 0˚ IRIAN JAYA IIIA-5 SULAWESI IIIA-7 IIIA-8 IIIB-1 IIIA-6 SERAM 5˚ IIIC-1 IIIC-2 FLORES IIIA-10 IIIA-11 IIIA-9 TIMOR IIIB-2 SUMBA IIIA-12 IIIA-13 10˚ Sawu IIID-1 Roti 99010 120˚ 125˚ 130˚ INDONESIAN ARCHIPELAGIC SEA LANE III I/1-8 .

How to search Ships’ Routeing (page 1 of 5) This Ships’Routeing publication is made available in an Adobe Acrobat 4. Plug-In Help. Using Acrobat Search. Please take note: If you have Acrobat Reader on your computer you may find that you will not be able to search. For that you need Acrobat Reader with Search*.adobe. * Acrobat Reader with Search Capability is available on this CDROM and freely downloadable from Adobes site at http://www. Reader Online Guide . About Plug-Ins. Acrobat Search .should give a button labelled Verity.com (see README files for installation instruction) Page 2 Page 5 . Below are given some special features of this Ships’ Routeing application.Brief explanation of the program for searching and displaying Ships’ Routeing Information follows.available via Help. Clicking this will tell you that the Verity Search Engine is included.and Using Acrobat Search . Information about the version of Acrobat Reader is given via Help.0 format. Users unfamiliar with Acrobat may wish to consult the Online Guide about Acrobat Reader available at the top of the screen via Help. It can be read and searched with Acrobat Reader with Search Capability.

Page 3 Page 1 . You can also access it via its Bookmark (click on the fifth button from the left at the top of your screen). Via a text search (click on the button with the small binoculars and page). See also below under Links. If you click on the relevant line in the index you will jump to the text description of the routeing measure. in which case a link will have been set up (see below under Links). Some items take you to a page with a detailed overview. Links to either text or charts are boxed in blue or red (see below under Links). If you click somewhere in the middle of the Introduction Screen you will be taken to this page. If you are looking at the text description of a routeing measure and there is chart that goes with it.How to search Ships’ Routeing (page 2 of 5) Special features of this edition of Ships’ Routeing Searching There are two basic methods for finding the information you want: 1. Via the Contents page which provides further links to the information. 2. Overview charts often contain an index and show the relevant routeing measure with a number and a purple spot on that chart. Sometimes the information is illustrated in a chart of another routeing measure. if you click somewhere near the purple spot you will jump to the relevant chart. you can simply browse forward. Another search method is to use the many charts available.

you will be taken to the text description of the Traffic Separation Scheme (TSS) “Off Casquets”. If you move your cursor over this part of the text and click your mouse. In charts and text descriptions links are invisible but you will notice that your cursor changes from a ‘hand’ to a ‘hand with pointing finger’.. Links Ships’ Routeing contains very many links. links have been set up to take you directly to these . Browsing forward one page will show the relevant chatlet. If you wish for even more detail you can always activate the magnifier at the top of your screen. Show Articles at the top of your screen.use the traffic separation scheme “Off Casquets”.How to search Ships’ Routeing (page 3 of 5) Viewing Charts Some charts contain much detail that is hardly legible on screen. Where charts contain text references to other routeing measures. An overview of magnified charts and tables is available via Window.your hand cursor changes to cursor of a hand with a pointing finger. Page 4 Page 2 . clicking on the chart will also enlarge it. If you click on your left mouse button you will jump to the relevant page. Moving your cursor over the screen you will notice that the ‘hand’ sometimes changes to a ‘hand with an arrow’. If you click your left mouse button the relevant part of the map is enlarged. Where charts are on the same page as text.. Some are directly visible such as those in the contents pages (blue and red boxes). An example: In paragraph 1.1 of ‘Recommendations on navigation through the English Channel and the Dover Strait’ can be read: “.

1.g.3 Page 5 Page 3 . Below you will find a summary of the most important commands/actions for searching.2 Screens: Full Screen (default) .2 2.How to search Ships’ Routeing (page 4 of 5) Brief explanation of the program for searching and displaying Ships’ Routeing Information The program used to store the Ships’ Routeing information is Adobe Acrobat 4. displaying and printing the information. If you hold down your left mouse button you can move the page you are viewing over your screen. At the bottom of the screen you will see the zoom factor expressed as a percentage e. At the bottom of your screen you will see the page number of the page you are looking at e. 123 of 399 View buttons: ‘Hand' (default) . Note that the slide bar at the right hand side of your screen regards the whole PDF file and therefore cannot be used to move a page on your screen. On release of the mouse button the marked part will fill the whole screen. position your cursor on it and click).1 2.1 1. 120%.the list of bookmarks consists of links to relevant pages in the PDF file (to activate a link. If you want to zoom in on a piece of text or illustration drag the cursor over part of your screen whilst holding down the left mouse button. To go back to the previous situation either click on this (at the bottom of the screen) and reset to “Fit Width' or click on the ‘heavy arrow back' button at the top of your screen.0. All the pages of Ships’ Routeing plus the menus for finding these are stored in one PDF (Acrobat portable document file) on this CDROM. You will find comprehensive information about Acrobat Reader by clicking on Help at the top right of your screen.this shows one page of Ships’ Routeing or a menu.g. The button to activate/deactivate this is the fifth from the left. ‘Magnifying Glass' .this turns your cursor into a magnifying glass. right: a page from Ships’ Routeing) . The button to activate or deactivate this is the fifth on the left hand side of the button bar.allows you to drag your mouse over a piece of text to copy it to your clipboard. ‘T+’ . Split screen (left: Bookmarks or Thumbnails. except when your cursor is positioned over a part of a page containing a link (see below under links). 1. 2. 2.this turns your cursor into a hand.

2 Shows the whole page 4. and because parts of pages can be zoomed in on via the ‘hand with arrow’ cursor. A successful search will take you to the first page containing your search term.one action forward depending on what you have done 4.which will be highlighted.5 Search buttons (from left to right): ‘Binoculars' (Not Advised!) . 5.2 3. ‘Circle and page' .back one page in the PDF file Single Arrow Right .3 3.4 Rotate pages 90° left 4.forward one page in the PDF file To last page .6 Browsing buttons (from left to right): Back to first page .2 5.5 Rotate pages 90° right 5.4 3.this takes you to the last page of the PDF file Heavy Arrow Left . 4.1 Shows a page at 100% zoom 4.display of previous page from the list of found pages Page 1 Page 4 .one action back depending on what you have done Heavy Arrow Right .3 5.3 Sets the zoom factor to display the full width of the text (default) Note on the zoom factor: because the pages in this edition of Ships’ Routeing have many different page sizes. 3.1 3.this takes you back to the Introduction Screen Single Arrow Left .display of previous page from the list of found pages ‘Page with arrow right' .activates a linear search ‘Binoculars and page' .gives a list of pages resulting from your search ‘Page with arrow left' . all pages in Ships’ Routeing automatically open at ‘page width’ zoom factor. Page view buttons (from left to right): 4.5 3.How to search Ships’ Routeing (page 5 of 5) Brief explanation of the program for searching and displaying Ships’ Routeing Information 3. which means that each page needs its own zoom factor for legibility.1 5.allows you to search the index.4 5.

the GMDSS Manual (CD only). containers and cargoes. IMO also has a Legal Committee. the IMO Resolutions database (CD only). Ships’ Routeing (CD only). etc. The objective of IMO's publishing activities is to provide the world maritime community with the numerous texts (conventions. 'The Computerized IMDG Code' (available on CD and diskette). The world-wide dissemination of this information plays an important role in the promotion of maritime safety and the prevention of marine pollution. The Technical Co-operation Committee handles IMO's growing technical co-operation programme. The majority are translated into French and Spanish and an increasing number into Arabic. The Secretariat consists of some 300 international civil servants headed by a Secretary-General. search and rescue. especially in the early years. just across the River Thames from the Houses of Parliament. radiocommunications. for the effectiveness of IMO measures depends upon how widely they are accepted and how they are implemented. it has 159 Member States plus two Associate Members. Chinese and Russian. and the Facilitation Committee deals with measures to simplify the documentation and formalities required in international shipping. This international approach is essential. the IAMSAR Manual (CD only). The IMO Headquarters is in London. Formal arrangements for co-operation and/or consultative status have been established with a large number of international organizations. life-saving. Today. carriage of dangerous goods. which is designed to help Member Governments implement the technical measures adopted by the Organization. was to develop a comprehensive body of international conventions. A catalogue of publications (on paper and on diskette) is available on request. The governing body of IMO is the Assembly.) prepared by the Organization as part of its work programme. acts as governing body. bulk chemicals and flag State implementation. which meets every two years. codes. 'The IMO-Vega Database' (CD only). . In between Assembly sessions a Council. IMO Labels and Symbols (CD only) and MARPOL on CDROM (CD only). Today. Since October 1993 IMO has also launched several electronic publications. The Maritime Environment Protection Committee deals with pollution prevention. ship design and equipment. recommendations. codes and recommendations which could be implemented by all Member Governments. stability and load lines. The Maritime Safety Committee is the most senior of these and has sub-committees dealing with the following subjects: safety of navigation. The Organization's chief task.About the International Maritime Organization IMO IMO is a technical organization established in 1958. guidelines. fishing vessel safety. standards of training and watchkeeping. fire protection. The technical work of IMO is carried out by a series of committees. originally established to deal with legal problems resulting from the Torrey Canyon pollution disaster of 1967 but later made a permanent body. The fact that the most important IMO conventions are now accepted by countries whose combined merchant fleets represent 98% of the world total indicates how successful this policy has been. consisting of 32 Member States elected by the Assembly. IMO has over 200 titles available in English.

Membership List of IMO (page 1 of 4) Members and the Date of Receipt of the Instrument of Acceptance Albania Algeria Angola Antigua and Barbuda Argentina Australia Austria Azerbaijan Bahamas Bahrain Bangladesh Barbados Belgium Belize Benin Bolivia Bosnia and Herzegovina Brazil Brunei Darussalam Bulgaria Cambodia Cameroon Canada Cape Verde Chile China Colombia Congo Costa Rica Cote d'Ivoire Croatia Cuba Cyprus Czech Republic Democratic People's Republic of Korea Democratic Republic of the Congo Denmark Djibouti Dominica Dominican Republic Ecuador Egypt PAGE 2 PAGE 4 24 May 1993 31 October 1963 6 June 1977 13 January 1986 18 June 1953 13 February 1952 2 April 1975 15 May 1995 22 July 1976 22 September 1976 27 May 1976 7 January 1970 9 August 1951 13 September 1990 19 March 1980 6 July 1987 16 July 1993 4 March 1963 31 December 1984 5 April 1960 3 January 1961 1 May 1961 15 October 1948 24 August 1976 17 February 1972 1 March 1973 19 November 1974 5 September 1975 4 March 1981 4 November 1960 8 July 1992 6 May 1966 21 November 1973 18 June 1993 16 April 1986 16 August 1973 3 June 1959 20 February 1979 18 December 1979 25 August 1953 12 July 1956 17 March 1958 .

Membership List of IMO (page 2 of 4) Members and the Date of Receipt of the Instrument of Acceptance El Salvador Equatorial Guinea Eritrea Estonia Ethiopia Fiji Finland France Gabon Gambia Georgia Germany Ghana Greece Grenada Guatemala Guinea Guinea-Bissau Guyana Haiti Honduras Hungary Iceland India Indonesia Iran (Islamic Republic of) Iraq Ireland Israel Italy Jamaica Japan Jordan Kazakhstan Kenya Kuwait Latvia Lebanon Liberia Libyan Arab Jamahiriya Lithuania Luxembourg PAGE 3 PAGE 1 12 February 1981 6 September 1972 31 August 1993 31 January 1992 3 July 1975 14 March 1983 21 April 1959 9 April 1952 1 April 1976 11 January 1979 22 June 1993 7 January 1959 6 July 1959 31 December 1958 3 December 1998 16 March 1983 3 December 1975 6 December 1977 13 May 1980 23 June 1953 23 August 1954 10 June 1970 8 November 1960 6 January 1959 18 January 1961 2 January 1958 28 August 1973 26 February 1951 24 April 1952 28 January 1957 11 May 1976 17 March 1958 9 November 1973 11 March 1994 22 August 1973 5 July 1960 1 March 1993 3 May 1966 6 January 1959 16 February 1970 7 December 1995 14 February 1991 .

Membership List of IMO (page 3 of 4) Members and the Date of Receipt of the Instrument of Acceptance Madagascar Malawi Malaysia Maldives Malta Marshall Islands Mauritania Mauritius Mexico Monaco Mongolia Morocco Mozambique Myanmar Namibia Nepal Netherlands New Zealand Nicaragua Nigeria Norway Oman Pakistan Panama Papua New Guinea Paraguay Peru Philippines Poland Portugal Qatar Republic of Korea Romania Russian Federation Saint Lucia Saint Vincent and the Grenadines Samoa Sao Tome and Principe Saudi Arabia Senegal Seychelles Sierra Leone PAGE 4 PAGE 2 8 March 1961 19 January 1989 17 June 1971 31 May 1967 22 June 1966 26 March 1998 8 May 1961 18 May 1978 21 September 1954 22 December 1989 11 December 1996 30 July 1962 17 January 1979 6 July 1951 27 October 1994 31 January 1979 31 March 1949 9 November 1960 17 March 1982 15 March 1962 29 December 1958 30 January 1974 21 November 1958 31 December 1958 6 May 1976 15 March 1993 15 April 1968 9 November 1964 16 March 1960 17 March 1976 19 May 1977 10 April 1962 28 April 1965 24 December 1958 10 April 1980 29 April 1981 25 October 1996 9 July 1990 25 February 1969 7 November 1960 13 June 1978 14 March 1973 .

China PAGE 1 PAGE 3 7 June 1967 2 February 1990 17 January 1966 24 March 1993 10 February 1993 27 June 1988 4 April 1978 28 February 1995 23 January 1962 6 April 1972 5 July 1974 14 October 1976 27 April 1959 20 July 1955 28 January 1963 20 September 1973 13 October 1993 20 June 1983 23 February 2000 27 April 1965 23 May 1963 25 March 1958 26 August 1993 28 March 1994 4 March 1980 14 February 1949 8 January 1974 17 August 1950 10 May 1968 21 October 1986 27 October 1975 12 June 1984 14 March 1979 12 February 1960 .Membership List of IMO (page 4 of 4) Members and the Date of Receipt of the Instrument of Acceptance Singapore Slovakia Slovenia Solomon Islands Somalia South Africa Spain Sri Lanka Sudan Suriname Sweden Switzerland Syrian Arab Republic Thailand The Former Yugoslav Republic of Macedonia Togo Tonga Trinidad and Tobago Tunisia Turkey Turkmenistan Ukraine United Arab Emirates United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland United Republic of Tanzania United States of America Uruguay Vanuatu Venezuela Viet Nam Yemen Yugoslavia Associate Members Hong Kong. China Macao.

org .imo.Address of the IMO Publications Section Please address all enquiries to: Publications Section Electronic Sales International Maritime Organization 4 Albert Embankment London SE1 7SR United Kingdom Telephone: Fax: Telex: WWW: +44 (0)171 735 7611 extension 2230/2225 +44 (0)171 587 3210 23588 http://www.

for sales purposes. . Amersfoort. the Netherlands Tel/fax: +31 33 4627165 email intrwise@knoware. electronic.0 Edition of April 2000 INTERNATIONAL MARITIME ORGANIZATION 4 Albert Embankment. No part of this publication may. be reproduced. magnetic tape.knoware. mechanical. without prior permission in writing from the International Maritime Organization. electrostatic.Colophon and Copyright Notice to 'Ships’ Routeing' Version 2. stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by means.nl/users/intrwise All rights reserved. London SE1 7SR IMO PUBLICATION Sales number: CD-502 © IMO 2000 Copyright to the Information Design and Production: © 2000 InterWise.nl WWW: http://utopia. photcopying or otherwise.